2017 Nissan Rogue | Owner's Manual And Maintenance Information USA

User Manual: 2017-rogue

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 529 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

2017 Nissan Rogue Owner's Manual and Maintenance Information
OM17EA 0T32U0
Table of Contents

2017 ROGUE

OWNER’S MANUAL

and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

2017 NISSAN ROGUE T32-D

T32-D

Printing : August 2016 (08)

Publication No.: OM0E 0L32U2

Printed in U.S.A.

T00UM-JM03D

OM17EA 0T32U0

46325 2c Cover Tweddle Group • PDF Supplied 8/10/2016 Black + PMS 200

GRACOL PROOF on PRODUCTION PAPER

Back Cover

Front Cover

Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN

owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with

confidence. It was produced using the latest

techniques and strict quality control.

This manual was prepared to help you under-

stand the operation and maintenance of your

vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilome-

ters) of driving pleasure. Please read through this

manual before operating your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Booklet

explains details about the warranties cov-

ering your vehicle. The “Maintenance and

schedules” section of this manual explains

details about maintaining and servicing

your vehicle. Additionally, a separate Cus-

tomer Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only)

will explain how to resolve any concerns

you may have with your vehicle, and clarify

your rights under your state’s lemon law.

When you require any service or have any ques-

tions, a NISSAN dealer will be glad to assist you

with the extensive resources available to them.

In addition to factory-installed options, your ve-

hicle may also be equipped with additional ac-

cessories installed prior to delivery. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for details

concerning the particular accessories with which

your vehicle is equipped. It is important that you

familiarize yourself with all disclosures, warnings,

cautions and instructions concerning proper use

of such accessories prior to operating the vehicle

and/or accessory. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for details concerning the

particular accessories with which your vehicle is

equipped.

Before driving your vehicle, please read this

Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure famil-

iarity with controls and maintenance require-

ments, assisting you in the safe operation of your

vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION

REMINDERS!

Follow these important driving rules to

help ensure a safe and comfortable trip

for you and your passengers!

●NEVER drive under the influence of al-

cohol or drugs.

●ALWAYS observe posted speed limits

and never drive too fast for conditions.

●

ALWAYS give your full attention to driving

and avoid using vehicle features or taking

other actions that could distract you.

●

ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-

priate child restraint systems. Pre-teen

children should be seated in the rear seat.

●ALWAYS provide information about the

proper use of vehicle safety features to

all occupants of the vehicle.

●ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual

for important safety information.

FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

For descriptions specified for all-wheel drive

models, an AWD mark is placed at the beginning

of the applicable sections/items.

As with other vehicles with features for

off-road use, failure to operate all-wheel

drive models correctly may result in loss of

control or an accident. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Driving safety precau-

tions” in the “Starting and driving” section

of this manual.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIV-

ING

This vehicle will handle and maneuver

differently from an ordinary passenger

car because it has a higher center of

gravity for off-road use. As with other

vehicles with features of this type, fail-

ure to operate this vehicle correctly may

result in loss of control or an accident.

For additional information, refer to “On-

pavement and off-road driving

precautions”, “Avoiding collision and

rollover” and “Driving safety precau-

tions” in the “Starting and driving” sec-

tion of this manual.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified.

Modification could affect its

performance, safety or durability and may

even violate governmental regulations. In

addition, damage or performance prob-

lems resulting from modifications may

not be covered under NISSAN warranties.

WARNING

Installing an aftermarket On-Board Diag-

nostic (OBD) plug-in device that uses the

port during normal driving, for example

remote insurance company monitoring,

remote vehicle diagnostics, telematics or

engine reprogramming, may cause inter-

ference or damage to vehicle systems. We

do not recommend or endorse the use of

any aftermarket OBD plug-in devices, un-

less specifically approved by NISSAN. The

vehicle warranty may not cover damage

caused by any aftermarket plug-in device.

This manual includes information for all features

and equipment available on this model. Features

and equipment in your vehicle may vary depend-

ing on model, trim level, options selected, order,

date of production, region or availability. There-

fore, you may find information about features or

equipment that are not included or installed on

your vehicle.

All information, specifications and illustrations in

this manual are those in effect at the time of

printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change

specifications, performance, design or compo-

nent suppliers without notice and without obliga-

tion. From time to time, NISSAN may update or

revise this manual to provide Owners with the

most accurate information currently available.

Please carefully read and retain with this manual

all revision updates sent to you by NISSAN to

ensure you have access to accurate and up-to-

date information regarding your vehicle. Current

versions of vehicle Owner’s Manuals and any

updates can also be found in the Owner section

of the NISSAN website at

https://owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/

navigation/manualsGuide. If you have ques-

tions concerning any information in your Owner’s

Manual, contact NISSAN Consumer Affairs. For

contact information, refer to the NISSAN CUS-

TOMER CARE PROGRAM page in this Owner’s

Manual.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT

THIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in this manual. They

are used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of a

hazard that could cause death or serious

personal injury. To avoid or reduce the

risk, the procedures must be followed

precisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of a

hazard that could cause minor or moder-

ate personal injury or damage to your ve-

hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro-

cedures must be followed carefully.

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this”

or “Do not let this happen.”

If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustration,

it means the arrow points to the front of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these

indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these

call attention to an item in the illustration.

APD1005

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,

and certain vehicle components contain or

emit chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and birth de-

fects or other reproductive harm. In addi-

tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles

and certain products of component wear

contain or emit chemicals known to the

State of California to cause cancer and

birth defects or other reproductive harm.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE

ADVISORY

Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batter-

ies, may contain perchlorate material. The

following advisory is provided: “Perchlo-

rate Material – special handling may apply.

For additional information, refer to

www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/”.

BLUETOOTH® is a

trademark owned by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

and licensed to

Visteon and Bosch.

SiriusXM® services

require a subscription

after trial period and

are sold separately or

as a package. The

satellite service is

available only in the

48 contiguous USA

and DC. SiriusXM®

satellite service is

also available in

Canada; see

Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval

system, or transmitted in any form, or by any

means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,

recording or otherwise, without the prior written

permission of Nissan North America, Inc.

NISSAN CARES...

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are

our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, if there is something that your NISSAN

dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to

provide NISSAN directly with comments or

questions, please contact the NISSAN Con-

sumer Affairs Department using our toll-free

number:

For U.S. customers

1-800-NISSAN-1

(1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers

1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the

following information:

– Your name, address, and telephone number

– Vehicle identification number (attached to the

top of the instrument panel on the driver’s

side)

– Date of purchase

– Current odometer reading

– Your NISSAN dealer’s name

– Your comments or questions

You can write to NISSAN with the information at:

For U.S. customers

Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

or via e-mail at:

nnaconsumeraffairs@nissan-usa.com

For Canadian customers

Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

or via e-mail at:

information.centre@nissancanada.com

If you prefer, visit us at:

www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or

www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

Table of Contents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Do-it-yourself

Maintenance and schedules

Technical and consumer information

Index

0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints ..............0-2

Exterior front ......................................0-3

Exterior rear.......................................0-4

Passenger compartment ...........................0-5

Instrument panel...................................0-6

Engine compartment check locations . . ..............0-8

Warning and indicator lights ........................0-9

1. Supplemental air bags (P. 1-47)

2. Occupant classification sensor (weight

sensor) (P. 1-47)

3. Front Seat belt with pretensioner(s) and

shoulder heights adjuster (P. 1-15,

1-47)

4. Head restraints/headrests (P. 1-10)

5. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag (P. 1-47)

6. 2nd row center position top tether strap

(located on ceiling) (P. 1-25)

7. Folding 3rd row bench (if so equipped)

(P. 1-2)

8. 2nd row outboard seat top tether strap

anchor (located on bottom of seatback)

(P. 1-25)

9. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) (P. 1-25)

10. Folding 2nd row bench (P. 1-2)

11. Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag (P. 1-47)

12. Seats (P. 1-2)

Refer to the page number indicated in pa-

rentheses for operating details.

LII2305

AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD

RESTRAINTS

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

1. Front view camera (if so equipped)

(P. 4-17)

2. Engine hood (P. 3-26)

3. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-36)

Wiper blades (P. 8-16)

4. Windshield (P. 8-16)

Windshield-washer fluid (P. 8-10)

5. Power windows (P. 2-57)

6. Door locks (P. 3-5)

NISSAN Intelligent Key®

(if so equipped) (P. 3-11)

NISSAN Jackknife key (if so equipped)

(P. 3-7)

Keys (P. 3-2)

7. Mirrors (P. 3-39)

Side view camera (if so equipped)

(P. 4-17)

8. Tire pressure (P. 8-29)

Flat tire (P. 6-3)

Tire chains (P. 8-29)

9. Fog light switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-39)

Daytime running light system (P. 2-39)

10. Headlight and turn signal switch

(P. 2-39)

Replacing bulbs (P. 8-26)

Refer to the page number indicated in pa-

rentheses for operating details.

LII2493

EXTERIOR FRONT

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

1. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-36)

2. Antenna (P. 4-43)

3. Child safety rear door lock (P. 3-5)

4. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-34)

Fuel-filler cap (P. 3-34)

Fuel recommendation (P. 10-2)

5. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-26)

6. Rearview camera (P. 4-11, 4-17)

7. Liftgate release (P. 3-27)

Refer to the page number indicated in pa-

rentheses for operating details.

LII2494

EXTERIOR REAR

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

1. Glove box (P. 2-49)

2. Map lights (P. 2-62)

3. Power panoramic moonroof

(if so equipped) (P. 2-59)

4. Console box (P. 2-49)

5. Luggage hooks (P. 2-49)

6. Center armrest (2nd row) (P. 1-2)

7. Cup holders (P. 2-49)

8. Sun visors (P. 3-37)

Refer to the page number indicated in pa-

rentheses for operating details.

LII2515

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

1. Vent (P. 4-32)

2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn

signal switch (P. 2-39)

3. Meters and gauges (P. 2-4)

Warning and indicator lights (P. 2-10)

Vehicle information display (P. 2-19)

4. Wiper and washer switch, rear wiper

washer switch (P. 2-36)

5. Ignition switch (if so equipped)

(P. 5-13)

Push-button ignition switch

(if so equipped) (P. 5-16)

6. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2)

7. Radio (P. 4-43)

Navigation system* (if so equipped)

(P. 4-4)

8. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-47)

9. Glove box (P. 2-49)

10. Heater and air conditioning controls

(P. 4-33)

11. Power outlet (P. 2-46)

12. Shift lever (P. 5-21)

13. Auxiliary jack (P. 4-64)

USB port (P. 4-64)

14. Front passenger air bag status light

(P. 1-47)

LII2516

INSTRUMENT PANEL

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

15. Cruise control main/set switches

(if so equipped) (P. 5-44)

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-46)

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

(P. 4-82, 4-95)

16. Driver supplemental air bag (P. 1-47)

Horn (P. 2-43)

17. Tilt and telescopic steering (P. 3-37)

18. Control panel and vehicle information

display switches (P. 2-19)

19. Hood release (P. 3-26)

Fuel door release (P. 3-34)

20. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF

switch (P. 2-45)

SPORT mode switch (P. 5-25)

ECO mode switch (P. 5-26)

Power liftgate switch (if so equipped)

(P. 3-27)

Power liftgate main switch

(if so equipped) (P. 3-27)

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) lock switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-46)

21. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-39)

Twin trip odometer reset switch (P. 2-4)

*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-

er’s Manual (if so equipped).

Refer to the page number indicated in pa-

rentheses for operating details.

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

QR25DE engine

1. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-4)

2. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-6)

3. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-9)

4. Battery (P. 8-10)

5. Air cleaner (P. 8-15)

6. Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-19)

7. Radiator cap (P. 8-4)

8. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-6)

9. Drive belt location (P. 8-13)

10. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-10)

Engine cover removed for clarity.

Refer to the page number indicated in pa-

rentheses for operating details.

LDI2809

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

Warning

light

Name Page

Anti-lock Braking

System (ABS) warn-

ing light

2-11

Brake warning light 2-11

Charge warning

light

2-12

Forward Emergency

Braking (FEB) sys-

tem warning light (if

so equipped)

2-12

Forward Emergency

Braking (FEB) with

pedestrian detection

system warning light

(if so equipped)

2-12

Warning

light

Name Page

Low tire pressure

warning light

2-12

Low windshield-

washer fluid warning

light (if so equipped)

2-14

Master warning light 2-14

Power steering

warning light

2-15

Seat belt warning

light and chime

2-15

Supplemental air

bag warning light

2-15

Indicator

light

Name Page

All-Wheel Drive

(AWD) LOCK indi-

cator light (if so

equipped)

2-16

Front fog light indi-

cator light (if so

equipped)

2-16

Front passenger air

bag status light

2-16

High beam assist

indicator light

(green) (if so

equipped)

2-16

High beam indicator

light (blue)

2-16

Malfunction Indica-

tor Light (MIL)

2-16

Security indicator

light

2-17

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

Indicator

light

Name Page

Side light and head-

light indicator light

(green)

2-18

Slip indicator light 2-17

SPORT mode indi-

cator light

2-18

Turn signal/hazard

indicator lights

2-18

Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) OFF

indicator light

2-18

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system

Seats ............................................1-2

Front manual seat adjustment

(if so equipped) ................................1-3

Front power seat adjustment

(if so equipped) ................................1-4

2nd row bench seat adjustment ..................1-6

Armrests ......................................1-6

Flexible seating.................................1-7

Head restraints/headrests .........................1-10

Adjustable head restraint/headrest

components ..................................1-11

Non-adjustable head restraint/headrest

components ..................................1-12

Remove ......................................1-12

Install ........................................1-13

Adjust........................................1-13

Seat belts .......................................1-15

Precautions on seat belt usage..................1-15

Seat belt warning light .........................1-18

Pregnant women ..............................1-18

Injured persons................................1-18

Three-point type seat belt with retractor..........1-18

Seat belt extenders ............................1-22

Seat belt maintenance .........................1-23

Child safety ......................................1-23

Infants........................................1-24

Small children.................................1-24

Larger children ................................1-24

Child restraints ...................................1-25

Precautions on child restraints ..................1-25

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) system ..............................1-27

Rear-facing child restraint installation using

LATCH.......................................1-30

Rear-facing child restraint installation using

the seat belts .................................1-32

Forward-facing child restraint installation

using LATCH..................................1-35

Forward-facing child restraint installation

using the seat belts ............................1-39

Booster seats .................................1-44

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ..............1-47

Precautions on SRS ...........................1-47

Supplemental air bag warning labels.............1-65

Supplemental air bag warning light ..............1-65

WARNING

●Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident,

you could be thrown into it and receive

neck or other serious injuries. You

could also slide under the lap belt and

receive serious internal injuries.

●For the most effective protection when

the vehicle is in motion, the seat should

be upright. Always sit well back and

upright in the seat with both feet on the

floor and adjust the seat properly. For

additional information, refer to “Pre-

cautions on seat belt usage” in this

section.

●After adjustment, gently rock in the seat

to make sure it is securely locked.

●Do not leave children unattended inside

the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-

tivate switches or controls or make the

vehicle move. Unattended children

could become involved in serious

accidents.

●To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave

children, people who require the assis-

tance of others or pets unattended in

your vehicle. Additionally, the tempera-

ture inside a closed vehicle on a warm

day can quickly become high enough to

cause a significant risk of injury or

death to people and pets.

●Do not adjust the driver’s seat while

driving so full attention may be given to

vehicle operation. The seat may move

suddenly and could cause loss of con-

trol of the vehicle.

●The seatback should not be reclined

any more than needed for comfort. Seat

belts are most effective when the pas-

senger sits well back and straight up in

the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the

risk of sliding under the lap belt and

being injured is increased.

ARS1152

SEATS

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

CAUTION

When adjusting the seat positions, be

sure not to contact any moving parts to

avoid possible injuries and/or damage.

FRONT MANUAL SEAT

ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)

Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manually. For

additional information about adjusting the seats,

refer to the steps outlined in this section.

Forward and backward

Pull the center of the bar up and hold it while you

slide the seat forward or backward to the desired

position. Release the bar to lock the seat in

position.

Reclining

To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean

back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever

up and lean your body forward. Release the lever

to lock the seatback in position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the

seatback for occupants of different sizes for

added comfort and to help obtain proper seat

belt fit. For additional information, refer to “Pre-

cautions on seat belt usage” in this section. Also,

the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants

to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift

lever is in the P (Park) position.

LRS2160 LRS2161

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

Seat lifter (driver’s seat)

Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to adjust

the seat height until the desired position is

achieved.

FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT

(if so equipped)

Operating tips

●The power seat motor has an auto-reset

overload protection circuit. If the motor

stops during operation, wait 30 seconds

then reactivate the switch.

●Do not operate the power seat switch for a

long period of time when the engine is off.

This will discharge the battery.

Forward and backward

Moving the switch forward or backward will slide

the seat forward or backward to the desired

position.

Reclining

Move the recline switch backward until the de-

sired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback

forward again, move the switch forward and

move your body forward. The seatback will move

forward.

LRS2202 LRS2662

1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the

seatback for occupants of different sizes for

added comfort and to help obtain proper seat

belt fit. For additional information, refer to “Pre-

cautions on seat belt usage” in this section. Also,

the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants

to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift

lever is in P (Park).

Seat lifter (driver’s seat)

Push the switch up or down to achieve desired

seat height.

Lumbar support (driver’s seat)

The lumbar support feature provides adjustable

lower back support to the driver. Move the switch

forward or backward to adjust the seatback lum-

bar area.

LRS2784 LRS2270

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

2ND ROW BENCH SEAT

ADJUSTMENT

Forward and backward

Pull the center of the bar 䊊

1up and hold it while

you slide the seat forward or backward to the

desired position. Release the bar to lock the seat

in position.

Reclining

To recline the seatback, pull up on the lever 䊊

and lean back. To bring the seatback forward, pull

the lever 䊊

2up and lean your body forward.

Release the lever to lock the seatback in position.

The recline feature allows adjustment of the seat-

back for occupants of different sizes for added

comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit. For

additional information, refer to “Precautions on

seat belt usage” in this section. Also, the seat-

back can be reclined to allow occupants to rest

when the vehicle is stopped and the shift lever is

in P (Park).

WARNING

●After adjustment, gently rock in the seat

to make sure it is securely locked.

●Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident,

you could be thrown into it and receive

neck or other serious injuries. You

could also slide under the lap belt and

receive serious internal injuries.

●For the most effective protection when

the vehicle is in motion, the seat should

be upright. Always sit well back and

upright in the seat with both feet on the

floor and adjust the seat belt properly.

For additional information, refer to

“Precautions on seat belt usage” in this

section.

ARMRESTS

The 2nd row center armrest is locked in the up

position. To lower the armrest, pull on the armrest

strap that is located in the armrest pivot area.

To return the armrest to the up position, pull up on

the armrest until it is locked in the up position.

Outboard seats

LRS2717 LRS2713

1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

FLEXIBLE SEATING

WARNING

●Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo

area or on the rear seats when they are

in the fold-down position. In a collision,

people riding in these areas without

proper restraints are more likely to be

seriously injured or killed.

●Do not allow people to ride in any area

of your vehicle that is not equipped with

seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone

in your vehicle is in a seat and using a

seat belt properly.

●Do not allow more than one person to

use the same seat belt.

●Do not fold down the rear seats when

occupants are in the rear seat area or

any luggage is on the rear seats.

– Make sure that the seat path is clear

before moving the seat.

– Be careful not to allow hands or feet

to get caught or pinched in the seat.

●Head restraints/headrests should be

adjusted properly as they may provide

significant protection against injury in

an accident. Always replace and adjust

them properly if they have been re-

moved for any reason.

●If the head restraints/headrests are re-

moved for any reason, they should be

securely stored to prevent them from

causing injury to passengers or damage

to the vehicle in case of sudden braking

or an accident.

●When returning the seatbacks to the

upright position, be certain they are

completely secured in the latched posi-

tion. If they are not completely secured,

passengers may be injured in an acci-

dent or sudden stop.

●Properly secure all cargo to help pre-

vent it from sliding or shifting. Do not

place cargo higher than the seatbacks.

In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured

cargo could cause personal injury.

Accessing the 3rd row seats (if so

equipped)

The 3rd row can be accessed from outside the

vehicle by using the seatback release lever lo-

cated on the 2nd row seatback. To access the

3rd row from outside the vehicle:

1. Lower or remove the 2nd row head

restraints/headrests and store them prop-

erly so they are not loose in the vehicle. For

additional information about head

restraint/headrest removal and adjustment,

refer to “Head restraints/headrests” in this

section.

LRS2752

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

2. Stow the 2nd row seat belts in the seat belt

hooks found on the sides of the vehicle.

3. Lift up on the seatback release lever 䊊

located on the 2nd row seatback and push

the seatback forward. The seatback will stop

at a 45° angle and the slide lock will disen-

gage. This allows the entire seat to slide

forward and an occupant to enter/exit the

3rd row.

4. To return the 2nd row bench seats to a

seating position, push up on the seatback

until it latches in place.

Folding the 2nd row bench seat (for

vehicles equipped with 3rd row seats)

To fold the 2nd row bench seat flat for maximum

cargo hauling in vehicles equipped with a 3rd row

seat:

1. Follow steps 1–3 in “Accessing the 3rd row

seats” in this section to begin folding the

seat.

2. Pull the strap 䊊

Bon the lower side of the

outboard seats to fold the 2nd row seats

completely flat.

3. To return the 2nd row bench seats to a

seating position, push up on the seatback

until it latches in place.

LRS2753

1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Folding the 2nd row bench seat (for

vehicles not equipped with 3rd row

seats)

To fold the 2nd row bench seat flat for maximum

cargo hauling in vehicles not equipped with 3rd

row seats:

1. Lower or remove the 2nd row head

restraints/headrests and store them prop-

erly so they are not loose in the vehicle. For

additional information about head

restraint/headrest removal and adjustment,

refer to “Head restraints/headrests” in this

section.

2. Stow the 2nd row seat belts in the seat belt

hooks found on the sides of the vehicle.

3. Lift up on the seatback release lever 䊊

Aon

the top of the outboard seats to fold the

seatbacks flat.

4. To return the 2nd row bench seats to a

seating position, push up on the seatback

until it latches in place.

Folding the 3rd row seats (if so

equipped)

To fold the 3rd row seats flat for maximum cargo

capacity:

1. Make sure the head restraints/headrests are

all the way down.

2. Pull the strap 䊊

1to release the seat.

3. Once released, push the seatback forward

䊊

LRS2754 LRS2348

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

To return the 3rd row seats to a seating position:

1. Use the pull straps 䊊

1to raise each seat-

back. Pull back until the seatback latches

into position. Make sure to properly raise

each seatback to an upright and se-

cured position.

WARNING

When the seat is returned to the normal

seating position, the head

restraints/headrests must be returned to

the upright position to properly protect

vehicle occupants.

WARNING

Head restraints/headrests supplement

the other vehicle safety systems. They may

provide additional protection against in-

jury in certain rear end collisions. Adjust-

able head restraints/headrests must be

adjusted properly, as specified in this sec-

tion. Check the adjustment after someone

else uses the seat. Do not attach anything

to the head restraint/headrest stalks or

remove the head restraint/headrest. Do

not use the seat if the head

restraint/headrest has been removed. If

the head restraint/headrest was removed,

reinstall and properly adjust the head

restraint/headrest before an occupant

uses the seating position. Failure to fol-

low these instructions can reduce the ef-

fectiveness of the head

restraints/headrests. This may increase

the risk of serious injury or death in a

collision.

The illustration shows the seating positions

equipped with head restraints/headrests.

䉱Indicates the seating position is equipped with

a head restraint.

䡲Indicates the seating position is equipped with

a headrest.

+ Indicates the seating position is not equipped

with a head restraint or headrest (if applicable).

●Your vehicle is equipped with a head

restraint/headrest that may be integrated,

adjustable or non-adjustable.

2nd row seating

LRS2403

HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS

1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

●Adjustable head restraints/headrests have

multiple notches along the stalk(s) to lock

them in a desired adjustment position.

●The non-adjustable head

restraints/headrests have a single locking

notch to secure them to the seat frame.

●Proper Adjustment:

– For the adjustable type, align the head

restraint/headrest so the center of your

ear is approximately level with the center

of the head restraint/headrest.

– If your ear position is still higher than the

recommended alignment, place the head

restraint/headrest at the highest position.

●If the head restraint/headrest has been re-

moved, ensure that it is reinstalled and

locked in place before riding in that desig-

nated seating position.

ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/

HEADREST COMPONENTS

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Multiple notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

3rd row seating (if so equipped)

LRS2308 LRS2300

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD

RESTRAINT/HEADREST

COMPONENTS

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Single notch

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

REMOVE

Use the following procedure to remove the head

restraint/headrest:

1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to the

highest position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the head restraint/headrest from

the seat.

4. Store the head restraint/headrest properly in

a secure place so it is not loose in the

vehicle.

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head

restraint/headrest before an occupant uses

the seating position.

LRS2299 LRS2302

1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

INSTALL

1. Align the head restraint/headrest stalks with

the holes in the seat. Make sure that the

head restraint/headrest is facing the correct

direction. The stalk with the notch (notches)

䊊

1must be installed in the hole with the lock

knob 䊊

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the

head restraint/headrest down.

3. Properly adjust the head restraint/headrest

before an occupant uses the seating posi-

tion.

ADJUST

For adjustable head restraint/headrest

Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the center

is level with the center of your ears. If your ear

position is still higher than the recommended

alignment, place the head restraint/headrest at

the highest position.

For non-adjustable head restraint/headrest

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is posi-

tioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch

before riding in that designated seating position.

LRS2303 WRS0134 LRS2351

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

Raise

To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it up.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is posi-

tioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch

before riding in that designated seating position.

Lower

To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push

the head restraint/headrest down.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is posi-

tioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch

before riding in that designated seating position.

LRS2305 LRS2306

1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

USAGE

If you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-

justed and you are sitting upright and well back in

your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances

of being injured or killed in a collision and/or the

severity of injury may be greatly reduced.

NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your

passengers to buckle up every time you drive,

even if your seating position includes a supple-

mental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories specify that seat belts be worn at

all times when a vehicle is being driven.

SSS0136

SEAT BELTS

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

WARNING

●Every person who drives or rides in this

vehicle should use a seat belt at all

times. Children should be in the rear

seats and in an appropriate restraint.

WARNING

●The seat belt should be properly ad-

justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so may

reduce the effectiveness of the entire

restraint system and increase the

chance or severity of injury in an acci-

dent. Serious injury or death can occur if

the seat belt is not worn properly.

SSS0134 SSS0016

1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

●Always route the shoulder belt over

your shoulder and across your chest.

Never put the belt behind your back,

under your arm or across your neck. The

belt should be away from your face and

neck, but not falling off your shoulder.

●Position the lap belt as low and snug as

possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE

WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could

increase the risk of internal injuries in

an accident.

●Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely

fastened to the proper buckle.

●Do not wear the seat belt inside out or

twisted. Doing so may reduce its

effectiveness.

●Do not allow more than one person to

use the same seat belt.

●Never carry more people in the vehicle

than there are seat belts.

●If the seat belt warning light glows con-

tinuously while the ignition is placed in

the ON position with all doors closed

and all seat belts fastened, it may indi-

cate a malfunction in the system. Have

the system checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

●No changes should be made to the seat

belt system. For example, do not modify

the seat belt, add material, or install

devices that may change the seat belt

routing or tension. Doing so may affect

the operation of the seat belt system.

Modifying or tampering with the seat

belt system may result in serious per-

sonal injury.

●Once seat belt pretensioner(s) have ac-

tivated, they cannot be reused and must

be replaced together with the retractor.

It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

●All seat belt assemblies, including re-

tractors and attaching hardware, should

be inspected after any collision. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service. NISSAN recom-

mends that all seat belt assemblies in

use during a collision be replaced un-

less the collision was minor and the

belts show no damage and continue to

operate properly. Seat belt assemblies

not in use during a collision should also

be inspected and replaced if either

damage or improper operation is noted.

●All child restraints and attaching hard-

ware should be inspected after any col-

lision. Always follow the restraint

manufacturer’s inspection instructions

and replacement recommendations.

The child restraints should be replaced

if they are damaged.

SSS0014

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT

Both the driver’s and passenger’s front seats are

equipped with a seat belt warning light. The

warning light, located on the instrument panel,

will show the status of the driver and passenger

seat belt.

NOTE:

The front passenger seat belt warning light

will not light up if the seat is not occupied.

For additional information, refer to “Warning

lights, indicator lights and audible reminders” in

the “Instruments and controls” section of this

manual.

PREGNANT WOMEN

NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use

seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug and

always position the lap belt as low as possible

around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder

belt over your shoulder and across your chest.

Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your ab-

dominal area. Contact your doctor for specific

recommendations.

INJURED PERSONS

NISSAN recommends that injured persons use

seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific

recommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT

WITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

●Every person who drives or rides in this

vehicle should use a seat belt at all

times. Children should be in the rear

seats and in an appropriate restraint.

●Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident,

you could be thrown into it and receive

neck or other serious injuries. You

could also slide under the lap belt and

receive serious internal injuries.

●For the most effective protection when

the vehicle is in motion, the seat should

be upright. Always sit well back and

upright in the seat with both feet on the

floor and adjust the seat belt properly.

●Do not allow children to play with the

seat belts. Most seating positions are

equipped with Automatic Locking Re-

tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat

belt becomes wrapped around a child’s

neck with the ALR mode activated, the

child can be seriously injured or killed if

the seat belt retracts and becomes

tight. This can occur even if the vehicle

is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to

release the child. If the seat belt cannot

be unbuckled or is already unbuckled,

release the child by cutting the seat belt

with a suitable tool (such as a knife or

scissors) to release the seat belt.

LRS0786

1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Fastening the seat belts

1. Adjust the seat. For additional information,

refer to “Seats” in this section.

Manual front seat shown (if so equipped)

LRS2160

Power front seat shown (if so equipped)

LRS2662

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor

and insert the tongue into the buckle 䊊

Auntil

you hear and feel the latch engage.

●The retractor is designed to lock dur-

ing a sudden stop or on impact. A

slow pulling motion permits the seat

belt to move and allows you some

freedom of movement in the seat.

●If the seat belt cannot be pulled from

its fully retracted position, firmly pull

the belt and release it. Then

smoothly pull the belt out of the re-

tractor.

3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug

on the hips 䊊

Bas shown.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the

retractor to take up extra slack 䊊

C. Be sure

the shoulder belt is routed over your shoul-

der and across your chest.

The front passenger seat and the rear seating

positions’ three-point seat belts have two modes

of operation:

●Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

●Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The ELR mode allows the seat belt to extend and

retract to allow the driver and passengers some

freedom of movement in the seat. The ELR locks

the seat belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly

or during certain impacts.

The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks the

seat belt for child restraint installation.

When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt

cannot be extended again until the seat belt

tongue is detached from the buckle and fully

retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode

after the seat belt fully retracts. For additional

information, refer to “Child restraints” in this sec-

tion.

The ALR mode should be used only for

child restraint installation. During normal

seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode

should not be activated. If it is activated, it

may cause uncomfortable seat belt ten-

sion. It can also change the operation of

the front passenger air bag. For additional

information, refer to “Front passenger air

bag and status light” in this section.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be certain

that the seatbacks are completely secured

in the latched position. If they are not

completely secured, passengers may be

injured in an accident or sudden stop.

LRS2674 LRS2675

1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on the

buckle 䊊

1. The seat belt automatically retracts.

Checking seat belt operation

Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt

movement by two separate methods:

●When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the

retractor

●When the vehicle slows down rapidly

To increase your confidence in the seat belts,

check the operation as follows:

●Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward

quickly. The retractor should lock and re-

strict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this check,

get the system checked. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service or to

learn more about seat belt operation.

Shoulder belt height adjustment (front

seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad-

justed to the position best for you. For additional

information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt

usage” in this section. To adjust, pull out the

adjustment button 䊊

1and move the shoulder belt

anchor to the desired position 䊊

2, so the belt

passes over the center of the shoulder. The belt

should be away from your face and neck, but not

falling off your shoulder. Release the adjustment

button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into posi-

tion.

WRS0139 LRS0242

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

WARNING

●After adjustment, release the adjust-

ment button and try to move the shoul-

der belt anchor up and down to make

sure it is securely fixed in position.

●The shoulder belt anchor height should

be adjusted to the position best for you.

Failure to do so may reduce the effec-

tiveness of the entire restraint system

and increase the chance or severity of

injury in an accident.

Seat belt hook

When the seat belt is not in use and when folding

down the rear seats, hook the rear seat belts on

the seat belt hooks.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it is

not possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder belt

and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with

the installed seat belts is available for purchase.

The extender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm)

of length and are available for the:

●Driver and front passenger seating position

●2nd and 3rd row seating position

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for assistance with purchasing an extender if an

extender is required.

WARNING

●Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made

by the same company which made the

original equipment seat belts, should

be used with NISSAN seat belts.

●Adults and children who can use the

standard seat belt should not use an

extender. Such unnecessary use could

result in serious personal injury in the

event of an accident.

●Never use seat belt extenders to install

child restraints. If the child restraint is

not secured properly, the child could be

seriously injured or killed in a collision

or a sudden stop.

3rd row shown; 2nd row similar

LRS2157

1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

●To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a

mild soap solution or any solution recom-

mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.

Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat

belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the

seat belts to retract until they are completely

dry.

●If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt

guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat

belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder

belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

●Periodically check to see that the seat

belt and the metal components, such as

buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires

and anchors, work properly. If loose parts,

deterioration, cuts or other damage on the

webbing is found, the entire seat belt as-

sembly should be replaced.

WARNING

Do not allow children to play with the seat

belts. Most seating positions are

equipped with Automatic Locking Retrac-

tor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat belt

becomes wrapped around a child’s neck

with the ALR mode activated, the child can

be seriously injured or killed if the seat

belt retracts and becomes tight. This can

occur even if the vehicle is parked. Un-

buckle the seat belt to release the child. If

the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is

already unbuckled, release the child by

cutting the seat belt with a suitable tool

(such as a knife or scissors) to release the

seat belt.

Children need adults to help protect them.

They need to be properly restrained.

In addition to the general information in this

manual, child safety information is available from

many other sources, including doctors, teachers,

government traffic safety offices, and community

organizations. Every child is different, so be sure

to learn the best way to transport your child.

There are three basic types of child restraint

systems:

●Rear-facing child restraints

●Forward-facing child restraints

●Booster seats

The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.

Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less

than 20 lbs (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facing

child restraints. Forward-facing child restraints

are available for children who outgrow rear-

facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old.

Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle

lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer

use a forward-facing child restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special protec-

tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit

them properly. The shoulder belt may

come too close to the face or neck. The lap

belt may not fit over their small hip bones.

In an accident, an improperly fitting seat

belt could cause serious or fatal injury.

Always use appropriate child restraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territo-

ries require the use of approved child restraints

for infants and small children. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Child restraints” in this section.

CHILD SAFETY

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by

using either the LATCH (Lower Anchors and

Tethers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle

seat belt. For additional information, refer to

“Child restraints” in this section.

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens

and children be restrained in the rear seat.

Studies show that children are safer when

properly restrained in the rear seat than in

the front seat.

This is especially important because your

vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-

tem (air bag system) for the front passen-

ger. For additional information, refer to

“Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)” in

this section.

INFANTS

Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed

in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recom-

mends that infants be placed in child restraints

that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards. You should choose a child restraint

that fits your vehicle and always follow the manu-

facturer’s instructions for installation and use.

SMALL CHILDREN

Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at least

20 lbs (9 kg) should remain in a rear-facing child

restraint as long as possible up to the height or

weight limit of the child restraint. Children who

outgrow the height or weight limit of the rear-facing

child restraint and are at least 1 year old should be

secured in a forward-facing child restraint with a

harness. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions

for minimum and maximum weight and height rec-

ommendations. NISSAN recommends that small

children be placed in child restraints that comply

with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You

should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle

and always follow the manufacturer’s instructions

for installation and use.

LARGER CHILDREN

Children should remain in a forward-facing child

restraint with a harness until they reach the maxi-

mum height or weight limit allowed by the child

restraint manufacturer.

Once a child outgrows the height or weight limit

of the harness-equipped forward-facing child re-

straint, NISSAN recommends that the child be

placed in a commercially available booster seat to

obtain proper seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit

properly, the booster seat should raise the child

so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned

across the chest and the top, middle portion of

the shoulder. The shoulder belt should not cross

the neck or face and should not fall off the shoul-

der. The lap belt should lie snugly across the

lower hips or upper thighs, not the abdomen. A

booster seat can only be used in seating posi-

tions that have a three-point type seat belt. The

booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have

a label certifying that it complies with Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Mo-

tor Vehicle Safety Standards.

A booster seat should be used until the child can

pass the seat belt fit test below:

●Are the child’s back and hips against the

vehicle seatback?

●Is the child able to sit without slouching?

●Do the child’s knees bend easily over the

front edge of the seat with feet flat on the

floor?

●Can the child safely wear the seat belt (lap

belt low and snug across the hips and shoul-

der belt across mid-chest and shoulder)?

●Is the child able to use the properly adjusted

head restraint/headrest?

●Will the child be able to stay in position for

the entire ride?

1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

If you answered no to any of these questions, the

child should remain in a booster seat using a

three-point type seat belt.

NOTE:

Laws in some communities may follow dif-

ferent guidelines. Check local and state

regulations to confirm your child is using

the correct restraint system before travel-

ing.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat

and do not allow a child in the cargo area.

The child could be seriously injured or

killed in a sudden stop or collision.

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD

RESTRAINTS

WARNING

●Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use and installa-

tion of child restraints could result in

serious injury or death of a child or

other passengers in a sudden stop or

collision:

– The child restraint must be used and

installed properly. Always follow all

of the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation and use.

LRS2690 ARS1098

CHILD RESTRAINTS

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

– Infants and children should never be

held on anyone’s lap. Even the stron-

gest adult cannot resist the forces of

a collision.

– Do not put a seat belt around both a

child and another passenger.

– NISSAN recommends that all child

restraints be installed in the rear

seat. Studies show that children are

safer when properly restrained in the

rear seat than in the front seat. If you

must install a forward-facing child

restraint in the front seat, refer to

“Forward-facing child restraint in-

stallation using the seat belts” in this

section.

– Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-

facing child restraint in the front seat.

An inflating air bag could seriously

injure or kill a child. A rear-facing

child restraint must only be used in

the rear seat.

– Be sure to purchase a child restraint

that will fit the child and vehicle.

Some child restraints may not fit

properly in your vehicle.

– Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage

the child restraint anchorages. The

child restraint will not be properly

installed using the damaged anchor-

age, and a child could be seriously

injured or killed in a collision.

– Never use the anchor points for adult

seat belts or harnesses.

– A child restraint with a top tether

strap should not be used in the front

passenger seat.

– Keep seatbacks as upright as pos-

sible after fitting the child restraint.

– Infants and children should always

be placed in an appropriate child re-

straint while in the vehicle.

●When the child restraint is not in use,

keep it secured with the LATCH system

or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or colli-

sion, loose objects can injure occupants

or damage the vehicle.

WRS0256

1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

CAUTION

A child restraint in a closed vehicle can

become very hot. Check the seating sur-

face and buckles before placing a child in

the child restraint.

This vehicle is equipped with a universal child

restraint anchor system, referred to as the LATCH

(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys-

tem. Some child restraints include rigid or

webbing-mounted attachments that can be con-

nected to these anchors. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “LATCH (Lower Anchors and Teth-

ers for CHildren) system” in this section.

If you do not have a LATCH compatible child

restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.

Several manufacturers offer child restraints for

infants and children of various sizes. When se-

lecting any child restraint, keep the following

points in mind:

●Choose only a restraint with a label certifying

that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

●Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be

sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat

and seat belt system.

●If the child restraint is compatible with your

vehicle, place your child in the child restraint

and check the various adjustments to be

sure the child restraint is compatible with

your child. Choose a child restraint that is

designed for your child’s height and weight.

Always follow all recommended procedures.

●If the combined weight of the child and child

restraint is less than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), you

may use either the LATCH anchors or the

seat belt to install the child restraint (not both

at the same time).

●If the combined weight of the child and child

restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use

the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-

chors) to install the child restraint.

●Be sure to follow the child restraint manufac-

turer’s instructions for installation.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved child

restraint at all times while the vehicle is

being operated. Canadian law requires the

top tether strap on forward-facing child re-

straints be secured to the designated an-

chor point on the vehicle.

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers

for CHildren) SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor

points that are used with LATCH system compat-

ible child restraints. This system may also be

referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible

system. With this system, you do not have to use

a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint

unless the combined weight of the child and child

restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and child restraint is

greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s

seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the

LATCH system lower anchor locations -

bench seat

LRS2137

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint

manufacturer’s instructions for installation.

The LATCH lower anchor points are provided to

install child restraints in the following positions

only:

●2nd row bench seat – outboard seating

positions

LATCH lower anchor

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-

tions for proper use and installation of

child restraints could result in serious in-

jury or death of a child or other passen-

gers in a sudden stop or collision:

– Attach LATCH system compatible

child restraints only at the locations

shown in the illustration.

– Do not secure a child restraint in the

2nd row center position using the

LATCH system anchors. The child re-

straint will not be secured properly.

– Inspect the lower anchors by insert-

ing your fingers into the lower anchor

area. Feel to make sure there are no

obstructions over the anchors such

as seat belt webbing or seat cushion

material. The child restraint will not

be secured properly if the lower an-

chors are obstructed.

– Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage

the child restraint anchorages. The

child restraint will not be properly

installed using the damaged anchor-

ages, and a child could be seriously

injured or killed in a collision.

LATCH lower anchor locations

The LATCH lower anchors are located at the rear

of the seat cushion near the seatback. A label is

attached to the seatback to help you locate the

LATCH lower anchors.

LATCH lower anchor location

WRS0700

1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Installing child restraint LATCH lower

anchor attachments

LATCH compatible child restraints include two

rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can

be connected to two anchors located at certain

seating positions in your vehicle. With this sys-

tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to

secure the child restraint. Check your child re-

straint for a label stating that it is compatible with

LATCH. This information may also be in the in-

structions provided by the child restraint manu-

facturer.

When installing a child restraint, carefully read

and follow the instructions in this manual and

those supplied with the child restraint.

LATCH label locations 2nd row bench

LRS2718

LATCH webbing-mounted attachment

LRS0661

LATCH rigid-mounted attachment

LRS0662

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

Top tether anchor

WARNING

●Do not allow cargo to contact the top

tether strap when it is attached to the

top tether anchor. Properly secure the

cargo so it does not contact the top

tether strap. Cargo that is not properly

secured or cargo that contacts the top

tether strap may damage it during a

collision. A child could be seriously in-

jured or killed in a collision if the top

tether strap is damaged.

●Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage the

child restraint anchorages. The child re-

straint will not be properly installed us-

ing the damaged anchorages, and a

child could be seriously injured or killed

in a collision.

䊊

1Top tether strap

䊊

2Anchor point

Top tether anchor point locations

Anchor points are located in the following loca-

tions:

●2nd row bench on the bottom of the seat-

back in the seating positions shown.

●Roof above the rear cargo area.

The top tether anchor located in the roof is only to

be used for a child restraint located in the center

position of the 2nd row.

A child restraint with a top tether strap should

only be placed in the center position of the 2nd

row if there are no 3rd row occupants.

Rearward adjustment of the 2nd row bench seat

will result in loosening of the top tether strap for

the center position of the 2nd row. Avoid moving

the 2nd row bench seat or retighten the top

tether strap following rearward movement of the

2nd row bench seat.

If you have any questions when installing a top

tether strap, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING LATCH

For additional information, refer to all Warnings

and Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Child

restraints” sections of this manual before install-

ing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the combined

weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds

65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the

child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs

(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the

lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be

sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

2nd row bench seat

LRS2714

1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child

restraint in the 2nd row seats using the LATCH

system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-

ways follow the child restraint manufactur-

er’s instructions.

2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-

ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check

to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-

erly attached to the lower anchors.

Rear-facing webbing-mounted – step 2

WRS0801

Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2

WRS0802

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

3. For child restraints that are equipped with

webbing-mounted attachments, remove any

additional slack from the anchor attach-

ments. Press downward and rearward firmly

in the center of the child restraint with your

hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion

and seatback while tightening the webbing

of the anchor attachments.

4. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-

fore you place the child in it. Push it from side

to side while holding the child restraint near

the LATCH attachment path. The child re-

straint should not move more than 1 inch

(25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it

forward and check to see if the LATCH at-

tachment holds the restraint in place. If the

restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH

attachment as necessary, or put the restraint

in another seat and test it again. You may

need to try a different child restraint or try

installing by using the vehicle seat belt (if

applicable). Not all child restraints fit in all

types of vehicles.

5. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1

through 4.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT

BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used

when installing a child restraint. Failure to

use the ALR mode will result in the child

restraint not being properly secured. The

restraint could tip over or be loose and

cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or

collision.

For additional information, refer to all Warnings

and Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Child

restraints” sections of this manual before install-

ing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the combined

weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds

65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the

child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs

(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the

lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be

Rear-facing – step 3

LRS0673

Rear-facing – step 4

LRS0674

1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child

restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear

seats:

1. Child restraints for infants must be

used in the rear-facing direction and

therefore must not be used in the front

seat. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manufactur-

er’s instructions.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child

restraint and insert it into the buckle until you

hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to

follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-

structions for belt routing.

Rear-facing – step 1

WRS0256

Rear-facing – step 2

WRS0761

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully

extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor

is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It

reverts to the ELR mode when the seat belt

is fully retracted.

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the

shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

5. Remove any additional slack from the seat

belt; press downward and rearward firmly in

the center of the child restraint to compress

the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while

pulling up on the seat belt.

Rear-facing – step 3

LRS2395

Rear-facing – step 4

LRS2396

Rear-facing – step 5

WRS0762

1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-

fore you place the child in it. Push it from side

to side while holding the child restraint near

the seat belt path. The child restraint should

not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from

side to side. Try to tug it forward and check

to see if the belt holds the restraint in place.

If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat

belt as necessary, or put the restraint in

another seat and test it again. You may need

to try a different child restraint. Not all child

restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 1

through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat

belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint

mode) is canceled.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD

RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING

LATCH

For additional information, refer to all Warnings

and Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Child

restraints” sections of this manual before install-

ing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the combined

weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds

65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the

child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs

(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the

lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be

sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a forward-facing

child restraint in the 2nd row seats using the

LATCH system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-

ways follow the child restraint manufactur-

er’s instructions.

Rear-facing – step 6

LRS2397

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-

ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check

to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-

erly attached to the lower anchors.

If the child restraint is equipped with a top

tether strap, route the top tether strap and

secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point. For additional information, refer to “In-

stalling top tether strap” in this section.

Do not install child restraints that require the

use of a top tether strap in seating positions

that do not have a top tether anchor.

3. The back of the child restraint should be

secured against the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child

restraint fit. If the head restraint/headrest is

removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure

to reinstall the head restraint/headrest

when the child restraint is removed. For

additional information about head

restraint/headrest adjustment, refer to

“Head restraints/headrests” in this section.

If the seating position does not have an

adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is

interfering with the proper child restraint fit,

try another seating position or a different

child restraint.

Forward-facing webbing-mounted – step 2

LRS2398

Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2

LRS2399

1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

4. For child restraints that are equipped with

webbing-mounted attachments, remove any

additional slack from the anchor attach-

ments. Press downward and rearward firmly

in the center of the child restraint with your

knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion

and seatback while tightening the webbing

of the anchor attachments.

5. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove any

slack.

6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-

fore you place the child in it. Push it from side

to side while holding the child restraint near

the LATCH attachment path. The child re-

straint should not move more than 1 inch

(25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it

forward and check to see if the LATCH at-

tachment holds the restraint in place. If the

restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH

attachment as necessary, or put the restraint

in another seat and test it again. You may

need to try a different child restraint. Not all

child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1

through 6.

Forward-facing – step 4

LRS0671

Forward-facing – step 6

WRS0697

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

䊊

1Top tether strap

䊊

2Anchor point

Installing top tether strap

The child restraint top tether strap must be used

when installing the child restraint with the LATCH

lower anchor attachments.

First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH

lower anchors (2nd row bench outboard seating

positions only).

2nd row bench seat

OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS

1. Remove the head restraint/headrest and

store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall

the head restraint/headrest when the child

restraint is removed. For additional informa-

tion about head restraint/headrest adjust-

ment, removal and installation, refer to

“Head restraints/headrests” in this section.

2. Position the top tether strap 䊊

1over the

seatback.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point 䊊

2on the bottom of the seatback

behind the child restraint.

4. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove any

slack.

CENTER SEATING POSITION

1. Remove the head restraint/headrest and

store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall

the head restraint/headrest when the child

restraint is removed. For additional informa-

tion about head restraint/headrest adjust-

ment, removal and installation, refer to

“Head restraints/headrests” in this section.

2. Open the top tether anchor 䊊

2cover lo-

cated on the ceiling.

3. Secure the tether strap 䊊

1to the tether

anchor point 䊊

2on the ceiling behind the

child restraint.

4. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove any

slack. Make sure the head restraint/headrest

does not contact the top tether strap.

If you have any questions when installing a

top tether strap, it is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are designed

to withstand only those loads imposed by

correctly fitted child restraints. Under no

circumstances are they to be used to at-

tach adult seat belts, or other items or

equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could

damage the child restraint anchorages.

The child restraint will not be properly

installed using the damaged anchorage,

and a child could be seriously injured or

killed in a collision.

2nd row bench seat

LRS2714

1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

FORWARD-FACING CHILD

RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING

THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used

when installing a child restraint. Failure to

use the ALR mode will result in the child

restraint not being properly secured. The

restraint could tip over or be loose and

cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or

collision. Also, it can change the operation

of the front passenger air bag. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Front passen-

ger air bag and status light” in this section.

For additional information, refer to all Warnings

and Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Child

restraints” sections of this manual before install-

ing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the combined

weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds

65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the

child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs

(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the

lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be

sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a forward-facing

child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the

rear seats or in the front passenger seat:

1. If you must install a child restraint in

the front seat, it should be placed in a

forward-facing direction only. Move

the seat to the rearmost position. Child

restraints for infants must be used in

the rear-facing direction and, there-

fore, must not be used in the front seat.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-

ways follow the child restraint manufactur-

er’s instructions.

The back of the child restraint should be

secured against the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child

restraint fit. If the head restraint/headrest is

removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure

to reinstall the head restraint/headrest

when the child restraint is removed. For

additional information about head

restraint/headrest adjustment, removal and

installation, refer to “Head

restraints/headrests” in this section.

Forward-facing (front passenger seat) –

step 1

WRS0699

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

If the seating position does not have an

adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is

interfering with the proper child restraint fit,

try another seating position or a different

child restraint.

3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child

restraint and insert it into the buckle until you

hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to

follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-

structions for belt routing.

If the child restraint is equipped with a top

tether strap, route the top tether strap and

secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point (2nd row installation only). For addi-

tional information, refer to “Installing top

tether strap” in this section.

Do not install child restraints that require the

use of a top tether strap in seating positions

that do not have a top tether anchor.

Forward-facing – step 3

WRS0680

1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully

extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor

is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It

reverts to ELR mode when the seat belt is

fully retracted.

5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the

shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

6. Remove any additional slack from the seat

belt; press downward and rearward firmly in

the center of the child restraint with your

knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion

and seatback while pulling up on the seat

belt.

7. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove any

slack.

Forward-facing – step 4

LRS2394

Forward-facing – step 5

LRS0668

Forward-facing – step 6

WRS0681

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

8. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-

fore you place the child in it. Push it from side

to side while holding the child restraint near

the seat belt path. The child restraint should

not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from

side to side. Try to tug it forward and check

to see if the belt holds the restraint in place.

If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat

belt as necessary, or put the restraint in

another seat and test it again. You may need

to try a different child restraint. Not all child

restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

9. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2

through 8.

10. If the child restraint is installed in the front

passenger seat, place the ignition switch in

the ON position. The front passenger air bag

status light should illuminate. If this

light is not illuminated, refer to “Front pas-

senger air bag and status light” in this sec-

tion. Move the child restraint to another

seating position. Have the system

checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat

belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child re-

straint mode) is canceled.

Forward-facing – step 8

WRS0698

Forward-facing – step 10

WRS0475

1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

䊊

1Top tether strap

䊊

2Anchor point

Installing top tether strap

The child restraint top tether strap must be used

when installing the child restraint with seat belts.

First, secure the child restraint with the seat belt.

2nd row bench seat

OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS

1. Remove the head restraint/headrest and

store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall

the head restraint/headrest when the child

restraint is removed. For additional informa-

tion about head restraint/headrest adjust-

ment, removal and installation, refer to

“Head restraints/headrests” in this section.

2. Position the top tether strap 䊊

1over the

seatback.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point 䊊

2on the bottom of the seatback

behind the child restraint.

4. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove any

slack.

CENTER SEATING POSITION

1. Remove the head restraint/headrest and

store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall

the head restraint/headrest when the child

restraint is removed. For additional informa-

tion about head restraint/headrest adjust-

ment, removal and installation, refer to

“Head restraints/headrests” in this section.

2. Open the top tether anchor 䊊

2cover lo-

cated on the ceiling.

3. Secure the tether strap 䊊

1to the tether

anchor point 䊊

2on the ceiling behind the

child restraint.

4. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove any

slack. Make sure the head restraint/headrest

does not contact the top tether strap.

If you have any questions when installing a

top tether strap, it is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are designed

to withstand only those loads imposed by

correctly fitted child restraints. Under no

circumstances are they to be used to at-

tach adult seat belts, or other items or

equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could

damage the child restraint anchorages.

The child restraint will not be properly

installed using the damaged anchorage,

and a child could be seriously injured or

killed in a collision.

2nd row bench seat

LRS2714

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

BOOSTER SEATS

For additional information on installing a booster

seat in your vehicle, follow the instructions out-

lined in this section.

Precautions on booster seats

WARNING

If a booster seat and seat belt are not used

properly, the risk of a child being injured

or killed in a sudden stop or collision

greatly increases:

– Make sure the shoulder portion of

the belt is away from the child’s face

and neck and the lap portion of the

belt does not cross the stomach.

– Make sure the shoulder belt is not

behind the child or under the child’s

arm.

– A booster seat must only be installed

in a seating position that has a

lap/shoulder belt.

A. Low back booster seat

B. High back booster seat

Booster seats of various sizes are offered by

several manufacturers. When selecting any

booster seat, keep the following points in mind:

●Choose only a booster seat with a label

certifying that it complies with Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

●Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be

sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat

and seat belt system.

LRS2479 LRS0453

1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

●Make sure the child’s head will be properly

supported by the booster seat or vehicle

seat. The seatback must be at or above the

center of the child’s ears. For example, if a

low back booster seat is chosen, the vehicle

seatback must be at or above the center of

the child’s ears. If the seatback is lower than

the center of the child’s ears, a high back

booster seat should be used.

●If the booster seat is compatible with your

vehicle, place the child in the booster seat

and check the various adjustments to be

sure the booster seat is compatible with the

child. Always follow all recommended pro-

cedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved child

restraint at all times while the vehicle is

being operated.

The instructions in this section apply to booster

seat installation in the rear seats or the front

passenger seat.

Booster seat installation

WARNING

To avoid injury to child, do not use the

lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic Lock-

ing Retractor (ALR) mode when using a

booster seat with the seat belts.

For additional information, refer to all Warnings

and Cautions in the “Child safety,” “Child re-

straints” and “Booster seats” sections of this

manual before installing a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the

2nd or 3rd rows or in the front passenger seat:

1. If you must install a booster seat in the

front seat, move the seat to the rear-

most position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only

place it in a front-facing direction. Always

follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-

structions.

LRS0464 WRS0699

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

3. The booster seat should be positioned on

the vehicle seat so that it is stable.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint/headrest to obtain the correct

booster seat fit. If the head

restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a

secure place. Be sure to reinstall the

head restraint/headrest when the

booster seat is removed. For additional

information about head restraint/headrest

adjustment, removal and installation, refer to

“Head restraints/headrests” in this section.

If the seating position does not have an

adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is

interfering with the proper booster seat fit,

try another seating position or a different

booster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low

and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to

follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-

structions for adjusting the seat belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt

toward the retractor to take up extra slack.

Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned

across the top, middle portion of the child’s

shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat

manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the

seat belt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-

tions for properly fastening a seat belt

shown in “Three-point type seat belt with

retractor” in this section.

7. If the booster seat is installed in the front

passenger seat, place the ignition switch in

the ON position. The front passenger air bag

status light may or may not illuminate,

depending on the size of the child and the

type of booster seat being used. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Front passenger

air bag and status light” in this section.

Front passenger position

LRS0454 WRS0475

1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

PRECAUTIONS ON SRS

This SRS section contains important information

concerning the following systems:

●Driver and front passenger supplemental

front-impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System)

●Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bag

●Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and roll-

over supplemental air bag

●Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats)

Supplemental front-impact air bag system

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help

cushion the impact force to the head and chest of

the driver and front passenger in certain frontal

collisions.

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bag system

This system can help cushion the impact force to

the chest area of the driver and front passenger in

certain side-impact collisions. The side air bags

are designed to inflate on the side where the

vehicle is impacted.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag system

This system can help cushion the impact force to

the head of occupants in front and rear outboard

seating positions in certain side-impact colli-

sions. The curtain air bags are designed to inflate

on the side where the vehicle is impacted. In a

rollover, the curtain air bags are designed to

inflate and remain inflated for a short time.

The SRS is designed to supplement the crash

protection provided by the driver and front pas-

senger seat belts and is not a substitute for

them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn

and the occupant seated a suitable distance

away from the steering wheel, instrument panel

and door finishers. For additional information

about instructions and precautions on seat belt

usage, refer to “Seat belts” in this section.

The supplemental air bags operate only

when the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position.

After placing the ignition switch in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7 sec-

onds if the system is operational.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT

SYSTEM (SRS)

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

WARNING

●The front air bags ordinarily will not

inflate in the event of a side impact, rear

impact, rollover, or lower severity fron-

tal collision. Always wear your seat

belts to help reduce the risk or severity

of injury in various kinds of accidents

●The front passenger air bag will not

inflate if the passenger air bag status

light is lit. For additional information,

refer to “Front passenger air bag and

status light” in this section.

●The seat belts and the front air bags are

most effective when you are sitting well

back and upright in the seat. The front

air bags inflate with great force. Even

with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-

tem, if you are unrestrained, leaning

forward, sitting sideways or out of posi-

tion in any way, you are at greater risk of

injury or death in a crash. You may also

receive serious or fatal injuries from the

front air bag if you are up against it

when it inflates. Always sit back against

the seatback and as far away as practi-

cal from the steering wheel or instru-

ment panel. Always properly use the

seat belts.

●The driver and front passenger seat belt

buckles are equipped with sensors that

detect if the seat belts are fastened. The

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System

monitors the severity of a collision and

seat belt usage, then inflates the air

bags as needed. Failure to properly

wear seat belts can increase the risk or

severity of injury in an accident.

WRS0031

1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

●The front passenger seat is equipped

with an occupant classification sensor

(weight sensor) that turns the front pas-

senger air bag OFF under some condi-

tions. This sensor is only used in this

seat. Failure to be properly seated and

wearing the seat belt can increase the

risk or severity of injury in an accident.

For additional information, refer to

“Front passenger air bag and status

light” in this section.

●Keep hands on the outside of the steer-

ing wheel. Placing them inside the

steering wheel rim could increase the

risk that they are injured when the front

air bag inflates.

ARS1133

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

WARNING

●Never let children ride unrestrained or

extend their hands or face out of the

window. Do not attempt to hold them in

your lap or arms. Some examples of

dangerous riding positions are shown

in the illustrations.

WARNING

●Children may be severely injured or

killed when the front air bags, side air

bags or curtain air bags inflate if they

are not properly restrained. Pre-teens

and children should be properly re-

strained in the rear seat, if possible.

ARS1041 ARS1042 ARS1043

1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

●Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-facing

child restraint in the front seat. An in-

flating front air bag could seriously in-

jure or kill your child. For additional

information, refer to “Child restraints”

in this section.

ARS1044 ARS1045 ARS1046

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51

WARNING

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bags and roof-mounted curtain

side-impact and rollover supplemental air

bags:

●The side air bags and curtain air bags

ordinarily will not inflate in the event of

a frontal impact, rear impact, or lower

severity side collision. Always wear

your seat belts to help reduce the risk or

severity of injury in various kinds of

accidents.

WARNING

●The seat belts, the side air bags and

curtain air bags are most effective when

you are sitting well back and upright in

the seat with both feet on the floor. The

side air bag and curtain air bag inflate

with great force. Do not allow anyone to

place their hand, leg or face near the

side air bag on the side of the seatback

of the front seat or near the side roof

rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the

front seats or rear outboard seats to

extend their hand out of the window or

lean against the door. Some examples

of dangerous riding positions are

shown in the previous illustrations. WARNING

●When sitting in the rear seat, do not

hold onto the seatback of the front seat.

If the side air bag inflates, you may be

seriously injured. Be especially careful

with children, who should always be

properly restrained. Some examples of

dangerous riding positions are shown

in the illustrations.

●Do not use seat covers on the front

seatbacks. They may interfere with side

air bag inflation.

WRS0431 WRS0032

1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0162 SSS0159

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System

(front seats)

1. Supplemental front-impact air bag modules

2. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)

3. Occupant classification sensor

(weight sensor)

4. Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bag modules

5. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bags

6. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag inflators

7. Satellite sensors

8. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats)

9. Pressure sensors in door (driver’s side

shown; front passenger side similar)

10. Crash zone sensor

LRS2815

1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

To ensure proper operation of the passen-

ger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System,

please observe the following items.

●Do not allow a passenger in the rear

bench seats to push or pull on the seat-

back pocket.

●Do not place heavy loads heavier than

2.2 lb (1 kg) on the seatback, head

restraint/headrest or in the seatback

pocket.

●Make sure that there is nothing press-

ing against the rear of the seatback,

such as a child restraint installed in the

rear seat or an object stored on the

floor.

●Make sure that there is no object placed

under the front passenger seat.

●Make sure that there is no object placed

between the seat cushion and center

console or between the seat cushion

and the door.

●If a forward-facing child restraint is in-

stalled in the front passenger seat, do

not position the front passenger seat so

the child restraint contacts the instru-

ment panel. If the child restraint does

contact the instrument panel, the sys-

tem may determine the seat is occupied

and the passenger air bag may deploy

in a collision. Also the front passenger

air bag status light may not illuminate.

For additional information about in-

stalling and using child restraints, refer

to “Child restraints” in this section.

●Confirm the operating condition with

the front passenger air bag status light.

●If you notice that the front passenger air

bag status light is not operating as de-

scribed in this section, get the occupant

classification system checked. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

●Until you have confirmed with a dealer

that your passenger seat occupant clas-

sification system is working properly,

position the occupants in the rear seat-

ing positions.

●Do not position the front passenger

seat so it contacts the rear seat. If the

front seat does contact the rear seat,

the air bag system may determine a

sensor malfunction has occurred and

the front passenger air bag status light

may illuminate and the supplemental

air bag warning light may flash.

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Ad-

vanced Air Bag System for the driver and front

passenger seats. This system is designed to

meet certification requirements under U.S. regu-

lations. It is also permitted in Canada. However,

all of the information, cautions and warn-

ings in this manual still apply and must be

followed.

The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is

located in the center of the steering wheel. The

front passenger supplemental front-impact air

bag is mounted in the dashboard above the glove

box. The front air bags are designed to inflate in

higher severity frontal collisions, although they

may inflate if the forces in another type of collision

are similar to those of a higher severity frontal

impact. They may not inflate in certain frontal

collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not

always an indication of proper front air bag sys-

tem operation.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System monitors

information from the crash zone sensor, the Air

bag Control Unit (ACU), seat belt buckle sensors

and occupation classification sensor (weight

sensor). Inflator operation is based on the sever-

ity of a collision and seat belt usage for the driver.

For the front passenger, the occupant classifica-

tion sensor is also monitored. Based on informa-

tion from the sensor, only one front air bag may

inflate in a crash, depending on the crash severity

and whether the front occupants are belted or

unbelted. Additionally, the front passenger air

bag may be automatically turned off under some

conditions, depending on the weight detected on

the front passenger seat and how the seat belt is

used. If the front passenger air bag is OFF, the

front passenger air bag status light will be illumi-

nated. For additional information, refer to “Front

passenger air bag and status light”in this section.

One front air bag inflating does not indicate im-

proper performance of the system.

If you have any questions about your air bag

system, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer to obtain information about the

system. If you are considering modification of

your vehicle due to a disability, you may also

contact NISSAN. Contact information is con-

tained in the front of this Owner’s Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise

may be heard, followed by the release of smoke.

This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a

fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may

cause irritation and choking. Those with a history

of a breathing condition should get fresh air

promptly.

Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,

help to cushion the impact force on the face and

chest of the front occupants. They can help save

lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an

inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions

or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide

restraint to the lower body.

Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat

belts should be correctly worn and the driver and

front passenger seated upright as far as practical

away from the steering wheel or instrument

panel. The front air bags inflate quickly in order to

help protect the front occupants. Because of this,

the force of the front air bag inflating can increase

the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or

is against, the front air bag module during infla-

tion.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.

The front air bags operate only when the

ignition switch is in the ON position.

After placing the ignition switch in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7 sec-

onds if the system is operational.

1-56 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed to

automatically turn OFF under some condi-

tions. Read this section carefully to learn

how it operates. Proper use of the seat,

seat belt and child restraints is necessary

for most effective protection. Failure to

follow all instructions in this manual con-

cerning the use of seats, seat belts and

child restraints can increase the risk or

severity of injury in an accident.

Status light

The front passenger seat is equipped with an

occupant classification sensor (weight sensor)

that turns the front passenger air bag on or off

depending on the weight applied to the front

passenger seat. The status of the front passen-

ger air bag (ON or OFF) is indicated by the front

passenger air bag status light which is lo-

cated on the instrument panel.

After the ignition switch is placed in the ⬙ON⬙

position, the front passenger air bag status light

on the instrument panel illuminates for about

7 seconds and then turns off or remains illumi-

nated depending on the front passenger seat

occupied status. The light operates as follows:

CONDITION DESCRIPTION PASSENGER AIR BAG INDI-

CATOR LIGHT ( )FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG STATUS

Empty Empty front passenger seat ON (illuminated) INHIBITED

Nobody/Somebody Bag or Child or Child Restraint or Small

Adult in front passenger seat ON (illuminated) INHIBITED

Adult Adult in the front passenger seat OFF (dark) ACTIVATED

WRS0475

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57

In addition to the above, certain objects placed

on the front passenger seat may also cause the

light to operate as described above depending

on their weight.

For additional information related to the normal

operation and troubleshooting of this occupant

classification sensor system, please refer to

“Normal operation” and “Troubleshooting” in this

section.

Front passenger air bag

The front passenger air bag is designed to auto-

matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated

under some conditions as described below in

accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front

passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a

crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your

vehicle are not part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce

the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag

to certain front passenger seat occupants, such

as children, by requiring the air bag to be auto-

matically turned OFF. Certain sensors are used to

meet the requirements.

The occupant classification sensor in this vehicle

is a weight sensor. It is designed to detect an

occupant and objects on the seat by weight. For

example, if a child is in the front passenger seat,

the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System is de-

signed to turn the front passenger air bag OFF in

accordance with the regulations. Also, if a child

restraint of the type specified in the regulations is

on the seat, its weight and the child’s weight can

be detected and cause the air bag to turn OFF.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who are

properly seated and using the seat belt as out-

lined in this manual should not cause the front

passenger air bag to be automatically turned

OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF,

however if the occupant takes his/her weight off

the seat cushion (for example, by not sitting up-

right, by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by

otherwise being out of position), this could cause

the sensor to turn the air bag OFF. Always be

sure to be seated and wearing the seat belt

properly for the most effective protection by the

seat belt and supplemental air bag.

NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil-

dren be properly restrained in a rear seat.

NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child

restraints and booster seats be properly installed

in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupant

classification sensor is designed to operate as

described above to turn the front passenger air

bag OFF for specified child restraints as required

by the regulations. Failing to properly secure

child restraints and to use the ALR mode may

allow the restraint to tip or move in a collision or

sudden stop. This can also result in the passen-

ger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being

OFF. For additional information about proper use

and installation, refer to “Child restraints” in this

section.

If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the

front passenger air bag is designed not to inflate

in a crash. However, heavy objects placed on the

seat could result in air bag inflation, because of

the object’s weight detected by the occupant

classification sensor. Other conditions could also

result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is

standing on the seat, or if two children are on the

seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.

Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants

are seated and restrained properly.

Using the front passenger air bag status light, you

can monitor when the front passenger air bag is

automatically turned OFF.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the front

passenger air bag status light is illuminated (indi-

cating that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the

person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat

properly or not using the seat belt properly.

If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,

the front passenger air bag status light may or

may not be illuminated, depending on the size of

the child and the type of child restraint being

used. If the air bag status light is not illuminated

(indicating that the air bag might inflate in a

1-58 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

crash), it could be that the child restraint or seat

belt is not being used properly. Make sure that

the child restraint is installed properly, the seat

belt is used properly and the occupant is posi-

tioned properly. If the air bag status light is still not

illuminated, reposition the occupant or child re-

straint in a rear seat.

If the front passenger air bag status light will not

illuminate even though you believe that the child

restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are

properly positioned, it is recommended that you

take your vehicle to a NISSAN dealer. A NISSAN

dealer can check system status by using a spe-

cial tool. However, until you have confirmed with

a dealer that your air bag is working properly,

reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear

seat.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and front

passenger air bag status light will take a few

seconds to register a change in the front passen-

ger seat status. For example, if a large adult who

is sitting in the front passenger seat exits the

vehicle, the front passenger air bag status light

will go from OFF to ON for a few seconds and

then to OFF. This is normal system operation and

does not indicate a malfunction.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air

bag system, the supplemental air bag warning

light , located in the meter and gauges area

of the instrument panel, will be illuminated (blink-

ing or steadily lit). Have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

Normal operation

In order for the occupant classification sensor

system to classify the front passenger based on

weight, please follow the precautions and steps

outlined below:

Precautions

●Make sure that there are no objects weigh-

ing over 2.2 lbs (1 kg) hanging on the seat or

placed in the seatback pocket.

●Make sure that a child restraint or other

object is not pressing against the rear of the

seatback.

●Make sure that a rear passenger is not push-

ing or pulling on the back of the front pas-

senger seat.

●Make sure that the front passenger seat or

seatback is not forced back against an ob-

ject on the seat or floor behind it.

●Make sure that there is no object placed

under the front passenger seat.

Steps

1. Adjust the seat as outlined in the “Seats”

section of this manual. Sit upright, leaning

against the seatback, and centered on the

seat cushion with your feet comfortably ex-

tended to the floor.

2. Make sure there are no objects on your lap.

3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in the “Seat

belts” section of this manual. Front passen-

ger seat belt buckle status is monitored by

the occupant classification system, and is

used as an input to determine occupancy

status. So, it is highly recommended that the

front passenger fasten their seat belt.

4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds al-

lowing the system to classify the front pas-

senger before the vehicle is put into motion.

5. Ensure proper classification by checking the

front passenger air bag status light.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59

NOTE:

This vehicle’s occupant classification sen-

sor system generally keeps the classifica-

tion locked during driving, so it is important

that you confirm that the front passenger is

properly classified prior to driving. How-

ever, the occupant classification sensor

may recalculate the weight of the occupant

under some conditions (both while driving

and when stopped), so front passenger

seat occupants should continue to remain

seated as outlined above.

Troubleshooting

If you think the front passenger air bag status light

is incorrect:

1. If the light is ON with an adult occupying the

front passenger seat:

●Occupant is a small adult — the air bag light

is functioning as intended. The front passen-

ger air bag is suppressed.

However, if the occupant is not a small adult, then

this may be due to the following conditions that

may be interfering with the weight sensors:

●Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning

against the seatback, and centered on the

seat cushion with his/her feet comfortably

extended to the floor.

●A child restraint or other object pressing

against the rear of the seatback.

●A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the

back of the front passenger seat.

●Forcing the front seat or seatback against an

object on the seat or floor behind it.

●An object placed under the front passenger

seat.

●An object placed between the seat cushion

and center console or between the seat

cushion and the door.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop

when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of

the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and

wait 1 minute.

NOTE:

A system check will be performed during

which the front passenger air bag status

light will remain lit for about 7 seconds

initially.

If the light is still ON after this, the person should

be advised not to ride in the front passenger seat

and the vehicle should be checked as soon as

possible. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

2. If the light is OFF with a small adult, child or

child restraint occupying the front passen-

ger seat.

This may be due to the following conditions

that may be interfering with the weight sen-

sors:

●Small adult or child is not sitting upright,

leaning against the seatback, and centered

on the seat cushion with his/her feet com-

fortably extended to the floor.

●The child restraint is not properly installed,

as outlined in the “Child restraints”section of

this manual.

●An object weighing over 2.2 lbs (1 kg) hang-

ing on the seat or placed in the seatback

pocket.

●A child restraint or other object pressing

against the rear of the seatback.

●A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the

back of the front passenger seat.

●Forcing the front seat or seatback against an

object on the seat or floor behind it.

●An object placed under the front passenger

seat.

●An object placed between the seat cushion

and center console.

1-60 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop

when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of

the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and

wait 1 minute.

NOTE:

A system check will be performed during

which the front passenger air bag status

light will remain lit for about 7 seconds

initially.

If the light is still OFF after this, the small adult,

child or child restraint should be repositioned in

the rear seat and the vehicle should be checked

as soon as possible. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

3. If the light is OFF with no front passenger

and no objects on the front passenger seat,

the vehicle should be checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer as

soon as possible.

Other supplemental front-impact air bag

precautions

WARNING

●Do not place any objects on the steering

wheel pad or on the instrument panel.

Also, do not place any objects between

any occupant and the steering wheel or

instrument panel. Such objects may be-

come dangerous projectiles and cause

injury if the front air bags inflate.

●Immediately after inflation, several

front air bag system components will be

hot. Do not touch them; you may se-

verely burn yourself.

●No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the supplemental air bag system. This is

to prevent accidental inflation of the

supplemental air bag or damage to the

supplemental air bag system.

●Do not make unauthorized changes to

your vehicle’s electrical system, sus-

pension system or front end structure.

This could affect proper operation of

the front air bag system.

●Tampering with the front air bag system

may result in serious personal injury.

Tampering includes changes to the

steering wheel and the instrument

panel assembly by placing material

over the steering wheel pad and above

the instrument panel or by installing

additional trim material around the air

bag system.

●Removing or modifying the front pas-

senger seat may affect the function of

the air bag system and result in serious

personal injury.

●Modifying or tampering with the front

passenger seat may result in serious

personal injury. For example, do not

change the front seats by placing mate-

rial on the seat cushion or by installing

additional trim material, such as seat

covers, on the seat that are not specifi-

cally designed to assure proper air bag

operation. Additionally, do not stow any

objects under the front passenger seat

or the seat cushion and seatback. Such

objects may interfere with the proper

operation of the occupant classification

sensor (weight sensor).

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61

●No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the seat belt system. This may affect the

front air bag system. Tampering with

the seat belt system may result in seri-

ous personal injury.

●It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for work on and around

the front air bag. It is also recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for installation of electrical equipment.

The Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS) wiring harnesses* should not be

modified or disconnected. Unauthor-

ized electrical test equipment and prob-

ing devices should not be used on the

air bag system.

●A cracked windshield should be re-

placed immediately by a qualified repair

facility. A cracked windshield could af-

fect the function of the supplemental air

bag system.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors are

yellow and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the front air bag system

and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections

in this Owner’s Manual.

Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag and roof-

mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag systems

The side air bags are located in the outside of the

seatback of the front seats. The curtain air bags

are located in the side roof rails in all three rows.

All of the information, cautions and warn-

ings in this manual apply and must be fol-

lowed. The side air bags and curtain air bags are

designed to inflate in higher severity side colli-

sions, although they may inflate if the forces in

another type of collision are similar to those of a

higher severity impact. They are designed to in-

flate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.

They may not inflate in certain side collisions.

Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate in

certain types of rollover collisions or near roll-

overs. As a result, certain vehicle movements (for

example, during severe off-roading) may cause

the curtain air bags to inflate.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an

indication of proper side air bag and curtain air

bag operation.

When the side air bags and curtain air bags

inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed

by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful

and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken

not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and

choking. Those with a history of a breathing con-

dition should get fresh air promptly.

Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,

help to cushion the impact force on the chest of

the front occupants. Curtain air bags help to

cushion the impact force to the head of occu-

pants in the front and rear outboard seating po-

sitions in all rows. They can help save lives and

reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating

side air bag or curtain air bag may cause abra-

sions or other injuries. Side air bags and curtain

air bags do not provide restraint to the lower

body.

WRS0381

1-62 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

The seat belts should be correctly worn and the

driver and front passenger seated upright as far

as practical away from the side air bag. Rear seat

passengers should be seated as far away as

practical from the door finishers and side roof

rails. The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate

quickly in order to help protect the occupants.

Because of this, the force of the side air bags and

curtain air bags inflating can increase the risk of

injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against,

these air bag modules during inflation. The side

air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is

over.

The curtain air bag will remain inflated for a short

time.

The side air bags and curtain air bags op-

erate only when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position.

After placing the ignition switch in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7 sec-

onds if the system is operational.

WARNING

●Do not place any objects near the seat-

back of the front seats. Also, do not

place any objects (an umbrella, bag,

etc.) between the front door finisher

and the front seat. Such objects may

become dangerous projectiles and

cause injury if a side air bag inflates.

●Right after inflation, several side air bag

and curtain air bag system components

will be hot. Do not touch them; you may

severely burn yourself.

●No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the side air bag and curtain air bag

systems. This is to prevent damage to or

accidental inflation of the side air bag

and curtain air bag systems.

●Do not make unauthorized changes to

your vehicle’s electrical system, sus-

pension system or side panel. This

could affect proper operation of the cur-

tain air bag systems.

●Tampering with the side air bag system

may result in serious personal injury.

For example, do not change the front

seats by placing material near the seat-

backs or by installing additional trim

material, such as seat covers, around

the side air bag.

●It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for work on and around

the side air bag and curtain air bag. It is

also recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for installation of elec-

trical equipment. The SRS wiring har-

nesses* should not be modified or dis-

connected. Unauthorized electrical test

equipment and probing devices should

not be used on the side air bag or cur-

tain air bag systems.

*The SRS wiring harness or connectors are

yellow or orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the side air bags and

curtain air bag system and guide the buyer to the

appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-63

Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front

seats)

WARNING

●The pretensioner(s) cannot be reused

after activation. They must be replaced

together with the retractor and buckle

as a unit.

●If the vehicle becomes involved in a

collision but pretensioner(s) are not ac-

tivated, be sure to have the preten-

sioner system checked and, if neces-

sary, replaced. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

●No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the pretensioner system. This is to pre-

vent damage to or accidental activation

of the pretensioner(s). Tampering with

the pretensioner system may result in

serious personal injury.

●It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for work on and around

the pretensioner system. It is also rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for installation of electrical

equipment. Unauthorized electrical test

equipment and probing devices should

not be used on the pretensioner system.

●If you need to dispose of the preten-

sioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service. Incorrect dis-

posal procedures could cause personal

injury.

The pretensioner system may activate with the

supplemental air bag system in certain types of

collisions. Working with the seat belt retractor,

the pretensioner(s) help tighten the seat belt

when the vehicle becomes involved in certain

types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat

occupants.

The pretensioner(s) are encased within the seat

belt retractor and to the seat belt anchor affixed

to the floor of the vehicle. These seat belts are

used the same way as conventional seat belts.

When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is re-

leased and a loud noise may be heard. This

smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.

Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may

cause irritation and choking. Those with a history

of a breathing condition should get fresh air

promptly.

After the pretensioner(s’) activation, load limiters

allow the seat belt to release webbing (if neces-

sary) to reduce forces against the chest.

The supplemental air bag warning light is

used to indicate malfunctions in the pretensioner

system. For additional information, refer to

⬙Supplemental air bag warning light⬙in this sec-

tion. If the operation of the supplemental air bag

warning light indicates there is a malfunction,

have the system checked. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the pretensioner system

and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections

in this Owner’s Manual.

1-64 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1. SRS Air Bag Warning Labels

The warning labels are located on the sur-

face of the sun visor.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG

WARNING LABELS

Warning labels about the supplemental front-

impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle as

shown in the illustration.

WARNING

Do not use a rear-facing child restraint on

a seat protected by an air bag in front of it.

If the air bag deploys, it may cause serious

injury or death.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG

WARNING LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light,

displaying in the instrument panel, moni-

tors the circuits for the air bag systems, preten-

sioner(s) and all related wiring.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning light

illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns

off. This means the system is operational.

WRS0885 LRS0100

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-65

If any of the following conditions occur, the front

air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and preten-

sioner systems need servicing:

●The supplemental air bag warning light re-

mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

●The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

●The supplemental air bag warning light does

not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air

bag, curtain air bag or pretensioner systems may

not operate properly. They must be checked and

repaired. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light

is on, it could mean that the front air bag,

side air bag, curtain air bag and/or preten-

sioner systems will not operate in an acci-

dent. To help avoid injury to yourself or

others, have your vehicle checked as soon

as possible. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Repair and replacement procedure

The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags

and pretensioner(s) are designed to inflate on a

one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is

damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light

remains illuminated after inflation has occurred.

These systems should be repaired and/or re-

placed as soon as possible. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

When maintenance work is required on the ve-

hicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain air

bags, pretensioner(s) and related parts should be

pointed out to the person performing the mainte-

nance. The ignition switch should always be

placed in the LOCK position when working under

the hood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING

●Once a front air bag, side air bag, or

curtain air bag has inflated, the air bag

module will not function again and

must be replaced. Additionally, the acti-

vated pretensioner(s) must also be re-

placed. The air bag module and preten-

sioner(s) should be replaced. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service. However, the air

bag module and pretensioner(s) cannot

be repaired.

●The front air bag, side air bag, curtain

air bag systems and the pretensioner

system should be inspected if there is

any damage to the front end or side

portion of the vehicle. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

●If you need to dispose of the supple-

mental air bag or pretensioner systems

or scrap the vehicle, it is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer. Incorrect

disposal procedures could cause per-

sonal injury.

●If there is an impact to your vehicle from

any direction, your Occupant Classifica-

tion Sensor (OCS) should be checked to

verify it is still functioning correctly. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service. The OCS should

be checked even if no air bags deploy as

a result of the impact. Failure to verify

proper OCS function may result in an

improper air bag deployment resulting

in injury or death.

1-66 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

MEMO

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-67

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel...................................2-2

Meters and gauges ................................2-4

Speedometer and odometer .....................2-4

Tachometer ....................................2-5

Engine coolant temperature gauge ...............2-6

Fuel gauge ....................................2-6

Compass (if so equipped) ..........................2-7

Compass display ...............................2-7

Warning lights, indicator lights and audible

reminders........................................2-10

Checking lights ...............................2-11

Warning lights ................................2-11

Indicator lights ................................2-16

Audible reminders .............................2-18

Vehicle information display.........................2-19

How to use the vehicle information display .......2-19

Startup display ................................2-19

Resetting the trip computer .....................2-20

Settings ......................................2-20

Vehicle information display warnings and

indicators.....................................2-30

Security systems .................................2-33

Vehicle security system.........................2-33

NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system .............2-34

Wiper and washer switch .........................2-36

Switch operation ..............................2-36

Rear switch operation..........................2-37

Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped)

defroster switch ..................................2-38

Headlight and turn signal switch....................2-39

Headlight control switch........................2-39

Daytime running light system....................2-41

Instrument brightness control ...................2-42

Turn signal switch .............................2-42

Fog light switch (if so equipped) ................2-43

Horn ............................................2-43

Heated seat switches (if so equipped) ..............2-44

Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped) .......2-45

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch...........2-45

All-wheel drive (AWD) lock switch (if so equipped) . . .2-46

E-call (SOS) switch (if so equipped)................2-46

Power outlets ....................................2-46

12v outlets ...................................2-46

Extended storage switch ..........................2-48

Storage .........................................2-49

Seatback pockets .............................2-49

Glove box ....................................2-50

Console box ..................................2-50

Sunglasses holder.............................2-50

Cup holders ..................................2-51

Cargo area storage bin (if so equipped) ..........2-53

Divide-n-hide® adjustable floor

(if so equipped) ...............................2-53

Luggage hooks................................2-54

Cargo cover (if so equipped)....................2-55

Roof rack (if so equipped) ......................2-56

Windows ........................................2-57

Power windows ...............................2-57

Power moonroof (if so equipped) ...................2-59

Interior lights .....................................2-62

Console light..................................2-62

Map lights ....................................2-63

Personal Lights (if so equipped).................2-63

Room light (if so equipped) .....................2-63

Luggage compartment light........................2-64

1. Vent (P. 4-32)

2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn

signal switch (P. 2-39)

3. Meters and gauges (P. 2-4)

Warning and indicator lights (P. 2-10)

Vehicle information display (P. 2-19)

4. Wiper and washer switch, rear wiper

washer switch (P. 2-36)

5. Ignition switch (if so equipped)

(P. 5-13)

Push-button ignition switch

(if so equipped) (P. 5-16)

6. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2)

7. Radio (P. 4-43)

Navigation system* (if so equipped)

(P. 4-4)

8. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-47)

9. Glove box (P. 2-49)

10. Heater and air conditioning controls

(P. 4-33)

11. Power outlet (P. 2-46)

12. Shift lever (P. 5-21)

13. Auxiliary jack (P. 4-64)

USB port (P. 4-64)

14. Front passenger air bag status light

(P. 1-47)

LII2516

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-2 Instruments and controls

15. Cruise control main/set switches

(if so equipped) (P. 5-44)

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-46)

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

(P. 4-82, 4-95)

16. Driver supplemental air bag (P. 1-47)

Horn (P. 2-43)

17. Tilt and telescopic steering (P. 3-37)

18. Control panel and vehicle information

display switches (P. 2-19)

19. Hood release (P. 3-26)

Fuel door release (P. 3-34)

20. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF

switch (P. 2-45)

SPORT mode switch (P. 5-25)

ECO mode switch (P. 5-26)

Power liftgate switch (if so equipped)

(P. 3-27)

Power liftgate main switch

(if so equipped) (P. 3-27)

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) lock switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-46)

21. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-39)

Twin trip odometer reset switch (P. 2-4)

*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-

er’s Manual (if so equipped).

Refer to the page number indicated in pa-

rentheses for operating details.

Instruments and controls 2-3

1. Tachometer

2. Warning and indicator lights

3. Vehicle information display

4. Speedometer

5. Fuel gauge

6. Engine coolant temperature gauge

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

This vehicle is equipped with a speedometer and

odometer. The speedometer is located on the

right side of the meter cluster. The odometer is

located within the vehicle information display.

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

LIC2627

LIC2255

METERS AND GAUGES

2-4 Instruments and controls

Odometer/Twin trip odometer

The odometer 䊊

1and the twin trip odometer 䊊

are displayed below the vehicle information dis-

play when the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position.

The odometer records the total distance the ve-

hicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the distance of

individual trips.

Changing the display

Push the TRIP RESET 䊊

3switch on the instru-

ment panel to change the display as follows:

Trip →Trip →Trip

Resetting the trip odometer

Pushing the TRIP RESET switch 䊊

3for 1 second

resets the currently displayed trip odometer to

zero.

TACHOMETER

The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo-

lutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev engine into

the red zone 䊊

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the red

zone, reduce engine speed. Operating the

engine in the red zone may cause serious

engine damage.

LIC3350 LIC2219

Instruments and controls 2-5

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

GAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera-

ture. The engine coolant temperature is within the

normal range 䊊

1when the gauge needle points

within the zone shown in the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature varies with the

outside air temperature and driving conditions.

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates coolant tempera-

ture near the hot (H) end of the normal

range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease

temperature. If the gauge is over the nor-

mal range, stop the vehicle as soon as

safely possible. If the engine is over-

heated, continued operation of the vehicle

may seriously damage the engine. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “If your ve-

hicle overheats” in the “In case of emer-

gency” section of this manual for

immediate action required.

FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level

in the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during braking,

turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.

The gauge needle returns to 0 (Empty) after the

ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

The low fuel warning message appears in the

vehicle information display when the amount of

fuel in the tank is getting low.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-

ters 0 (Empty).

LIC2220 LIC2222

2-6 Instruments and controls

The indicates that the fuel-filler door is

located on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.

CAUTION

●If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may

come on. Refuel as soon as possible.

After a few driving trips. the light

should turn off. If the light remains on

after a few driving trips, have the vehicle

inspected. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

●For additional information, refer to

“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in

this section.

This unit measures terrestrial magnetism and in-

dicates the heading direction of the vehicle.

With the ignition switch in the ON position, press

the button as described in the charts be-

low to activate various features of the automatic

anti-glare rearview mirror.

Push and hold

the

button for about:

Feature:

(Push button again for about 1 sec-

ond to change settings)

1 second Compass display toggles on/off

8 seconds Compass zone can be changed to

correct false compass readings

10 seconds Compass enters calibration mode

For additional information about the automatic

anti-glare feature, refer to “Automatic anti-glare

rearview mirror” in the “Pre-driving checks and

adjustments” section of this manual.

COMPASS DISPLAY

Press the button for about one second

when the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position to toggle the compass direction display

䊊

1on or off. The display will indicate the direction

that the vehicle is heading.

N: North

E: East

S: South

W: West

If the display reads “C”, calibrate the compass by

driving the vehicle in three complete circles at

less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

LIC1487

COMPASS (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-7

You can also calibrate the compass by driving

your vehicle on your everyday route. The com-

pass will be calibrated once it has tracked three

complete circles.

WIC0355

2-8 Instruments and controls

Zone variation change procedure

The difference between magnetic north and geo-

graphical north is known as variance. In some

areas, this difference can sometimes be great

enough to cause false compass readings. Follow

these instructions to set the variance for your

particular location if this happens:

1. Press and hold the button for about

8 seconds. The current zone number will

appear in the display. Release the button.

2. Find your current location on the zone map.

Refer to the illustration.

3. Press the button repeatedly to toggle

through the zone numbers until the desired

number appears in the display. Once you

have selected a zone number, the display

will show a compass direction within a few

seconds.

Inaccurate compass direction

The compass display is equipped with automatic

correction function. If the correct direction is not

shown, follow this procedure.

1. With the display turned on, press and hold

the for about 10 seconds. The “C”

icon in the compass display will illuminate.

2. Calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle

in three complete circles at a maximum

speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).

3. After completing the circles, the display

should return to normal.

CAUTION

●Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,

which are attached to the vehicle by

means of a magnet. They affect the op-

eration of the compass.

●When cleaning the mirror, use a paper

towel or similar material dampened

with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass

cleaner directly on the mirror as it may

cause the liquid cleaner to enter the

mirror housing.

Instruments and controls 2-9

or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)

warning light

Power steering warning light Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

or Brake warning light Seat belt warning light and chime Security indicator light

Charge warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Side light and headlight indicator light (green)

Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) system

warning light (if so equipped)

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK indicator light

(if so equipped)

Slip indicator light

Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) with pedes-

trian detection system warning light (if so

equipped)

Front fog light indicator light (if so equipped) SPORT mode indicator light

Low tire pressure warning light Front passenger air bag status light Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Low windshield-washer fluid warning light

(if so equipped)

High beam assist indicator light (green)

(if so equipped)

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator

light

Master warning light High beam indicator light (blue)

WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR

LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

2-10 Instruments and controls

CHECKING LIGHTS

With all doors closed, apply the parking brake,

fasten the seat belts and place the ignition switch

in the ON position without starting the engine.

The following lights (if so equipped) will come on:

, or , ,

The following lights (if so equipped) come on

briefly and then go off:

or , , , ,

, ,

If any light fails to come on or operate in a way

other than described, it may indicate a burned-

out bulb and/or a system malfunction. Have the

system checked. It is recommended that you visit

a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Some indicators and warnings are also displayed

on the vehicle information display between the

speedometer and tachometer. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Vehicle information display” in

this section.

WARNING LIGHTS

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle infor-

mation display” in this section.

or Anti-lock Braking

System (ABS)

warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the ABS warning light illuminates and

then turns off. This indicates the ABS is opera-

tional.

If the ABS warning light illuminates while the

engine is running or while driving, it may indicate

the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the

system checked. It is recommended that you visit

a NISSAN dealer for this service.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock func-

tion is turned off. The brake system then operates

normally but without anti-lock assistance. For

additional information, refer to “Brake system” in

the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

or Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake and

the foot brake systems.

Low brake fluid warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the light warns of a low brake fluid level.

If the light comes on while the engine is running,

with the parking brake not applied, stop the ve-

hicle and perform the following:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid

as necessary. For additional information, re-

fer to “Brake fluid” in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the

warning system checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-

vice.

WARNING

●Your brake system may not be working

properly if the warning light is on. Driv-

ing could be dangerous. If you judge it

to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest

service station for repairs. Otherwise,

have your vehicle towed because driv-

ing it could be dangerous.

●Pressing the brake pedal with the en-

gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid

level may increase your stopping dis-

tance and braking will require greater

pedal effort as well as pedal travel.

Instruments and controls 2-11

●If the brake fluid level is below the

MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake

fluid reservoir, do not drive until the

brake system has been checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning

indicator

When the parking brake is released and the

brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake

warning light and the ABS warning light illumi-

nate, it may indicate the ABS is not functioning

properly. Have the brake system checked and, if

necessary, repaired. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Avoid

high-speed driving and abrupt braking. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Anti-lock Braking Sys-

tem (ABS) warning light” in this section.

Charge warning light

If this light comes on while the engine is running,

it may indicate the charging system is not func-

tioning properly. Turn the engine off and check

the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken,

missing, or if the light remains on, have the sys-

tem checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

CAUTION

●Do not ground electrical accessories di-

rectly to the battery terminal. Doing so

will bypass the variable voltage control

system and the vehicle battery may not

charge completely. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Variable voltage con-

trol system” in the “Do-it-yourself” sec-

tion of this manual.

●Do not continue driving if the generator

belt is loose, broken or missing.

Forward Emergency Braking

(FEB) system warning light (if

so equipped)

This light illuminates when the Forward Emer-

gency Braking system is set to OFF on the meter

display.

If the light illuminates when the Forward Emer-

gency Braking system is ON, it may indicate that

the system is unavailable. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Forward Emergency Braking (FEB)”

in the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

Forward Emergency Braking

(FEB) with Pedestrian

Detection system warning light

(if so equipped)

This light comes on when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position. It turns off after the

engine is started.

This light illuminates when the FEB system is set

to OFF in the vehicle information display.

If the light illuminates when the FEB system is on,

it may indicate that the system is unavailable. For

additional information, refer to “Forward Emer-

gency Braking (FEB) with Pedestrian Detection

system” in the “Starting and driving” section of

this manual.

Low tire pressure warning light

Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire

pressure of all tires except the spare.

The low tire pressure warning light warns of low

tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not

functioning properly.

After the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, this light illuminates for about 1 second

and turns off.

2-12 Instruments and controls

Low tire pressure warning

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire

pressure, the warning light will illuminate.

A “Tire Pressure Low Add Air” warning also

appears in the vehicle information display.

When the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates, you should stop and adjust the

tire pressure of all four tires to the recom-

mended COLD tire pressure shown on the

Tire and Loading Information label located

in the driver’s door opening. The low tire

pressure warning light does not automati-

cally turn off when the tire pressure is ad-

justed. After the tire is inflated to the rec-

ommended pressure, the vehicle must be

driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h) to

activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire

pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure

gauge to check the tire pressure.

The “Tire Pressure Low Add Air” warning ap-

pears each time the ignition switch is placed in

the ON position as long as the low tire pressure

warning light remains illuminated.

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle infor-

mation display” in this section and “Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and

driving” section and in the “In case of emergency”

section of this manual.

TPMS malfunction

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low

tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi-

mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position. The light will remain on

after 1 minute. Have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service. The ⬙Tire Pressure Low — Add Air⬙

warning does not appear if the low tire pressure

warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS mal-

function.

For additional information, refer to “Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and

driving” section and “Tire pressure” in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

WARNING

●Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those who

use a pacemaker should contact the

electric medical equipment manufac-

turer for the possible influences before

use.

●If the light does not illuminate with the

ignition switch placed in the ON posi-

tion, have the vehicle checked as soon

as possible. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

●If the light illuminates while driving,

avoid sudden steering maneuvers or

abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,

pull off the road to a safe location and

stop the vehicle as soon as possible.

Driving with under-inflated tires may

permanently damage the tires and in-

crease the likelihood of tire failure. Se-

rious vehicle damage could occur and

may lead to an accident and could result

in serious personal injury or death.

Check the tire pressure for all four tires.

Adjust the tire pressure to the recom-

mended COLD tire pressure shown on

the Tire and Loading Information label

located in the driver’s door opening to

turn the low tire pressure warning light

off. If the light still illuminates while

driving after adjusting the tire pressure,

a tire may be flat or the TPMS may be

malfunctioning. If you have a flat tire,

replace it with a spare tire as soon as

possible. If no tire is flat and all tires are

properly inflated, have the vehicle

checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Instruments and controls 2-13

●Since the spare tire is not equipped with

TPMS, when a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel is replaced the TPMS will not

function and the low tire pressure warn-

ing light will flash for approximately

1 minute. The light will remain on after

1 minute. Have your tires replaced

and/or TPMS system reset as soon as

possible. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for these services.

●Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by NISSAN could affect the

proper operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION

●The TPMS is not a substitute for the

regular tire pressure check. Be sure to

check the tire pressure regularly.

●If the vehicle is being driven at speeds

of less than 16 mph (25 km/h), the

TPMS may not operate correctly.

●Be sure to install the specified size of

tires to the four wheels correctly.

Low windshield-washer fluid

warning light (if so equipped)

This light comes on when the windshield-washer

fluid is at a low level. Add windshield-washer fluid

as necessary. For additional information, refer to

“Windshield-washer fluid” in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual.

Master warning light

When the ignition is in the ON position, the

master warning light illuminates if any of the fol-

lowing are displayed on the vehicle information

display.

●All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Tire Size Incorrect

See Owner’s Manual

●All-Wheel Drive (AWD) High Temp. Stop

vehicle

●All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Error See Owner’s

Manual

●No key warning

●Low fuel warning

●Low windshield-washer fluid warning

●Parking brake release warning

●Door/liftgate open warning

●Loose fuel cap warning

If the All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system malfunc-

tions, or the diameter of the front and the rear

wheels are different, the master warning light will

illuminate. For additional information, refer to “All-

Wheel Drive (AWD)” in the “Starting and driving”

section of this manual.

●If the warning light comes on while driving

there may be a malfunction in the AWD

system. Reduce the vehicle speed and have

your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

CAUTION

●If the master warning light was illumi-

nated while driving:

—AWD High Temp Stop vehicle

Pull off the road in a safe area and idle the

engine. The driving mode will change to

2WD to prevent the AWD system from

malfunctioning. If the warning light turns

off, you can drive again.

—Tire Size Incorrect See Owner’s Manual

Pull off the road in a safe area and idle the

engine. Check that all tire sizes are the

same, tire pressure is correct and tires are

not worn.

2-14 Instruments and controls

●If the warning light is still on after the

above operations, have your vehicle

checked as soon as possible. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Power steering warning light

WARNING

●If the engine is not running or is turned

off while driving, the power assist for

the steering will not work. Steering will

be harder to operate.

●When the power steering warning light

illuminates with the engine running,

there will be no power assist for the

steering. You will still have control of

the vehicle, but the steering will be

harder to operate. Have the power

steering system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the power steering warning light illumi-

nates. After starting the engine, the power steer-

ing warning light turns off. This indicates the

power steering is operational.

If the power steering warning light illuminates

while the engine is running, it may indicate the

power steering is not functioning properly and

may need servicing. Have the power steering

checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

When the power steering warning light illumi-

nates with the engine running, there will be no

power assist for the steering, but you will still

have control of the vehicle. At this time, greater

steering effort is required to operate the steering

wheel, especially in sharp turns and at low

speeds.

For additional information, refer to “Power steer-

ing” in the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

Seat belt warning light and

chime

The light and chime remind you to fasten your

seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the

ignition switch is placed in the ON or START

position and remains illuminated until the driver’s

seat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime

sounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s

seat belt is securely fastened.

The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if

the front passenger’s seat belt is not fastened

when the front passenger’s seat is occupied. For

7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in

the ON position, the system does not activate the

warning light for the front passenger.

For additional information, refer to “Seat belts” in

the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental

restraint system” section of this manual.

Supplemental air bag warning

light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or

START position, the supplemental air bag warn-

ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then

turns off. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the front

air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, and preten-

sioner seat belt systems need servicing:

●The supplemental air bag warning light re-

mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

●The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

●The supplemental air bag warning light does

not come on at all.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for these services.

Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental

restraint system (air bag system) and/or the pre-

tensioner(s) may not function properly. For addi-

Instruments and controls 2-15

tional information, refer to “Supplemental Re-

straint System (SRS)” in the “Safety—Seats, seat

belts and supplemental restraint system” section

of this manual.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light

is on, it could mean that the front air bag,

side air bag, curtain air bag and/or preten-

sioner systems will not operate in an acci-

dent. To help avoid injury to yourself or

others, have your vehicle checked as soon

as possible. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle infor-

mation display” in this section.

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK

indicator light (if so equipped)

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,

the All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK indicator light

illuminates and then turns off.

When selecting AWD LOCK mode while the

engine is running, the AWD LOCK indicator light

illuminates.

CAUTION

Do not drive on dry hard surface roads in

the LOCK mode.

Front fog light indicator light (if

so equipped)

The front fog light indicator light illuminates when

the front fog lights are on. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Fog light switch” in this section.

Front passenger air bag status

light

The front passenger air bag status light will be lit

and the passenger front air bag will be off de-

pending on how the front passenger seat is being

used.

For additional information, refer to “Front passen-

ger air bag and status light” in the “Safety —

Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint sys-

tem” section of this manual.

High beam assist indicator light

(green) (if so equipped)

This indicator light illuminates when the head-

lights come on while the headlight switch is in the

AUTO position with the high beams selected.

This indicates that the high beam assist is opera-

tional.

For additional information, refer to “Headlight and

turn signal switch” in this section.

High beam indicator light

(blue)

This blue light comes on when the headlight high

beams are on and goes out when the low beams

are selected.

The high beam indicator light also comes on

when the passing signal is activated.

Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL)

If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks

while the engine is running, it may indicate a

potential emission control malfunction.

The MIL may also come on steady if the fuel-filler

cap is loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs out

of fuel. Check to make sure the fuel-filler cap is

installed and closed tightly, and that the vehicle

has at least 3 gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the

fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the light should

turn off if no other potential emission control

system malfunction exists.

2-16 Instruments and controls

If this indicator light comes on steady for 20 sec-

onds and then blinks for 10 seconds when the

engine is not running, it indicates that the vehicle

is not ready for an emission control system

inspection/maintenance test. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Readiness for

inspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the “Tech-

nical and consumer information” section of this

manual.

Operation

The MIL will come on in one of two ways:

●MIL on steady — An emission control system

malfunction has been detected. Check the

fuel-filler cap if the LOOSE FUEL CAP

warning appears in the vehicle information

display. If the fuel-filler cap is loose or miss-

ing, tighten or install the cap and continue to

drive the vehicle. The light should turn

off after a few driving trips. If the light

does not turn off after a few driving trips,

have the vehicle inspected. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service. You do not need to have your

vehicle towed to the dealer.

●MIL blinking — An engine misfire has been

detected which may damage the emission

control system. To reduce or avoid emission

control system damage:

– do not drive at speeds above 45 mph

(72 km/h).

– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.

– avoid steep uphill grades.

– if possible, reduce the amount of cargo

being hauled or towed.

The MIL may stop blinking and come on steady.

Have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the

dealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without hav-

ing the emission control system checked

and repaired as necessary could lead to

poor driveability, reduced fuel economy,

and possible damage to the emission con-

trol system.

Security indicator light

This light blinks when the ignition switch is

placed in the OFF or LOCK position.

The blinking security indicator light indicates that

the security systems equipped on the vehicle are

operational.

For additional information, refer to “Security sys-

tems” in this section.

Side light and headlight

indicator light (green)

The side light and headlight indicator light illumi-

nates when the side light or headlight position is

selected. For additional information, refer to

“Headlight and turn signal switch” in this section.

Slip indicator light

This indicator will blink when the VDC system is

operating, thus alerting the driver to the fact that

the road surface is slippery and the vehicle is

nearing its traction limits.

You may feel or hear the system working; this is

normal.

The light will blink for a few seconds after the

VDC system stops limiting wheel spin.

Instruments and controls 2-17

The indicator light also comes on when

you place the ignition switch in the ON position.

The light will turn off after approximately 2 sec-

onds if the system is operational. If the light does

not come on have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

SPORT mode indicator light

This light illuminates and then turns off when the

ignition switch is placed in the ON position, and

when the SPORT mode is selected.

For additional information, refer to “Continuously

Variable Transmission (CVT)” in the “Starting and

driving” section of this manual.

Turn signal/hazard indicator

lights

The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal

switch is activated.

Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned

on.

Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) OFF indicator light

This indicator light comes on when the VDC OFF

switch is pushed to off. This indicates the VDC

system has been turned off.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the

engine and the system will operate normally. For

additional information, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driv-

ing” section of this manual.

The VDC indicator light also comes on when you

place the ignition switch in the ON position. The

light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the

system is operational. If the light stays on or

comes on along with the indicator light

while you are driving, have the VDC system

checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

While the VDC system is operating, you might

feel a slight vibration or hear the system working

when starting the vehicle or accelerating, but this

is normal.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.

When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it

makes a high pitched scraping sound when the

vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake

pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as

soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.

Key reminder chime

A chime sounds if the driver’s door is opened while

the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position or

placed in the OFF or LOCK position with the key

left in the vehicle. Make sure the ignition switch is

placed in the LOCK position, and take the key with

you when leaving the vehicle.

Light reminder chime

With the ignition switch placed in the OFF posi-

tion, a chime sounds when the driver’s door is

opened if the headlights or parking lights are on.

Turn the headlight control switch off before leav-

ing the vehicle.

NISSAN Intelligent Key® door buzzer

(if so equipped)

The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if any one

of the following improper operations is found.

●The Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle

when locking the doors.

●Any doors are not closed securely when

locking the doors.

When the buzzer sounds, be sure to check both

the vehicle and the Intelligent Key. For additional

information, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key®” in

the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments”section

of this manual.

2-18 Instruments and controls

The vehicle information display is located to the

left of the speedometer. It displays such items as:

●Vehicle settings

●Trip computer information

●Drive system warnings and settings

●Cruise control system information

●NISSAN Intelligent Key® operation informa-

tion

●Chassis Control

●Indicators and warnings

●Tire Pressure information

HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE

INFORMATION DISPLAY

The vehicle information display can be changed

using the , , and

OK buttons located on the steering wheel.

䊊

1- Use these but-

tons to navigate the vehicle information dis-

play.

䊊

2OK - Change or select an item in the vehicle

information display.

䊊

3— Returns to the previous menu.

The OK, and buttons also

control audio and control panel functions in some

conditions. Most screens and menus offer in-

struction prompts of the steering switch buttons

to indicate how to control the vehicle information

display. Dots on the left side of the vehicle infor-

mation display will appear if there is more than

one page of menu items. The OK button changes

the audio source and the buttons

also control voice recognition manual mode. For

additional information, refer to the separate Navi-

gation System Owner’s Manual.

STARTUP DISPLAY

When the vehicle is placed in the ON position,

the vehicle information display may display the

following screens:

●Home

●Range

●Average speed

●Trip

●Fuel Economy

●Compass

●Audio

●Driving Aids

●Tire Pressure

LIC2630 LIC3566

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

Instruments and controls 2-19

●4x4–i

●Chassis Control

●Warnings

●Settings

Warnings will only display if there are any pres-

ent. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle

information display warnings and indicators” in

this section.

To control which items display in the vehicle

information display, refer to “Meter settings” in

this section.

RESETTING THE TRIP COMPUTER

1. Press the or buttons

until you reach the desired trip computer

mode.

NOTE:

Once you have a trip computer displayed,

you can use the and but-

tons to display the Average Speed and Fuel

Economy screens.

2. Press the OK button.

3. Select one of the following items:

●“Cancel” — returns to the previous screen

without resetting the trip computer.

●“Distance” — resets the current trip com-

puter distance and time of the selected trip

computer.

●“All” — resets all linked values for the se-

lected drive computer. This includes dis-

tance and time, average fuel economy and

average speed information for the selected

drive computer.

NOTE:

Trip computer 2 will automatically reset

each time the ignition is placed in the OFF

position.

SETTINGS

The setting mode allows you to change the infor-

mation displayed in the vehicle information dis-

play:

●Driver Assistance

●Clock

●Meter Settings

●Vehicle Settings

●Maintenance

●Alarm

●Tire Pressures

●Unit

●Language

●Factory Reset

2-20 Instruments and controls

Driver Assistance

The driver assistance menu allows the user to

change the settings for driving, parking, and brak-

ing aids.

Menu item Result

Driving Aids (if so equipped) Displays available driving aids

Cruise Control Displays available cruise control options

Steering Assist Allows user to turn the steering assist feature on or off

Blind Spot Displays available blind spot options

Warning Allows user to turn Blind Spot Warning (BSW) on or off. For additional information, refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” in the

“Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Emergency Brake Allows user to turn the emergency brake feature on or off. For additional information, refer to “Forward Emergency Braking

(FEB)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Forward (FCW) Allows user to turn the forward collision warning on or off.

Parking Aids (if so equipped) Displays available parking aids

Moving Object Allows user to turn the Moving Object Detection (MOD) feature on or off For additional information, refer to “Around View®

Monitor” in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section of this manual.

Cross Traffic Allows user to turn the Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) feature on or off

Front Sensor Allows user to turn the front sensor on or off

Rear Sensor Allows user to turn the rear sensor on or off

Display Allows user to turn the display on or off

Volume Allows user to select sensor volume (High, Mid. or Low)

Range Allows user to select the sensor range (Far, Mid. or Near)

Chassis Control Displays available chassis controls options

Trace Control Allows user to turn the trace control feature on or off. For additional information, refer to “Active trace control” in the “Starting and

driving” section of this manual.

Engine Brake Allows user to turn the engine brake feature on or off. For additional information, refer to “Active engine brake” in the “Starting

and driving” section of this manual.

Instruments and controls 2-21

Clock

Menu item Result

Clock When selected, the following message appears:

Models with Navigation: “Set clock in NAVI”. For additional information, refer to the separate Navigation System Own-

er’s Manual.

Models without Navigation: “Set clock in Audio”. For additional information, refer to “Audio system” in the “Monitor,

climate, audio, phone and voice recognition system” in this manual.

Meter Settings

The meter settings allow the user to change the

settings for the vehicle information display

Menu item Result

Main Menu Selection Displays the available options

Home Allows user to turn the home screen on or off in the vehicle information display

Range Allows user to turn the range display on or off in the vehicle information display

Average Speed Allows user to turn the average speed screen on or off in the vehicle information display

Trip Allows user to turn the trip display on or off in the vehicle information display

Fuel Economy Allows user to turn the fuel economy display on or off in the vehicle information display

Navigation (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the navigation display on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refertothe

separate “Navigation Owner’s Manual”.

Audio Allows user to turn the audio screen on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Audio

system” in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section of this manual,

Driving Aids (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the driving aids display on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to

“Driver Assistance” in this section.

Tire Pressures Allows user to turn the tire pressure display on or off in the vehicle information display

Chassis Control Allows user to turn the chassis control display on or off in the vehicle information display

Body Color Allows user to select the color of the vehicle displayed in the vehicle information display

2-22 Instruments and controls

Menu item Result

ECO Mode Settings Displays the available options for ECO mode settings

ECO Indicator Allows the user to turn the ECO indicator on or off in the vehicle information display

DISP Mode Allows user to select how the ECO mode in displayed

Pedal Select to have the ECO mode shown as a pedal display

Inst.FE Select to have the ECO mode shown as instant fuel economy

ECO Drive Report Displays the available options for the ECO drive report

Display Allows user to turn the ECO drive report on or off

View History Allows user to view and reset ECO drive report history

Welcome Effect Displays the available options for the welcome effect

Dial Effect Allows user to turn the dial effect on or off

Display Effect Allows user to turn the display effect on or off

Instruments and controls 2-23

Vehicle Settings

The vehicle settings allow the user to change the

settings for lights, wipers, locking, keys, and

other vehicle settings.

Menu item Result

Lighting Displays the available lighting options

Welcome Light Allows user to turn the welcome light on or off

Auto Room Lamp Allows user to turn the auto room lamp on or off

Light Sensitivity Allows user to change when the lights illuminate based on the brightness outside the vehicle

Light Off Delay Allows user to change the duration of time that the automatic headlights stay on after the vehicle is shut off

Turn indicator Displays the available turn indicator options

3 Flash Pass Allows user to turn the 3 flash pass feature on or off

Locking Displays the available locking options

I-Key Door Lock Allows user to turn I-Key door lock on or off. When turned on, the request switch on the door is activated

Selective Unlock Allows user to turn selective unlock on or off. When turned on, only the driver’s door is unlocked after the door unlock

operation. When the door handle request switch on the driver’s or front passenger’s side door is pushed to be unlocked,

only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock operation is performed again

within 1 minute. When this item is turned off, all the doors will be unlocked after the door unlock operation is performed

once.

Warning Allows the user to turn the warning feature on or off

Answer Bk. Horn Allows user to turn answer back horn on or off. When turned on, the horn will chirp and the hazard indicators will flash once

when locking the vehicle with the Intelligent Key.

Wipers Displays the available wiper options

Speed Dependent Allows user to turn wiper with speed on or off

Reverse Link (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the reverse link feature on or off

Drip Wipe Allows user to turn the drip wipe feature on or off

Remote Start (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the remote start on or off. When turned on, the engine can be restarted remotely. For additional

information, refer to “Remote engine start” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this manual.

2-24 Instruments and controls

Menu item Result

Battery Saver Allows user to turn the battery saver on or off. When turned on, the battery saver automatically turns off the ignition after a

period of time when the ignition switch is left in the ON position.

Driving Position (if so equipped) Displays the available driving position options

Exit Seat Slide Allows the user to turn the exit seat slide on or off. When turned on, this feature will move the driver’s seat backward for an

easy exit when the ignition is turned off and the driver’s door is opened. After getting into the vehicle and placing the igni-

tion switch in the ON position, the driver’s seat will move to the previous set position. For additional information, refer to

“Automatic drive positioner” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this manual.

Exit Steering Up Allows the user to turn the exit steering up feature on or off. When turned on, this feature will move the steering wheel up-

ward for an easy exit when the ignition is turned off and the driver’s door is opened. After getting into the vehicle and plac-

ing the ignition switch in the ON position, the steering wheel moves to the previous position. For additional information, re-

fer to “Automatic drive positioner” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this manual.

Instruments and controls 2-25

Maintenance

The maintenance menu allows the user to set

reminders for various vehicle maintenance items.

WARNING

The tire replacement indicator is not a

substitute for regular tire checks, includ-

ing tire pressure checks. For additional

information, refer to “Changing wheels

and tires”in the “Do-it-yourself” section of

this manual. Many factors including tire

inflation, alignment, driving habits and

road conditions affect tire wear and when

tires should be replaced. Setting the tire

replacement indicator for a certain driving

distance does not mean your tires will last

that long. Use the tire replacement indica-

tor as a guide only and always perform

regular tire checks. Failure to perform

regular tire checks, including tire pressure

checks could result in tire failure. Serious

vehicle damage could occur and may lead

to a collision, which could result in serious

personal injury or death.

Menu item Result

Maintenance Displays various maintenance reminder options

Oil and Filter Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one

Tire Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one

Other Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one

2-26 Instruments and controls

Alarm

The alarm menu allows the user to set specific

alarms for various items on the vehicle.

Menu item Result

Outside Temp. Allows user to turn the outside temp. alarm on or off

Timer Alert Allows user to set the timer alert alarm

Navigation (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the navigation alarm on or off

Phone Allows user to turn the phone alarm on or off

Mail Allows user to turn the mail alarm on or off

Tire Pressures

The tire pressure menu allows the user to change

the units for the tire pressure display.

Menu item Result

Tire Pressure Unit Displays available units for tire pressure display

Unit

The unit menu allows the user to customize the

information that appears in the vehicle informa-

tion display.

Menu item Result

Mileage Displays available mileage options shown in the vehicle information display

Tire Pressures Displays available tire pressures options shown in the vehicle information display

Temperature Displays available temperature options shown in the vehicle information display

Instruments and controls 2-27

Language

The language menu allows the user to change the

languages displayed in the vehicle information

display.

Menu item Result

Language Displays available language options for the vehicle information display

Factory Reset

The factory reset menu allows the user to restore

the vehicle information display settings to factory

status.

Menu item Result

Factory Reset Allows user to reset the vehicle information display settings to the original factory settings. Once selected, the user can

confirm or deny the reset.

2-28 Instruments and controls

LIC3665

Instruments and controls 2-29

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

WARNINGS AND INDICATORS

1. Engine start operation

2. No Key Detected (if so equipped)

3. Shift to Park

4. Key Battery Low (if so equipped)

5. Engine start operation for Intelligent Key sys-

tem (if I-Key battery level is low) (if so

equipped)

6. Key ID Incorrect (if so equipped)

7. Release Parking Brake

8. Low Fuel

9. Low Washer Fluid (if so equipped)

10. Door/liftgate Open

11. I-Key System Error: See Owner’s Manual (if

so equipped)

12. Loose Fuel Cap

13. Tire Pressure Low — Add Air

14. Flat Tire — Visit Dealer (if so equipped)

15. Low Oil Pressure Stop Vehicle

16. AWD Error: See Owner’s Manual (if so

equipped)

17. AWD High Temp. Stop vehicle (if so

equipped)

18. Tire Size Incorrect: See Owner’s Manual (if

so equipped)

19. Battery Voltage Low Charge Battery

20. Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse

21. Power will turn off to save the battery

22. Power turned off to save the battery

23. Reminder: Turn OFF headlights

24. Timer Alert — Time for a driver break?

25. Low Outside Temperature

26. Chassis Control System Error: See Owner’s

Manual

27. Cruise control indicator (if so equipped)

28. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) indicators (if

so equipped)

29. Transmission Shift Position Indicator

30. CVT Error: See Owner’s Manual

31. Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual

32. ECO mode

Engine start operation

This indicator appears when the shift lever is in

the P (Park) position.

This indicator means that the engine will start by

pushing the ignition switch with the brake pedal

depressed. You can start the engine from any

position of the ignition switch.

No Key Detected (if so equipped)

This warning appears when the Intelligent Key is

left outside the vehicle with the ignition switch in

the ON position. Make sure the Intelligent Key is

inside the vehicle.

For additional information about the Intelligent

Key, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key®” in the

“Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of

this manual.

Shift to Park

This warning illuminates when the ignition switch

is in the OFF position and the shift lever is not in

the P (Park) position. Also, a chime sounds when

the ignition switch is in the OFF position.

If this warning illuminates, move the shift lever to

the P (Park) position and start the engine.

Key Battery Low (if so equipped)

This indicator illuminates when the Intelligent Key

battery is running out of power.

2-30 Instruments and controls

If this indicator illuminates, replace the battery

with a new one. For additional information, refer

to “Battery replacement” in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual.

Engine start operation for Intelligent Key

system (if I-Key battery is low) (if so

equipped)

This indicator appears when the battery of the

Intelligent Key is low and when the Intelligent Key

system and the vehicle are not communicating

normally.

If this appears, touch the ignition switch with the

Intelligent Key while depressing the brake pedal.

For additional information, refer to “NISSAN In-

telligent Key® battery discharge” in the “Starting

and driving” section of this manual.

Key ID Incorrect (if so equipped)

This warning appears when the ignition switch is

placed from the OFF position and the Intelligent

Key is not recognized by the system. You cannot

start the engine with an unregistered key.

For additional information, refer to “NISSAN In-

telligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks and

adjustments” section of this manual.

Release Parking Brake

This warning illuminates in the message area of

the vehicle information display when the parking

brake is set and the vehicle is driven.

Low Fuel

This warning illuminates when the fuel level in the

fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is

convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge

reaches 0 (Empty). There will be a small re-

serve of fuel in the tank when the fuel

gauge needle reaches 0 (Empty).

Low Washer Fluid (if so equipped)

This warning illuminates when the windshield-

washer fluid is at a low level. Add windshield-

washer fluid as necessary. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Windshield-washer fluid” in the

“Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

Door/liftgate Open

This warning illuminates when a door has been

opened when the engine is running.

Key System Error: See Owner’s Manual (if

so equipped)

After the ignition switch is pushed to the ON

position, this light comes on for about 2 seconds

and then turns off.

The Key System Error message warns of a mal-

function with the Intelligent Key system. If the light

comes on while the engine is stopped, it may be

impossible to start the engine.

If the light comes on while the engine is running,

you can drive the vehicle. However in these

cases, contact a NISSAN dealer for repair as

soon as possible.

Loose Fuel Cap

This warning appears when the fuel-filler cap is

not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been

refueled. For additional information, refer to

“Fuel-filler cap” in the “Pre-driving checks and

adjustments” section of this manual.

Tire Pressure Low - Add Air

This warning appears when the low tire pressure

warning light in the meter illuminates and low tire

pressure is detected. The warning appears each

time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position

as long as the low tire pressure warning light re-

mains illuminated. If this warning appears, stop the

vehicle and adjust the tire pressures of all four tires

to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown

on the Tire and Loading Information label. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Low tire pressure

warning light” in this section and “Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and

driving” section of this manual.

Instruments and controls 2-31

Flat Tire – Visit Dealer (if so equipped)

This warning appears when the low tire pressure

warning light in the meter illuminates and one or

more flat tires are detected while driving. A chime

also sounds for approximately 10 seconds.

Low Oil Pressure Stop Vehicle

This warning appears in the message area of the

vehicle information display if low oil pressure is

detected. This gauge is not designed to indicate

low oil level. The low oil pressure warning is

not designed to indicate a low oil level. Use

the dipstick to check the oil level. For additional

information, refer to “Engine oil” in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

AWD Error: See Owner’s Manual (if so

equipped)

This warning appears when the all-wheel drive

system is not functioning properly while the en-

gine is running.

AWD High Temp. Stop vehicle (if so

equipped)

This warning may appear while trying to free a

stuck vehicle due to increased oil temperature.

The driving mode may change to 2-Wheel Drive

(2WD). If this warning is displayed, stop the

vehicle with the engine idling, as soon as it is safe

to do so. Then if the warning turns off, you can

continue driving.

Tire Size Incorrect: See Owner’s Manual

(if so equipped)

This warning may appear if there is a large differ-

ence between the diameters of the front and rear

wheels. Pull off the road in a safe area, with the

engine idling. Check that all the tire sizes are the

same, that the tire pressure is correct and that the

tires are not excessively worn.

Battery Voltage Low Charge Battery

This warning appears when the battery is low and

needs to be charged.

Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse

This warning may appear if the extended storage

switch is not pushed in. When this warning ap-

pears, push in the extended storage switch to

turn off the warning. For additional information,

refer to “Extended storage switch” in this section.

Power will turn off to save the battery

This warning appears in the message area of the

vehicle information display after a period of time if

the shift lever has not moved from the P (Park)

position.

Power turned off to save the battery

This warning appears after the ignition switch is

automatically turned off to save the battery.

Reminder: Turn OFF headlights

This warning appears when the headlights are

left in the ON position when exiting the vehicle.

Place the headlight switch in the OFF or AUTO

position. For additional information, refer to

“Headlight and turn signal switch” in this section.

Timer Alert – Time for a driver break?

This indicator appears when the set time is

reached. The time can be set up to six hours. For

additional information on setting the timer, refer

to “Alarm” in this section.

Low Outside Temperature

This warning appears if the outside temperature

is below 37°F (3°C). The temperature can be

changed to display in Celsius or Fahrenheit. For

additional information, refer to “Unit” in this sec-

tion.

2-32 Instruments and controls

Chassis Control System Error: See Own-

er’s Manual

This warning appears if the Integrated Dynamics-

control Module detects an error in the Active

Trace Control, Active Engine Brake, or the Active

Ride Control systems. Have the system checked.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service. For additional information, refer to

“Chassis control” in the “Starting and driving”

section of this manual.

Cruise control indicator (if so equipped)

This indicator shows the cruise control system

status.

For additional information, refer to “Cruise con-

trol” in the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) indicators

(if so equipped)

These indicators show the Intelligent Cruise

Control (ICC) system status. The status is shown

by color. For additional information, refer to “In-

telligent Cruise Control (ICC)” in the “Starting

and driving” section of this manual.

Transmission Shift Position Indicator

This indicator shows the transmission shift posi-

tion.

CVT Error: See Owner’s Manual

This warning illuminates when there is a problem

with the CVT system. If this warning comes on,

have the system checked. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual

This warning appears when the Forward Emer-

gency Braking (FEB) system is not functioning

properly.

ECO mode indicator

This indicator shows when the ECO mode is

engaged.

For additional information, refer to “ECO mode

switch”in the “Starting and driving”section of this

manual.

Your vehicle may have two types of security sys-

tems:

●Vehicle security system

●NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM

The vehicle security system provides visual and

audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors

or liftgate when the system is armed. It is not,

however, a motion detection type system that

activates when a vehicle is moved or when a

vibration occurs.

LIC2385

SECURITY SYSTEMS

Instruments and controls 2-33

The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot

prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or

exterior vehicle components in all situations. Al-

ways secure your vehicle even if parking for a

brief period. Never leave your keys in the vehicle,

and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Be

aware of your surroundings, and park in secure,

well-lit areas whenever possible.

Many devices offering additional protection, such

as component locks, identification markers, and

tracking systems, are available at auto supply

stores and specialty shops. A NISSAN dealer

may also offer such equipment. Check with your

insurance company to see if you may be eligible

for discounts for various theft protection features.

How to arm the vehicle security

system

1. Close all windows. (The system can be

armed even if the windows are open.)

2. Remove the keys from the vehicle.

3. Close all doors and liftgate. Lock all doors.

The doors can be locked with the key fob (if

so equipped), Intelligent Key (if so

equipped), door handle request switch, or

mechanical key.

4. Confirm that the security indicator

light stays on for about 30 seconds. The

vehicle security system is now pre-armed.

The vehicle security system will automati-

cally shift into the armed phase. The

security light begins to flash once every

three seconds. If during the pre-armed

phase one of the following occurs, the sys-

tem will not arm:

●Any door is unlocked with the key fob (if so

equipped), the Intelligent Key (if so

equipped), mechanical key, or door request

switch.

●Ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

●Even when the driver and/or passen-

gers are in the vehicle, the system will

activate with all the doors, hood and

liftgate locked with the ignition switch

placed in the LOCK position. When

placing the ignition switch in the ON

position, the system will be released.

Vehicle security system activation

The vehicle security system will give the following

alarm:

●The headlights blink and the horn sounds

intermittently but synchronously.

●The alarm automatically turns off after a pe-

riod of time. However, the alarm reactivates if

the vehicle is tampered with again.

The alarm is activated by:

●opening any door or the liftgate without us-

ing the key or Intelligent Key (even if the door

is unlocked by releasing the door inside lock

knob).

How to stop an activated alarm

The alarm stops only by unlocking a door or the

liftgate with the mechanical key the key fob (if so

equipped), pressing the button on the In-

telligent Key (if so equipped), or pushing the

request switch on the driver’s or passenger’s

door with the Intelligent Key (if so equipped) in

range of the door handle.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not

allow the engine to start without the use of a

registered key.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

2-34 Instruments and controls

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device may

not cause harmful interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference re-

ceived, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to op-

erate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada

license-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-

tion is subject to the following two condi-

tions: (1) this device may not cause inter-

ference, and (2) this device must accept any

interference received, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired operation

of the device.

Security indicator light

The security indicator light blinks whenever the

ignition switch is placed in the OFF or LOCK

position.

This function indicates the NISSAN Vehicle Im-

mobilizer System is operational.

If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal-

functioning, the light will remain on while the

ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

If the light still remains on and/or the en-

gine will not start, seek service for the

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser-

vice as soon as possible. Please bring all

registered keys that you have. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

LIC0474

Instruments and controls 2-35

SWITCH OPERATION

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solu-

tion may freeze on the windshield and

obscure your vision which may lead to an

accident. Warm the windshield with the

defroster before you wash the windshield.

CAUTION

●Do not operate the washer continuously

for more than 30 seconds.

●Do not operate the washer if the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir is

empty.

●Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid

reservoir with windshield-washer fluid

concentrates at full strength. Some

methyl alcohol based windshield-

washer fluid concentrates may perma-

nently stain the grille if spilled while

filling the windshield-washer fluid

reservoir.

●Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con-

centrates with water to the manufactur-

er’s recommended levels before pour-

ing the fluid into the windshield-washer

fluid reservoir. Do not use the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir to

mix the windshield-washer fluid con-

centrate and water.

NOTE:

If the windshield wiper operation is inter-

rupted by snow or ice, the wiper may stop

moving to protect its motor. If this occurs,

turn the wiper switch to the OFF position

and remove the snow or ice that is on and

around the wiper arms. In approximately

1 minute, turn the switch on again to oper-

ate the wiper.

The windshield wiper and washer operates when

the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the

following speed:

䊊

1Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation

can be adjusted by turning the knob toward

䊊

A(Slower) or 䊊

B(Faster). Also, the inter-

mittent operation speed varies in accor-

dance with the vehicle speed. (For example,

when the vehicle speed is high, the intermit-

tent operation speed will be faster.)

䊊

2Low (LO) — continuous low speed operation

䊊

3High (HI) — continuous high speed opera-

tion

LIC2661

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

2-36 Instruments and controls

Lift the lever up 䊊

4to have one sweep operation

(MIST) of the wiper.

Pull the lever toward you 䊊

5to operate the

washer. The wiper will also operate several times.

After a short delay the drip wipe function will

operate the wiper once more to clear remaining

windshield-washer fluid from the windshield.

NOTE:

The Speed Dependent feature and Drip

Wipe feature may be disabled. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Vehicle infor-

mation display” in this section.

REAR SWITCH OPERATION

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solu-

tion may freeze on the window and ob-

scure your vision. Warm the rear window

with the defroster before you wash the

rear window.

CAUTION

●Do not operate the washer continuously

for more than 30 seconds.

●Do not operate the washer if the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir is

empty.

●Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid

reservoir with windshield-washer fluid

concentrates at full strength. Some

methyl alcohol based windshield-

washer fluid concentrates may perma-

nently stain the grille if spilled while

filling the windshield-washer fluid

reservoir.

●Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con-

centrates with water to the manufactur-

er’s recommended levels before pour-

ing the fluid into the windshield-washer

fluid reservoir. Do not use the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir to

mix the windshield-washer fluid con-

centrate and water.

LIC2662

Instruments and controls 2-37

NOTE:

If the rear window wiper operation is inter-

rupted by snow, etc., the wiper may stop

moving to protect its motor. If this occurs,

turn the wiper switch to OFF and remove

the snow, etc. on and around the wiper

arms. After about 1 minute, turn the switch

ON again to operate the wiper.

The rear window wiper and washer operate when

the ignition switch is in the ON position. Turn the

switch clockwise from the OFF position to oper-

ate the wiper.

䊊

1Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation

(not adjustable)

䊊

2Low (ON) — continuous low speed opera-

tion

Push the switch forward 䊊

3to operate the

washer. The wiper will also operate several times.

NOTE:

The Reverse Link feature may be disabled.

For additional information, refer to “Ve-

hicle information display” in this section.

To defrost the rear window glass and outside

mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine and

push the rear window defroster switch on. The

rear window defroster indicator light on the

switch comes on. Push the switch again to turn

the defroster off.

The rear window defroster automatically turns off

after approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rear

window, be careful not to scratch or dam-

age the rear window defroster.

NOTE:

The top and bottom few rows of wires on

the rear window are not part of the rear

window defroster system. These wires

make up the antenna for the audio system.

LIC2614

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE

MIRROR (if so equipped)

DEFROSTER SWITCH

2-38 Instruments and controls

HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

Lighting

䊊

1Rotate the switch to the position, and

the front parking, tail, license plate, and in-

strument panel lights will come on.

䊊

2Rotate the switch to the position, and

the headlights will come on and all the other

lights remain on.

CAUTION

Use the headlights with the engine run-

ning to avoid discharging the vehicle

battery.

Autolight system (if so equipped)

The autolight system allows the headlights to turn

on and off automatically. The autolight system

can:

●Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail,

license plate and instrument panel lights au-

tomatically when it is dark.

●Turn off all the lights when it is light.

●Keep all the lights on for a period of time after

you place the ignition switch in the OFF

position and all doors are closed.

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC2634

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC2635 LIC2636

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL

SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-39

NOTE:

Autolight activation sensitivity and the time

delay for autolight shutoff can be adjusted.

For additional information, refer to “Ve-

hicle information display” in this section.

To turn on the autolight system:

1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi-

tion 䊊

2. Turn the ignition switch to ON.

3. The autolight system automatically turns the

headlights on and off.

Initially, if the ignition switch is turned OFF and a

door is opened and left open, the headlights

remain ON for a period of time. If another door is

opened while the headlights are on, then the

timer is reset.

To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to

the OFF, ,or position.

Be sure you do not put anything on top of

the autolight sensor located in the top side

䊊

1of the instrument panel. The autolight

sensor controls the autolight; if it is cov-

ered, the autolight sensor reacts as if it is

dark out and the headlights will illuminate.

If this occurs while parked with the engine

off and the ignition switch placed in the ON

position, your vehicle’s battery could be-

come discharged.

Headlight beam select

䊊

1To select the high beam function, push the

lever forward. The high beam lights come on

and the light illuminates.

䊊

2Pull the lever back to select the low beam.

䊊

3Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the

headlight high beams on and off.

LIC3051 LIC2637

2-40 Instruments and controls

Battery saver system

The battery saver system automatically turns off

the ignition after a period of time when the igni-

tion switch is left in the ON position.

The battery saver system automatically turns off

the following lights after a period of time when the

ignition switch is placed in the OFF position and

the doors are closed:

●Headlights, when the headlight switch is in

the or position

●Interior lights, when left in the ON position

CAUTION

Even though the battery saver feature au-

tomatically turns off the headlights after a

period of time, you should turn the head-

light switch to the OFF position when the

engine is not running to avoid discharging

the vehicle battery.

Automatic headlight aiming control (if

so equipped)

Vehicles with LED headlights may be equipped

with an automatic levelling system. The headlight

axis is controlled automatically.

NISSAN recommends that you should consult

the local regulations on the use of lights.

Manual headlight aiming control (if so

equipped)

Depending on the number of occupants in the

vehicle and the load it is carrying, the headlight

axis may be higher than desired. If the vehicle is

traveling on a hilly road, the headlights may di-

rectly hit the rearview mirror of the vehicle ahead

or the windshield of the oncoming vehicle. The

light axis can be lowered with the operation of the

switch.

The larger the number designated on the switch,

the lower the axis.

When traveling without a heavy load or on a flat

road, select position 0.

Select the switch position by referring to the

following sample.

Vehicle Load Switch

Position

Driver only or Driver/front pas-

senger 0

Driver/front seat passenger/rear

seat passengers 1

Driver/front seat passenger/rear

seat passengers/cargo or driver/

cargo/no trailer

Fully loaded/no trailer 3

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM

The daytime running lights automatically illumi-

nate when the engine is started with the parking

brake released. The daytime running lights oper-

ate with the headlight switch in the OFF position

or in the position. Turn the headlight switch

to the position for full illumination when

driving at night.

If the parking brake is applied before the engine is

started, the daytime running lights do not illumi-

nate. The daytime running lights illuminate when

the parking brake is released. The daytime run-

ning lights will remain on until the ignition switch

is placed in the OFF position.

LIC0662

Instruments and controls 2-41

WARNING

When the daytime running light system is

active, tail lights on your vehicle are not

on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your

headlights. Failure to do so could cause

an accident injuring yourself and others.

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS

CONTROL

Press the “-” button 䊊

Ato decrease the bright-

ness of instrument panel lights.

Press the “+” button 䊊

Bto increase the bright-

ness of instrument panel lights.

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Turn signal

䊊

1Move the lever up or down to signal the

turning direction. When the turn is com-

pleted, the turn signal cancels automatically.

LIC2624 LIC2638

2-42 Instruments and controls

Lane change signal

䊊

2Move the lever up or down until the turn

signal begins to flash, but the lever does not

latch, to signal a lane change. Hold the lever

until the lane change is completed.

Move the lever up or down until the turn

signal begins to flash, but the lever does not

latch, and release the lever. The turn signal

will automatically flash three times.

Choose the appropriate method to signal a lane

change based on road and traffic conditions.

For additional information on disabling the 3 flash

pass turn indicator, refer to “Vehicle information

display” in this section. FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch

to the position, then turn the fog light

switch to the position.

To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switch

in the AUTO position, the headlights must be on,

then turn the fog light switch to the posi-

tion.

To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switch

to the OFF position.

The headlights must be on and the low beams

selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog

lights automatically turn off when the high beam

headlights are selected.

To sound the horn, push near the horn icon on the

steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so

could affect proper operation of the

supplemental front air bag system. Tam-

pering with the supplemental front air bag

system may result in serious personal

injury.

LIC2639 LIC3568

HORN

Instruments and controls 2-43

WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to use the

seat heater if you or the occupants cannot

monitor elevated seat temperatures or

have an inability to feel pain in body parts

that contact the seat. Use of the seat

heater by such people could result in seri-

ous injury.

CAUTION

●The battery could run down if the seat

heater is operated while the engine is

not running.

●Do not use the seat heater for extended

periods or when no one is using the

seat.

●Do not put anything on the seat which

insulates heat, such as a blanket, cush-

ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat

may become overheated.

●Do not place anything hard or heavy on

the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar

object. This may result in damage to the

heater.

●Any liquid spilled on the heated seat

should be removed immediately with a

dry cloth.

●When cleaning the seat, never use

gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi-

lar materials.

●If any malfunctions are found or the

heated seat does not operate, turn the

switch off and have the system checked.

It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters.

1. Start the engine.

2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch, as

desired. The indicator light in the switch will

illuminate.

The heater is controlled by a thermostat,

automatically turning the heater on and off.

The indicator light will remain on as long as

the switch is on.

3. When the seat is warmed or before you

leave the vehicle, be sure to push the switch

to turn it off.

LIC3475

HEATED SEAT SWITCHES (if so

equipped)

2-44 Instruments and controls

The heated steering wheel system is designed to

operate only when the surface temperature of the

steering wheel is below 68°F (20°C).

Push the heated steering wheel switch to warm

the steering wheel after the engine starts. The

indicator light will come on.

If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is

below 68°F (20°C), the system will heat the

steering wheel and cycle off and on to maintain a

temperature above 68°F (20°C). The indicator

light will remain on as long as the system is on.

Push the switch again to turn the heated steering

wheel system off manually. The indicator light will

go off.

NOTE:

If the surface temperature of the steering

wheel is above 68°F (20°C) when the switch

is turned on, the system will not heat the

steering wheel. This is not a malfunction.

The vehicle should be driven with the VDC sys-

tem on for most driving conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC

system reduces the engine output to reduce

wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced

even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If

maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck

vehicle, turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF

switch. The indicator will come on.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the

engine to turn on the system. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

system” in the “Starting and driving” section of

this manual.

LIC3476 LIC3344

HEATED STEERING WHEEL SWITCH

(if so equipped)

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

OFF SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-45

The all-wheel drive (AWD) lock switch is located

on the instrument panel. The AWD LOCK indica-

tor light will illuminate when the switch is turned

on. For additional information, refer to “Warning

lights, indicator lights and audible reminders” in

this section and “AWD Lock Switch Operations”

in the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

Each time you push the switch, the AWD mode

will switch: AUTO →LOCK →AUTO.

The E-call (SOS) system switch is used in com-

bination with a NissanConnect

Services sub-

scription to call for assistance in case of an

emergency.

Pushing the switch will (with a paid subscription)

reach a Response Specialist that will provide

assistance based on the situation described by

the vehicle’s occupant. For additional informa-

tion, or to enroll your vehicle, refer to

www.NissanUSA.com/connect,

www.Nissan.ca/NissanConnect, or

www.Nissan.ca/NissanConnect/fr or call

855–426–6628.

12V OUTLETS

The power outlets are for powering electrical

accessories such as cellular telephones. They

are rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A) maximum.

The front and center console power outlets are

powered only when the ignition switch is in the

ON position, or while the accessory power is

active.

LIC2645 LIC3357

Instrument Panel

LIC2615

ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) LOCK

SWITCH (if so equipped)

E-CALL (SOS) SWITCH (if so

equipped)

POWER OUTLETS

2-46 Instruments and controls

NOTE:

●When the ignition is in the OFF position, the

front and center console power outlets stop

delivering power one minute after the door is

opened and stays open.

●If the door remains closed after the ignition is

placed in the OFF position, the front and

center console power outlets continue to

deliver power until the accessory power

timer has elapsed.

●The cargo area power outlet(s) continues to

deliver power normally.

CAUTION

●The outlet and plug may be hot during

or immediately after use.

●Only certain power outlets are designed

for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do

not use any other power outlet for an

accessory lighter. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for addi-

tional information.

●Do not use with accessories that exceed

a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.

●Do not use double adapters or more

than one electrical accessory.

●Use power outlets with the engine run-

ning to avoid discharging the vehicle

battery.

●Avoid using power outlets when the air

conditioner, headlights or rear window

defroster is on.

●Before inserting or disconnecting a

plug, be sure the electrical accessory

being used is turned OFF.

Center Console

LIC2616

Cargo Area

LIC2617

Instruments and controls 2-47

●Push the plug in as far as it will go. If

good contact is not made, the plug may

overheat or the internal temperature

fuse may open.

●When not in use, be sure to close the

cap. Do not allow water or any other

liquid to contact the outlet.

LIC3359

OFF position

LIC3266

EXTENDED STORAGE SWITCH

2-48 Instruments and controls

The extended storage switch is used when ship-

ping the vehicle. It is located in the fuse panel on

the driver’s side of the instrument panel. If any

electrical equipment does not operate, ensure

the extended storage switch is pushed fully in

place, as shown.

To inspect the extended storage switch, ensure

the ignition switch and headlight switch are off,

remove the fuse box cover 䊊

Ausing a suitable

tool in combination with a cloth to avoid damag-

ing the trim.

SEATBACK POCKETS

There is a pocket located on the back of the driver

and passenger seats. These pockets can be

used to store maps.

WARNING

To ensure proper operation of the passen-

ger’s advanced air bag system, please ob-

serve the following items:

●Do not allow a passenger in the 2nd row

to push or pull on the seatback pocket.

●Do not place heavy loads heavier than

2.2 lbs. (1 kg) on the seatback, head

restraint/headrest or in the seatback

pocket.

ON position

LIC3268 LIC2618

STORAGE

Instruments and controls 2-49

GLOVE BOX

Open the glove box by pulling the handle.

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driving to

help prevent injury in an accident or a

sudden stop.

CONSOLE BOX

To open the console box, press in on the lever 䊊

and raise the lid 䊊

To close, push the lid down until the lock latches.

SUNGLASSES HOLDER

To open the sunglasses holder, push and release.

Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder.

WARNING

Keep the sunglasses holder closed while

driving to avoid obstructing the driver’s

view and to help prevent an accident.

LIC2890 WIC1504 LIC2312

2-50 Instruments and controls

CAUTION

●Do not use for anything other than

sunglasses.

●Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-

glasses holder while parking in direct

sunlight. The heat may damage the

sunglasses.

CUP HOLDERS CAUTION

Do not recline the rear seatback when you

use the cup holders on the rear armrest.

Doing so may cause the beverages to spill

over, and if they are hot, they may scald

the passengers.

Front console

LIC2619

2nd row

LIC2620

Instruments and controls 2-51

CAUTION

●Avoid abrupt starting and braking when

the cup holder is being used to prevent

spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it

can scald you or your passenger.

●Use only soft cups in the cup holder.

Hard objects can injure you in an

accident.

Bottle holder — front

LIC2622

Bottle holder — rear

LIC2623

2-52 Instruments and controls

CAUTION

●Do not use bottle holder for any other

objects that could be thrown about in

the vehicle and possibly injure people

during sudden braking or an accident.

●Do not use bottle holder for open liquid

containers.

CARGO AREA STORAGE BIN (if so

equipped)

WARNING

If your vehicle is equipped with 3rd row

seating, do not attempt to store/place a

spare tire in the cargo area storage area.

In a collision a spare tire could become

loose and strike a person resulting in se-

vere injury or death.

To access the floor storage area, pull up on the

handle to lift the luggage board.

DIVIDE-N-HIDE® ADJUSTABLE

FLOOR (if so equipped)

WARNING

Do not put objects heavier than 165 lbs

(75 kg) on the Divide-N-Hide® while in the

mid position. In the upper position, ob-

jects should not weigh more than 30 lbs

(14 kg).

There are multiple positions for the adjust-

able floor. The upper position allows for

additional storage below the adjustable

floor.

Bottle holder — 3rd row (if so equipped)

LIC2837 LIC2625 LIC2646

Instruments and controls 2-53

To move the adjustable floor from the

lower position to the upper position:

1. Use the handle to lift the adjustable floor.

2. Move the adjustable floor to the upper guide

track and ensure it is secure in place.

LUGGAGE HOOKS

When securing items using luggage hooks lo-

cated on the back of the seat or side finisher do

not apply a load over more than 6.5 lbs (29 N) to

a single hook.

The luggage hooks that are located on the floor

should have loads less than 110 lbs (490 N) to a

single hook.

The luggage hooks can be used to secure cargo

with ropes or other types of straps.

WARNING

●Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or

shifting. Do not place cargo higher than

the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-

lision, unsecured cargo could cause

personal injury.

●Use suitable ropes and hooks to secure

cargo.

●Never allow anyone to ride in the lug-

gage area. It is extremely dangerous to

ride in a cargo area inside of a vehicle.

In a collision, people riding in these

areas are more likely to be seriously

injured or killed.

●Do not allow people to ride in any area

of your vehicle that is not equipped with

seats and seat belts.

●The child restraint top tether strap may

be damaged by contact with items in

the cargo area. Secure any items in the

cargo area. Your child could be seri-

ously injured or killed in a collision if

the top tether strap is damaged.

●Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a

seat and using a seat belt properly.

LIC2647 LIC2629

2-54 Instruments and controls

CARGO COVER (if so equipped)

WARNING

●Never put anything on the cargo cover,

no matter how small. Any object on it

could cause an injury in an accident or

sudden stop.

●Do not put objects heavier than 44 lbs

(20 kg) on the cargo cover for long peri-

ods of time.

●Do not leave the cargo cover in the

vehicle with it disengaged from the

holder.

●Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or

shifting. Do not place cargo higher than

the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-

lision, unsecured cargo could cause

personal injury.

●Your child could be seriously injured or

killed in a collision if the child restraint

top tether strap is damaged.

– If the cargo cover contacts the top

tether strap when it is attached to the

top tether anchor, remove the cargo

cover from the vehicle or secure it on

the cargo floor below its attachment

location. If the cargo cover is not re-

moved, it may damage the top tether

strap during a collision.

– Do not allow cargo to contact the top

tether strap when it is attached to the

top tether anchor. Properly secure

the cargo so it does not contact the

top tether strap. Cargo that is not

properly secured or that contacts the

top tether strap may damage the top

tether strap during a collision.

The cargo cover keeps the luggage compartment

contents hidden from the outside.

Only attach the hook and loop fastener on the

cargo cover privacy cloth to the area on the rear

seatback where it is supposed to be attached.

Otherwise, the seat surface could be damaged.

WIC1003

Instruments and controls 2-55

To remove the cargo cover:

䊊

1Remove the straps from the rear hatch.

䊊

2Remove the edge of the cargo cover privacy

cloth from the rear seatback.

䊊

3Remove the cargo cover holders from the

rear pillar.

ROOF RACK (if so equipped)

Genuine NISSAN accessory cross bars are avail-

able through a NISSAN dealer. Contact a

NISSAN dealer for crossbar or other equipment

information.

Always distribute the luggage evenly on the cross

bars. Do not load more than 150 lb (68 kg) on the

cross bars. Observe the maximum load limit

shown on the cross bars or roof carriers when

you attach them on the roof cross bars. Contact a

NISSAN dealer for crossbar or other equipment

information.

Do not apply any load directly to the roof side

rails. Cross bars must be installed before apply-

ing load/cargo/luggage to the roof of the vehicle.

Be careful that your vehicle does not exceed the

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or its

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR front and

rear). The GVWR and GAWR are located on the

F.M.V.S.S. or C.V.M.S.S. certification label (lo-

cated on the driver’s door pillar). For additional

information regarding GVWR and GAWR, refer

to “Vehicle loading information” in the “Technical

and consumer information” section of this

manual.

WARNING

●Drive extra carefully when the vehicle is

loaded at or near the cargo carrying

capacity, especially if the significant

portion of that load is carried on the

cross bars.

●Heavy loading of the cross bars has the

potential to affect the vehicle stability

and handling during sudden or unusual

handling maneuvers.

●Roof rack cross bars should be evenly

distributed.

●Do not exceed maximum roof rack cross

bars load.

LIC2386

2-56 Instruments and controls

●Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or

shifting. In a sudden stop or collision,

unsecured cargo could cause personal

injury.

CAUTION

Always install the cross bars onto the roof

side rails before loading cargo of any kind.

Loading cargo directly onto the roof side

rails or the vehicle’s roof may cause ve-

hicle damage.

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING

●Make sure that all passengers have

their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while

it is in motion and before closing the

windows. Use the window lock switch to

prevent unexpected use of the power

windows.

●To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, including

entrapment in windows or inadvertent

door lock activation, do not leave chil-

dren, people who require the assistance

of others or pets unattended in your

vehicle. Additionally, the temperature

inside a closed vehicle on a warm day

can quickly become high enough to

cause a significant risk of injury or

death to people and pets.

The power windows operate when the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position, or for a

period of time after the ignition switch is placed in

the OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s

door is opened during this period of time, the

power to the windows is canceled.

Driver’s side power window switches

1. Window lock button

2. Power door lock switch

3. Front passenger side switch

4. Right rear passenger side switch

5. Left rear passenger side switch

6. Driver side automatic switch

LIC3208

WINDOWS

Instruments and controls 2-57

The driver’s side control panel is equipped with

switches to open or close all of the windows.

To open a window, push the switch to the first

detent and continue to hold down until the de-

sired window position is reached. To close a

window, pull the switch to the first detent and

continue to hold up until the desired window

position is reached.

Locking passengers’ windows

When the window lock switch is depressed, only

the driver’s side window can be opened or

closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock

function.

Front passenger’s power window

switch

The passenger’s window switch operates only

the corresponding passenger’s window. To open

the window partially, push the switch down 䊊

lightly until the desired window position is

reached. To close the window partially, pull the

switch up 䊊

2until the desired window position is

reached.

Rear power window switch

The rear power window switches open or close

only the corresponding windows. To open the

window, push the switch and hold it down 䊊

1.To

close the window, pull the switch up 䊊

LIC2309 LIC2663

2-58 Instruments and controls

Automatic operation

To fully open a window equipped with automatic

operation, press the window switch down to the

second detent and release it; it need not be held.

The window automatically opens all the way. To

stop the window, lift the switch up while the

window is opening.

To fully close a window equipped with automatic

operation, pull the switch up to the second detent

and release it; it need not be held. To stop the

window, press the switch down while the window

is closing.

Auto-reverse function

The auto-reverse function can be activated when

a window is closed by automatic operation.

Depending on the environment or driving

conditions, the auto-reverse function may

be activated if an impact or load similar to

something being caught in the window oc-

curs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-

ately before the closed position which

cannot be detected. Make sure that all

passengers have their hands, etc., inside

the vehicle before closing the window.

If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, replaced,

or jump started, the power window auto-reverse

function may not operate properly. If this occurs,

please contact the dealer to re-initialize the

power window auto-reverse system.

If the control unit detects something caught in a

window equipped with automatic operation, as it

is closing, the window will be immediately low-

ered.

The moonroof will only operate when the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position. The moon-

roof is operational for a period of time, even if the

ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. If the

driver’s door or the front passenger’s door is

opened during this period of time, the power to

the moonroof is canceled.

When operating the power moonroof or pan-

oramic sunshade, the switch need not be held

continuously. To stop the moonroof or sunshade

at any point while it is opening or closing, slide

the switch momentarily.

LIC0410 LIC3477

POWER MOONROOF (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-59

Sliding the moonroof

To fully open the moonroof, slide the switch to-

ward the open 䊊

1position to the second detent

and release it. If the switch is slid to the first

detent and released while the sunshade is closed

only the sunshade will open.

To fully close the moonroof, slide the switch to-

ward the close 䊊

2position to the second detent

and release it. If the switch is slid to the first

detent and released, the moonroof will close but

the sunshade will remain open.

Tilting the moonroof

To tilt the moonroof up, push and release the tilt

switch 䊊

3. If the moonroof is open, it will auto-

matically close and then tilt up.

To tilt the moonroof down but keep the sunshade

open, push and release the tilt switch 䊊

3or slide

the switch toward the close position 䊊

2to the

first detent.

To tilt the moonroof down and close the sun-

shade at the same time, slide the switch toward

the close position 䊊

2to the second detent.

Auto-reverse function (when closing or

tilting down the moonroof)

The auto-reverse function can be activated when

the moonroof is closed or tilted down by auto-

matic operation when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position or for a period of time

after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position.

Depending on the environment or driving

conditions, the auto-reverse function may

be activated if an impact or load similar to

something being caught in the moonroof

occurs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-

ately before the closed position which

cannot be detected. Make sure that all

passengers have their hands, etc., inside

the vehicle before closing the moonroof.

When closing

If the control unit detects something caught in the

moonroof as it moves to the front, the moonroof

will immediately open backward.

When tilting down

If the control unit detects something caught in the

moonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will im-

mediately tilt up.

If the auto-reverse function malfunctions and re-

peats opening or tilting up the moonroof, keep

pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds

after it happens; the moonroof will fully close

gradually. Make sure nothing is caught in the

moonroof.

WARNING

●In an accident you could be thrown from

the vehicle through an open moonroof.

Always use seat belts and child

restraints.

●Do not allow anyone to stand up or

extend any portion of their body out of

the moonroof opening while the vehicle

is in motion or while the moonroof is

closing.

CAUTION

●Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand

from the moonroof before opening.

●Do not place heavy objects on the

moonroof or surrounding area.

2-60 Instruments and controls

Panoramic sunshade

The panoramic sunshade operates when the ig-

nition switch is in the ON position. When opening

or closing the sunshade the switch need not be

held.

To open the sunshade:

●To fully open the sunshade, slide the switch

䊊

1toward the open position to the first

detent.

●To fully open the sunshade and the moon-

roof together, slide the switch 䊊

1toward the

open position to the second detent.

To close the sunshade:

●To fully close the sunshade, slide the switch

䊊

2toward the close position to the second

detent. If the moonroof is open, both the

moonroof and the sunshade will close auto-

matically.

●If the switch is slid 䊊

2toward the close

position to the first detent while the moon-

roof is open, only the moonroof with close,

the sunshade will remain open.

WARNING

●To avoid personal injury, keep your

hands, fingers and head away from the

sunshade arm, the arm rail and sun-

shade inlet port.

●Do not allow children near the rear sun-

shade system. They could be injured.

●Do not place objects on or near the rear

sunshade. This could cause improper

operation or damage it.

●Do not pull or push the rear sunshade.

This could cause improper operation or

damage it.

CAUTION

●Do not place objects (such as newspa-

pers, handkerchiefs, etc.) on the sun-

shade inlet port. Doing so may entangle

these objects in the sunshade when it is

extending or retracting, causing im-

proper operation or damage to the

sunshade.

●Do not push the sunshade arm with

your hands, etc., as this may deform it.

Improper operation or damage to the

sunshade may result.

●Do not put any object into the sunshade

inlet port as this may result in improper

operation or damage the sunshade.

●Do not hang any object on the arm rail

as this may result in improper operation

or damage the sunshade.

●Do not forcefully pull the sunshade. Do-

ing so may elongate the sunshade. Im-

proper operation or damage to the sun-

shade may result.

If the moonroof does not close

Have your moonroof checked and repaired. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

Instruments and controls 2-61

When the ON switch 䊊

1is pressed, the footwell

lights (if so equipped), step lights (if so

equipped), map lights and rear personal lights

will automatically turn on and stay on for a period

of time when:

●The doors are unlocked by the Intelligent

Key, a key or the request switch (if so

equipped) while all doors are closed and the

ignition switch is in the OFF position.

●When individually pushed.

When the OFF switch 䊊

2is pushed, the interior

lights do not illuminate even when pushed. When

the DOOR/OFF switch is pressed and the ON

switch is pressed, all of the lights will come on.

NOTE:

The footwell lights and step lights illumi-

nate when the driver and passenger doors

are open regardless of the interior light

switch position. These lights will turn off

automatically after a period of time while

doors are open to prevent the battery from

becoming discharged.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time

with the engine stopped. This could result

in a discharged battery.

CONSOLE LIGHT

The console light will turn on whenever the park-

ing lights or headlights are illuminated.

The console light brightness can be adjusted

with the illumination brightness control.

LIC2302 LIC2303

INTERIOR LIGHTS

2-62 Instruments and controls

MAP LIGHTS

Press the button to turn the map lights on. To turn

them off, press the button again.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time

with the engine stopped. This could result

in a discharged battery.

PERSONAL LIGHTS (if so equipped)

To turn the rear personal lights on, push the

switch. To turn them off, push the switch again.

ROOM LIGHT (if so equipped)

The room light on the overhead trim has a three-

position switch. To operate, push the switch to

the desired position.

䊊

1ON: The light is illuminated, regardless of

door position.

䊊

2DOOR: The light illuminates when a door or

the liftgate is opened. The light turns off

when the door or liftgate is closed.

䊊

3OFF: The light does not illuminate.

The lights will turn off automatically after a period

of time while doors are open to prevent the bat-

tery from becoming discharged.

LIC2304

Rear personal lights

LIC1083 SIC2063A

Instruments and controls 2-63

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time

with the engine stopped. This could result

in a discharged battery.

The light illuminates when the rear hatch is

opened. When the rear hatch is closed, the light

will turn off.

The light also illuminates with other interior lights

when the interior light switch is in the DOOR

position. For additional information, refer to “Inte-

rior lights” in this section.

The lights will turn off automatically after a period

of time while doors are open to prevent the bat-

tery from becoming discharged.

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHT

2-64 Instruments and controls

MEMO

Instruments and controls 2-65

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys.............................................3-2

Remote keyless entry (if so equipped) ............3-2

NISSAN Intelligent Key® (if so equipped) .........3-3

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys .........3-4

Doors ............................................3-5

Locking with key................................3-5

Locking with inside lock knob ....................3-6

Locking with power door lock switch . . . ..........3-6

Automatic door locks ...........................3-7

Child safety rear door lock.......................3-7

Remote keyless entry system (if so equipped).........3-7

How to use remote keyless entry system ..........3-8

NISSAN Intelligent Key® (if so equipped) ...........3-11

Operating range...............................3-12

Door locks/unlocks precaution ..................3-13

NISSAN Intelligent Key® Operation .............3-14

How to use the remote keyless entry

function ......................................3-17

Warning signals ...............................3-20

Troubleshooting guide .........................3-21

Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) ...............3-23

Remote engine start operating range . . . .........3-23

Remote starting the vehicle .....................3-24

Extending engine run time ......................3-24

Canceling a remote start .......................3-24

Conditions the remote start will not work .........3-25

Hood ...........................................3-26

Liftgate..........................................3-27

Operating the manual liftgate

(if so equipped) ...............................3-27

Operating the power liftgate (if so equipped) .....3-28

Motion-Activated Liftgate (if so equipped) ........3-31

Power liftgate main switch ......................3-33

Liftgate release................................3-33

Liftgate position setting ........................3-34

Fuel-filler door ...................................3-34

Opener operation..............................3-34

Fuel-filler cap .................................3-35

Steering wheel ...................................3-37

Manual operation ..............................3-37

Sun visors .......................................3-37

Vanity mirrors .................................3-38

Card holder (driver’s side only)..................3-38

Mirrors ..........................................3-39

Manual anti-glare rearview mirror

(if so equipped) ...............................3-39

Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror

(if so equipped) ...............................3-39

Outside mirrors ...............................3-40

Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) ..........3-41

Memory storage function .......................3-41

Entry/exit function .............................3-42

System operation..............................3-43

1. Jackknife type key

2. Integrated door lock key fob with tran-

sponder chip

3. Key number plate

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (if so

equipped)

CAUTION

Do not leave the ignition key inside the

vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

A key number plate is supplied with your keys.

Record the key number and keep it in a safe place

(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose

your keys, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the key

number. NISSAN does not record key numbers

so it is very important to keep track of your key

number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you have

lost all your keys. If you still have a key, it can be

duplicated without knowing the key number.

Storing remote keyless entry

To lock or unlock the vehicle using the key press

the release button 䊊

1to unfold the key from the

fob.

When storing the key press the release button 䊊

and push key 䊊

2to fold the key back into fob slot

䊊

Never leave keys in vehicle.

LPD2197 LPD2192

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

1. Intelligent Key (two sets)

2. Mechanical key

3. Key number plate (one plate)

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® (if so

equipped)

Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent

Keys which are registered to your vehicle’s Intel-

ligent Key System components and NISSAN Ve-

hicle Immobilizer System components.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

As many as four Intelligent Keys can be regis-

tered and used with one vehicle. The new keys

must be registered prior to use with the Intelligent

Key System and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer

System of your vehicle. Since the registration

process requires erasing all memory in the Intel-

ligent Key components when registering new

keys, be sure to take all Intelligent Keys that you

have to the NISSAN dealer.

A key number plate is supplied with your keys.

Record the key number and keep it in a safe place

(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose

your keys, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the key

number. NISSAN does not record key numbers

so it is very important to keep track of your key

number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you have

lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate

from. If you still have a key, it can be duplicated

without knowing the key number.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-

rences which will damage the Intelligent

Key:

●Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which

contains electrical components, to

come into contact with water or salt

water. This could affect the system

function.

●Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

Type A (if so equipped)

LPD2279

Type B (if so equipped)

LPD2052

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

●Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply

against another object.

●Do not change or modify the Intelligent

Key.

●Wetting may damage the Intelligent

Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-

mediately wipe until it is completely dry.

●Do not place the Intelligent Key for an

extended period in an area where tem-

peratures exceed 60°C (140°F).

●Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a

key holder that contains a magnet.

●Do not place the Intelligent Key near

equipment that produces a magnetic

field, such as a TV, audio equipment and

personal computers.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN

recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli-

gent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the

unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate

the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing

procedure, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer.

Mechanical key

The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key.

To remove the mechanical key, release the lock

knob on the back of the Intelligent Key.

To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into

the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to

the lock position.

Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the

driver’s door.

CAUTION

Always carry the mechanical key installed

in the Intelligent Key slot.

For additional information, refer to “Doors” in this

section.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM KEYS

You can only drive your vehicle using the keys

which are registered to the NISSAN Vehicle Im-

mobilizer System components in your vehicle.

A mechanical key can be used for all the locks.

Never leave the keys in the vehicle.

Additional or replacement keys:

If you still have a key, the key number is not

necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle

Immobilizer System keys. Your existing key can

be duplicated without knowing the key number.

As many as four NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer

System keys can be used with one vehicle. You

should bring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-

tem keys that you have to a NISSAN dealer for

registration. This is because the registration pro-

cess will erase the memory of all key codes

previously registered into the NISSAN Vehicle

Immobilizer System. After the registration pro-

cess, these components will only recognize keys

SPA1951

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

coded into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-

tem during registration. Any key that is not given

to the dealer at the time of registration will no

longer be able to start your vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not allow the immobilizer system key,

which contains an electrical transponder,

to come into contact with water or salt

water. This could affect system function.

When the doors are locked using one of the

following methods, the doors cannot be opened

using the inside or outside door handles. The

doors must be unlocked to open the doors.

WARNING

●Before opening any door, always look

for and avoid oncoming traffic.

●To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and or its systems, including

entrapment in windows or inadvertent

door lock activation, do not leave chil-

dren, people who require the assistance

of others or pets unattended in your

vehicle. Additionally, the temperature

inside a closed vehicle on a warm day

can quickly become high enough to

cause a significant risk of injury or

death to people and pets.

LOCKING WITH KEY

To lock or unlock the vehicle, turn the key as

shown.

Manual

To lock a door, turn the key toward the front of the

vehicle 䊊

1. To unlock, turn the key toward the rear

䊊

Driver’s side

LPD2129

DOORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

Power

The power door lock system allows you to lock or

unlock all doors at the same time.

Turning the key toward the front 䊊

1of the vehicle

locks all doors.

Turning the key one time toward the rear 䊊

2of the

vehicle unlocks that door. From that position,

returning the key to neutral 䊊

3(where the key can

only be removed and inserted) and turning it

toward the rear again 䊊

4within 5 seconds un-

locks all doors.

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK

KNOB

To lock the door without the key, move the inside

lock knob to the lock position 䊊

1, then close the

door.

To unlock the door without the key, move the

inside lock knob to the unlock position 䊊

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR

LOCK SWITCH

To lock all the doors without a key, push the door

lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side) to

the lock position 䊊

1. When locking the door this

way, be certain not to leave the key inside the

vehicle.

To unlock all the doors without a key, push the

door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s

side) to the unlock position 䊊

Driver’s side

LPD0461

Inside lock

SPA2726 LPD2093

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Lockout protection

When the power door lock switch is moved to the

lock position with any door open and the Intelli-

gent Key is left in the vehicle, all doors will unlock

automatically and a chime will sound after the

door is closed.

This function helps to prevent the Intelligent Key

from being accidentally locked inside the vehicle.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS

●All doors lock automatically when the vehicle

speed reaches 15 mph (24 km/h).

●All doors unlock automatically when the ig-

nition is placed in the OFF position (models

with Intelligent Key system) or when the key

is removed from the ignition switch (models

without Intelligent Key system).

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK

Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors

from being opened accidentally, especially when

small children are in the vehicle.

The child safety lock levers are located on the

edge of the rear doors.

When the lever is in the LOCK position, the

door can be opened only from the outside.

WARNING

●Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those who

use a pacemaker should contact the

electric medical equipment manufac-

turer for the possible influences before

use.

●The remote keyless entry key fob trans-

mits radio waves when the buttons are

pressed. The FAA advises radio waves

may affect aircraft navigation and com-

munication systems. Do not operate the

remote keyless entry key fob while on

an airplane. Make sure the buttons are

not operated unintentionally when the

unit is stored for a flight.

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn the

interior lights on, and activate the panic alarm by

using the key fob from outside the vehicle.

Be sure to remove the key from the vehicle

before locking the doors.

The key fob can operate at a distance of approxi-

mately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. The effective

distance depends on the conditions around the

vehicle.

LPD2374

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM

(if so equipped)

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

As many as four key fobs can be used with one

vehicle. For information concerning the purchase

and use of additional key fobs, it is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

The key fob will not function when:

●the battery is discharged

●the distance between the vehicle and the

key fob is over 33 ft (10 m)

The panic alarm will not activate when the

key is in the ignition switch.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-

rences which will damage the key fob:

●Do not allow the key fob, which con-

tains electrical components, to come

into contact with water or salt water.

This could affect the system function.

●Do not drop the key fob.

●Do not strike the key fob sharply

against another object.

●Do not change or modify the key fob.

●Wetting may damage the key fob. If the

key fob gets wet, immediately wipe until

it is completely dry.

●Do not place the key fob for an ex-

tended period in an area where tem-

peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).

●Do not attach the key fob with a key

holder that contains a magnet.

●Do not place the key fob near equip-

ment that produces a magnetic field,

such as a TV, audio equipment and per-

sonal computers.

If a key fob is lost or stolen, NISSAN rec-

ommends erasing the ID code of that key

fob. This will prevent the key fob from

unauthorized use to unlock the vehicle.

For information regarding the erasing

procedure, it is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer.

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS

ENTRY SYSTEM

Locking doors

1. Remove the ignition key.

2. Close all the doors.

3. Press the LOCK button on the key

fob.

●All the doors will lock.

●The hazard indicator flashes twice and the

horn beeps once.

LPD2193

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

NOTE:

An auto-relock function will operate after a

full or partial unlock, when no further user

action occurs. The relock will operate ap-

proximately one minute after full or partial

unlock. The auto-relock function is can-

celled when any door is opened or the key

is inserted into the ignition.

Unlocking doors

●Press the UNLOCK button on the key

fob to unlock the driver’s door.

●The hazard indicator lights flash once.

●Press the UNLOCK button again

within five seconds to unlock all doors.

Using the panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,

you may activate the panic alarm to call attention

by pressing and holding the button on the

key fob for longer than 0.5 seconds.

The panic alarm will stay on for a period of time.

The panic alarm stops when:

●it has run for a period of time, or

●any button is pressed on the key fob.

LPD2194 LPD2195

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

Using the interior lights

Press the button on the key fob once to

turn on the interior lights.

For additional information, refer to “Interior lights”

in the “Instruments and controls” section of this

manual.

Answer back horn feature

If desired, the answer back horn feature can be

deactivated using the key fob. When deactivated

and the LOCK button is pressed the

hazard indicator flashes twice and when the

UNLOCK button is pressed, neither the

hazard indicator nor the horn operates.

NOTE:

If you change the answer back horn and

light flash feature with the key fob, the

vehicle information display screen will

show the current mode after the ignition

switch has been cycled from the OFF to the

ON position. The vehicle information dis-

play screen can also be used to change the

answer back horn mode.

To deactivate: Press and hold the

and buttons for at least two seconds.

The hazard indicator lights will flash three times to

confirm that the answer back horn feature has

been deactivated.

To activate: Press and hold the

and buttons for at least two seconds

once more.

The hazard indicator lights will flash once and the

horn will sound once to confirm that the horn

beep feature has been reactivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-

lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

LPD2196

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

WARNING

●Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those who

use a pacemaker should contact the

electric medical equipment manufac-

turer for the possible influences before

use.

●The Intelligent Key transmits radio

waves when the buttons are pressed.

The FAA advises the radio waves may

affect aircraft navigation and communi-

cation systems. Do not operate the In-

telligent Key while on an airplane. Make

sure the buttons are not operated unin-

tentionally when the unit is stored for a

flight.

The Intelligent Key system can operate all the

door locks using the remote control function or

pushing the request switch on the vehicle without

taking the key out from a pocket or purse. The

operating environment and/or conditions may af-

fect the Intelligent Key system operation.

Be sure to read the following before using the

Intelligent Key system.

CAUTION

●Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with

you when operating the vehicle.

●Never leave the Intelligent Key in the

vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is always communicating with

the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intel-

ligent Key system transmits weak radio waves.

Environmental conditions may interfere with the

operation of the Intelligent Key system under the

following operating conditions:

●When operating near a location where

strong radio waves are transmitted, such as

a TV tower, power station and broadcasting

station.

●When in possession of wireless equipment,

such as a cellular telephone, transceiver, or a

CB radio.

●When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or

covered by metallic materials.

●When any type of radio wave remote control

is used nearby.

●When the Intelligent Key is placed near an

electric appliance such as a personal com-

puter.

●When the vehicle is parked near a parking

meter.

In such cases, correct the operating conditions

before using the Intelligent Key function or use

the mechanical key.

Although the life of the battery varies depending

on the operating conditions, the battery’s life is

approximately two years. If the battery is dis-

charged, replace it with a new one.

When the Intelligent Key battery is low, an indi-

cator illuminates in the vehicle information dis-

play. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle

information display” in the “Instruments and con-

trols” section of this manual.

Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving

radio waves, if the key is left near equipment

which transmits strong radio waves, such as sig-

nals from a TV and personal computer, the bat-

tery life may become shorter.

For additional information, refer to “Battery re-

placement” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

As many as four Intelligent Keys can be regis-

tered and used with one vehicle. For information

about the purchase and use of additional Intelli-

gent Keys, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® (if so

equipped)

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-

rences which will damage the Intelligent

Key:

●Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which

contains electrical components, to

come into contact with water or salt

water. This could affect the system

function.

●Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

●Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply

against another object.

●Do not change or modify the Intelligent

Key.

●Wetting may damage the Intelligent

Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-

mediately wipe until it is completely dry.

●Do not place the Intelligent Key for an

extended period in an area where tem-

peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).

●Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a

key holder that contains a magnet.

●Do not place the Intelligent Key near

equipment that produces a magnetic

field, such as a TV, audio equipment and

personal computers.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN

recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli-

gent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the

unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate

the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing

procedure, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer.

OPERATING RANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can only be used

when the Intelligent Key is within the specified

operating range from the request switch 䊊

LPD2180

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or

strong radio waves are present near the operat-

ing location, the Intelligent Key operating range

becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may

not function properly.

The operating range is within 31.5 in (80 cm)

from each request switch 䊊

If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass,

handle or rear bumper, the request switches may

not function.

When the Intelligent Key is within the operating

range, it is possible for anyone, even someone

who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the

request switch to lock/unlock the doors.

DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS

PRECAUTION

●Do not push the door handle request switch

with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as

illustrated. The close distance to the door

handle will cause the Intelligent Key system

to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelli-

gent Key is outside the vehicle.

●After locking with the door handle request

switch, verify the doors are securely locked

by testing them.

●To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left

inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the

Intelligent Key with you and then lock the

doors.

●Do not pull the door handle before pushing

the door handle request switch. The door

will be unlocked but will not open. Release

the door handle once and pull it again to

open the door.

WPD0375

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

OPERATION

You can lock or unlock the doors without taking

the Intelligent Key out of your pocket or bag.

When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you

can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door

handle request switch within the range of opera-

tion.

Locking doors

1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position,

place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-

tion and make sure you carry the Intelligent

Key with you.

2. Close all doors.

3. Push any door handle request switch while

carrying the Intelligent Key with you.

4. All doors and the rear liftgate will lock.

5. The hazard indicator lights flash twice and

the outside buzzer sounds twice, unless the

answer back feature is deactivated, then

only the hazard lights will flash. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Answer back

horn feature” in this section.

LPD2181 LPD2509 LPD2183

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

NOTE:

●Request switches for all doors and the

liftgate can be deactivated when the

I-Key Door Lock setting is turned off in

the Vehicle Settings of the vehicle in-

formation display. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Vehicle information

display” in the “Instruments and con-

trols” section of this manual.

●Doors lock with the door handle re-

quest switch while the ignition switch

is not in the LOCK position.

●Doors do not lock by pushing the door

handle request switch while any door is

open. However, doors lock with the

mechanical key even if any door is

open.

●Doors do not lock with the door handle

request switch with the Intelligent Key

inside the vehicle and a beep sounds to

warn you. However, when an Intelligent

Key is inside the vehicle, doors can be

locked with another Intelligent Key.

CAUTION

●After locking the doors using the re-

quest switch, make sure that the doors

have been securely locked by operating

the door handles or the rear liftgate

opener switch.

●When locking the doors using the re-

quest switch, make sure to have the

Intelligent Key in your possession be-

fore operating the request switch to

prevent the Intelligent Key from being

left in the vehicle.

●The request switch is operational only

when the Intelligent Key has been de-

tected by the Intelligent Key system.

Lockout protection

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci-

dentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protection

is equipped with the Intelligent Key system.

When the driver’s side door is open, the doors

are locked, and then the Intelligent Key is put

inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed;

the lock will automatically unlock and the door

buzzer sounds.

NOTE:

The doors may not lock when the Intelli-

gent Key is in the same hand that is oper-

ating the request switch to lock the door.

Put the Intelligent Key in a purse, pocket or

your other hand.

CAUTION

The lockout protection may not function

under the following conditions:

●When the Intelligent Key is placed on

top of the instrument panel.

●When the Intelligent Key is placed in-

side the glove box or a storage bin.

●When the Intelligent Key is placed in-

side the door pockets.

●When the Intelligent Key is placed in-

side or near metallic materials.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

Unlocking doors

1. Carry the Intelligent Key.

2. Push the door handle request switch.

3. The hazard warning lights flash once and the

outside buzzer sounds once, unless the an-

swer back feature is deactivated, then only

the hazard lights will flash. For additional

information, refer to “Answer back horn fea-

ture” in this section.

4. Push the door handle request switch again

within one minute to unlock all doors.

For power liftgate opening:

1. Carry the Intelligent Key.

2. Press the power liftgate request switch (if so

equipped).

NOTE:

Request switches for all doors and liftgate

can be deactivated when the I-Key Door

Lock setting is turned off in the Vehicle

Settings of the vehicle information display.

For additional information, refer to “Ve-

hicle information display” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section of this manual.

If a door handle is pulled while unlocking the

doors, that door may not be unlocked. Returning

the door handle to its original position will unlock

the door. If the door does not unlock after return-

ing the door handle, push the door handle re-

quest switch to unlock the door.

All doors will be locked automatically unless one

of the following operations is performed within

one minute after pushing the request switch.

●Opening any door.

●Pushing the ignition switch.

The interior light timer illuminates for a period of

time when a door is unlocked and the room light

switch is in the DOOR position.

The interior light can be turned off without waiting

by performing one of the following operations:

●Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi-

tion.

●Locking the doors with the remote control.

●Switching the room light switch to the OFF

position.

●Switching the Auto Room Lamp to the OFF

position in Vehicle Settings of the vehicle

information display. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Vehicle information display” in

the “Instruments and controls” section.

LPD2509 LPD2183

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

HOW TO USE THE REMOTE

KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION

The remote keyless entry function can operate all

door locks using the remote keyless function of

the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function

can operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) away

from the vehicle. The operating distance de-

pends upon the conditions around the vehicle.

The remote keyless entry function will not func-

tion under the following conditions:

●When the Intelligent Key is not within the

operational range.

●When the doors or the rear liftgate are open

or not closed securely.

●When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-

charged.

CAUTION

When locking the doors using the Intelli-

gent Key, be sure not to leave the key in

the vehicle.

Locking doors

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-

tion.

2. Close all doors.

3. Press the button on the Intelligent

Key.

4. The hazard indicator lights flash twice and

the horn beeps once, unless the answer

back feature is deactivated, then only the

hazard lights will flash. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Answer back horn feature”

in this section.

5. All doors will be locked.

CAUTION

After locking the doors using the Intelli-

gent Key, be sure that the doors have been

securely locked by operating the door

handles.

LPD2257

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

Unlocking doors

1. Press the button on the Intelligent

Key.

2. The driver’s door will unlock and the hazard

indicator lights flash once.

3. Press the button again within five

seconds, the hazard indicator lights flash

once and the remaining doors unlock.

NOTE:

The unlocking operation can be changed in

Selective Unlock in the Vehicle Settings of

the vehicle information display. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Vehicle infor-

mation display” in the “Instruments and

controls” section of this manual.

All doors will be locked automatically unless one

of the following operations is performed within

one minute after pressing the button:

●Opening any doors.

●Pushing the ignition switch.

The interior light illuminates for a period of time

when a door is unlocked and the room light

switch is in the DOOR position.

The light can be turned off without waiting by

performing one of the following operations:

●Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi-

tion.

●Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key.

●Switching the room light switch to the OFF

position.

●Switching the Auto Room Lamp to the OFF

position in Vehicle Settings of the vehicle

information display. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Vehicle information display” in

the “Instruments and controls”section of this

manual.

LPD2258

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Releasing the rear liftgate (if so

equipped)

The rear liftgate can be opened and closed by

performing the following:

●Press the button (if so equipped) for

longer than 0.5 seconds to open the rear

liftgate.

●Press the button (if so equipped)

again for longer than 0.5 seconds to close

the rear liftgate.

When the button (if so equipped) is

pressed during the open or close process the

liftgate will stop. When pressed again, the liftgate

will reverse and go in the opposite direction.

Using the panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,

you may activate the panic alarm to call attention

by pressing and holding the button on the

Intelligent Key for longer than 0.5 seconds.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for a

period of time.

The panic alarm stops when:

●It has run for a period of time, or

●Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key.

●The request switch on the driver or passen-

ger door is pushed and the Intelligent Key is

in range of the door handle.

Using the interior lights

Press the button on the key fob once to

turn on the interior lights.

For additional information, refer to “Interior lights”

in the “Instruments and controls” section of this

manual.

WPD0414 WPD0415

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

Answer back horn feature

If desired, the answer back horn feature can be

deactivated using the Intelligent Key. When it is

deactivated and the LOCK button is

pressed, the hazard indicator lights flash twice.

When the UNLOCK button is pressed,

neither the hazard indicator lights nor the horn

operates.

NOTE:

If you change the answer back horn and

light flash feature with the Intelligent Key,

the vehicle information display screen will

show the current mode after the ignition

switch has been cycled from the OFF to the

ON position. The vehicle information dis-

play screen can also be used to change the

answer back horn mode.

To deactivate: Press and hold the

and buttons for at least 2 seconds.

The hazard indicator lights will flash three times to

confirm that the answer back horn feature has

been deactivated.

To activate: Press and hold the

and buttons for at least 2 seconds once

more.

The hazard indicator lights will flash once and the

horn will sound once to confirm that the horn

beep feature has been reactivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-

lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

WARNING SIGNALS

To help prevent the vehicle from moving unex-

pectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent

Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being

stolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and

outside the vehicle and a warning is displayed in

the instrument panel.

When a chime or beep sounds or a warning is

displayed, be sure to check the vehicle and the

Intelligent Key.

For additional information, refer to the “Trouble-

shooting guide” in this section and “Vehicle infor-

mation display” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

LPD2259

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are

programmed for the vehicle. If another Intelligent

Key is in range or inside the vehicle, the vehicle

system may respond differently than expected.

Symptom Possible Cause Remedy

When stopping the engine

The red Shift to Park warning appears on

the display and the inside warning chime

sounds continuously.

The shift lever is not in the P (Park) position. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.

When shifting the shift lever to the P (Park)

position

The Push ignition to OFF warning appears

on the display. The ignition switch is in the ON position. Place the ignition switch in the OFF

position.

When opening the driver’s door to get out

of the vehicle

The Door Open warning appears on the

display. The ignition switch is in the ON position. Place the ignition switch in the OFF

position.

When closing the door after getting out of

the vehicle

The No Key Detected warning appears on

the display, the outside chime sounds three

times and the inside warning chime sounds

for approximately three seconds.

The ignition switch is in the ON position. Place the ignition switch in the OFF

position.

The red Shift to Park warning appears on

the display and the inside side chime

sounds continuously.

The ignition switch is in the ON position

and the shift lever is not in the P (Park)

position.

Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position

and place the ignition switch in the OFF

position.

When closing the door with the inside lock

knob turned to LOCK

The outside chime sounds for approximately

three seconds and all the doors unlock. The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the door handle request

switch or the LOCK button on the Intelli-

gent Key to lock the door

The outside chime sounds for approximately

three seconds. The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

Symptom Possible Cause Remedy

When pushing the ignition switch to start

the engine

The Intelligent Key battery indicator appears

on the display. The battery charge is low.

Replace the battery with a new one. For

additional information, refer to “Battery re-

placement” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of

this manual.

The yellow Key ID Incorrect warning ap-

pears on the display. The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the ignition switch The Key System Error warning appears on

the display.

It warns of a malfunction with the Intelligent

Key system.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer.

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

The button will be on the NISSAN Intelli-

gent Key® if the vehicle has remote engine start.

This feature allows the engine to start from out-

side the vehicle.

The following features may be affected when the

remote start feature is used:

●Vehicles with an automatic climate control

system will default to either heating or cool-

ing mode. For additional information, refer to

“Remote engine start logic” in the “Monitor,

climate, audio, phone and voice recognition

systems” section of this manual.

Laws in some local communities may restrict the

use of remote starters. For example, some laws

require a person using remote start to have the

vehicle in view. Check local regulations for any

requirements.

Other conditions may affect the function of the

Remote Engine Start feature. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Conditions the remote start will

not work” in this section.

Other conditions can affect the performance of

the Intelligent Key transmitter. For additional in-

formation, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key®” in

this section.

REMOTE ENGINE START

OPERATING RANGE

WARNING

To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the ve-

hicle and or its systems, including entrap-

ment in windows or inadvertent door lock

activation, do not leave children, people

who require the assistance of others or

pets unattended in your vehicle. Addition-

ally, the temperature inside a closed ve-

hicle on a warm day can quickly become

high enough to cause a significant risk of

injury or death to people and pets.

Type A (if so equipped)

LPD2293

Type B (if so equipped)

LPD2272

REMOTE ENGINE START (if so

equipped)

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

CAUTION

When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-

charged or other strong radio wave

sources are present near the operating

location, the Intelligent Key operating

range becomes narrower, and the Intelli-

gent Key may not function properly.

The remote engine start function can only be

used when the Intelligent Key is within the speci-

fied operating range from the vehicle.

The remote engine start operating range is ap-

proximately 197 ft (60 m) from the vehicle.

REMOTE STARTING THE VEHICLE

To use the remote start feature to start the engine

perform the following:

1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle.

2. Press the LOCK button to lock all

doors.

3. Within 5 seconds press and hold the

remote start button until the turn signal lights

flash and the tail lamps turn on. If the vehicle

is not within view press and hold the

remote start button for at least 2 seconds.

The following events will occur when the engine

starts:

●The parking lights will turn on and remain on

as long as the engine is running.

●The doors will be locked and the climate

control system may come on.

●The engine will continue to run for 10 min-

utes. Repeat the steps to extend the time for

an additional 10 minutes. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Extending engine run

time” in this section.

Depress and hold the brake then push the push-

button ignition switch to the ON position before

driving. For additional information, refer to “Driv-

ing the vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” sec-

tion of this manual.

EXTENDING ENGINE RUN TIME

The remote start feature can be extended one

time by performing the steps listed in “Remote

starting the vehicle” in this section. Run time will

be calculated as follows:

●The first 10 minute run time will start when

the remote start function is performed.

●The second 10 minutes will start immedi-

ately when the remote start function is per-

formed again. For example, if the engine has

been running for 5 minutes, and 10 minutes

are added, the engine will run for a total of

15 minutes.

●Extending engine run time will count towards

the two remote start limit.

A maximum of two remote starts, or a single start

with an extension, are allowed between ignition

cycles. The ignition switch must be cycled to the

ON position and then back to the OFF position

before the remote start procedure can be used

again.

CANCELING A REMOTE START

To cancel a remote start, perform one of the

following:

●Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle and

press until the parking lights turn off.

●Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

●Cycle the ignition switch ON and then OFF.

●The extended engine run time has expired.

●The first 10 minute timer has expired.

●The engine hood has been opened.

●The shift lever is moved out of park.

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

●The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into the

vehicle.

●The ignition switch is pushed without an

Intelligent Key in the vehicle.

●The ignition switch is pushed with an Intelli-

gent Key in the vehicle but the brake pedal is

not depressed.

CONDITIONS THE REMOTE START

WILL NOT WORK

The remote start will not operate if any of the

following conditions are present:

●“Remote Engine Start” is turned off in the

“Locking” section of the Vehicle Settings

menu.

●The ignition switch is placed in the ON po-

sition.

●The hood is not securely closed.

●The hazard warning lights are on.

●The engine is still running. The engine must

be completely stopped. Wait at least 6 sec-

onds if the engine goes from running to off.

This is not applicable when extending en-

gine run time.

●The remote start button is not pressed

and held for at least 2 seconds.

●The remote start button is not pressed

and held within 5 seconds of pressing the

lock button.

●The brake is pressed.

●The doors are not closed and locked.

●The Intelligent Key warning message ap-

pears in the vehicle information display.

●The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into the

vehicle.

●Two remote vehicle starts, or a single remote

start with an extension, have already been

used.

●The vehicle is not in P (Park).

●There is a detected registered key already

inside of the vehicle.

●The remote start function has been switched

to the OFF position in Vehicle Settings of the

vehicle information display. For additional

information, refer to “Vehicle information dis-

play” in the “Instruments and controls” sec-

tion of this manual.

The remote engine start may display a warning or

indicator in the vehicle information display. For

additional information, refer to “Vehicle informa-

tion display” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25

1. Pull the hood lock release handle 䊊

1located

below the instrument panel until the hood

springs up slightly.

2. Locate the lever 䊊

2in between the hood and

grille and push the lever sideways with your

fingertips.

3. Raise the hood 䊊

4. Remove the support rod 䊊

4and insert it into

the slot 䊊

Hold the coated parts 䊊

Awhen removing or

resetting the support rod. Avoid direct con-

tact with the metal parts, as they may be

hot immediately after the engine has been

stopped.

When closing the hood, return the support rod to

its original position, lower the hood to approxi-

mately 12 in (30 cm) above the latch and release

it. This allows proper engagement of the hood

latch.

WARNING

●Make sure the hood is completely

closed and latched before driving. Fail-

ure to do so could cause the hood to fly

open and result in an accident.

●If you see steam or smoke coming from

the engine compartment, to avoid injury

do not open the hood.

LPD2266

HOOD

3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

WARNING

●Always be sure the liftgate has been

closed securely to prevent it from open-

ing while driving.

●Do not drive with the liftgate open. This

could allow dangerous exhaust gases

to be drawn into the vehicle. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Exhaust

gas (carbon monoxide)” in the “Starting

and driving” section of this manual.

●To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and or its systems, including

entrapment in windows or inadvertent

door lock activation, do not leave chil-

dren, people who require the assistance

of others or pets unattended in your

vehicle. Additionally, the temperature

inside a closed vehicle on a warm day

can quickly become high enough to

cause a significant risk of injury or

death to people and pets.

●Always be sure that hands and feet are

clear of the door frame to avoid injury

while closing the liftgate.

CAUTION

Do not use accessory carriers that attach

to the rear hatch. Doing so will cause dam-

age to the vehicle.

OPERATING THE MANUAL

LIFTGATE (if so equipped)

The power door lock system allows you to lock or

unlock all doors including the liftgate simultane-

ously.

To open the liftgate, press the liftgate opener

switch 䊊

Aand pull up on the handle.

To close, lower and push the liftgate down se-

curely.

LPD2184

LIFTGATE

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27

OPERATING THE POWER LIFTGATE

(if so equipped)

WARNING

●Make sure that all passengers have

their hands, etc., inside the vehicle be-

fore closing the liftgate.

●To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and or its systems, including

entrapment in windows or inadvertent

door lock activation, do not leave chil-

dren, people who require the assistance

of others or pets unattended in your

vehicle. Additionally, the temperature

inside a closed vehicle on a warm day

can quickly become high enough to

cause a significant risk of injury or

death to people and pets.

NOTE:

To open, close or reverse the power liftgate,

the shift lever must be in P (Park). Also, the

power liftgate will not operate if battery

voltage is low.

Power Open:

The power liftgate automatically moves from the

fully closed position to the fully open position in

approximately five – eight seconds. The power

open feature can be activated by the button on

the key fob, the instrument panel switch or the

liftgate open switch. A chime sounds to indicate

the power open sequence has been started.

●When the vehicle is locked, the liftgate can

be opened with the instrument panel switch

or key fob.

●The key fob button must be held for 0.5 sec-

ond before the liftgate opens.

●The liftgate must be unlocked (or the key fob

must be within range) to open with the lift-

gate open switch 䊊

●The liftgate open switch 䊊

Acan only be used

to open the liftgate if the MAIN switch (lo-

cated in Instrument Panel) is in the ON po-

sition.

Instrument panel switch

LPD2212

Liftgate opener switch

LPD2209

3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

A warning chime will sound if the shift lever is

moved out of P (Park) during a power open

operation.

Power Close:

The power liftgate automatically moves from the

fully open position to the secondary position.

When the liftgate reaches the secondary posi-

tion, the cinching motor engages and pulls the

liftgate to its primary latch position. Power close

takes approximately seven – ten seconds. The

power close feature can be activated by the

button on the key fob, the instrument panel

switch or the liftgate close switch 䊊

B. A chime

sounds to indicate the power close sequence

has been started.

●If the liftgate open switch 䊊

Ais activated

while the cinching motor is engaged, the

cinching motor will disengage and release

the latch.

●The key fob button must be held for 0.5 sec-

ond before the liftgate closes.

●The liftgate close switch 䊊

Bcan only be

used to close the liftgate if the power liftgate

main switch is in the ON position.

Stop - Reverse:

During the open/close movement, the liftgate can

be stopped, if the Intelligent Key, instrument

panel or liftgate switch (䊊

Aor 䊊

B) is pressed. The

liftgate can be reversed in the Intelligent Key,

instrument panel or liftgate switch (䊊

Aor 䊊

B)is

pressed again.

Auto Reverse:

If an obstacle is detected during power open or

power close, a warning chime will sound and the

liftgate will reverse direction and return to the full

open or full close position. If a second obstacle is

detected, the liftgate motion will stop and the

liftgate will enter manual mode.

A pinch strip is mounted on each side of the

liftgate. If an obstacle is detected by a pinch strip

during power close, the liftgate will reverse direc-

tion and return to the full open position.

LPD2270

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29

NOTE:

If the pinch strip is damaged or removed,

the power close function will not operate.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-

ately before the closed position which

cannot be detected. Make sure that all

passengers have their hands, etc., inside

the vehicle before closing the liftgate.

Manual Mode:

If power operation is not available, the liftgate

may be operated manually. Power operation may

not be available even if the power liftgate main

switch is in the ON position under the following

conditions:

●Multiple obstacles have been detected in a

single power cycle

●Battery voltage is low

If the power liftgate open switch 䊊

Ais pushed

during power open or close, the power operation

will be canceled and the liftgate can be operated

manually.

To open the liftgate manually, press the liftgate

open switch 䊊

Aand raise the liftgate.

To close, lower and push the liftgate down se-

curely.

LPD2184

3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

MOTION-ACTIVATED LIFTGATE (if so

equipped)

The liftgate can be opened/closed using a foot

kicking motion when it is locked or unlocked. Two

sensors along the rear bumper (center area) can

detect a forward kicking motion 䊊

B. The Intelli-

gent Key must be present within 3 ft (1 m) of the

liftgate to allow using the hands free feature to

open/close the liftgate.

NOTE:

To achieve proper motion activation, kick

within the kicking zone 䊊

A2 ft (60 cm).

Improper kicking either from side to side

䊊

Cor at angles 䊊

Dwill not open/close the

liftgate.

CAUTION

Before performing the kicking motion,

steady your stance to prevent any loss of

balance. Also, while making the kicking

motion, take caution around hot exhaust

system parts. Otherwise, there may be

danger of injury.

LPD2507

Example of a proper kick

LPD2484

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31

While positioned at the rear of the vehicle (cen-

ter) at arms’ length distance away, begin making

the forward kicking motion. Kick the foot under

the rear bumper then immediately return the foot

back to standing position. The kicking motion

should be straight, smooth and consistent. Your

leg does not need to touch the bumper surface

but be within 3/4 inch (2 cm) to 4 inches (10 cm)

of the bumper surface. After your kick motion is

completed step back to allow the liftgate to

open/close. The liftgate should begin moving

within 1–2 seconds after the kick. This time is

needed to verify the Intelligent Key and to validate

the kick motion. Kicking again within this time

frame (1–2 seconds) could cause the liftgate to

reverse or stop.

WARNING

Prevent unintentional liftgate

opening/closing. There may be conditions

when opening/closing the liftgate is not

desired. Keep the Intelligent Key out of

the range of the liftgate (3 ft or 1 m), when

washing or working around the back of

the vehicle.

CAUTION

Interference or malfunction can be caused

by parking in close proximity to radio or

satellite towers.

Proper kicking zone and method

LPD2485

Improper kicking methods

LPD2486

3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

POWER LIFTGATE MAIN SWITCH

The power liftgate operation can be turned on or

off by the power liftgate main switch on the

instrument panel.

When the power liftgate main switch is pushed to

the OFF position, the power operation is not

available by the power liftgate switch on the

liftgate and liftgate opener switch.

Power operation is available when in the OFF

position by the instrument panel switch and the

key fob button.

Motion-Activated Liftgate (if so equipped) will not

function when the power liftgate main switch is

pushed in the OFF position.

LIFTGATE RELEASE

WARNING

●Always be sure the liftgate has been

closed securely to prevent it from open-

ing while driving.

●Do not drive with the liftgate open. This

could allow dangerous exhaust gases

to be drawn into the vehicle. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Exhaust

gas (carbon monoxide)” in the “Starting

and driving” section of this manual.

●To avoid personal injury, do not attempt

to activate the power liftgate if one or

both of the liftgate struts are removed.

CAUTION

●If the power liftgate does not stay open

or if the liftgate unexpectedly closes at

any time while a continuous warning

chime sounds, do not operate the lift-

gate. There may be a pressure loss in

one or both of the liftgate struts. It is

recommended that you have the liftgate

inspected. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

●Do not activate the power liftgate if one

or both of the liftgate struts are re-

moved. Damage to the liftgate or power

liftgate mechanisms may occur.

●Keep the power liftgate main switch in

the OFF position when washing or

working around the back of the vehicle

(with Intelligent Key) to prevent inad-

vertent opening/closing.

LPD2277

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-33

Liftgate release (manual and power)

The liftgate release mechanism allows the liftgate

to be opened in the event of a discharged battery.

To release the liftgate from the inside of the

vehicle, perform the following operations:

1. Fold the rear seats down. For additional

information, refer to “Folding the 3rd row

seats” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system” section of

this manual.

2. Insert a suitable tool in the top access open-

ing hole. Move the release lever to the right.

The liftgate will be unlatched.

3. Push the liftgate up to open.

NOTE:

If you had to open the liftgate using this

lever, it is recommended that you have your

vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

LIFTGATE POSITION SETTING

The liftgate can be set to open to a specific height

by performing the following:

1. Open the liftgate using the request switch or

the Intelligent Key.

2. Pull the liftgate down to the desired position

and hold the liftgate (the liftgate will have

some resistance when being manually ad-

justed).

3. While holding the liftgate in position, push

and hold the liftgate switch located

on the liftgate for approximately 5 seconds

or until three beeps are heard.

The liftgate will open to the selected position

setting. To change the position of the liftgate,

repeat Steps 1-3 for setting the position of the

liftgate.

OPENER OPERATION

The fuel-filler door release is located below the

instrument panel. To open the fuel-filler door, pull

the release. To lock, close the fuel-filler door

securely.

LPD2375 LPD2022

FUEL-FILLER DOOR

3-34 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

FUEL-FILLER CAP

WARNING

●Gasoline is extremely flammable and

highly explosive under certain condi-

tions. You could be burned or seriously

injured if it is misused or mishandled.

Always stop the engine and do not

smoke or allow open flames or sparks

near the vehicle when refueling.

●Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank

after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off

automatically. Continued refueling may

cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel

spray and possibly a fire.

●Use only an original equipment type

fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a

built-in safety valve needed for proper

operation of the fuel system and emis-

sion control system. An incorrect cap

can result in a serious malfunction and

possible injury. It could also cause

the Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL) to come on.

●Never pour fuel into the throttle body to

attempt to start your vehicle.

●Do not fill a portable fuel container in

the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity

can cause an explosion of flammable

liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or

trailer. To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death when filling portable fuel

containers:

– Always place the container on the

ground when filling.

– Do not use electronic devices when

filling.

– Keep the pump nozzle in contact

with the container while you are fill-

ing it.

– Use only approved portable fuel con-

tainers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

●Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your

vehicle. For additional information, re-

fer to “Fuel recommendation” in the

“Technical and consumer information”

section of this manual.

●The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning mes-

sage will be displayed/warning will ap-

pear if the fuel-filler cap is not properly

tightened. It may take a few driving trips

for the message to be displayed. Failure

to tighten the fuel-filler cap properly

after the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning

message is displayed/warning appears

may cause the Malfunction Indi-

cator Light (MIL) to illuminate.

●Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap

properly may cause the Malfunc-

tion Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate.

If the light illuminates because

the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing,

tighten or install the cap and continue

to drive the vehicle. The light

should turn off after a few driving trips.

If the light does not turn off after a

few driving trips, have the vehicle in-

spected. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

●For additional information, refer to

“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in

the “Instruments and controls” section

of this manual.

●If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,

flush it away with water to avoid paint

damage.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-35

To remove the fuel-filler cap:

1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise to

remove.

2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder 䊊

while refueling.

To install the fuel-filler cap:

1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the fuel-

filler tube.

2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a

single click is heard.

LOOSE FUEL CAP warning

The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message ap-

pears in the vehicle information display when the

fuel-filler cap is not tightened correctly after the

vehicle has been refueled. It may take a few

driving trips for the message to be displayed. To

turn off the warning message, perform the follow-

ing:

1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as soon

as possible. For additional information, refer

to “Fuel-filler cap” in this section.

2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until a single click

is heard.

3. Press the button 䊊

Aon the steering

wheel for about one second to turn off the

LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message 䊊

after tightening the fuel-filler cap.

LPD2186 LPD2527

3-36 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

WARNING

●Do not adjust the steering wheel while

driving. You could lose control of your

vehicle and cause an accident.

●Do not adjust the steering wheel any

closer to you than is necessary for

proper steering operation and comfort.

The driver’s air bag inflates with great

force. If you are unrestrained, leaning

forward, sitting sideways or out of posi-

tion in any way, you are at greater risk of

injury or death in a crash. You may also

receive serious or fatal injuries from the

air bag if you are up against it when it

inflates. Always sit back against the

seatback and as far away as practical

from the steering wheel. Always use the

seat belts.

MANUAL OPERATION

Tilt and telescopic operation

Pull the lock lever 䊊

1down:

●Adjust the steering wheel up or down in

direction 䊊

2to the desired position.

●Adjust the steering wheel forward or back-

ward in direction 䊊

3to the desired position.

Push the lock lever 䊊

1up firmly to lock the

steering wheel in place.

LPD2524

WPD0344

STEERING WHEEL SUN VISORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-37

1. To block glare from the front, swing down

the sun visor 䊊

2. To block glare from the side, remove the sun

visor from the center mount and swing the

visor to the side 䊊

3. To extend the sun visor, slide 䊊

3in or out as

needed.

CAUTION

●Do not store the sun visor before return-

ing the extension to its original

position.

●Do not pull the extension sun visor

forcedly downward. VANITY MIRRORS

To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor

down and flip open the mirror cover. Some vanity

mirrors will illuminate when the mirror cover is

open.

CARD HOLDER (driver’s side only)

To access the card holder, slide card in the card

holder. Do not view information while operating

the vehicle.

LPD2067 LPD2120

3-38 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

MANUAL ANTI-GLARE REARVIEW

MIRROR (if so equipped)

Use the night position 䊊

1to reduce glare from

the headlights of vehicles behind you at night.

Use the day position 䊊

2when driving in daylight

hours.

WARNING

Use the night position only when neces-

sary, because it reduces rear view clarity.

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE

REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)

The inside mirror is designed so that it automati-

cally dims during night time conditions and ac-

cording to the intensity of the headlights of the

vehicle following you. The automatic anti-glare

feature is activated when the ignition switch is in

the ON position.

The indicator light 䊊

2will illuminate when the

automatic anti-glare feature is operating.

NOTE:

Do not hang any objects over the sensors

䊊

1or apply glass cleaner to the sensors.

Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the

sensors, resulting in improper operation. The indicator light will illuminate when the auto-

matic anti-glare feature is operating.

With the ignition switch in the ON position, press

the button as described:

●To turn off the anti-glare feature, press

the button. The indicator light will turn

off.

●To turn on the anti-glare feature, press

the button again. The indicator light

will turn on.

WPD0126

Type A (if so equipped)

WPD0446

MIRRORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-39

For additional information about the compass 䊊

and compass features, refer to “Compass dis-

play” in the “Instruments and controls” section of

this manual.

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

The outside mirror remote control will operate

only when the ignition switch is in the ON posi-

tion.

Move the small switch 䊊

1to select the left or right

mirror. Adjust each mirror to the desired position

using the large switch 䊊

WARNING

●Objects viewed in the outside mirror on

the passenger side are closer than they

appear. Be careful when moving to the

right. Using only this mirror could cause

an accident. Use the inside mirror or

glance over your shoulder to properly

judge distances to other objects.

●Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.

You could lose control of your vehicle

and cause an accident.

Type B (if so equipped)

LPD2419 LPD2452

3-40 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Manual folding outside mirrors

Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it.

Heated mirrors (if so equipped)

Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost,

defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Rear window and

outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch”

in the “Instruments and controls” section of this

manual.

The automatic drive positioner system has two

features:

●Memory storage function

●Entry/exit function

MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION

Two positions for the driver’s seat and outside

mirrors can be stored in the automatic drive po-

sitioner memory. Follow these procedures to use

the memory system.

1. Place the ignition in the ON or OFF position

(the vehicle should be stopped while setting

the memory).

2. Adjust the driver’s seat and outside mirrors

to the desired positions by manually operat-

ing each adjusting switch. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Seats” in the “Safety—

Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint

LPD2084 LPD2531

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if

so equipped)

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-41

system” section of this manual and “Outside

mirrors” in this section.

3. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds,

push the memory switch (1 or 2).

4. The indicator light for the pushed memory

switch will come ON and stay ON for ap-

proximately 5 seconds.

5. The chime will sound if the memory has been

stored.

NOTE:

If a NEW memory position is stored in the

same memory switch, the previous memory

position will be overwritten by the new

stored position.

Confirming memory storage

Push the SET switch.

●If a memory position has not been stored in

the switch (1 or 2) the indicator light for the

respective switch will come ON for approxi-

mately 0.5 seconds.

●If a memory position has been stored in the

switch (1 or 2) then the indicator light for the

respective switch will stay ON for approxi-

mately 5 seconds.

Linking a key fob to a stored memory

position

Each key fob can be linked to a stored memory

position (memory switch 1 or 2) with the follow-

ing procedure.

1. Follow steps 1-3 in the “Memory Storage

Function” section for storing the memory

position.

2. The indicator light for the pushed memory

switch will come ON. While the indicator

light is ON for 5 seconds, press the

button on the key fob. The indicator light of

the linked memory switch will blink. After the

indicator light goes off, the key fob is linked

to that memory setting.

Once it is linked, when ignition switch is placed in

the OFF position, pressing the button on

the key fob will move the driver’s seat and outside

mirrors to the linked memory switch position.

NOTE:

If a NEW memory position is stored in the

linked memory switch, then the key fob will

link the NEW position and overwrites the

previous position.

ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION

This system is designed so that the driver’s seat

will automatically move when the shift lever is in

the P (Park) position. This allows the driver to get

into and out of the driver’s seat more easily.

The driver’s seat will slide backward:

●When the driver’s door is opened with the

ignition switch placed in the OFF position.

●When the ignition switch is changed from

ON to OFF with the driver’s door open.

The driver’s seat will return to the previous posi-

tion:

●When the ignition switch is turned to ON

while the shift lever is in the P (Park) position.

The entry/exit function can be adjusted or can-

celed through the vehicle settings in the vehicle

information display by performing the following:

●Switch the Exit Seat Slide from ON to OFF.

3-42 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

SYSTEM OPERATION

The automatic drive positioner system will not

work or will stop operating under the following

conditions:

●When the vehicle speed is above 0 mph

(0 km/h) or 4 mph (7km/h) for some limited

functions such as linking a key fob to the

meter when the power source is turned on

from off or during the Exit function.

●When any of the memory switches are

pushed while the automatic drive positioner

is operating.

●When the adjusting switch for the driver’s

seat and steering column is turned on while

the automatic drive positioner is operating.

●When the seat has already been moved to

the memorized position.

●When no seat position is stored in the

memory switch.

●When the shift lever is moved from P (Park)

to any other position.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-43

MEMO

3-44 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice

recognition systems

Control panel buttons — color screen with

Navigation System (if so equipped) ..................4-4

How to use the touch-screen . . ..................4-5

How to use the BACK button ..............4-7

How to use the [ ] button ..................4-7

button..................................4-10

How to use the POWER button/VOLUME

control knob ..................................4-10

How to use the CAMERA button ................4-10

RearView Monitor (if so equipped)..................4-11

RearView Monitor system operation .............4-12

How to read the displayed lines .................4-12

Difference between predicted and actual

distances .....................................4-13

Adjusting the screen ...........................4-15

RearView Monitor system limitations .............4-15

System maintenance...........................4-16

Around View® Monitor (if so equipped) .............4-17

Around View® Monitor system operation.........4-18

Difference between predicted and actual

distances .....................................4-21

How to park with predicted course lines..........4-23

How to switch the display ......................4-24

Adjusting the screen ...........................4-25

Around View® Monitor system limitations ........4-25

System maintenance...........................4-27

Moving Object Detection (MOD) (if so equipped) ....4-28

MOD system operation.........................4-29

Turning MOD on and off (if so equipped) .........4-30

MOD system limitations ........................4-31

System maintenance...........................4-31

Vents ...........................................4-32

Heater and Air Conditioner (manual)

(if so equipped) ..................................4-33

Controls......................................4-34

Heater operation ..............................4-34

Air conditioner operation .......................4-35

Air flow charts.................................4-37

Heater and Air Conditioner (automatic)

(if so equipped) ..................................4-40

Automatic operation ...........................4-41

Manual operation ..............................4-42

Operating tips.................................4-42

Servicing air conditioner...........................4-43

Audio system ....................................4-43

Radio ........................................4-43

FM radio reception ............................4-44

AM radio reception ............................4-44

Satellite radio reception ........................4-44

Audio operation precautions ....................4-45

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)

player (Type A) (if so equipped) .................4-52

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)

player (Type B) (if so equipped) .................4-56

USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port

(models without Navigation System)

(if so equipped) ...............................4-64

USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port

(models with Navigation System)

(if so equipped) ...............................4-66

iPod®* player operation without Navigation

System (if so equipped) ........................4-68

iPod®* player operation with Navigation

System (if so equipped) ........................4-70

Bluetooth® streaming audio without

Navigation System (if so equipped) ..............4-73

Bluetooth® streaming audio with Navigation

System (if so equipped) ........................4-74

CD care and cleaning ..........................4-75

Steering wheel switch for audio control ..........4-76

Antenna ......................................4-77

NissanConnect

Mobile Apps (if so equipped) .....4-77

Registering with NissanConnect

Mobile

Apps. ........................................4-77

Connect Phone ...............................4-77

Application Download..........................4-78

NissanConnect

Services (if so equipped) . ........4-78

Siri® Eyes Free ..................................4-78

Requirements .................................4-79

Siri® Activation ...............................4-79

Operating Siri® Eyes Free......................4-79

Changing Siri® Eyes Free Settings

(models without navigation system) ..............4-80

Troubleshooting guide .........................4-81

Car phone or CB radio ............................4-82

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System without

Navigation System (if so equipped) .................4-82

Regulatory Information .........................4-84

Using the system ..............................4-84

Control buttons ...............................4-86

Connecting procedure .........................4-87

Voice commands ..............................4-88

Making a call. .................................4-89

Receiving a call ...............................4-90

During a call ..................................4-90

Ending a call ..................................4-90

Text messaging (if so equipped) .................4-90

Bluetooth® settings ...........................4-92

Manual control ................................4-94

Troubleshooting guide .........................4-94

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with

Navigation System (if so equipped) .................4-95

Regulatory Information .........................4-96

Voice commands ..............................4-97

Connecting Procedure .........................4-97

Vehicle phonebook ............................4-98

Making a call..................................4-98

Receiving a call ...............................4-98

During a call ..................................4-98

Ending a call ..................................4-98

Text messaging (if so equipped) .................4-99

Bluetooth® settings ..........................4-101

Phone settings ...............................4-102

Troubleshooting guide ........................4-103

NISSAN Voice Recognition System

(if so equipped) .................................4-104

Using the system .............................4-104

System features ..............................4-105

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

voice commands .............................4-106

Navigation System voice commands ............4-107

Audio system voice commands.................4-107

Information voice commands...................4-107

My Apps Voice Commands ....................4-107

Help voice commands ........................4-108

Troubleshooting guide ........................4-108

WARNING

●Positioning of the heating or air condi-

tioning controls and display controls

should not be done while driving in or-

der that full attention may be given to

the driving operation.

●Do not disassemble or modify this sys-

tem. If you do, it may result in accidents,

fire, or electrical shock.

●Do not use this system if you notice any

abnormality, such as a frozen screen or

lack of sound. Continued use of the

system may result in accident, fire or

electric shock.

●In case you notice any foreign object in

the system hardware, spill liquid on it,

or notice smoke or smell coming from it,

stop using the system immediately. Ig-

noring such conditions may lead to ac-

cidents, fire or electrical shock. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for servicing.

1. MAP button*

2. Display screen

3. button**

4. button

5. (brightness control) button

6. BACK button

7. ENTER / AUDIO button / TUNE / SCROLL

knob

8. POWER button / VOLUME control knob

LHA2900

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS —

COLOR SCREEN WITH NAVIGATION

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

9. CAMERA button

10. NAV button*

* For additional information, refer to the separate

Navigation System Owner’s Manual regarding

the Navigation system control buttons .

** For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation Sys-

tem” in this section regarding the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System control button.

When you use this system, make sure the engine

is running.

If you use the system with the engine not

running for a long time, it will discharge the

battery, and the engine will not start.

Reference symbols:

“Example” — Words marked in quotes refer to a

key shown only on the display. These keys can be

selected by touching the screen.

HOW TO USE THE TOUCH-

SCREEN

CAUTION

●The glass display screen may break if it

is hit with a hard or sharp object. If the

glass screen breaks, do not touch it.

Doing so could result in an injury.

●To clean the display, never use a rough

cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any

kind of solvent or paper towel with a

chemical cleaning agent. They will

scratch or deteriorate the panel.

●Do not splash any liquid such as water

or car fragrance on the display. Contact

with liquid will cause the system to

malfunction.

To help ensure safe driving, some functions can-

not be operated while driving.

The on-screen functions that are not available

while driving will be “grayed out” or muted.

Park the vehicle in a safe location and then oper-

ate the navigation system.

WARNING

●ALWAYS give your full attention to

driving.

●Avoid using vehicle features that could

distract you. If distracted, you could

lose control of your vehicle and cause

an accident.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5

Touch-screen operation

Menu Item Result

Selecting the item Touch an item to select . To select the “Audio” key, touch the “Audio” key on the screen. Press the BACK button to re-

turn to the previous screen.

Adjusting the item Touch the “+” key or the “⫺” key to adjust the settings of an item. Touch the up arrow to scroll up the page one item at a time.

Touch the down arrow to scroll down the page one item at a time.

Inputting characters Touch the letter or number key. There are some options available when inputting characters.

123/ABC Changes the available character set to numbers.

Space Inserts a space.

Delete Deletes the last inputted character with one touch. Touch and hold the “Delete” key to delete all of the characters.

OK Completes the character input.

LHA3712

4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Touch-screen maintenance

If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft

cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a

small amount of neutral detergent with a soft

cloth. Never spray the screen with water or de-

tergent. Dampen the cloth first and then wipe the

screen.

HOW TO USE THE BACK

BUTTON

Press the BACK button to return to the

previous screen.

HOW TO USE THE [ ] BUTTON

For additional information, refer to the separate

Navigation System Owner’s Manual regarding

the “SiriusXM® Travel Link”, and “Traffic” fea-

tures.

For additional information, refer to “NissanCon-

nect

Mobile Apps” in this section regarding

“My Apps” key.

For additional information, refer to “NISSAN

Voice Recognition System” in this section re-

garding the “Voice Commands” key.

To select and/or adjust several functions, fea-

tures and modes that are available for your ve-

hicle:

1. Press the [ ] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the desired item.

Type A (if so equipped)

LHA3711

Type B (if so equipped)

LHA4360

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7

Menu item Result

Audio For additional information, refer to “Audio system” in this section.

Navigation For additional information, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

Phone & Bluetooth For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System” in this section.

System Touch this key to select and/or adjust various functions of this system. A screen with additional options will appear.

Display Touch this key to adjust the appearance of the display.

Brightness Adjusts the brightness of the display.

Display Mode Adjusts to fit the level of lighting in the vehicle. Touch key to cycle through options. “Day” and “Night” modes are suited for the respec-

tive times of day while “Auto” controls the display automatically.

Scroll Direction Adjusts the direction of the menu scroll. Choose to either move up or down.

Clock Touch this key to adjust the time.

LHA3712

4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Menu item Result

Time Format The clock can be set to 12 hours or 24 hours.

Date Format Select from five possible formats for displaying the day, month, and year.

Clock Mode Adjust the mode for the clock. “Auto” uses the system’s GPS to automatically maintain the time. “Manual” allows you to set the clock

using the “Set Clock Manually” key.

Set Clock

Manually

Adjust the clock manually, Touch the “+” or “-” keys to adjust the hours, minutes, day, month and year up or down. “Clock Mode” must

be set to manual for this option to be available.

Daylight Sav-

ings Time

Adjusts the daylight savings time on or off.

Time Zone Choose the applicable time zone from the list.

Language Touch this key to change the language on the display.

Camera Touch this key to change the camera settings.

Display Mode Touch this key to select the touch-screen display mode (day, night, or automatic).

Brightness Adjust touch-screen brightness.

Contrast Adjust touch-screen contrast.

Color Adjust touch-screen color.

Temperature Unit Touch this key to change the temperature unit being displayed (Fahrenheit or Celsius).

Touchscreen click Toggles the touch-screen click feature on or off. When activated a click sound will be heard every time a key on the screen is touched.

System Beeps Toggle the system beep tones feature on or off. When activated, a beep sound will be heard when a pop-up message appears on the

screen or a button on the unit (such as the button) is pressed and held for 2 seconds.

Return to Factory Settings/

Clear Memory

Touch this key to return all settings to default and to clear the memory.

Software Licenses Touch this key to display software licensing information.

Traffic messages Touch this key to display traffic settings. For additional information, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

SXM Touch this key to start SiriusXM® radio. For additional information, refer to “Audio system” regarding SXM setup in this section.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9

BUTTON

To change the display brightness, press

the button. Pressing the button again will

change the display to the day or the night display.

Press and hold the button for more than

2 seconds to turn the display off. Press the button

again to turn the display on.

HOW TO USE THE POWER

BUTTON/VOLUME CONTROL KNOB

Press the POWER button to turn audio function

on and off. Turn the VOLUME control knob to

adjust audio volume.

HOW TO USE THE CAMERA

BUTTON

For additional information, refer to “Around

View® Monitor” in this section.

4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-

tions for proper use of the RearView

Monitor system could result in serious in-

jury or death.

●RearView Monitor is a convenience fea-

ture and is not a substitute for proper

backing. Always turn and look out the

windows and check mirrors to be sure

that it is safe to move before operating

the vehicle. Always back up slowly.

●The system is designed as an aid to the

driver in showing large stationary ob-

jects directly behind the vehicle, to help

avoid damaging the vehicle.

LHA4361

REARVIEW MONITOR (if so

equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11

●The distance guide line and the vehicle

width line should be used as a reference

only when the vehicle is on a level

paved surface. The distance viewed on

the monitor is for reference only and

may be different than the actual dis-

tance between the vehicle and dis-

played objects.

CAUTION

Do not scratch the camera lens when

cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the

camera.

The RearView Monitor system automatically

shows a rear view of the vehicle when the shift

lever is shifted into the R (Reverse) position. The

radio can still be heard while the RearView Moni-

tor is active.

To display the rear view, the RearView Monitor

system uses a camera located just above the

vehicle’s license plate 䊊

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM

OPERATION

With the ignition switch in the ON position, move

the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position to

operate the RearView Monitor.

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED

LINES

Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width

and distances to objects with reference to the

vehicle body line 䊊

Aare displayed on the monitor.

Distance guide lines

Indicate distances from the vehicle body.

●Red line 䊊

1: approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

●Yellow line 䊊

2: approx. 3 ft (1 m)

●Green line 䊊

3: approx. 7 ft (2 m)

●Green line 䊊

4: approx. 10 ft (3 m)

LHA3694 LHA2944

4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Vehicle width guide lines 䊊

Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN

PREDICTED AND ACTUAL

DISTANCES

The displayed guidelines and their locations on

the ground are for approximate reference only.

Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or project-

ing objects will be actually located at distances

different from those displayed in the monitor rela-

tive to the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When

in doubt, turn around and view the objects as you

are backing up, or park and exit the vehicle to

view the positioning of objects behind the ve-

hicle.

Backing up on a steep uphill

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the dis-

tance guide lines and the vehicle width guide

lines are shown closer than the actual distance.

Note that any object on the hill is further than it

appears on the monitor.

Backing up on a steep downhill

When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide

lines are shown farther than the actual distance.

Note that any object on the hill is closer than it

appears on the monitor.

LHA3695 LHA3696

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13

Backing up near a projecting object

The vehicle may seem to nearly clear the object in

the display. However, the vehicle may hit the

object if it projects over the actual backing up

course.

Backing up behind a projecting object

The position 䊊

Cis shown farther than the position

䊊

Bin the display. However, the position 䊊

Cis

actually at the same distance as the position 䊊

The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to

the position 䊊

Aif the object projects over the

actual backing up course.

LHA2946 LHA3697

4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN

1. Firmly apply your foot to the brake and put

the vehicle into R (Reverse).

2. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

3. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to highlight

the “Brightness” or “Contrast” option.

4. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

5. Adjust the level using the TUNE/SCROLL

knob and then press the ENTER/SETTING

button to apply the adjustment.

NOTE:

Do not adjust any of the display settings of

the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is

moving. Make sure the parking brake is

firmly applied.

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM

LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for

RearView Monitor. Failure to operate the

vehicle in accordance with these system

limitations could result in serious injury or

death.

●The system cannot completely elimi-

nate blind spots and may not show ev-

ery object.

●Underneath the bumper and the corner

areas of the bumper cannot be viewed

on the RearView Monitor because of its

monitoring range limitation. The system

will not show small objects below the

bumper, and may not show objects

close to the bumper or on the ground.

●Objects viewed in the RearView Moni-

tor differ from actual distance because

a wide-angle lens is used.

●Objects in the RearView Monitor will

appear visually opposite compared to

when viewed in the rearview and out-

side mirrors.

●Use the displayed lines as a reference.

The lines are highly affected by the

number of occupants, fuel level, vehicle

position, road conditions and road

grade.

●Make sure that the liftgate is securely

closed when backing up.

●Do not put anything on the rearview

camera. The rearview camera is in-

stalled above the license plate.

●When washing the vehicle with high

pressure water, be sure not to spray it

around the camera. Otherwise, water

may enter the camera unit causing wa-

ter condensation on the lens, a mal-

function, fire or an electric shock.

●Do not strike the camera. It is a preci-

sion instrument. Otherwise, it may mal-

function or cause damage resulting in a

fire or an electric shock.

LHA3639

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15

The following are operating limitations and do not

represent a system malfunction:

●When the temperature is extremely high or

low, the screen may not clearly display ob-

jects.

●When strong light directly shines on the

camera, objects may not be displayed

clearly.

●Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the

screen. This is due to strong reflected light

from the bumper.

●The screen may flicker under fluorescent

light.

●The colors of objects on the RearView Moni-

tor may differ somewhat from the actual

color of objects.

●Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a

dark environment.

●There may be a delay when switching be-

tween views.

●If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on the cam-

era, the RearView Monitor may not display

objects clearly. Clean the camera.

●Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off

any wax with a clean cloth dampened with a

diluted mild cleaning agent, then wipe with a

dry cloth.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

●Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner

to clean the camera. This will cause

discoloration.

●Do not damage the camera as the moni-

tor screen may be adversely affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the camera

䊊

1, the RearView Monitor may not display ob-

jects clearly. Clean the camera by wiping it with a

cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning

agent and then wiping it with a dry cloth.

LHA3694

4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

1. CAMERA button

LHA4362

AROUND VIEW® MONITOR (if so

equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-

tions for the proper use of the Around

View® Monitor system could result in se-

rious injury or death

●The Around View® Monitor is a conve-

nience feature and is not a substitute

for proper vehicle operation because it

has areas where objects cannot be

viewed. The four corners of the vehicle

in particular, are areas where objects do

not always appear in the bird’s-eye,

front, or rear views. Always check your

surroundings to be sure that it is safe to

move before operating the vehicle. Al-

ways operate the vehicle slowly.

●The driver is always responsible for

safety during parking and other

maneuvers.

CAUTION

Do not scratch the camera lens when

cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the

camera.

The Around View® Monitor system is designed

as an aid to the driver in situations such as slot

parking or parallel parking.

The monitor displays various views of the position

of the vehicle in a split screen format. Not all

views are available at all times.

Available views:

●Front View

An approximately 150–degree view of the

front of the vehicle.

●Rear View

An approximately 150–degree view of the

rear of the vehicle.

●Bird’s-Eye View

The surrounding views of the vehicle from

above.

●Front-Side View

The view around and ahead of the front

passenger’s side wheel.

To display the multiple views, the Around View®

Monitor system uses cameras located in the front

grille, on the vehicle’s outside mirrors and one

just above the vehicle’s license plate 䊊

AROUND VIEW® MONITOR

SYSTEM OPERATION

With the ignition switch in the ON position, move

the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position or press

the CAMERA button to operate the Around

View® Monitor.

LHA3700

4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

The screen displayed on the Around View®

Monitor will automatically return to the previous

screen 3 minutes after the CAMERA button has

been pressed with the shift lever in a position

other than the R (Reverse) position.

Available views

WARNING

●The distance guide lines and the vehicle

width lines should be used as a refer-

ence only when the vehicle is on a

paved, level surface. The apparent dis-

tance viewed on the monitor may be

different than the actual distance be-

tween the vehicle and displayed

objects.

●Use the displayed lines and the bird’s-

eye view as a reference. The lines and

the bird’s-eye view are greatly affected

by the number of occupants, cargo, fuel

level, vehicle position, road condition

and road grade.

●If the tires are replaced with different

sized tires, the predicted course lines

and the bird’s-eye view may be dis-

played incorrectly.

●When driving the vehicle up a hill, ob-

jects viewed in the monitor are further

than they appear. When driving the ve-

hicle down a hill, objects viewed in the

monitor are closer than they appear.

●Objects in the rear view will appear vi-

sually opposite compared to when

viewed in the monitor and outside

mirrors.

●Use the mirrors or actually look to prop-

erly judge distances to other objects.

●On a snow-covered or slippery road,

there may be a difference between the

predicted course lines and the actual

course line.

●The vehicle width and predicted course

lines are wider than the actual width

and course.

●The displayed lines will appear slightly

off to the right, because the rearview

camera is not installed in the rear center

of the vehicle.

Front and rear view

Guiding lines that indicate the approximate ve-

hicle width and distance to objects with refer-

ence to the vehicle body line 䊊

Aare displayed on

the monitor.

Distance guide lines

Indicate distances from the vehicle body:

●Red line 䊊

1: approximately 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

●Yellow line 䊊

2: approximately 3 ft (1 m)

●Green line 䊊

3: approximately 7 ft (2 m)

●Green line 䊊

4: approximately 10 ft (3 m)

Front view

SAA1840

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19

Vehicle width guide lines 䊊

Indicate the approximate vehicle width when

backing up.

Predicted course lines 䊊

Indicate the predicted course when operating the

vehicle. The predicted course lines will be dis-

played on the monitor when the steering wheel is

turned. The predicted course lines will move de-

pending on how much the steering wheel is

turned and will not be displayed while the steer-

ing wheel is in the straight-ahead position.

The front view will not be displayed when the

vehicle speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h).

NOTE:

When the monitor displays the front view

and the steering wheel turns about 90 de-

grees or less from the straight-ahead posi-

tion, both the right and left predicted

course lines 䊊

6are displayed. When the

steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or

more, a line is displayed only on the oppo-

site side of the turn.

Bird’s-eye view

The bird’s-eye view shows the overhead view of

the vehicle, which helps confirm the vehicle po-

sition and the predicted course to a parking

space.

The vehicle icon 䊊

1shows the position of the

vehicle. Note that the apparent distance between

objects viewed in the bird’s-eye view may differ

somewhat from the actual distance to the vehicle.

The areas that the cameras cannot cover 䊊

2are

indicated in black.

Rear view

SAA1896 LHA3802

4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

The non-viewable area 䊊

2is highlighted in yellow

for several seconds after the bird’s-eye view is

displayed. It will be shown only the first time after

the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

WARNING

●Objects in the bird’s-eye view will ap-

pear further than the actual distance.

●Tall objects, such as a curb or vehicle,

may be misaligned or not displayed at

the seam of the views.

●Objects that are above the camera can-

not be displayed.

●The view of the bird’s-eye view may be

misaligned when the camera position

alters.

●A line on the ground may be misaligned

and is not seen as being straight at the

seam of the views. The misalignment

will increase as the line proceeds away

from the vehicle.

●Tire angle display does not indicate the

actual tire angle.

Front-side view

Guiding lines

Guiding lines that indicate the approximate width

and the front end of the vehicle are displayed on

the monitor.

The front-of-vehicle line 䊊

1shows the front part

of the vehicle.

The side-of-vehicle line 䊊

2shows the approxi-

mate vehicle width including the outside mirrors.

The extensions 䊊

3of both the front 䊊

1and side

䊊

2lines are shown with a green dotted line.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN

PREDICTED AND ACTUAL

DISTANCES

The displayed guidelines and their locations on

the ground are for approximate reference only.

Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or project-

ing objects will be actually located at distances

different from those displayed in the monitor rela-

tive to the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When

in doubt, turn around and view the objects as you

are backing up, or park and exit the vehicle to

view the positioning of objects behind the ve-

hicle.

LHA2652

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21

Backing up on a steep uphill

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the dis-

tance guide lines and the vehicle width guide

lines are shown closer than the actual distance.

Note that any object on the hill is further than it

appears on the monitor.

Backing up on a steep downhill

When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide

lines are shown farther than the actual distance.

Note that any object on the hill is closer than it

appears on the monitor.

Backing up near a projecting object

The predicted course lines 䊊

Ado not touch the

object in the display. However, the vehicle may hit

the object if it projects over the actual backing up

course.

LHA3695 LHA3696 LHA1201

4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Backing up behind a projecting object

The position 䊊

Cis shown farther than the position

䊊

Bin the display. However, the position 䊊

Cis

actually at the same distance as the position 䊊

The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to

the position 䊊

Aif the object projects over the

actual backing up course.

HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED

COURSE LINES

WARNING

●If the tires are replaced with different

sized tires, the predicted course lines

may be displayed incorrectly.

●On a snow-covered or slippery road,

there may be a difference between the

predicted course line and the actual

course line.

●If the battery is disconnected or be-

comes discharged, the predicted course

lines may be displayed incorrectly. If

this occurs, please perform the follow-

ing procedures:

– Turn the steering wheel from lock to

lock while the engine is running.

– Drive the vehicle on a straight road

for more than 5 minutes.

●When the steering wheel is turned with

the ignition switch in the ON position,

the predicted course lines may be dis-

played incorrectly.

1. Visually check that the parking space is safe

before parking your vehicle.

2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed on

the screen 䊊

Awhen the shift lever is moved

to the R (Reverse) position.

LHA3697 LHA1197

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23

3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the

steering wheel so that the predicted course

lines 䊊

Benter the parking space 䊊

4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make the

vehicle width guide lines 䊊

Dparallel to the

parking space 䊊

Cwhile referring to the pre-

dicted course lines.

5. When the vehicle is parked in the space

completely, move the shift lever to the P

(Park) position and apply the parking brake.

HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY

With the ignition switch in the ON position, press

the CAMERA button or move the shift lever to the

R (Reverse) position to operate the Around

View® Monitor.

The Around View® Monitor displays different

split screen views depending on the position of

the shift lever. Press the CAMERA button to

switch between the available views.

If the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position, the

available views are:

●Rear view/bird’s-eye view split screen

●Rear view/front-side view split screen

If the shift lever is in the P (Park) position, the

available views are:

●Front view/bird’s-eye view split screen

●Front view/front-side view split screen

If the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position, the

only available view is front view/front-side view

split screen.

The display will switch from the Around View®

Monitor screen when:

●The shift lever is in the D (Drive) position and

the vehicle speed increases above approxi-

mately 6 mph (10 km/h)

●A different screen is selected.

LHA1198

4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN

1. Firmly apply the brake and place the shift

lever in R (reverse).

2. Press the button on the control panel.

3. The screen will display the Night settings.

4. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust the

setting up or down.

5. Press the button again to access the

Auto settings.

NOTE:

Do not adjust any of the display settings of

the Around View® Monitor while the ve-

hicle is moving. Make sure the parking

brake is firmly applied.

AROUND VIEW® MONITOR

SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

LHA3679

LHA3750

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for

Around View® Monitor. Failure to operate

the vehicle in accordance with these sys-

tem limitations could result in serious in-

jury or death.

●Do not use the Around View® Monitor

with the outside mirrors in the stored

position, and make sure that the liftgate

is securely closed when operating the

vehicle using the Around View®

Monitor.

●The apparent distance between objects

viewed on the Around View® Monitor

differs from the actual distance.

●The cameras are installed on the front

grille, the outside mirrors and above the

rear license plate. Do not put anything

on the vehicle that covers the cameras.

●When washing the vehicle with high

pressure water, be sure not to spray it

around the cameras. Otherwise, water

may enter the camera unit causing wa-

ter condensation on the lens, a mal-

function, fire or an electric shock.

●Do not strike the cameras. They are

precision instruments. Doing so could

cause a malfunction or cause damage

resulting in a fire or an electric shock.

There are some areas where the system will not

show objects and the system does not warn of

moving objects. When in the front or rear view

display, an object below the bumper or on the

ground may not be viewed 䊊

1. When in the

bird’s-eye view, a tall object near the seam 䊊

2of

the camera viewing areas will not appear in the

monitor.

The following are operating limitations and do not

represent a system malfunction:

●There may be a delay when switching be-

tween views.

●When the temperature is extremely high or

low, the screen may not display objects

clearly.

●When strong light directly shines on the

camera, objects may not be displayed

clearly.

●The screen may flicker under fluorescent

light.

●The colors of objects on the Around View®

Monitor may differ somewhat from the actual

color of objects.

●Objects on the Around View® Monitor may

not be clear and the color of the object may

differ in a dark environment.

●There may be differences in sharpness be-

tween each camera view of the bird’s-eye

view.

●Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off

any wax with a clean cloth that has been

dampened with a diluted mild cleaning

agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.

4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

System temporarily unavailable

When the “!” icon is displayed on the screen,

there are abnormal conditions in the Around

View® Monitor. This will not hinder normal driving

operation but the system should be inspected. It

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

When the “[X]” icon is displayed on the screen,

the camera image may be receiving temporary

electronic disturbances from surrounding de-

vices. This will not hinder normal driving opera-

tion but the system should be inspected if it

occurs frequently. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

●Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner

to clean the camera. This will cause

discoloration.

●Do not damage the cameras as the

monitor screen may be adversely

affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of the

cameras 䊊

1, the Around View® Monitor may not

display objects clearly. Clean the camera by wip-

ing with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild

cleaning agent and then wiping with a dry cloth.

LHA3801 LHA3592 LHA3700

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27

1. CAMERA button

LHA4362

MOVING OBJECT DETECTION (MOD)

(if so equipped)

4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-

tions for proper use of the Moving Object

Detection (MOD) system could result in

serious injury or death

●The MOD system is not a substitute for

proper vehicle operation and is not de-

signed to prevent contact with objects

surrounding the vehicle. When maneu-

vering, always use the outside mirrors

and rearview mirror and turn and check

the surroundings to ensure it is safe to

maneuver.

●The system is deactivated at speeds

above 5 mph (8 km/h). It is reactivated

at lower speeds.

●The MOD system is not designed to

detect surrounding stationary objects.

The MOD system can inform the driver of moving

objects near the vehicle when backing out of

garages, maneuvering in parking lots and in other

such instances.

The MOD system detects moving objects by

using image processing technology on the image

shown in the display.

MOD SYSTEM OPERATION

The MOD system will turn on automatically under

the following conditions:

●When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)

position.

●When the CAMERA button is pressed to

activate the camera view on the display.

●When vehicle speed decreases below ap-

proximately 6mph (10 km/h) and the camera

screen is displayed.

The MOD system operates in the following con-

ditions when the camera view is displayed:

●When the shift lever is in the P (Park) or N

(Neutral) position and the vehicle is stopped,

the MOD system detects moving objects in

the bird’s-eye view. The MOD system will

not operate if the outside mirrors are moving

in or out, in the stowed position, or if either

front door is opened.

●When the shift lever is in the D (Drive) posi-

tion and the vehicle speed is below approxi-

mately 6mph (10 km/h), the MOD system

detects moving objects in the front view.

Front and bird’s-eye views

LHA4190

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29

●When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)

position and the vehicle speed is below ap-

proximately 6mph (10 km/h), the MOD sys-

tem detects moving objects in the rear view.

The MOD system will not operate if the

liftgate is open.

The MOD system does not detect moving ob-

jects in the front-side view. The MOD icon is not

displayed on the screen when in this view.

When the MOD system detects moving objects

near the vehicle, a chime will be heard when in

front or rear view and a yellow frame will be

displayed on the view where the objects are

detected. While the MOD system continues to

detect moving objects, the yellow frame contin-

ues to be displayed.

NOTE:

While the RCTA chime (if so equipped) is

beeping, the MOD system does not chime.

In the bird’s-eye view, the yellow frame 䊊

1is

displayed on each camera image (front, rear,

right, left) depending on where moving objects

are detected.

The yellow frame 䊊

2is displayed on each view in

the front view and rear view modes.

A blue MOD icon 䊊

3is displayed in the view

where the MOD system is operative. A gray MOD

icon is displayed in the view where the MOD

system is not operative.

If the MOD system is turned off, the MOD icon 䊊

is not displayed.

TURNING MOD ON AND OFF (if so

equipped)

Some vehicles include the option to allow the

MOD system to be turned on or off.

To turn the MOD system on or off:

1. Press the or button on the

steering wheel.

2. Using the buttons, select “Driver As-

sistance” and press the OK button.

3. Select “Parking Aids”.

4. Toggle ON or OFF “Moving Object” using

the OK button.

Rear and bird’s-eye views

LHA4191

Rear and front-side views

LHA4193

4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

MOD SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for

MOD. Failure to operate the vehicle in

accordance with these system limitations

could result in serious injury or death.

●Do not use the MOD system when tow-

ing a trailer. The system may not func-

tion properly.

●Excessive noise (for example, audio

system volume or open vehicle window)

will interfere with the chime sound, and

it may not be heard.

●The MOD system performance will be

limited according to environmental con-

ditions and surrounding objects such

as:

– When there is low contrast between

background and the moving objects.

– When there is a blinking source of

light.

– When strong light such as another

vehicle’s headlight or sunlight is

present.

– When camera orientation is not in its

usual position, such as when a mirror

is folded.

– When there is dirt, water drops or

snow on the camera lens.

– When the position of the moving ob-

jects in the display is not changed.

●The MOD system might detect flowing

water droplets on the camera lens,

white smoke from the muffler, moving

shadows, etc.

●The MOD system may not function

properly depending on the speed, direc-

tion, distance or shape of the moving

objects.

●If your vehicle sustains damage to the

parts where the camera is installed,

leaving it misaligned or bent, the sens-

ing zone may be altered and the MOD

system may not detect objects properly.

●When the temperature is extremely

high or low, the screen may not display

objects clearly. This is not a

malfunction.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

●Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner

to clean the camera. This will cause

discoloration.

●Do not damage the camera as the moni-

tor screen may be adversely affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of the

cameras 䊊

1, the MOD system may not operate

properly. Clean the camera by wiping with a cloth

dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and

then wiping with a dry cloth.

LHA3700

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31

Adjust air flow direction by moving the vent

slides.

Open or close the vents by using the dial. Move

the dial toward the to open the vents or

toward the to close them.

Side

LHA4301

Center

LHA4302

Rear

LHA1134

VENTS

4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

1. Fan speed control / system OFF dial /

air conditioning (A/C) button

2. Air flow control buttons

3. Temperature control dial / MAX A/C button

4. Air recirculation button

5. Rear window and outside mirror (if so

equipped) defroster switch

6. Front windshield defrost button

WARNING

●The air conditioner cooling function op-

erates only when the engine is running.

●Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assistance

of others alone in your vehicle. Pets

should also not be left alone. They

could accidentally injure themselves or

others through inadvertent operation of

the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,

temperatures in a closed vehicle could

quickly become high enough to cause

severe or possibly fatal injuries to

people or animals.

●Do not use the recirculation mode for

long periods as it may cause the interior

air to become stale and the windows to

fog up.

NOTE:

●Odors from inside and outside the vehicle

can build up in the air conditioner unit. Odor

can enter the passenger compartment

through the vents.

LHA2243

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

(manual) (if so equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33

●When parking, set the heater and air condi-

tioner controls to turn off air recirculation to

allow fresh air into the passenger compart-

ment. This should help reduce odors inside

the vehicle.

CONTROLS

Fan control dial

The fan control dial turns the fan on and off,

and controls fan speed.

Air flow control buttons

The air flow control buttons allow you to select

the air flow outlets.

MAX

A/C

— Air flows mainly from center and

side vents with maximum cooling

and turns on.

— Air flows mainly from center and

side vents.

— Air flows mainly from center and

side vents and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from foot outlets

and partly from defroster.

— Air flows mainly from defroster out-

lets and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from defroster

outlets.

Temperature control dial

The temperature control dial allows you to adjust

the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the

temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase

the temperature, turn the dial to the right.

Air recirculation button

On position (Indicator light on):

Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.

Press the button to the ON position when:

●driving on a dusty road.

●to prevent traffic fumes from entering pas-

senger compartment.

●for maximum cooling when using the air con-

ditioner.

Off position (Indicator light off):

Outside air is drawn into the passenger compart-

ment and distributed through the selected outlet.

Use the off position for normal heater or air con-

ditioner operation.

Air conditioner button

Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to

the desired position and press the button

to turn on the air conditioner. To turn off the air

conditioner, press the button again.

The air conditioner cooling function oper-

ates only when the engine is running.

Rear window and outside mirror (if so

equipped) defroster switch

For additional information, refer to “Rear window

and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster

switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section

of this manual.

HEATER OPERATION

Heating

This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot

outlets. Some air also flows from the defrost

outlets and the side vent outlets.

1. Press the button to change to fresh

air intake mode. The indicator light

will turn off for normal heating.

2. Press the air flow control button.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired

position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position between the middle and the

hot position.

4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Ventilation

This mode directs outside air to the side and

center vents.

1. Press the button to change to fresh

air intake mode. The indicator light

will turn off.

2. Press the air flow control button.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired

position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position.

Defrosting or defogging

This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets to

defrost/defog the windows.

1. Press the defroster button.

2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired

position.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position between the middle and the

hot position.

●To quickly remove ice or fog from the win-

dows, turn the fan control dial to the highest

setting and the temperature control to the

full HOT position.

●When the position is selected, the air

conditioner automatically turns on if the out-

side temperature is more than 36°F (2°C).

This dehumidifies the air which helps defog

the windshield. The indicator auto-

matically turns off, allowing outside air to be

drawn into the passenger compartment to

further improve the defogging performance.

The recirculation mode cannot be activated

in the position.

Bi-level heating

The bi-level mode directs warmed air to the side

and center vents and to the front and rear floor

outlets.

1. Press the button to change to fresh

air intake mode. The will turn off.

2. Press the air flow control button.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired

position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position.

Heating and defogging

This mode heats the interior and defogs the wind-

shield.

1. Press the air flow control button.

2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired

position.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position between the middle and the

hot position.

●When the position is selected, the air

conditioner automatically turns on if the out-

side temperature is more than 36°F (2°C).

This dehumidifies the air which helps defog

the windshield. The indicator auto-

matically turns off, allowing outside air to be

drawn into the passenger compartment to

further improve the defogging performance.

Operating tips

Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades

and air inlet in front of the windshield. This

improves heater operation.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION

Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to

the desired position, and press the button

to activate the air conditioner. When the air con-

ditioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying func-

tions are added to the heater operation.

The air conditioner cooling function oper-

ates only when the engine is running.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35

Cooling

This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.

1. Press the air flow control button.

2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired

position.

3. Press the button.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position.

●For quick cooling, press the MAX A/C but-

ton. When the MAX A/C button is pressed, it

will activate the mode. The amount of

air coming through the vents is the highest it

can go when in MAX A/C mode regardless

of the position of the FAN dial.

Dehumidified heating

This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air.

1. Press the button to the OFF position.

2. Press the air flow control button.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired

position.

4. Press the A/C button. The indicator light

comes on.

5. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position.

Dehumidified defogging

This mode is used to defog the windows and

dehumidify the air.

1. Press the front defrost button.

2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired

position.

●When the or are selected, the

air conditioner automatically turns on if the

outside temperature is more than 36°F

(2°C). This dehumidifies the air which helps

defog the windshield. The mode au-

tomatically turns off, allowing outside air to

be drawn into the passenger compartment

to further improve the defogging perfor-

mance.

●The air conditioner is always on in

or mode, regardless of whether the

indicator light is on or off.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position.

Operating tips

●Keep the windows and moonroof closed

while the air conditioner is in operation.

●After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3 min-

utes with the windows open to vent hot air

from the passenger compartment. Then,

close the windows. This allows the air con-

ditioner to cool the interior more quickly.

●The air conditioning system should be

operated for approximately 10 minutes

at least once a month. This helps pre-

vent damage to the system due to lack

of lubrication.

●A visible mist may be seen coming from the

ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air

is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a

malfunction.

●If the engine coolant temperature

gauge indicates engine coolant tem-

perature over the normal range, turn

the air conditioner off. For additional

information, refer to “If your vehicle

overheats” in the “In case of emer-

gency” section of this manual.

●If the engine coolant temperature becomes

too high, will be activated and the

indicator light will come on automatically.

●When the ignition is OFF, button characters

will not illuminate.

4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

AIR FLOW CHARTS

The following charts show the button and dial

positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,

cooling or defrosting. The air recirculation in-

dicator should always be in the OFF posi-

tion for heating and defrosting.

LHA4364

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37

LHA4365 LHA4366

4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA4367 LHA4368

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39

1. Front defroster button

2. Temperature control dial (driver’s side) /

ON-OFF button

3. MODE (manual air flow control) button

4. Display screen

5. A/C (air conditioner) button

6. Temperature control dial (passenger’s

side)/DUAL (passenger’s side tempera-

ture control) button

7. Rear window and outside mirror

(if so equipped) defroster switch

8. Fresh air intake button

9. AUTO (automatic mode) button

10. Fan speed control buttons

11. Air recirculation button

WARNING

●The air conditioner cooling function op-

erates only when the engine is running.

●Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assistance

of others alone in your vehicle. Pets

should also not be left alone. They

could accidentally injure themselves or

others through inadvertent operation of

the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,

temperatures in a closed vehicle could

quickly become high enough to cause

severe or possibly fatal injuries to

people or animals.

●Do not use the recirculation mode for

long periods as it may cause the interior

air to become stale and the windows to

fog up.

LHA2875

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

(automatic) (if so equipped)

4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NOTE:

●Odors from inside and outside the vehicle

can build up in the air conditioner unit. Odor

can enter the passenger compartment

through the vents.

●When parking, set the heater and air condi-

tioner controls to turn off air recirculation to

allow fresh air into the passenger compart-

ment. This should help reduce odors inside

the vehicle.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Cooling and/or dehumidified heating

(AUTO)

This mode may be used all year round as the

system automatically works to keep a constant

temperature. Air flow distribution and fan speed

are also controlled automatically.

1. Press the AUTO button on. The indicator on

the button will illuminate.

2. Turn the temperature control dial to the left

or right to set the desired temperature.

●The temperature of the passenger compart-

ment will be maintained automatically. Air

flow distribution and fan speed are also con-

trolled automatically.

●A visible mist may be seen coming from the

vents in hot, humid conditions as the air is

cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a mal-

function.

3. You can individually set driver’s and front

passenger’s side temperature using each

temperature control dial. When the DUAL

button or passenger’s side temperature dial

is turned, the DUAL indicator will come on.

To turn off the passenger’s side temperature

control, press the DUAL button.

Heating (A/C OFF)

The air conditioner does not activate. When you

need to heat only, use this mode.

1. Press the AUTO button.

2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the

desired temperature.

●The temperature of the passenger compart-

ment will be maintained automatically. Air

flow distribution and fan speed are also con-

trolled automatically.

●Do not set the temperature lower than the

outside air temperature. Otherwise, the sys-

tem may not work properly.

●Not recommended if windows fog up.

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging

1. Press the front defroster button on.

The indicator light on the button will come

on.

2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the

maximum temperature to aid in defrosting or

defogging.

●To quickly remove ice from the outside of the

windows, use the fan speed control dial to

set the fan speed to maximum.

●As soon as possible after the windshield is

clean, press the AUTO button to return to

the automatic mode.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41

●When the front defroster button is

pressed, the air conditioner will automati-

cally be turned on at outside temperatures

above 36°F (2°C). The air recirculate mode

automatically turns off, allowing outside air

to be drawn into the passenger compart-

ment to further improve the defogging per-

formance. When the air recirculate mode

automatically turns off, the air fresh mode will

automatically turn on.

Remote engine start logic (if so

equipped)

Vehicles equipped with automatic climate con-

trols and remote start function may go into auto-

matic heating or cooling mode when remote start

is activated depending on outside and cabin tem-

peratures. During this period, the climate control

display and buttons will be inoperable until the

ignition switch is turned on. In remote start de-

frosting mode, the rear defroster and heated

steering wheel (if so equipped) may be activated

automatically.

MANUAL OPERATION

Fan speed control

Press the fan speed control buttons to

manually control the fan speed.

Press the AUTO button to return to automatic

control of the fan speed.

Air recirculation

Press the air recirculation button to recir-

culate interior air inside the vehicle. The

indicator light on the button will come on.

The air recirculation cannot be activated when

the air conditioner is in the front defrosting

mode.

Fresh air intake

Press the fresh air intake button to draw

outside air into the passenger compartment.

Air flow control

Pressing the MODE button manually controls air

flow and selects the air outlet:

— Air flows mainly from center and

side vents.

— Air flows mainly from center and

side vents and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from foot outlets

and partly from defroster.

— Air flows mainly from defroster

and foot outlets.

To turn system off

Press the ON-OFF button.

Rear window and outside mirror (if so

equipped) defroster switch

For additional information, refer to “Rear window

and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster

switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section

of this manual.

OPERATING TIPS

●When the engine coolant temperature and

outside air temperature are low, the air flow

from the foot outlets may not operate for a

maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is

not a malfunction. After the coolant tempera-

ture warms up, air flow from the foot outlets

will operate normally.

●Keep the moonroof closed while the air con-

ditioner is in operation.

●If you feel that the air flow mode you have

selected and the outlets the air is coming out

do not match, select the mode.

●When you change the air flow mode, you

may feel air flow from the feet vents for just a

moment. This is not a malfunction.

4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

The sunload sensor, located on the top and cen-

ter of the instrument panel, helps the system

maintain a constant temperature. Do not put any-

thing on or around this sensor.

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve-

hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with

the environment in mind.

This refrigerant does not harm the earth’s

ozone layer.

Special charging equipment and lubricant is re-

quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi-

tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants

will cause severe damage to your air conditioner

system. For additional information, refer to “Air

conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommen-

dations” in the “Technical and consumer informa-

tion” section of this manual.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

to service your “environmentally friendly” air con-

ditioning system.

WARNING

The air conditioner system contains refrig-

erant under high pressure. To avoid per-

sonal injury, any air conditioner service

should be done only by an experienced

technician with proper equipment.

RADIO

With the ignition placed in the ON position, press

the or POWER button/VOLUME control

knob to turn the radio on.

Radio reception is affected by station signal

strength, distance from radio transmitter, build-

ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ-

ences. Intermittent changes in reception quality

normally are caused by these external influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the vehicle

may influence radio reception quality.

Radio reception

Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with

state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra-

dio reception. These circuits are designed to

extend reception range, and to enhance the qual-

ity of that reception.

However, there are some general characteristics

of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect

radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even

when the finest equipment is used. These char-

acteristics are completely normal in a given re-

ception area and do not indicate any malfunction

in your NISSAN radio system.

LHA2949

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER AUDIO SYSTEM

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43

Reception conditions will constantly change be-

cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,

signal distance and interference from other ve-

hicles can work against ideal reception. De-

scribed below are some of the factors that can

affect your radio reception.

Some cellular phones or other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to come

from the audio system speakers. Storing the de-

vice in a different location may reduce or elimi-

nate the noise.

FM RADIO RECEPTION

Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 – 30 mi

(40 – 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FM

having slightly more range than stereo FM. Exter-

nal influences may sometimes interfere with FM

station reception even if the FM station is within

25 mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is

directly related to the distance between the

transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-

of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same char-

acteristics as light. For example, they will reflect

off objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from

a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade

and/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interference from

buildings, large hills or due to antenna position

(usually in conjunction with increased distance

from the station transmitter), static or flutter can

be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the

treble control to reduce treble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflective

characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected

signals reach the receiver at the same time. The

signals may cancel each other, resulting in mo-

mentary flutter or loss of sound.

AM RADIO RECEPTION

AM signals, because of their low frequency, can

bend around objects and skip along the ground.

In addition, the signals can be bounced off the

ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of

these characteristics, AM signals are also sub-

ject to interference as they travel from transmitter

to receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing

through freeway underpasses or in areas with

many tall buildings. It can also occur for several

seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in

areas where no obstacles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical

power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION

When the satellite radio is used for the first time

or the battery has been replaced, the satellite

radio may not work properly. This is not a mal-

function. Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite

radio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal or

large building for satellite radio to receive all of

the necessary data.

No satellite radio reception is available and “NO

SAT” is displayed when the SAT band option is

selected unless optional satellite receiver and

antenna are installed and a SiriusXM® Satellite

Radio service subscription is active. Satellite ra-

dio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

Satellite radio performance may be affected if

cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio

signal.

If possible, do not put cargo over the satellite

antenna.

A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna can

affect satellite radio performance. Remove the

ice to restore satellite radio reception.

4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

Compact disc (CD) player

CAUTION

●Do not force a compact disc into the CD

insert slot. This could damage the CD

and/or CD player.

●Trying to load a CD with the CD door

closed could damage the CD and/or CD

player.

●Only one CD can be loaded into the CD

player at a time.

●Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)

round discs that have the “COMPACT

disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc

or packaging.

●During cold weather or rainy days, the

player may malfunction due to the hu-

midity. If this occurs, remove the CD

and dehumidify or ventilate the player

completely.

●The player may skip while driving on

rough roads.

●The CD player sometimes cannot func-

tion when the compartment tempera-

ture is extremely high or low.

Decrease/increase the temperature

before use.

●Do not expose the CD to direct sun-

light.

●CDs that are in poor condition or are

dirty, scratched or covered with finger-

prints may not work properly.

●The following CDs may not work prop-

erly:

●Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

●Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

●Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

●Do not use the following CDs as they

may cause the CD player to malfunc-

tion:

●3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter

●CDs that are not round

●CDs with a paper label

●CDs that are warped, scratched, or

have abnormal edges

●This audio system can only play pre-

recorded CDs. It has no capability to

record or burn CDs.

●If the CD cannot be played, one of the

following messages will be displayed.

LHA0099

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45

CHECK DISC

●Confirm that the CD is inserted cor-

rectly (the label side is facing up,

etc.).

●Confirm that the CD is not bent or

warped and it is free of scratches.

PRESS EJECT

This is an error due to excessive tem-

perature inside the player. Remove the

CD by pressing the EJECT button. After

a short time, reinsert the CD. The CD

can be played when the temperature of

the player returns to normal.

UNPLAYABLE

The file is unplayable in this audio sys-

tem (only MP3 or WMA (if so equipped)

CD).

Compact disc with MP3 or WMA

Terms

●MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures

Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the

most well-known compressed digital audio

file format. This format allows for near “CD

quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of

normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an

audio track from CD-ROM can reduce the

file size by approximately a 10:1 ratio with

virtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3

compression removes the redundant and

irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the

human ear doesn’t hear.

●WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is a

compressed audio format created by Micro-

soft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA

codec offers greater file compression than

the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more

digital audio tracks in the same amount of

space when compared to MP3s at the same

level of quality.

●Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of

bits per second used by a digital music file.

The size and quality of a compressed digital

audio file is determined by the bit rate used

when encoding the file.

●Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency

is the rate at which the samples of a signal

are converted from analog to digital (A/D

conversion) per second.

●Multisession — Multisession is one of the

methods for writing data to media. Writing

data once to the media is called a single

session, and writing more than once is called

a multisession.

●ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the

part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that

contains information about the digital music

file such as song title, artist, encoding bit

rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag infor-

mation is displayed on the Artist/song title

line on the display.

* Windows® and Windows Media® are regis-

tered trademarks and trademarks in the United

States of America and other countries of Micro-

soft Corporation of the USA.

4-46 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Playback order

Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or WMA

files is as illustrated.

●The names of folders not containing MP3 or

WMA files are not shown in the display.

●If there is a file in the top level of the disc,

“Root Folder” is displayed.

●The playback order is the order in which the

files were written by the writing software.

Therefore, the files might not play in the

desired order.

Playback order chart

WHA1078

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47

Specification chart

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW

Supported file systems ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.

Supported

versions*1

MP3

Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5

Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR

WMA Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9

Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR

Tag information ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)

Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)

Text character number limitation 128 characters

Displayable character codes*2 01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05:

UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.

*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.

4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Troubleshooting guide

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot play

Check if the disc was inserted correctly.

Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.

If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.

If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.

Files with extensions other than “.MP3”,“.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for

folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.

Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.

Check if the disc is protected by copyright.

Poor sound quality Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Bit rate may be too low.

It takes a relatively long time

before the music starts

playing.

If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts playing.

Music cuts off or skips The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match the

specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Skipping with high bit rate

files

Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Moves immediately to the

next song when playing

When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, there

will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.

Songs do not play back in

the desired order

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49

USB (Universal Serial Bus)

Connection Port

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect or operate the

USB device while driving. Doing so can be

a distraction. If distracted you could lose

control of your vehicle and cause an acci-

dent or serious injury.

CAUTION

●Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port may

damage the port. Make sure that the

USB device is connected correctly into

the USB port.

●Do not grab the USB port cover (if so

equipped) when pulling the USB device

out of the port. This could damage the

port and the cover.

●Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintentionally.

Pulling the cable may damage the port.

The vehicle is not equipped with a USB device.

USB devices should be purchased separately as

necessary.

This system cannot be used to format USB de-

vices. To format a USB device, use a personal

computer.

In some jurisdictions, the USB device for the front

seats plays only sound without images for regu-

latory reasons, even when the vehicle is parked.

This system supports various USB memory de-

vices, USB hard drives and iPod® players. Some

USB devices may not be supported by this sys-

tem.

●Partitioned USB devices may not play cor-

rectly.

●Some characters used in other languages

(Chinese, Japanese, etc.) may not appear

properly in the display. Using English lan-

guage characters with a USB device is rec-

ommended.

General notes for USB use

●For additional information, refer to your de-

vice manufacturer’s owner information re-

garding the proper use and care of the de-

vice.

Notes for iPod® use

iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in

the U.S. and other countries.

●Improperly plugging in the iPod® may cause

a checkmark to be displayed on and off

(flickering). Always make sure that the

iPod® is connected properly.

●An iPod® nano (1st Generation) may remain

in fast forward or rewind mode if it is con-

nected during a seek operation. In this case,

please manually reset the iPod®.

●An iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will con-

tinue to fast-forward or rewind if it is discon-

nected during a seek operation.

●An incorrect song title may appear when the

Play Mode is changed while using an iPod®

nano (2nd Generation).

●Audiobooks may not play in the same order

as they appear on an iPod®.

●Large video files cause slow responses in an

iPod®. The vehicle center display may mo-

mentarily black out, but will soon recover.

●If an iPod® automatically selects large video

files while in the shuffle mode, the vehicle

center display may momentarily black out,

but will soon recover.

4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Bluetooth® streaming audio

●Some Bluetooth® audio devices may not be

recognized by the in-vehicle audio system.

●It is necessary to set up the wireless con-

nection between a compatible Bluetooth®

audio device and the in-vehicle Bluetooth®

module before using the Bluetooth® audio.

●Operating procedure of the Bluetooth® au-

dio will vary depending on the devices. Make

sure how to operate your audio device be-

fore using it with this system.

●The Bluetooth® audio may be stopped un-

der the following conditions:

●Receiving a call on the Hands-Free

Phone System.

●Checking the connection to the hands-

free phone.

●Do not place the Bluetooth® audio device in

an area surrounded by metal or far away from

the in-vehicle Bluetooth® module to prevent

tone quality degradation and wireless con-

nection disruption.

●While an audio device is connected through

the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the

battery power of the device may discharge

quicker than usual.

●This system supports the Bluetooth® Audio

Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP).

BLUETOOTH® is a

trademark owned by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

and licensed to

Visteon and Bosch.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH

COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type

A) (if so equipped)

1. CD eject button

2. XM button*

3. Display screen

4. CD insert slot

5. SEEK button

6. SCAN button

7. CAT button

8. BACK button

9. iPod MENU button

10. ENTER/SETTING button/ TUNE/SCROLL

knob

11. Station select (1 - 6) buttons

12. RDM (random) button

13. RPT (repeat) button

14. (power) button/ VOL (volume) control

knob

15. DISP (display) button

16. MEDIA button

17. FM•AM button

*No satellite radio reception is available when the

XM button is pressed to access satellite radio

stations unless optional satellite receiver and an-

tenna are installed and an SiriusXM® Satellite

Radio service subscription is active. Satellite ra-

dio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

For additional information, refer to “Audio opera-

tion precautions” regarding all operation precau-

tions in this section.

LHA4300

4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Audio main operation

(power) button / VOL (volume)

control knob

Place the ignition switch in the ON position and

press the (power) button while the system

is off to call up the mode (radio, CD, AUX,

Bluetooth® audio, USB or iPod®) that was play-

ing immediately before the system was turned off.

To turn the system off, press the (power)

button.

Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to adjust the

volume.

This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen-

sitive Volume. When this feature is active, the

audio volume changes as the driving speed

changes.

ENTER/SETTING button

Press the ENTER/SETTING button to show the

Settings screen on the display. Turn the

TUNE/SCROLL knob to navigate the options

and then press the ENTER/SETTING button to

make a selection.

Audio

Bass Adjusts the bass to the desired level.

Treble Adjusts the treble to the desired level.

Balance Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right speakers.

Fade Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers.

Speed Sens Vol. (Speed Sensitive Volume) Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as the speed of

the vehicle increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the more the volume in-

creases in relation to vehicle speed.

AUX Vol. Choose a setting from 0 to +3 to control the boost of incoming auxiliary device volume. A setting of 0 provides

no additional boost in volume. A setting of +3 provides the greatest boost in volume.

Brightness and Contrast Adjust the brightness or contrast to adjust the appearance of the display screen.

Clock adjust Press the ENTER/SETTING button to highlight the hours or minutes and then use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to

adjust the value. Press the ENTER/SETTING button again to set the value.

On-Screen Clock Toggles ON or OFF the clock display on the upper right corner of the display screen.

RDS Display Toggles ON or OFF the RDS information displayed on the screen while the radio is playing.

Language Select the desired language for the system from the available options.

Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be adjusted by pressing the ENTER/SETTING button and turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to select the item

to adjust. When the desired item is shown on the display, turn the tuning to adjust and then press the ENTER/SETTING button until the display returns to

the main audio screen. If the button is not pressed for approximately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display will automatically reappear.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53

iPod® MENU button

This button can only be used for iPod® opera-

tions. For additional information, refer to “iPod®

player operation without Navigation System” in

this section regarding the function of this button.

FM/AM/SAT radio operation

FM·AM button

Press the FM·AM button to change the band as

follows:

AM →FM1 →FM2 →AM

If another audio source is playing when the

FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source play-

ing will automatically be turned off and the last

radio station played will begin playing.

The FM stereo indicator (STEREO) is shown on

the screen during FM stereo reception. When the

stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio auto-

matically changes from stereo to monaural re-

ception.

XM band select

Press the XM button to change the band as

follows:

XM1* →XM2* →XM3* →XM1 (satellite, if so

equipped)

When the XM button is pressed while the ignition

switch is in ON position, the radio will come on at

the station last played.

The last station played will also come on when

the VOL (volume)/ (power) control

knob/button is pressed on.

*When the XM button is pressed, the satellite

radio reception will not be available unless an

optional satellite receiver and antenna are in-

stalled and a SiriusXM® Satellite Radio service

subscription is active. Satellite radio is not avail-

able in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

If a compact disc is playing when the XM button

is pressed, the compact disc will automatically be

turned off and the last radio station played will

come on.

TUNE/SCROLL knob (Tuning)

Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to the left or right

for manual tuning.

SEEK tuning

Press the or SEEK buttons to tune

from low to high or high to low frequencies and to

stop at the next broadcasting station.

SCAN tuning

Press the SCAN button to stop at each broad-

casting station for 5 seconds. SCAN will appear

on the screen while the radio is scan tuning.

Pressing the SCAN button again during this

5 second period will stop SCAN tuning and the

radio will remain tuned to that station. If the

SCAN button is not pressed within 5 seconds,

SCAN tuning moves to the next station.

1 to 6 Station memory operations

Six stations can be set for the AM band. Twelve

stations can be set for the FM band (six for FM1,

six for FM2).

1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2

using the FM·AM button.

2. Tune to the desired station using the

SEEK button or the TRACK button.

Press and hold any of the desired station

memory buttons (1 – 6) until the preset

number is updated on the display and a

beep is heard.

3. Programming is now complete.

4. Other buttons can be set in the same man-

ner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse

opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that

case, reset the desired stations.

4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Compact disc (CD) player operation

If the radio is already operating, it automatically

turns off and the compact disc begins to play.

MEDIA button

With a CD loaded, press the MEDIA button until

the CD mode is displayed on the screen.

CD/MP3 display mode

While listening to an MP3/WMA CD, certain text

may be displayed on the screen if the CD has

been encoded with text information. Depending

on how the MP3/WMA CD is encoded, informa-

tion such as Artist, Song and Folder will be dis-

played.

The track number and the total number of tracks

in the current folder or on the current disc are

displayed on the screen as well.

SEEK/CAT (Reverse or

Fast Forward) button

Press and hold the or SEEK/CAT

button for 1.5 seconds while the compact disc is

playing to reverse or fast forward the track being

played. The compact disc plays at an increased

speed while reversing or fast forwarding. When

the button is released, the compact disc returns

to normal play speed.

SEEK/CAT button

Press the SEEK/CAT button while a CD or

MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to the begin-

ning of the current track. Press

the SEEK/CAT button several times to skip

backward several tracks.

Press the SEEK/CAT button while a CD or

MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance one track.

Press the SEEK/CAT button several times

to skip forward several tracks. If the last track on

a CD is skipped, the first track on the disc is

played. If the last track in a folder of an

MP3/WMA CD is skipped, the first track of the

next folder is played.

TUNE/SCROLL knob (MP3/WMA CD only)

If a MP3/WMA CD with multiple folders is play-

ing, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to change

folders. Turn the knob to the left to skip back a

folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip ahead a

folder.

RPT (repeat) button

When the RPT (repeat) button is pressed while a

compact disc is playing, the play pattern can be

changed as follows:

CD:

1 Track Repeat ←→ OFF

CD with MP3 or WMA:

1 Folder Repeat →1 Track Repeat →OFF

1 Track Repeat: the current track will be re-

peated.

1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be re-

peated.

OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The indi-

cator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on

the screen unless no pattern is applied.

RDM (random) button

When the RDM (random) button is pressed while

a compact disc is playing, the play pattern can be

changed as follows:

CD:

1 Disc Random ←→ OFF

CD with MP3 or WMA:

1 Disc Random →1 Folder Random →OFF

1 Disc Random: all tracks on the disc will be

played randomly.

1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current folder

will be played randomly.

OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The

indicator on the display will turn off.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55

The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on

the screen unless no pattern is applied.

CD EJECT button

When the CD EJECT button is pressed

with a compact disc loaded, the compact disc

will eject and the last source will be played.

When the CD EJECT button is pressed

twice with a compact disc loaded, the compact

disc will be ejected further for easier CD removal.

If the disc is not removed within 20 seconds, the

disc will reload.

Additional features

For additional information, refer to “iPod® player

operation without Navigation System” regarding

the iPod® player available with this system in this

section.

For additional information, refer to “USB (Univer-

sal Serial Bus) Connection Port (models without

Navigation System)” regarding the USB connec-

tion port available with this system in this section.

For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth®

streaming audio without Navigation System”

about the Bluetooth® audio interface available

with this system in this section.

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH

COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type

B) (if so equipped)

1. FM-AM button

2. CD eject button

3. CD insert slot

4. Backward seek button

5. button

6. Forward seek button

LHA2901

4-56 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

7. BACK button

8. ENTER/AUDIO button/ TUNE/SCROLL

knob

9. Display screen

10. POWER button/ VOLUME control knob

11. AUX button

12. CD button

13. SXM button*

The [ ] button launches the Smartphone

Integration Mode. For additional information, re-

fer to “NissanConnect

Mobile Apps” in this

section.

*No satellite radio reception is available when the

SXM button is pressed to access satellite radio

stations unless optional satellite receiver and an-

tenna are installed and an SiriusXM® Satellite

Radio service subscription is active. Satellite ra-

dio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

For additional information, refer to “Audio opera-

tion precautions” regarding all operation precau-

tions in this section.

Audio main operation

POWER button/ VOLUME control knob

Place the ignition switch in the ON position, and

then press the POWER button while the system

is off to call up the mode (radio, CD, AUX,

Bluetooth® audio, USB or iPod) which was play-

ing immediately before the system was turned off.

To turn the system off, press the POWER button.

Turn the VOLUME control knob to adjust the

volume.

This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen-

sitive Volume (SSV) for audio. The audio volume

changes as the driving speed changes.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57

Audio settings

1. Press the [ ] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the “Audio” key.

Use the touch-screen to adjust the following

items to the desired setting:

Audio

Bass Adjusts the bass to the desired level.

Treble Adjusts the treble to the desired level.

Balance Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right speakers.

Fade Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers.

Speed Sensitive Vol. Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as the speed of the ve-

hicle increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the more the volume increases in relation to

vehicle speed.

AUX Volume Level/AUX Level Controls the volume level of incoming sound when an auxiliary device is connected to the system. Available options are

Low (Quiet), Medium, and High (Loud).

Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be adjusted by pressing the ENTER/AUDIO control knob and turning it to select the item to adjust. When the desired

item is shown on the display, turn the tuning to adjust and then press the ENTER/AUDIO button until the display returns to the main audio screen. If the button

is not pressed for approximately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display will automatically reappear.

4-58 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SXM settings

To view the SXM settings:

1. Press the [ ] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the “SXM” key.

The signal strength, activation status and other

information are displayed on the screen.

FM/AM/SAT radio operation

FM·AM button

Press the FM·AM button to change the band as

follows:

AM →FM1 →FM2 →AM

If another audio source is playing when the

FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source play-

ing will automatically be turned off and the last

radio station played will begin playing.

The FM stereo indicator (STEREO) is shown on

the screen during FM stereo reception. When the

stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio auto-

matically changes from stereo to monaural re-

ception.

SXM band select

Pressing the SXM button will change the band as

follows:

SXM1* →SXM2* →SXM3*→SXM1* (satellite,

if so equipped)

When the SXM button is pressed while the igni-

tion switch is in the ON position, the radio will

come on at the last station played.

The last station played will also come on when

the POWER button is pressed.

*When the SXM button is pressed, the satellite

radio mode will be skipped unless an optional

satellite receiver and antenna are installed and a

SiriusXM® Satellite Radio service subscription is

active. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska,

Hawaii and Guam.

If a compact disc is playing when the SXM button

is pressed, the compact disc will automatically be

turned off and the last radio station played will

come on.

While the radio is in SXM mode, the operation

can be controlled through the touch-screen.

Touch the “Channels” key to display a list of

channels. Touch a channel displayed on the list to

change to that channel. Touch the “Categories”

key to display a list of categories. Touch a cat-

egory displayed on the list to display options

within that category.

Tuning with the touch-screen

When in AM or FM mode, the radio can be tuned

using the touch-screen. To bring up the visual

tuner, touch the “Tune” key on the lower right

corner of the screen. A screen appears with a bar

running from low frequencies on the left to high

frequencies on the right. Touch the screen at the

location of the frequency you wish to tune and the

station will change to that frequency. To return to

the regular radio display screen, touch the “OK”

key.

Tuning with the TUNE/SCROLL knob

The radio can also be manually tuned using the

TUNE/SCROLL knob. When in FM or AM mode,

turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to the left for lower

frequencies or to the right for higher frequencies.

When in SXM mode, turn the TUNE/SCROLL

knob to change the channel.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59

SEEK tuning

When in FM or AM mode, press the

or seek buttons to tune from low to high or

high to low frequencies and to stop at the next

broadcasting station.

When in SXM mode, press the or

seek buttons to change the category.

1 to 6 Station memory operations

Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (six for

FM1, six for FM2) and six stations can be set for

the AM band. Eighteen stations can be set for the

SXM band (six for SXM1, six for SXM2, six for

SXM3).

1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2

using the FM·AM button or choose the radio

band SXM1, SXM2, SXM3 using the SXM

button.

2. Tune to the desired station using manual or

seek tuning. Touch and hold any of the de-

sired station memory keys (1 – 6) until a

beep sound is heard.

3. The channel indicator will then come on and

the sound will resume. Programming is now

complete.

4. Other keys can be set in the same manner.

If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse

opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that

case, reset the desired stations.

Presets can also be selected by touching the

desired preset number on the screen.

LHA2899

4-60 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Smart Favorites Preset Setup (if so

equipped)

The Smart Favorites feature allows the user to

designate presets, within the SXM1, SXM2 and

SXM3 bands, as their Smart Favorites. When any

of the Smart Favorite presets are selected, the

current track on that station will play from the

beginning of the song.

To program a Smart Favorite preset:

1. Press the SXM button.

2. Touch the “Setup” key.

3. Touch the “Tune Start” key to activate (ON)

or deactivate (OFF) Smart Favorites.

4. Touch the “Add Preset” key to select an

available preset.

For additional information, refer to “1 to 6 station

memory operations”in this section regarding pre-

set memory options.

NOTE:

• Smart Favorites will start functioning only

after the audio unit is turned on for a few

minutes.

• Tune Start is supported for music chan-

nels only.

Replay Screen

The Replay Screen gives the user the ability to

replay, skip, pause or rewind the currently aired

track.

When the “Replay” key is touched, the Replay

Screen is prompted.

LHA3085 LHA3087

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61

REPLAY To replay a track from the

beginning, press the

seek button. The user can

continue to press

the seek button to

replay previous songs, but

can only go back as far as

the system permits. The

system will warn the user

when they cannot skip any

further back by displaying

“At the End” in the bottom

left corner of the screen.

SKIP To skip a track, press

the track button.

“Live” will appear in the

bottom left corner of the

screen indicating the dif-

ference from play time to

live audio.

PAUSE To pause a track, press

the pause button.

REWIND/

FAST

FORWARD

To rewind/ fast forward a

track, hold the

or seek/track

button.

Compact disc (CD) player operation

If the radio is already operating, it automatically

turns off and the compact disc begins to play.

CD button

When the CD button is pressed with the system

off and the compact disc loaded, the system will

turn on and the compact disc will start to play.

When the CD button is pressed with a compact

disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio will

automatically be turned off and the compact disc

will start to play.

4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CD/MP3 display mode

Menu item

CD/MP3

While listening to a CD or an MP3/WMA CD, certain text may be displayed (when a CD encoded with text is

being used). Depending on how the CD or MP3/WMA CD is encoded, the text is displayed listing the artist,

album and song title. There are other keys displayed on the screen when a CD is playing.

Random

Touch the “Random” key to apply a random play pattern to the CD. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching “Ran-

dom” or alternates between Random Folder, and Random All. This text will appear on the display. To cancel

Random mode, touch the “Random” key until the key is no longer highlighted.

Repeat Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play pattern to the CD. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching “Repeat”

alternates between repeating the current song and repeating the current folder. This text will appear on the

display. To cancel Repeat mode, touch the “Repeat” key until the key is no longer highlighted

Browse Touch the “Browse” key to display the titles on the CD in list format. Touch the title of a song in the list to begin

playing that song. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching the “Browse” key will also list the folders on the disc. Fol-

low the procedure for selecting a song with the touch-screen to choose a folder.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63

SEEK (Reverse or Fast

Forward) buttons

Press and hold the or seek buttons

for 1.5 seconds while the compact disc is playing

to reverse or fast forward the track being played.

The compact disc plays at an increased speed

while reversing or fast forwarding. When the but-

ton is released, the compact disc returns to nor-

mal play speed.

SEEK buttons

Press the seek button while a CD or

MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to the begin-

ning of the current track. Press the seek

button several times to skip backward several

tracks.

Press the seek button while a CD or

MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance one track.

Press the seek button several times to skip

forward several tracks. If the last track on a CD is

skipped, the first track on the disc is played. If the

last track in a folder of an MP3/WMA CD is

skipped, the first track of the next folder is played.

AUX button

The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any stan-

dard analog audio input such as from a portable

cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or a laptop

computer. Press the AUX button to play a com-

patible device plugged into the AUX IN jack.

CD EJECT button

When the CD EJECT button is pressed

with a compact disc loaded, the compact disc

will eject and the last source will be played.

If the disc is not removed within 10 seconds, the

disc will reload.

Additional features

For additional information, refer to “iPod® player

operation with Navigation System” in this section.

For additional information, refer to “USB (Univer-

sal Serial Bus) Connection Port (models with

Navigation System)” in this section.

For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth®

streaming audio with Navigation System” in this

section.

USB (Universal Serial Bus)

CONNECTION PORT (models

without Navigation System) (if so

equipped)

Connecting a device to the USB

Connection Port

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect, or operate the

USB device while driving. Doing so can be

a distraction. If distracted you could lose

control of your vehicle and cause an acci-

dent or serious injury.

LHA2929

4-64 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CAUTION

●To avoid damage and loss of function

when using a USB device, note the fol-

lowing precautions.

●Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port may

damage the port. Make sure that the

USB device is connected correctly into

the USB port.

●Do not grab the USB port cover (if so

equipped) when pulling the USB device

out of the port. This could damage the

port and the cover.

●Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintentionally.

Pulling the cable may damage the port.

Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner infor-

mation regarding the proper use and care of the

device.

The USB port is located on the center console

beneath the heater and air conditioner controls.

Insert the USB device into the connection port.

When a compatible storage device is plugged

into the connection port, compatible audio files

on the storage device can be played through the

vehicle’s audio system. The port is illuminated for

better visibility when the headlight switch is in the

ON position.

Audio file operation

MEDIA button

Place the ignition switch in the ON position and

press the MEDIA button to switch to the USB

input mode. If a CD is playing or another audio

source is plugged in through the AUX IN jack

located in the center console, the MEDIA button

toggles between the three sources.

Play information

Information about the audio files being played

can be displayed on the display screen of the

vehicle’s audio system. Depending on how the

audio files are encoded, information such as

Folder, Song and Artist will be displayed.

The track number and number of total tracks in

the folder are displayed on the screen as well.

SEEK/CAT (Reverse or

Fast Forward) buttons

Press and hold the SEEK/CAT buttons

or for 1.5 seconds while an audio file on

the USB device is playing to reverse or fast

forward the track being played. The track plays at

an increased speed while reversing or fast for-

warding. When the button is released, the audio

file returns to normal play speed.

SEEK/CAT buttons

Press the SEEK/CAT button while an au-

dio file on the USB device is playing to return to

the beginning of the current track. Press the

SEEK/CAT button several times to skip

backward several tracks.

Press the SEEK/CAT button while an au-

dio file on the USB device is playing to advance

one track. Press the SEEK/CAT button

several times to skip forward several tracks. If the

last track in a folder on the USB device is

skipped, the first track of the next folder is played.

RDM (random) button

When the RDM (random) button is pressed while

an audio file on the USB device is playing, the

play pattern can be changed as follows:

All Random →1 Folder Random →OFF

All Random: all tracks on the USB device will be

played randomly.

1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current folder

will be played randomly.

OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The

indicator on the display will turn off.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65

The current play pattern of the USB device is

displayed on the screen unless no pattern is

applied.

RPT (repeat) button

When the RPT (repeat) button is pressed while

an audio file on the USB device is playing, the

play pattern can be changed as follows:

1 Folder Repeat →1 Track Repeat →OFF

1 Track Repeat: the current track will be re-

peated.

1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be re-

peated.

OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The indi-

cator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the USB device is

displayed on the screen unless no pattern is

applied.

TUNE/SCROLL knob

If there are multiple folders with audio files on the

USB device, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to

change folders. Turn the knob to the left to skip

back a folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip

ahead a folder. If there is only one folder of audio

files on the USB device, turning the

TUNE/SCROLL knob in either direction will re-

turn to the first track on the USB device.

USB (Universal Serial Bus)

CONNECTION PORT (models with

Navigation System) (if so equipped)

Connecting a device to the USB

Connection Port

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect, or operate the

USB device while driving. Doing so can be

a distraction. If distracted you could lose

control of your vehicle and cause an acci-

dent or serious injury.

CAUTION

●To avoid damage and loss of function

when using a USB device, note the fol-

lowing precautions.

●Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port may

damage the port. Make sure that the

USB device is connected correctly into

the USB port.

●Do not grab the USB port cover (if so

equipped) when pulling the USB device

out of the port. This could damage the

port and the cover.

●Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintentionally.

Pulling the cable may damage the port.

Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner infor-

mation regarding the proper use and care of the

device.

The USB port is located on the center console

beneath the heater and air conditioner controls.

Insert the USB device into the connection port.

LHA2929

4-66 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

When a compatible storage device is plugged

into the connection port, compatible audio files

on the storage device can be played through the

vehicle’s audio system. The port is illuminated for

better visibility when the headlight switch is in the

ON position.

Audio file operation

AUX button

Place the ignition switch in the ON position and

press the AUX button to switch to the USB input

mode. If another audio source is playing and a

USB memory device is inserted, press the AUX

button until the center display changes to the

USB memory mode.

If the system has been turned off while the USB

memory was playing, press the POWER button

to restart the USB memory.

Play information

Information about the audio files being played is

shown on the display screen of the vehicle’s

audio system. Touch “Browse” to display the list

of folders and files on the USB device. Touch the

name of a song on the screen to begin playing

that song.

SEEK buttons

Press the SEEK button while an audio file

on the USB device is playing to return to the

beginning of the current track. Press the SEEK

button several times to skip backward sev-

eral tracks.

Press the SEEKbutton while an audio file

on the USB device is playing to advance one

track. Press the SEEK button several

times to skip forward several tracks. If the last

track in a folder on the USB device is skipped, the

first track of the next folder is played.

Random and repeat play mode

While files on a USB device are playing, the play

pattern can be altered so that songs are repeated

or played randomly.

Random

Touch the “Random” key to apply a random play

pattern to the USB device. When the Random

mode is active, the icon will illuminate. By touch-

ing the “Random” key again, the ”Random

Folder” key appears. By touching the “Random”

key once more, the “Random All” key appears. To

cancel Random mode, touch the “Random” key

until no icons are illuminated.

Repeat

Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play

pattern to the USB device. When the Repeat

mode is active, the icon will illuminate. By touch-

ing the “Repeat” key again, the ”Repeat Track”

key appears. By touching the “Repeat” key once

more, the “Repeat Folder” key appears. . To can-

cel Repeat mode, touch the “Repeat” key until no

icons are illuminated.

LHA4006

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67

iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION

WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if

so equipped)

Connecting iPod®

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect, or operate the

USB device while driving. Doing so can be

a distraction. If distracted you could lose

control of your vehicle and cause an acci-

dent or serious injury.

CAUTION

●Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port may

damage the port. Make sure that the

USB device is connected correctly into

the USB port.

●Do not grab the USB port cover (if so

equipped) when pulling the USB device

out of the port. This could damage the

port and the cover.

●Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintentionally.

Pulling the cable may damage the port.

For additional information, refer to your device

manufacturer’s owner information regarding the

proper use and care of the device.

To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that the

iPod® can be controlled with the audio system

controls and display screen, use the USB con-

nection port located on the center console below

the heater and air conditioner controls. Connect

the iPod®-specific end of the cable to the iPod®

and the USB end of the cable to the USB con-

nection port on the vehicle. If your iPod® sup-

ports charging via a USB connection, its battery

will be charged while connected to the vehicle

with the ignition switch in the ON position. The

port is illuminated for better visibility when the

headlight switch is in the ON position.

While connected to the vehicle, the iPod® can

only be operated by the vehicle audio controls.

To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle, re-

move the USB end of the cable from the USB

connection port on the vehicle, then remove the

cable from the iPod®.

* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in

the U.S. and other countries.

Compatibility

The following models are compatible:

●iPod® Classic - 5th Generation (firmware

version 1.3.0 or later)

●iPod® Classic - 6th Generation (firmware

version 2.0.1 or later)

●iPod® Classic - 7th Generation (firmware

version 2.0.4 or later)

●iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware ver-

sion 1.3.1 or later)

●iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmware ver-

sion 1.1.3 or later)

●iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmware ver-

sion 1.1.3 or later)

LHA2929

4-68 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

●iPod® nano - 4th generation (firmware ver-

sion 1.0.4 or later)

●iPod® nano - 5th generation (firmware ver-

sion 1.0.2 or later)

●iPod® nano - 6th generation (firmware ver-

sion 1.1 or later)

●iPod® Touch - 2nd generation (firmware

version 4.2.1 or later)

●iPod® Touch - 3rd generation (firmware ver-

sion 5.1 or later) (minimum iOS 5.0 required

for smartphone integration)

●iPod® Touch - 4th generation (firmware ver-

sion 5.1 or later) (minimum iOS 5.0 required

for smartphone integration)

●iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.2.1 or later)

●iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 5.1 or later)

(minimum iOS 5.0 required for smartphone

integration)

●iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.1 or later)

(minimum iOS 5.0 required for smartphone

integration)

●iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later)

(minimum iOS 5.0 required for smartphone

integration)

Make sure that your iPod® firmware is updated to

the version indicated above.

Audio main operation

Place the ignition switch in the ON position.

Press the MEDIA button repeatedly to switch to

the iPod® mode.

If the system has been turned off while the iPod®

was playing, pressing the button will start

the iPod®.

SEEK/CAT buttons

Press the SEEK/CAT buttons or to

skip backward or forward one track.

Press and hold the SEEK/CAT buttons

or for 1.5 seconds while a track is playing

to reverse or fast forward the track being played.

The track plays at an increased speed while

reversing or fast forwarding. When the button is

released, the track returns to normal play speed.

REPEAT (RPT)

When the RPT button is pressed while a track is

being played, the play pattern can be changed as

follows:

Repeat Off →1 Track Repeat →All Repeat →

Repeat Off

1 Track Repeat: the current track will be re-

peated.

All Repeat: all songs in the current list are re-

peated.

Repeat Off: no repeat play pattern is applied.

RANDOM (RDM)

When the RDM button is pressed while a track is

being played, the play pattern can be changed as

follows:

Shuffle Off →Track Shuffle →Album Shuffle →

Shuffle Off

Track Shuffle: the tracks in the current list will be

played randomly.

Album Shuffle: the albums in the current list will

be played randomly.

Shuffle Off: no random play pattern is applied.

BACK button

When the BACK button is pressed, it re-

turns to the previous menu.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69

iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION WITH

NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so

equipped)

Connecting iPod®

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect, or operate the

USB device while driving. Doing so can be

a distraction. If distracted you could lose

control of your vehicle and cause an acci-

dent or serious injury.

CAUTION

●Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port may

damage the port. Make sure that the

USB device is connected correctly into

the USB port.

●Do not grab the USB port cover (if so

equipped) when pulling the USB device

out of the port. This could damage the

port and the cover.

●Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintentionally.

Pulling the cable may damage the port.

For additional information, refer to your device

manufacturer’s owner information regarding the

proper use and care of the device.

To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that the

iPod® can be controlled with the audio system

controls and display screen, use the USB con-

nection port located on the center console below

the heater and air conditioner controls. Connect

the iPod®-specific end of the cable to the iPod®

and the USB end of the cable to the USB con-

nection port on the vehicle. If your iPod® sup-

ports charging via a USB connection, its battery

will be charged while connected to the vehicle

with the ignition switch in the ON position. The

port is illuminated for better visibility when the

headlight switch is in the ON position.

While connected to the vehicle, the iPod® can

only be operated by the vehicle audio controls.

To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle, re-

move the USB end of the cable from the USB

connection port on the vehicle, then remove the

cable from the iPod®.

* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in

the U.S. and other countries.

Compatibility

The following models are compatible:

●iPod® Classic 5th generation (firmware ver-

sion 1.3.0 or later)

●iPod® Classic 6th generation (firmware ver-

sion 2.0.1 or later)

●iPod® Classic 7th generation (firmware ver-

sion 2.0.4 or later)

●iPod® Touch 2nd generation (firmware ver-

sion 4.2.1 or later)*

●iPod® Touch 3rd generation (firmware ver-

sion 5.1 or later)

●iPod® Touch 4th generation (firmware ver-

sion 5.1 or later)

LHA2929

4-70 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

●iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware ver-

sion 1.3.1 or later)

●iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmware ver-

sion 1.1.3 or later)

●iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmware ver-

sion 1.1.3 or later)

●iPod® nano - 4th generation (firmware ver-

sion 1.0.4 or later)

●iPod® nano - 5th generation (firmware ver-

sion 1.0.2 or later)

●iPod® nano - 6th generation (firmware ver-

sion 1.1 or later)

●iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.2.1 or later)

●iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 5.1 or later)

●iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.1 or later)

●iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later)

* Some features of this iPod® may not be fully

functional.

Make sure that your iPod® firmware is updated to

the version indicated above.

Audio main operation

AUX button

When the AUX button is pressed with the system

off and the iPod® connected, the system will turn

on. If another audio source is playing and the

iPod® is connected, press the AUX button re-

peatedly until the center display changes to the

iPod® mode.

Interface

The interface for iPod® operation shown on the

vehicle’s audio system display screen is similar to

the iPod® interface. Use the

touch-screen, BACK button or the scroll-

ing knob to navigate the menus on the screen.

When the iPod® is playing, touch the “Menu” key

to bring up the iPod® interface.

LHA4007 LHA2907

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71

Depending on the iPod® model, the following

items may be available on the menu list screen.

For additional information, refer to the iPod®

Owner’s Manual regarding each menu item.

●Playlists

●Artists

●Albums

●Genres

●Songs

●Composers

●Audiobooks

●Podcasts

Shuffle and repeat play mode

While the iPod® is playing, the play pattern can

be altered so that songs are repeated or played

randomly.

Shuffle

Touch the “Shuffle” key to apply a random play

pattern to the iPod®. When the Shuffle mode is

active, the text is illuminated. Touching the

“Shuffle” key once more will display the “Shuffle

songs” key. To cancel Shuffle mode, touch the

“Shuffle” key again until the text is no longer

illuminated.

Repeat

Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play

pattern to the iPod®. When the repeat mode is

active, the text is illuminated. Touching the “Re-

peat” key once more will display the “Repeat

song” key. To cancel Repeat mode, touch the

“Repeat” key again until the text is no longer

illuminated.

Seek buttons

Press the or seek button to skip

backward or forward one track.

Press and hold the or seek button

for 1.5 seconds while a track is playing to reverse

or fast forward the track being played. The track

plays at an increased speed while reversing or

fast forwarding. When the button is released, the

track returns to normal play speed.

Scrolling menus

While navigating long lists of artists, albums or

songs in the music menu, it is possible to scroll

the list by the first character in the name. To

activate character indexing, touch and hold the

“A-Z” key in the upper right corner of the screen.

Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to choose the

number or letter to jump to in the list and then

press the ENTER/AUDIO button.

If no character is selected after a few seconds,

the display returns to normal.

LHA2279

4-72 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO

WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if

so equipped)

If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio de-

vice that is capable of playing audio files, the

device can be connected to the vehicle’s audio

system so that the audio files on the device play

through the vehicle’s speakers.

Connecting Bluetooth® audio

To connect your Bluetooth® audio device to the

vehicle, follow the procedure below:

1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

2. Select “Bluetooth”.

3. Select “Add Phone or Device”. This same

screen can be accessed to remove, replace

or select a different Bluetooth® device.

4. The system acknowledges the command

and asks you to initiate connecting from the

phone handset.

5. The system will display a PIN on the screen

and request confirmation that it matches the

one on the handset.

6. Using the menu control switch on the steer-

ing wheel, select “Yes” and then press

the button. If the PIN does not match,

the wrong device may have been selected

on the handset.

NOTE:

The connecting procedure of the cellular

phone varies according to each cellular

phone model. For additional information,

refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual.

You can also visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for instructions

on connecting NISSAN recommended cel-

lular phones.

Audio main operation

To switch to the Bluetooth® audio mode, press

the MEDIA button repeatedly until the

Bluetooth® audio mode is displayed on the

screen.

The controls for the Bluetooth® audio are dis-

played on the screen. Use the Preset 3 button for

play and the Preset 4 button for pause.

LHA2775

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73

BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO

WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so

equipped)

If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio de-

vice that is capable of playing audio files, the

device can be connected to the vehicle’s audio

system so that the audio files on the device play

through the vehicle’s speakers.

Connecting Bluetooth® audio

To connect your Bluetooth® audio device to the

vehicle, follow the procedure below:

1. Press the [ ] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.

4. Touch the “Connect New Device” key.

5. The system acknowledges the command

and asks you to initiate connecting from the

phone handset.

LHA4360 LHA2844

4-74 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NOTE:

The connecting procedure of the cellular

phone varies according to each cellular

phone model. For additional information,

refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual.

You can also visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for instructions

on connecting NISSAN recommended cel-

lular phones.

Audio main operation

To switch to the Bluetooth® audio mode, press

the AUX button repeatedly until the Bluetooth®

audio mode is displayed on the screen.

The controls for the Bluetooth® audio are dis-

played on the screen.

CD CARE AND CLEANING

●Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the

disc. Never touch the surface of the disc.

●Always place the discs in the storage case

when they are not being used.

●To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the

center to the outer edge using a clean, soft

cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular

motion.

●Do not use a conventional record cleaner or

alcohol intended for industrial use.

●A new disc may be rough on the inner and

outer edges. Remove the rough edges by

rubbing the inner and outer edges with the

side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

LHA0049

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR

AUDIO CONTROL

1. Menu control switch / OK but-

ton

2. (back) button

3. Seek/Track buttons

4. Volume control button

Volume control switch

Push the volume control switch to increase or

decrease the volume.

Menu control

switch/OK button

In the vehicle information display, navigate to the

“Audio” display. Use the OK button as the source

to change the mode in the following sequence:

AM →FM1 →FM2 →(XM1 →XM2 →XM3

(satellite, if so equipped)) →(SXM1 →SXM →

SXM3 (satellite, if so equipped)) →USB/iPod®*

→Bluetooth® Audio* →AUX* →AM.

* These modes are only available when compat-

ible media storage is inserted into the device or

connected to the system.

SEEK/TRACK buttons

AM and FM

●Press or hold for less than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the preset station and

show a list of the preset stations.

●Press or hold for more than 1.5 seconds to

seek up or down to the next station.

XM (if so equipped)

●Press or hold for less than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the preset station.

●Press or hold for more than 1.5 seconds to

go to the next or previous channel.

SXM (if so equipped)

●Press or hold for less than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the preset station.

●Press or hold for more than 1.5 seconds to

go to the next or previous channel.

iPod®

●Press or hold for less than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the track number.

●Press or hold for more than 1.5 seconds to

reverse or fast forward the track being

played.

●Press or hold for less than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the track number.

●Press or hold for more than 1.5 seconds to

reverse or fast forward the track being

played.

Bluetooth® Streaming Audio

●Press or hold for less than 1.5 seconds to

skip ahead or back to the next song.

LHA4122

4-76 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

USB

●Press or hold for less than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the track number.

●Press or hold for more than 1.5 seconds to

reverse or fast forward the track being

played.

(back) button

Press the (back) button to return to the

previous screen or cancel the current selection.

ANTENNA

The vehicle is equipped with a shark fin antenna

and an antenna pattern is printed inside the rear

window.

CAUTION

●Do not place metalized film near the

rear window glass or attach any metal

parts to it. This may cause poor recep-

tion or noise.

●When cleaning the inside of the rear

window, be careful not to scratch or

damage the rear window antenna.

Lightly wipe along the antenna with a

dampened soft cloth.

This vehicle is equipped with Smartphone Inte-

gration technology. This allows many compatible

smartphone applications to be displayed and

easily controlled through the vehicle’s display

screen.

NOTE:

A compatible smartphone and registration

is required to use mobile applications or to

access connected features of certain ve-

hicle applications.

REGISTERING WITH

NISSANCONNECT

MOBILE APPS

To use the Smartphone Integration feature, it is

necessary for the user to register. In order to

Mobile Apps

website, www.nissanusa.com/connect/ or

www.nissan.ca/nissanconnect or

www.nissan.ca/nissanconnect/fr and sign up or

create an account through the prompts on the

NissanConnect Mobile Apps. Once registered,

download the NissanConnect Mobile Apps from

your compatible phone’s application download

source and then log into the application. If you

already have an account created through the

App, please log in.

CONNECT PHONE

To use this feature, a compatible smartphone

must be connected via Bluetooth® or USB to the

vehicle. For additional information, refer to

“Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with

Navigation System” in this section.

NOTE:

For vehicles with navigation, Apple

iPhones® REQUIRE the phone to be

plugged in via USB for NissanConnect Mo-

bile Apps to function.

For vehicles without Navigation, Apple

iPhones® must be paired via Bluetooth®

for NissanConnect Mobile Apps to func-

tion.

NOTE:

For Android phones, NissanConnect Mo-

bile Apps REQUIRES the phone to be

paired via Bluetooth®.

NISSANCONNECT

MOBILE APPS

(if so equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77

APPLICATION DOWNLOAD

Once connected, the NissanConnect App will

search your phone to determine which compatible

applications are currently installed. The user will

then choose which apps they want to bring into

their vehicle from the list of apps within the “Man-

age My Apps” section of the NissanConnect App

on their smartphone. The vehicle will then down-

load the in-vehicle interface for each of these com-

patible applications. Once downloaded, the user

can access their selected smartphone applications

through the vehicle touch-screen. For additional

information, refer to www.nissanusa.com/connect

or www.nissan.ca/nissanconnect or

www.nissan.ca/nissanconnect/fr regarding appli-

cation availability.

NissanConnect

Services is a suite of telemat-

ics tools that provide emergency preparedness,

remote access, customizable alerts and conve-

nience services. This feature is an option on

Navigation equipped vehicles. For additional in-

formation, refer to the separate Navigation Sys-

tem Owner’s Manual.

Apple Siri® Eyes Free personal assistant can be

accessed from the vehicle. Siri Eyes Free can be

accessed in Siri Eyes Free mode to reduce user

distraction. In this mode, Siri Eyes Free is avail-

able for interaction by voice control. After con-

necting a compatible Apple device by using

Bluetooth®, Siri Eyes Free can be activated from

the TALK switch on the steering wheel.

Siri® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in

the U.S. and other countries.

●Some Siri Eyes Free functions, such as dis-

playing pictures or opening apps, may not

be available while driving.

●For getting best results, always update your

device to the latest software version.

●Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as

possible. Close the windows to eliminate the

surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration

sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system

from recognizing the voice commands cor-

rectly.

●For functions that can be used in Siri Eyes

Free, please refer to the Apple website.

NISSANCONNECT

SERVICES (if so

equipped)

SIRI® EYES FREE

4-78 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

REQUIREMENTS

Siri is only available on the iPhone® 4S or later.

Devices released before iPhone® 4S are not

supported by the Siri Eyes Free system. Visit

www.apple.com/ios/siri for details about device

compatibility.

Siri must be enabled on the phone. Please check

phone settings.

If the device has a lock screen, Siri must be

accessible from the lock screen. Please check

phone settings.

For best results, always update your device to the

latest software version.

SIRI® ACTIVATION

Siri® Eyes Free function can be activated by

pushing TALK switch on the steering

wheel.

Models with navigation system

1. Connect an Siri Eyes Free enabled iPhone®

to the vehicle. For additional information,

refer to “Connecting procedure” in this sec-

tion.

2. After the Bluetooth® connection is estab-

lished, push and hold the TALK

switch to activate the Siri Eyes Free function.

Models without navigation system

1. Connect a Siri Eyes Free enabled iPhone®

to the vehicle. For additional information,

refer to “Initialization” in this section.

2. After the Bluetooth® connection is estab-

lished, the switch operation select screen is

displayed.

3. Select “Short Press” or “Long Press” for Siri

Eyes Free activation Switch action can also

be changed from the Bluetooth® settings

menu. For additional information, refer to

“Changing Siri® Eyes Free Settings (mod-

els without navigation system)” in this sec-

tion.

OPERATING SIRI® EYES FREE

1. Push or push and hold the TALK

switch.

2. Speak your command and then listen to the

Siri Eyes Free reply.

After starting Siri Eyes Free, push the

TALK switch again within 5 seconds of the end of

the Siri Eyes Free announcement to extend the

session.

Example 1 – Playing music

1. Push or push and hold the TALK

switch.

LHA4363

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-79

2. Say “Play (artist name, song name, etc.)”.

3. Your vehicle will automatically change to

Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode* when

the music starts playing. Mode selection is

determined by the phone.

* If the iPhone® is also connected with the USB

cable.

If the audio track does not start playing automati-

cally after Siri Eyes Free ends, try changing the

track or audio source to resume playback.

NOTE:

For best results, use the native music app.

Performance of music control function

while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other

3rd party music apps may vary and is con-

trolled by the iPhone®.

Example 2 – Replying to text messages

1. If a compatible iPhone® is connected and

“Show Notifications” of the iPhone® set-

tings is enabled, the vehicle will display a

notification for new incoming text messages.

2. After reading the message, push or push

and hold the TALK switch to reply

using Siri Eyes Free.

3. After a beep sounds, say “Text message” or

a similar command to reply using Siri Eyes

Free.

CHANGING SIRI® EYES FREE

SETTINGS (models without navigation

system)

Settings for Siri® Eyes Free can be found in the

Bluetooth settings menu. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Bluetooth® settings”in this section.

1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

2. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select

“Bluetooth” and then press the

ENTER/SETTING button.

3. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select

“Siri” and then press the ENTER/SETTING

button.

4. Select “Short Press” or “Long Press” using

the TUNE/SCROLL knob and then press

the ENTER/SETTING button.

4-80 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot access Siri Eyes Free from switch

on the steering wheel

Check if a Bluetooth® connection is established between the iPhone® and the system.

Check if Siri is enabled on the device. On your phone, go to Siri setting.

Check that Siri can be accessed from the device lock screen. This can be set in the settings menu of your phone.

Models without navigation system:

Check the settings for Siri Eyes Free activation on the vehicle audio system. If the setting is “Long Press”, you must push and hold

the TALK switch on the steering wheel for more than 1.5 seconds to start Siri Eyes Free. If the setting is “Short Press”, a short

push and release of the switch should start Siri Eyes Free.

Audio Source does not change automati-

cally to iPod® or Bluetooth® Audio mode

For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party

music apps may vary.

For best results, play media already stored on your device. Streaming music or playback from cloud storage may degrade performance.

Switch the source manually by pressing the AUX or MEDIA button on the vehicle audio system or the SOURCE select switch on the

steering wheel.

Play, pause, next track, previous track or

play timer does not work

For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party

music apps may vary and is controlled by the device.

Cannot hear any music/audio being played

back from a connected iPhone®

Check that the audio source is set to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode. A USB connection is required for iPod® mode.

Cannot hear map turn-by-turn direction

guidance from a connected iPhone®

Check that the audio source is set to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode. A USB connection is required for iPod® mode.

Cannot receive text message notifications

on the vehicle audio system

Check if “Send Notifications” is enabled on your phone. On the phone, go to Bluetooth® settings. Find the device name, like “My Car”.

Press the INFO button. Turn on “Show Notifications”.

Cannot reply to text message notifications

by Siri Eyes Free

After receiving an incoming text message, follow on-screen guidance. Push or push and hold the TALK switch on the steering

wheel for Siri Eyes Free. After Siri Eyes Free starts, say “Text Message”.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-81

When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in

your vehicle, be sure to observe the following

precautions; otherwise, the new equipment may

adversely affect the engine control system and

other electronic parts.

WARNING

●A cellular phone should not be used for

any purpose while driving so full atten-

tion may be given to vehicle operation.

Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of

cellular phones while driving.

●If you must make a call while your ve-

hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-

lar phone operational mode is highly

recommended. Exercise extreme cau-

tion at all times so full attention may be

given to vehicle operation.

●If you are unable to devote full attention

to vehicle operation while talking on

the phone, pull off the road to a safe

location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

●Keep the antenna as far away as pos-

sible from the electronic control

modules.

●Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in

(20 cm) away from the electronic control

system harnesses. Do not route the an-

tenna wire next to any harness.

●Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio

as recommended by the manufacturer.

●Connect the ground wire from the CB

radio chassis to the body.

●For additional information, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

●Use a phone after stopping your vehicle

in a safe location. If you have to use a

phone while driving, exercise extreme

caution at all times so full attention may

be given to vehicle operation.

●If you are unable to devote full attention

to vehicle operation while talking on

the phone, pull off the road to a safe

location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,

use a phone after starting the engine.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE

SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

4-82 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a com-

patible Bluetooth® enabled cellular phone, you

can set up the wireless connection between your

cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.

With Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephone call with

your cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is connected to the

in-vehicle phone module, no other phone con-

necting procedure is required. Your phone is

automatically connected with the in-vehicle

phone module when the ignition switch is placed

in the ON position with the previously connected

cellular phone turned on and carried in the ve-

hicle.

NOTE:

Some devices require the user to accept

connections to other Bluetooth® devices. If

your phone does not connect automatic

ally to the system, consult the phone’s

Owner’s Manual for details on device op-

eration.

You can connect up to five different Bluetooth®

cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.

However, you can talk on only one cellular phone

at a time.

Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System, refer to the following notes.

●Set up the wireless connection between a

compatible cellular phone and the in-vehicle

phone module before using the hands-free

phone system.

●Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones

may not be recognized or work properly.

Please visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth

or www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recom-

mended phone list and connecting instruc-

tions.

LHA4369

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-83

●You will not be able to use a hands-free

phone under the following conditions:

– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-

vice area.

– Your vehicle is in an area where it is

difficult to receive a cellular signal; such

as in a tunnel, in an underground parking

garage, near a tall building or in a moun-

tainous area.

– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it

from being dialed.

●When the radio wave condition is not ideal

or ambient sound is too loud, it may be

difficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-

ing a call.

●Do not place the cellular phone in an area

surrounded by metal or far away from the

in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone

quality degradation and wireless connection

disruption.

●While a cellular phone is connected through

the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the

battery power of the cellular phone may dis-

charge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge

cellular phones.

●Some cellular phones or other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to

come from the audio system speakers. Stor-

ing the device in a different location may

reduce or eliminate the noise.

●Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual

regarding the telephone charges, cellular

phone antenna and body, etc.

●For additional information, refer to “Trouble-

shooting guide” in this section. You can also

visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for

troubleshooting help if the hands-free phone

system seems to be malfunctioning.

REGULATORY INFORMATION

FCC Regulatory information

– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with

FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the

supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,

modification, or attachments could damage

the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-

tions.

– Operation is subject to the following two con-

ditions:

1. This device may not cause interference and

2. this device must accept any interference,

including interference that may cause unde-

sired operation of the device.

IC Regulatory information

– Operation is subject to the following two con-

ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept any

interference, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the device.

– This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-

quirements of the Canadian Interference-

Causing Equipment Regulations.

BLUETOOTH® is a

trademark owned by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

and licensed to

Visteon.

USING THE SYSTEM

The system allows hands-free operation of the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may

not be available so full attention may be given to

vehicle operation.

4-84 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Initialization

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,

which takes a few seconds. If the button is

pressed before the initialization completes, the

system will announce “Hands-free phone system

not ready” and will not react to voice commands.

Operating tips

To get the best performance out of the NISSAN

Voice Recognition System, observe the follow-

ing:

●Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as

possible. Keep all vents pointed away from

the microphone and close the windows to

eliminate surrounding noises (traffic noises,

vibration sounds, etc.), which may prevent

the system from recognizing voice com-

mands correctly.

●Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a

command. Otherwise, the command will not

be received properly.

●Start speaking a command within 5 seconds

after the tone sounds.

●Speak in a natural voice without pausing

between words.

●For calling contacts by name, please say

both the first and last name of the contact for

better recognition.

Giving voice commands

To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press

and release the button located on the

steering wheel. After the tone sounds, speak a

command.

The command given is picked up by the micro-

phone, and voice feedback is given when the

command is accepted.

●If you need to hear the available commands

for the current menu again, say “Help” and

the system will repeat them.

●If a command is not recognized, the system

announces, “Command not recognized.

Please try again.” Make sure the command is

said exactly as prompted by the system and

repeat the command in a clear voice.

●If you want to go back to the previous com-

mand, you can say “Go back” or “Correc-

tion” any time the system is waiting for a

response.

●You can cancel a command when the sys-

tem is waiting for a response by saying,

“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces

“Cancel” and ends the Voice Recognition

session. You can also press and hold

the button on the steering wheel for

5 seconds at any time to end the Voice

Recognition session. Whenever the Voice

Recognition session is canceled, a double

beep is played to indicate you have exited

the system.

●If you want to adjust the volume of the voice

feedback, push the volume control switches

(+ or -) on the steering wheel while being

provided with feedback. You can also use

the radio Volume control knob.

Voice Prompt Interrupt

In most cases you can interrupt the voice feed-

back to speak the next command by pressing

the button on the steering wheel. After

interrupting the system, wait for a beep before

speaking your command.

One Shot Call

To use the system faster, you may speak the

second level commands with the main menu

command on the main menu. For example, press

the button and after the tone say, “Call

Redial”.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-85

CONTROL BUTTONS

The control buttons for the Bluetooth® Hands-

Free Phone System are located on the steering

wheel.

PHONE/SEND

Press the button to initiate

a Voice Recognition session or

answer an incoming call.

If the operation of “Siri” is set to

“Short Press” on the Bluetooth®

setting menu, pressing and hold-

ing the button initiates a

Voice Recognition session for the

Hands-Free Phone operation. For

additional information, refer to

“Bluetooth® settings” in this

section.

You can also use the button

to interrupt the system feedback

and give a command at once. For

additional information, refer to

“Voice Commands” and “During a

call” in this section.

PHONE/END

While the voice recognition sys-

tem is active, press and hold

the button for 5 seconds to

quit the voice recognition system

at any time.

Tuning switch

While using the voice recognition

system, push the tuning switch

up, down, left or right to manually

control the phone system.

LHA4370

4-86 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CONNECTING PROCEDURE

NOTE:

The connecting procedure must be per-

formed when the vehicle is stationary. If the

vehicle starts moving during the procedure,

the procedure will be canceled.

To connect a phone to the Bluetooth® Hands-

Free Phone System:

Manual Connecting Procedure

1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

2. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select

“Bluetooth” and then press the

ENTER/SETTING button.

Menu Item Result

Bluetooth Allows user to switch Bluetooth® on and off. Bluetooth® must be turned on in order to connect device.

On Turns Bluetooth® functionality on.

Off Turns Bluetooth® functionality off.

Add Phone or Device Upon pressing this button, a message with a PIN appears on the screen. Operate the Bluetooth® phone to enter the PIN and complete the

connection process.

Replace Phone Replace the phone currently connected to the system. This option allows the user to keep any voicetags that were recorded using the previ-

ous phone if vehicle is equipped with voice recognition.

LHA2775

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-87

Automatic Connecting Procedure

If no phone is connected to the system, press

the button on the steering wheel. The sys-

tem will automatically begin searching for a com-

patible phone. If the system detects a compatible

phone a message with a PIN appears on the

screen. Operate the Bluetooth® phone to enter

the PIN and complete the connection process.

VOICE COMMANDS

Voice commands can be used to operate the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. Press

the button and say “Phone” to bring up the

phone command menu. The available options

are:

●Call

●Phonebook

●Recent Calls

●Messaging (if available)

●Show Applications (if so equipped)

●Select Phone or Device

“Call”

For additional information, refer to “Making a call”

in this section.

“Phonebook”

The following commands are available under

“Phonebook”:

●(a name)

Say a name in the phonebook to bring up a

list of options for that phonebook entry. The

system will say the name it interpreted based

on the voice command provided. If the name

is incorrect, say “Correction” to hear another

name.

Once the correct phonebook entry is identi-

fied, say “Dial” to dial the number or “Send

Text” to send a text message to that number.

Say “Record Name” to record a name for the

phonebook entry. Say “Delete Recording” to

delete a recorded name for the phonebook

entry.

●List Names

Speak this command to have the system list

the names in the phonebook one by one

alphabetically. Say “Dial” to dial the number

of the current name or “Send Text” to send a

text message to that number. Say “Next En-

try” or “Previous Entry” to move through the

list alphabetically. Say “Record Name” to

record a name for the current phonebook

entry. Say “Delete Recording” to delete a

recorded name for the current phonebook

entry.

●Transfer Entry

This command can be used to transfer mul-

tiple contacts at a time. To enable manual

contact transfer capability, set “Phonebook

Download” to “Off” in the Setting menu. The

ability to transfer contacts via the OPP

Bluetooth® profile depends on your mobile

phone. For additional information, refer to

your phone’s Owner’s Manual.

●Delete Entry

Speak this command to delete an entry in

the phonebook. Choose an entry to delete

by speaking the desired name or say “List

Names”.

“Recent Calls”

The following commands are available under

“Recent Calls”:

●Incoming Calls

Speak this command to list the last five

incoming calls to the vehicle. If the call is

from an entry in the phonebook, the name

will be displayed. Otherwise, the phone

number of the incoming call will be dis-

played.

Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send Text”

to send a text message to that number. Say

“Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move

through the list of incoming calls.

4-88 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

●Missed Calls

Speak this command to list the last five

missed calls to the vehicle. If the call is from

an entry in the phonebook, the name will be

displayed. Otherwise, the phone number of

the missed call will be displayed.

Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send Text”

to send a text message to that number. Say

“Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move

through the list of missed calls.

●Outgoing Calls

Speak this command to list the last five

outgoing calls from the vehicle. If the call

was to an entry in the phonebook, the name

will be displayed. Otherwise, the phone

number of the outgoing call will be dis-

played.

Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send Text”

to send a text message to that number. Say

“Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move

through the list of outgoing calls.

●Redial

Speak this command to call the last number

dialed.

●Call Back

Speak this command to call the number of

the last incoming call to the vehicle.

“Messaging” (if so equipped)

Speak this command to access text messaging

functions. For additional information, refer to

“Text messaging” in this section.

“Select Phone or Device”

Speak this command to select a phone to use

from a list of those phones connected to the

vehicle.

MAKING A CALL

To make a call from a phone connected to the

vehicle’s Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys-

tem:

1. Press the button.

2. The system will prompt you for a command.

Say “Call”.

3. Select one of the available voice commands

to continue:

●“(a name)” – Speak the name of a phone-

book entry to place a call to that entry. The

system will respond with the name it inter-

preted from your command and will prompt

you to confirm that the name is correct. Say

“Yes” to initiate the call or “No” to hear an-

other name from the phonebook.

●“Number” – Speak this command to place a

call by inputting numbers.

For 7- and 10-digit phone numbers, speak

the numbers. When finished, say “Dial” to

initiate the call. Say “Correction” at any time

in the process to correct a misspoken or

misinterpreted number.

For phone numbers with more digits or spe-

cial characters, say “Special Number”, then

speak the digits. Up to 24 digits can be

entered. Available special characters are

“star”, “pound”, “plus” and “pause”. When

finished, say “Dial” to initiate the call. Say

“Correction” at any time in the process to

correct a misspoken or misinterpreted num-

ber or character.

●“Redial” – Speak this command to dial the

number of the last outgoing call. The system

will display “Redialing <name/number>”.

The name of the phonebook entry will be

displayed if it available, otherwise the num-

ber being redialed will be displayed.

●“Call Back” – Speak this command to dial

the number of the last incoming call. The

system will display “Calling back

<name/number>”. The name of the phone-

book entry will be displayed if it available,

otherwise the number being called back will

be displayed.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-89

RECEIVING A CALL

When a call is received by the phone connected

to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System, the call information is displayed on either

the vehicle information display or both the vehicle

information display and the control panel display.

Press the button to accept the call. Press

the button to reject the call.

DURING A CALL

While a call is active, press the button to

access additional options. Speak one of the fol-

lowing commands:

●“Send” – Speak this command followed by

the digits to enter digits during the phone

call.

●“Mute On” or “Mute Off” – Speak the com-

mand to mute or unmute the system.

●“Transfer Call” – Speak this command to

transfer the call to the handset. To transfer

the call back from the handset to the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System,

press the button and confirm when

prompted.

If supported by the phone, the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System allows for call waiting

functionality. If a call is received while another call

is already active, a message will be displayed on

the screen. Press the button to hold the

active call and switch to the second call. Press

the button to reject the second call.

While the second call is active, pressing

the button will allow the same commands

that are available during any call as well as two

additional commands:

●“Switch Call” – Speak this command to hold

the second call and switch back to the origi-

nal call.

●“End Other Call” – Speak this command to

stay with the second call and end the original

call.

Press the button to accept the call. Press

the button to reject the call.

ENDING A CALL

To end an active call, press the button.

TEXT MESSAGING (if so equipped)

WARNING

●Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict

the use of “Text-to-Speech”. Check lo-

cal regulations before using this

feature.

●Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict

the use of some of the applications and

features, such as social networking and

texting. Check local regulations for any

requirements.

●Use the text messaging feature after

stopping your vehicle in a safe location.

If you have to use the feature while

driving, exercise extreme caution at all

times so full attention may be given to

vehicle operation.

●If you are unable to devote full attention

to vehicle operation while using the text

messaging feature, pull off the road to a

safe location and stop your vehicle.

4-90 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NOTE:

This feature is automatically disabled if the

connected device does not support the

Message Access Profile (MAP). For addi-

tional information, refer to the phone’s

Owner’s Manual for details and instruc-

tions.

NOTE:

Many phones may require special permis-

sion to enable text messaging. Check the

phone’s screen during Bluetooth® pairing.

For some phones, you may need to enable

‘Notifications’ in the phone’s Bluetooth®

menu for text messages to appear on the

headunit. For additional information, refer

to your phone’s Owner’s manual. Text mes-

sage integration requires that the phone

support MAP (Message Access Profile) for

both receiving and sending text messages.

Some phones may not support all text mes-

saging features. Please refer to

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for compatibility

information, as well as your device’s Own-

er’s manual.

The system allows for the sending and receiving

of text messages through the vehicle interface.

Sending a text message:

1. Press the button on the steering

wheel.

2. Say “Phone” after the tone.

3. Say “Send Text” after the tone.

4. The system will provide a list of available

commands in order to determine the recipi-

ent of the text message. Choose from the

following:

●To (a name)

●Enter Number

●Missed Calls

●Incoming Calls

●Outgoing Calls

For additional information about these op-

tions, refer to “Voice commands” in this sec-

tion.

5. Once a recipient is chosen, the system

prompts for which message to send. Nine

predefined messages are available as well

as three custom messages. To choose one

of the predefined messages, speak one of

the following after the tone:

●“Driving, can’t text”

●“Call me”

●“On my way”

●“Running late”

●“Okay”

●“Yes”

●“No”

●“Where are you?”

●“When?”

●“Custom Messages”

To send one of the custom messages, say

“Custom Messages”. If more than one cus-

tom message is stored, the system will

prompt for the number of the desired cus-

tom message. For additional information on

setting and managing custom text mes-

sages, refer to “Bluetooth® settings” in this

section.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-91

Reading a received text message:

1. Press the button on the steering

wheel.

2. Say “Phone” after the tone.

3. Say “Read Text” after the tone.

The text message, sender and delivery time are

shown on the screen. Use the tuning switch to

scroll through all text messages if more than one

are available. Press the button to exit the

text message screen. Press the button to

access the following options for replying to the

text message:

●Call Back

Speak this command to call the sender of

the text message using the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System.

●Send Text

Speak this command to send a text message

response to the sender of the text message.

●Read Text

Speak this command to read the text mes-

sage again.

●Previous Text

Speak this command to move to the previ-

ous text message (if available).

●Next Text

Speak this command to move to the next text

message (if available).

Siri® Eyes Free

If a connected phone is equipped with Siri®, it

can also be used to create custom messages

that are sent through the phone. For additional

information, refer to “Siri® Eyes Free” in this

section.

NOTE:

Text messages are only displayed if the

vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

NOTE:

For Apple iPhones®, text messages can

only be sent through Siri.

BLUETOOTH® SETTINGS

To access and adjust the settings for the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System:

1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

2. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select

“Bluetooth” and then press the

ENTER/SETTING button:

●Bluetooth

Select “On” or “Off” to turn the vehicle’s

Bluetooth® system on or off.

●Add Phone or Device

For additional information, refer to “Con-

necting procedure” in this section.

LHA2274

4-92 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

●Delete Phone or Device

Select to delete a phone from the displayed

list. The system will ask to confirm before

deleting the phone.

●Replace Phone

Select to replace a phone from the displayed

list. When a selection is made, the system

will ask to confirm before proceeding. The

recorded phonebook for the phone being

deleted will be saved as long as the new

phone’s phonebook is the same as the old

phone’s phonebook.

●Select Phone or Device

Select to connect to a previously connected

phone from the displayed list.

●Show Incoming Calls

Select “Driver Only” to have incoming call

information displayed only in the vehicle in-

formation display. Select “Both” to have in-

coming call information displayed in both the

vehicle information display and the center

display screen.

●Phonebook Download

Select to turn on or off the automatic down-

load of a connected phone’s phonebook.

●Siri ®

Press the button operation for

Siri®Eyes Free function from “Short Press”

and “Long Press” (if available). For addi-

tional information, refer to “Siri®Eyes Free”

in this section. “Siri” is displayed only when a

Siri Eyes Free enabled iPhone®is con-

nected to the vehicle.

●Text Message (if so equipped)

Select to turn on or off the vehicle’s text

messaging feature.

●New Text Sound (if so equipped)

Select to adjust the volume of the sound that

plays when a new text is received by a phone

connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free

Phone System. The setting all the way to the

left indicates that the new text sound will be

muted.

●Show Incoming Text (if so equipped)

Select “Driver Only” to have incoming text

messages displayed only in the vehicle infor-

mation display. Select “Both” to have incom-

ing text messages displayed in both the ve-

hicle information display and the center

display screen. Select “None” to have no

display of incoming text messages.

●Edit Custom Messages (if so equipped)

Select to set a custom message that will be

available with the standard options when

sending a text message. To set a custom

message, send a text message to your own

phone number while the phone is connected

to the system. Three custom messages can

be set. Custom messages can only be set

while the vehicle is stationary.

●Auto Reply (if so equipped)

Select to turn on or off the Auto Reply func-

tion. When enabled, the vehicle will auto-

matically send a predefined text message to

the sender when a text message is received

while driving.

●Auto Reply Message (if so equipped)

Select to choose the message that is sent

when the Auto Reply function is enabled.

Choose from “I’m Driving” or one of the three

custom messages stored in the system.

●Vehicle Signature On/Off (if so equipped)

Select to choose whether or not the vehicle

signature is added to outgoing text mes-

sages from the vehicle. This message can-

not be changed or customized.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-93

MANUAL CONTROL

While using the Voice Recognition system, it is

possible to select menu options by using the

steering wheel controls instead of speaking voice

commands. To activate manual control mode,

press the button on the steering wheel to

access the phone menu and then push either up

or down on the tuning switch .

The manual control mode does not allow dialing a

phone number by digits. The user may select an

entry from the Phonebook or Recent Calls lists.

To reactivate Voice Recognition, exit the manual

control mode by pressing and holding the

button. At that time, pressing the button

will start the Hands Free Phone System.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The system should respond correctly to all voice

commands without difficulty. If problems are en-

countered, try the following solutions.

Where the solutions are listed by number, try

each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until

the problem is resolved.

Symptom Solution

System fails to interpret the command correctly.

1. Ensure that the command is valid. For additional information, refer to “Voice commands” in this section.

2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.

3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.

4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too

noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.

5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.

The system consistently selects the wrong entry from the

phone book.

1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by

using the “List Names” command. For additional information, refer to “Phonebook” in this section.

2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.

3. Please speak both first and last name of contact to improve recognition accuracy.

4-94 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WARNING

●Use a phone after stopping your vehicle

in a safe location. If you have to use a

phone while driving, exercise extreme

caution at all times so full attention may

be given to vehicle operation.

●If you are unable to devote full attention

to vehicle operation while talking on

the phone, pull off the road to a safe

location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,

use a phone after starting the engine.

Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a com-

patible Bluetooth® enabled cellular phone, you

can set up the wireless connection between your

cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.

With Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephone call with

your cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is connected to the

in-vehicle phone module, no other phone con-

necting procedure is required. Your phone is

automatically reconnected with the in-vehicle

LHA4371

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE

SYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM

(if so equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-95

phone module when the ignition switch is placed

in the ON position with the connected cellular

phone turned on and carried in the vehicle.

You can register up to five different Bluetooth®

cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.

However, you can talk on only one cellular phone

at a time.

NISSAN Voice Recognition System supports the

phone commands, so dialing a phone number

using your voice is possible. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “NISSAN Voice Recognition Sys-

tem” in this section.

Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System, refer to the following notes.

●

Set up the wireless connection between a cel-

lular phone and the in-vehicle phone module

before using the hands-free phone system.

●Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones

may not be recognized by the in-vehicle

phone module. Please visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recom-

mended phone list and connecting.

●You will not be able to use a hands-free

phone under the following conditions:

– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-

vice area.

– Your vehicle is in an area where it is

difficult to receive cellular signal; such as

in a tunnel, in an underground parking

garage, near a tall building or in a moun-

tainous area.

– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it

from being dialed.

●When the radio wave condition is not ideal

or ambient sound is too loud, it may be

difficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-

ing a call.

●Immediately after the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position, it may be impos-

sible to receive a call for a short period of

time.

●Do not place the cellular phone in an area

surrounded by metal or far away from the

in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone

quality degradation and wireless connection

disruption.

●While a cellular phone is connected through

the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the

battery power of the cellular phone may dis-

charge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge

cellular phones.

●Some cellular phones or other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to

come from the audio system speakers. Stor-

ing the device in a different location may

reduce or eliminate the noise.

●Refer to the cellular phone owner’s manual

regarding the battery, battery charging and

cellular phone operations.

●The signal strength display on the monitor

will not coincide with the signal strength

display of some cellular phones.

●For additional information, refer to “Trouble-

shooting guide” in this section. You can also

visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for troubleshoot-

ing help if the hands-free phone system

seems to be malfunctioning.

REGULATORY INFORMATION

FCC Regulatory information

– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with

FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the

supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,

modification, or attachments could damage

the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-

tions.

4-96 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

– Operation is subject to the following two con-

ditions:

1. This device may not cause interference and

2. this device must accept any interference,

including interference that may cause unde-

sired operation of the device.

IC Regulatory information

– Operation is subject to the following two con-

ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept any

interference, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the device.

– This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-

quirements of the Canadian Interference-

Causing Equipment Regulations.

BLUETOOTH® is a

trademark owned by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

and licensed to

Bosch.

VOICE COMMANDS

You can use voice commands to operate various

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System features

using the NISSAN Voice Recognition System.

For additional information, refer to “NISSAN

Voice Recognition System” in this section.

Voice Prompt Interrupt

While using the Voice Recognition system, the

system voice can be interrupted to allow the user

to speak commands. While the system is speak-

ing, press the button on the steering

wheel. The system voice will stop and a tone will

be heard. After the tone, speak desired command

(displayed on the touch-screen).

One Shot Call

To use the system faster, you may speak the

second level commands with the main menu

command on the main menu. For example, press

the button and after the tone say, “Call

Redial”.

CONNECTING PROCEDURE

NOTE:

The connecting procedure must be per-

formed when the vehicle is stationary. If the

vehicle starts moving during the procedure,

the procedure will be canceled.

1. Press the [ ] button on the control

panel.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.

4. Touch the “Connect New Device” key.

LHA4360

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-97

5. Initiate the connecting process from the

handset. The system will display the mes-

sage: “Is PIN XXXXXX displayed on your

Bluetooth device?”. If the PIN is displayed

on your Bluetooth® device, select “Yes” to

complete the pairing process.

For additional information, refer to the

Bluetooth® device’s Owner’s Manual.

VEHICLE PHONEBOOK

To access the vehicle phonebook:

1. Press the button on the control panel.

2. Touch the “Phonebook” key.

3. Choose the desired entry from the displayed

list.

4. The number of the entry will be displayed on

the screen. Touch the number to initiate di-

aling.

NOTE:

To scroll quickly through the list, touch the

“A-Z” key in the upper right corner of the

screen. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to

choose a letter or number and then press

ENTER. The list will move to the first entry

that begins with that number or letter.

MAKING A CALL

To make a call, follow the procedure below:

1. Press the button on the control panel.

The “Phone” screen will appear on the dis-

play.

2. Select one of the following options to make a

call:

●“Phonebook”: Select the name from an entry

stored in the vehicle phonebook.

●“Call Lists”: Select the name from the in-

coming, outgoing or missed.

●“Redial”: Dial the last outgoing call from the

vehicle.

●“”: Input the phone number manually

using a keypad displayed on the screen. For

additional information, refer to “How to use

the touch-screen” in this section.

RECEIVING A CALL

When a call is placed to the connected phone,

the display will change to phone mode.

To accept the incoming call, either:

●Press the button on the steering

wheel, or

●Touch the icon on the screen.

To reject the incoming call, either:

●Press the button on the steering

wheel, or

●Touch the icon on the screen.

DURING A CALL

While a call is active, the following options are

available on the screen:

●“Handset”

Select this option to switch control of the

phone call over to the handset.

●“Mute Mic.”

Select this option to mute the microphone.

Select again to unmute the microphone.

●Phone icon

Select to end the phone call.

ENDING A CALL

To end a phone call, select the red phone

icon on the screen or press the button on

the steering wheel.

4-98 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

TEXT MESSAGING (if so equipped)

WARNING

●Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict

the use of “Text-to-Speech”. Check lo-

cal regulations before using this

feature.

●Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict

the use of some of the applications and

features, such as social networking and

texting. Check local regulations for any

requirements.

●Use the text messaging feature after

stopping your vehicle in a safe location.

If you have to use the feature while

driving, exercise extreme caution at all

times so full attention may be given to

vehicle operation.

●If you are unable to devote full attention

to vehicle operation while using the text

messaging feature, pull off the road to a

safe location and stop your vehicle.

NOTE:

This feature is automatically disabled if the

connected device does not support the

Message Access Profile (MAP). For addi-

tional information, refer to the phone’s

Owner’s Manual for details and instruc-

tions.

NOTE:

Many phones may require special permis-

sion to enable text messaging. Check the

phone’s screen during Bluetooth® pairing.

For some phones, you may need to enable

‘Notifications’ in the phone’s Bluetooth®

menu for text messages to appear on the

headunit. For additional information, refer

to your phone’s Owner’s manual. Text mes-

sage integration requires that the phone

support MAP (Message Access Profile) for

both receiving and sending text messages.

Some phones may not support all text mes-

saging features. For additional informa-

tion, please refer to

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for compatibility

information, as well as your device’s Own-

er’s manual.

The system allows for the sending and receiving

of text messages through the vehicle interface.

Sending a text message:

1. Press the button on the steering

wheel.

2. Say “Phone” after the tone.

3. Say “Send Text” after the tone.

4. The system will provide a list of available

commands in order to determine the recipi-

ent of the text message. Choose from the

following:

●To (a name)

●Enter Number

●Missed Calls

●Incoming Calls

●Outgoing Calls

For additional information about these op-

tions, refer to “Voice commands” in this sec-

tion.

5. Once a recipient is chosen, the system

prompts for which message to send. Nine

predefined messages are available as well

as three custom messages. To choose one

of the predefined messages, speak one of

the following after the tone:

●“Driving, can’t text”

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-99

●“Call me”

●“On my way”

●“Running late”

●“Okay”

●“Yes”

●“No”

●“Where are you?”

●“When?”

●“Custom Messages”

To send one of the custom messages, say

“Custom Messages”. If more than one cus-

tom message is stored, the system will

prompt for the number of the desired cus-

tom message. For additional information on

setting and managing custom text mes-

sages, refer to “Bluetooth® settings” in this

section.

Reading a received text message:

1. Press the button on the steering

wheel.

2. Say “Phone” after the tone.

3. Say “Read Text” after the tone.

The text message, sender and delivery time are

shown on the screen. Use the tuning switch to

scroll through all text messages if more than one

are available. Press the button to exit the

text message screen. Press the button to

access the following options for replying to the

text message:

●Call Back

Speak this command to call the sender of

the text message using the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System.

●Send Text

Speak this command to send a text message

response to the sender of the text message.

●Read Text

Speak this command to read the text mes-

sage again.

●Previous Text

Speak this command to move to the previ-

ous text message (if available).

●Next Text

Speak this command to move to the next text

message (if available).

Siri® Eyes Free

If a connected phone is equipped with Siri®, it

can also be used to create custom messages

that are sent through the phone. For additional

information, refer to “Siri® Eyes Free” in this

section.

NOTE:

Text messages are only displayed if the

vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

NOTE:

For Apple iPhones®, text messages can

only be sent through Siri.

4-100 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

BLUETOOTH® SETTINGS

To access the phone settings:

1. Press the [ ] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.

Menu Item Result

Phone Settings For additional information, refer to “Phone settings” in this section.

Connect New Device Touch to connect a new Bluetooth® device to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

Select Connected Device Touch to choose a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

Replace Connected Device Touch to replace a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

Delete Connected Device Touch to delete a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

Bluetooth Touch to toggle Bluetooth® on and off.

LHA2844

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-101

PHONE SETTINGS

To access the phone settings:

1. Press the [ ] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.

4. Touch the “Phone Settings” key and adjust

the following settings as desired:

●Start Siri® by:

Touch “Short Press” or “Long Press” to set

how Siri® is operated on the steering wheel.

●Sort Phonebook By:

Touch “First Name” or “Last Name” to

choose how phonebook entries are alpha-

betically displayed on the screen.

●Use Phonebook From:

Touch “Handset” to use the phone’s phone-

book. Touch “SIM” to use the phonebook on

the SIM card. Select “Both” to use both

sources.

●Download Phonebook Now:

Touch to download the phonebook to the

vehicle from the chosen source.

●Record Name for Phonebook Entry:

Touch to record a name for a phonebook

entry for use with the NISSAN Voice Recog-

nition System.

●Phone Notifications for:

Touch “Driver” to have phone notifications

shown in the vehicle information display. Se-

lect “Both” to have phone notifications

shown in both the vehicle information display

and the center display screen.

●Text Messaging (if so equipped):

Touch to toggle the text message function-

ality on or off.

●Show Incoming Text for If so equipped):

Touch “Driver” to have incoming text notifi-

cations shown in the vehicle information dis-

play. Touch “Both” to have text notifications

shown in both the vehicle information display

and the center display screen. Touch “Off” to

turn off all text notifications.

●Auto Reply (if so equipped):

Touch to toggle the auto reply functionality

on or off.

●Auto Reply Message (if so equipped):

Touch to indicate preferred message to be

sent when “Auto Reply”function is activated.

●Use Vehicle’s Signature (if so equipped):

Touch to toggle on or off the addition of the

vehicle signature to outgoing messages.

●Custom Text Messages (if so equipped):

Touch this option to select a custom mes-

sage to edit. There are 4 customer message

slots available.

4-102 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The system should respond correctly to all voice

commands without difficulty. If problems are en-

countered, try the following solutions.

Where the solutions are listed by number, try

each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until

the problem is resolved.

Symptom Solution

System fails to interpret the command correctly.

1. Ensure that the command is valid. For additional information, refer to “Voice commands” in this section.

2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.

3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.

4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too

noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.

5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.

The system consistently selects the wrong entry from the

phone book.

1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. For additional information,

refer to “Vehicle phonebook” in this section.

2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.

3. Please speak both first and last name of contact to improve recognition accuracy.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-103

The NISSAN Voice Recognition System allows

hands-free operation of the systems equipped on

this vehicle, such as the phone and navigation

systems.

To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press

the button located on the steering wheel.

When prompted, speak the command for the

system you wish to activate. The command given

is picked up by the microphone and performed

when it is properly recognized. NISSAN Voice

Recognition will provide a voice response as well

as a message in the center display to inform you

of the command results.

USING THE SYSTEM

Initialization

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,

NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized, which

takes a few seconds. When completed, the sys-

tem is ready to accept voice commands. If

the button is pressed before the initializa-

tion completes, the system will announce: “Voice

Recognition System not ready. Please wait.”

Giving voice commands

1. Press the button.

2. The system announces: “Please say a cat-

egory like phone or a command like points of

interest followed by a brand name”. A list of

available commands is then spoken by the

system.

3. After the tone sounds and the face icon on

the display changes, speak a command.

Available commands are discussed else-

where in this section.

4. Voice and display feedback are provided

when the command is accepted.

●Press the button to return to the pre-

vious screen.

●If the command is not recognized, the sys-

tem announces provides a list of available

selections.

●If you want to cancel the command or go

back to the previous menu of commands,

press the button. The system will an-

nounce: “Cancelling voice recognition” or

“Go back” depending on the current menu

level.

●Press the button to move back

through the menus displayed on the screen.

●If you want to adjust the volume of the voice

feedback, use the volume control switches

on the steering wheel or the volume knob on

the control panel.

●The voice command screen can also be

accessed using the control panel display:

1. Press the [ ] button.

2. Touch the “Voice Commands” key.

LHA4372

NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

4-104 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Operating tips

To get the best performance out of NISSAN

Voice Recognition, observe the following:

●Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as

possible. Close the windows to eliminate the

surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration

sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system

from recognizing the voice commands cor-

rectly.

●Wait until a tone sounds before speaking a

command. Otherwise, the command will not

be received properly.

●Start speaking a command within 3.5 sec-

onds after the tone sounds.

●Speak in a natural voice without pausing

between words.

SYSTEM FEATURES

NISSAN Voice Recognition can activate the fol-

lowing systems:

●Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

●Navigation

●Audio

●Information

●My Apps

●Help

For additional information, refer to the separate

Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

How to say numbers

NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain

way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer

to the following examples.

General rule: Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for

“0”.

Phone numbers

Speak phone numbers according to the following

example. For 1-800-662-6200, say dial number

and then speak the phone number in any of the

following formats:

●“one eight oh oh six six two six two oh oh”

●“one eight hundred six six two six two oh oh”

●“one eight zero zero six six two six two oh oh”

For the best voice recognition phone dialing re-

sults, say phone numbers as single digits. Also,

full numbers can only be spoken for “800”. For

example, you cannot say 555-6000 as “five five

five six thousand”.

LHA4373

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-105

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE

PHONE SYSTEM VOICE

COMMANDS

To access the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System voice commands:

1. Press the button.

Say “Call” and then a name in the vehicle

phonebook to call that entry. Otherwise, say

“Phone” to access various phone commands.

If the Bluetooth® has been set to “Off”, the

system announces: “Bluetooth® is off. Would

you like to turn Bluetooth® on?”

If no phone is connected to the system and the

vehicle is stationary, the system announces:

“There is no phone connected. Would you like to

connect a phone now?” Say “Yes” to connect a

phone. All further Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System voice commands are only available if a

phone is connected.

If a phone is connected and Bluetooth® is set to

“On”, the following voice commands are avail-

able:

●Call (a name)

Speak the name of the contact in which you

are trying to call. System will confirm correct

contact. Say “Dial” to initiate dialing.

●Dial Number

Allows for up to 24 digits to be dialed. After

the number is entered, say “Dial” to initiate

dialing. Say “Correction” to correct the num-

ber entered. Say “Go Back” to return to the

main menu.

●List Phonebook

Starting with the first alphabetical entry in

the vehicle phonebook, the system prompts

for an additional command. Say “Dial” to call

the number of the phonebook entry. Say

“Send Text” to send a text message to the

number of the phonebook entry. Say “Next

Entry” to skip to the next alphabetical entry in

the vehicle phonebook, where the same op-

tions will then be available.

●Recent Calls

The system prompts for an additional com-

mand. Say “Missed Calls”, “Incoming Calls”

or “Outgoing Calls” to display a list of such

calls on the screen.

Speak the number of the entry displayed on

the screen to dial that number or say “Next

Page” to view entries on the next page (if

available).

●Redial

Redials the last called number.

●Read Text (if so equipped)

Reads an incoming text message. For more

information about text messaging with the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System, re-

fer to“Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys-

tem with Navigation System” in this section.

●Send Text (if so equipped)

Sends a text message. For more information

about text messaging with the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System, refer to

“Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

with Navigation System” in this section.

●Select Phone

The system replies “Please use manual con-

trols to continue”. Use manual controls to

change the active phone from among the

listed phones connected to the vehicle.

●Siri (if so equipped)

For more information about the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System, refer to “Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation Sys-

tem” in this section.

4-106 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NAVIGATION SYSTEM VOICE

COMMANDS

The following voice commands are available for

the Navigation System:

●Street Address (address)

●Points of Interest (name)

●POI by Category

●Home

●Address Book

●Previous Destinations

●Enter Address in Steps

●Cancel Route

For additional information, refer to the separate

Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

AUDIO SYSTEM VOICE

COMMANDS

To access the audio system voice commands:

1. Press the button.

2. Say “Audio”

3. Speak a command from the following avail-

able commands:

●Play (AM, FM, etc.)

Allows user to select radio band

●Tune AM (number)

Allows user to tune directly to a desired AM

frequency

●Tune FM (number)

Allows user to tune directly to a desired FM

frequency

●SXM channel (number)

Allows user to tune directly to a desired

SXM station (if so equipped)

●CD Track (number)

Allows user to select track to be played

●Play Song (name)

Allows user to select song name to be

played

●Play Artist (name)

Allows user to select artist to be played

●Play Album (name)

Allows user to select album name to be

played

For additional information about the audio sys-

tem, refer to “Audio system” in this section.

INFORMATION VOICE COMMANDS

The following voice commands are available for

the information functions of the Navigation Sys-

tem:

●Traffic

●Fuel Prices

●Stocks

●Sports

●Movie Listings

●Current Weather

●Weather Map

●5 — day Forecast

●6 — hour Forecast

For additional information about these com-

mands, refer to the separate Navigation System

Owner’s Manual.

MY APPS VOICE COMMANDS

Many Apps can be accessed using this voice

command. For additional information, refer to

“NissanConnect

Mobile Apps” in this section.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-107

HELP VOICE COMMANDS

The following voice commands can be spoken to

have the system provide instructions and tips for

using the NISSAN Voice Recognition System.

●List Commands

●What Can I Say?

●General Help

●Quit

●Exit

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The system should respond correctly to all voice

commands without difficulty. If problems are en-

countered, follow the solutions given in this guide

for the appropriate error. Where the solutions are

listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting

with number one, until the problem is resolved.

Symptom/error message Solution

The system responds “Command Not

Recognized” or the system fails to rec-

ognize the command correctly.

1. Ensure that the command format is valid. Use the “List Commands” or “What Can I Say?” command under the “Help” menu.

2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.

3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, with the windows open or the defroster on).

NOTE:

If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.

4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then the command should be tried with these in place.

4-108 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving................5-4

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ..................5-4

Three-way catalyst..............................5-4

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)..........5-5

On-pavement and off-road driving

precautions ....................................5-9

Avoiding collision and rollover. . ..................5-9

Off-road recovery...............................5-9

Rapid air pressure loss .........................5-10

Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving...............5-10

Driving safety precautions ......................5-11

Ignition switch (if so equipped).....................5-13

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)........5-13

Key positions .................................5-13

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System.............5-14

Push-Button Ignition Switch (if so equipped) ........5-14

Operating range...............................5-15

Push-button ignition switch positions . . . .........5-16

Emergency engine shut off .....................5-16

NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge

(if so equipped) ...............................5-17

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System.............5-17

Before starting the engine .........................5-18

Starting the engine (models without NISSAN

Intelligent Key® system)...........................5-18

Starting the engine (models with NISSAN

Intelligent Key® system)...........................5-19

Remote start (if so equipped) ...................5-20

Driving the vehicle ................................5-20

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)........5-20

Parking brake ....................................5-25

SPORT mode switch .............................5-25

ECO mode switch ................................5-26

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (if so equipped) .........5-26

BSW system operation ........................5-28

How to enable/disable the BSW system .........5-29

BSW system limitations ........................5-30

BSW driving situations.........................5-31

System temporarily unavailable..................5-34

System maintenance...........................5-35

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (if so equipped) .....5-36

RCTA system operation ........................5-37

How to enable/disable the RCTA system .........5-39

RCTA system limitations........................5-40

System temporarily unavailable..................5-43

System maintenance...........................5-43

Cruise control....................................5-44

Precautions on cruise control ...................5-44

Cruise control operations.......................5-45

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (if so equipped)......5-46

How to select the cruise control mode ...........5-48

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode.........5-48

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

operation .....................................5-50

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

switches......................................5-51

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

limitations.....................................5-57

System temporarily unavailable..................5-61

System maintenance...........................5-63

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control

mode ........................................5-64

Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) (if so equipped) . .5-69

FEB system operation..........................5-70

Turning the FEB system on/off . . ................5-72

FEB system limitations .........................5-72

System temporarily unavailable..................5-74

System malfunction ............................5-74

System maintenance...........................5-74

Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) with pedestrian

detection system (if so equipped) ..................5-76

FEB with pedestrian detection system

operation .....................................5-77

Turning the FEB with pedestrian detection

system ON/OFF...............................5-79

FEB with pedestrian detection system

limitations.....................................5-80

System temporarily unavailable..................5-82

System malfunction ............................5-83

System maintenance...........................5-83

Break-in schedule ................................5-85

Fuel efficient driving tips...........................5-85

Increasing fuel economy...........................5-87

All-wheel drive (AWD) (if so equipped)..............5-87

AWD Lock Switch Operations ..................5-88

Parking/parking on hills............................5-90

Power steering ...................................5-91

Brake system ....................................5-92

Brake precautions .............................5-92

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS).................5-92

Brake assist ..................................5-93

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system .............5-94

Brake force distribution ........................5-95

Chassis Control ..................................5-96

Active trace control ............................5-96

Active engine brake............................5-97

Active ride control .............................5-98

Hill start assist system ............................5-99

Cold weather driving.............................5-100

Freeing a frozen door lock .....................5-100

Antifreeze....................................5-100

Battery ......................................5-100

Draining of coolant water ......................5-100

Tire equipment . . .............................5-101

Special winter equipment......................5-101

Driving on snow or ice ........................5-101

Engine block heater (if so equipped)............5-101

WARNING

●Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assistance

of others alone in your vehicle. Pets

should also not be left alone. They

could accidentally injure themselves or

others through inadvertent operation of

the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,

temperatures in a closed vehicle could

quickly become high enough to cause

severe or possibly fatal injuries to

people or animals.

●Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or

shifting. Do not place cargo higher than

the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-

lision, unsecured cargo could cause

personal injury.

●To avoid raising the center of gravity

excessively, do not exceed the rated

capacity of the roof rack (if so equipped)

and evenly distribute the load.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

●Do not breathe exhaust gases; they

contain colorless and odorless carbon

monoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger-

ous. It can cause unconsciousness or

death.

●If you suspect that exhaust fumes are

entering the vehicle, drive with all win-

dows fully open, and have the vehicle

inspected immediately.

●Do not run the engine in closed spaces

such as a garage.

●Do not park the vehicle with the engine

running for any extended length of time.

●Keep the rear vent windows, liftgates,

doors and trunk lids (if so equipped)

closed while driving, otherwise exhaust

gases could be drawn into the passen-

ger compartment. If you must drive with

one of these open, follow these

precautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the air recirculation but-

ton to off and the fan control dial to

high to circulate the air.

●If electrical wiring or other cable con-

nections must pass to a trailer through

the seal on the liftgate or the body,

follow the manufacturer’s recommen-

dation to prevent carbon monoxide en-

try into the vehicle.

●The exhaust system and body should be

inspected by a qualified mechanic

whenever:

a. The vehicle is raised for service.

b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are

entering into the passenger

compartment.

c. You notice a change in the sound of

the exhaust system.

d. You have had an accident involving

damage to the exhaust system, un-

derbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST

The three-way catalyst is an emission control

device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust

gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at

high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING

AND DRIVING

5-4 Starting and driving

WARNING

●The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-

tem are very hot. Keep people, animals

or flammable materials away from the

exhaust system components.

●Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry grass,

waste paper or rags. They may ignite

and cause a fire.

CAUTION

●Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits

from leaded gasoline will seriously re-

duce the three-way catalyst’s ability to

help reduce exhaust pollutants.

●Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-

tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or

electrical systems can cause over rich

fuel flow into the three-way catalyst,

causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv-

ing if the engine misfires, or if notice-

able loss of performance or other un-

usual operating conditions are

detected. Have the vehicle inspected

promptly. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

●Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel

level. Running out of fuel could cause

the engine to misfire, damaging the

three-way catalyst.

●Do not race the engine while warming it

up.

●Do not push or tow your vehicle to start

the engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS)

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold and in-

flated to the inflation pressure recommended by

the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard

or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has

tires of a different size than the size indicated on

the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,

you should determine the proper tire inflation

pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been

equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale

when one or more of your tires is significantly

under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire

pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and

check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate

them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-

cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-

heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation

also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and

may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping

ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for

proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s

responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,

even if under-inflation has not reached the level to

trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure

telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the

system is not operating properly. The TPMS mal-

function indicator is combined with the low tire

pressure telltale. When the system detects a

malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-

mately one minute and then remain continuously

illuminated. This sequence will continue upon

subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal-

function exists. When the malfunction indicator is

illuminated, the system may not be able to detect

or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS

malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,

including the installation of replacement or alter-

nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent

the TPMS from functioning properly. Always

check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac-

ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to

Starting and driving 5-5

ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and

wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function

properly.

Additional information:

●Since the spare tire is not equipped with the

TPMS, the TPMS does not monitor the tire

pressure of the spare tire.

●The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle

is driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h).

Also, this system may not detect a sudden

drop in tire pressure (for example a flat tire

while driving).

●The low tire pressure warning light does not

automatically turn off when the tire pressure

is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the

recommended pressure, the vehicle must be

driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h) to

activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire

pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure

gauge to check the tire pressure.

●The “Tire Pressure Low Add Air” warning

appears each time the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position as long as the low

tire pressure warning light remains illumi-

nated.

●The “Tire Pressure Low Add Air” warning

appears in the vehicle information display

when the low tire pressure warning light is

illuminated and low tire pressure is detected.

The “Tire Pressure Low Add Air” warning

turns off when the low tire pressure warning

light turns off.

●The “Tire Pressure Low Add Air” warning

does not appear if the low tire pressure

warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS

malfunction.

●Tire pressure rises and falls depending on

the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation

and the outside temperature. Do not reduce

the tire pressure after driving because the

tire pressure rises after driving. Low outside

temperature can lower the temperature of

the air inside the tire which can cause a

lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause

the low tire pressure warning light to illumi-

nate. If the warning light illuminates, check

the tire pressure for all four tires.

●The Tire and Loading Information label (also

referred to as the vehicle placard or tire

inflation pressure label) is located in the

driver’s door opening.

●You can also check the pressure of all tires

(except the spare tire) on the vehicle infor-

mation display screen. The order of the tire

pressure figures displayed on the screen

corresponds with the actual order of the tire

position.

For additional information, refer to “Low tire pres-

sure warning light” in the “Instruments and con-

trols” section, “Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency” section of

this manual.

WARNING

●Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those who

use a pacemaker should contact the

electric medical equipment manufac-

turer for the possible influences before

use.

5-6 Starting and driving

●If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, avoid sudden

steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,

reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road

to a safe location and stop the vehicle

as soon as possible. Driving with under-

inflated tires may permanently damage

the tires and increase the likelihood of

tire failure. Serious vehicle damage

could occur and may lead to an accident

and could result in serious personal in-

jury. Check the tire pressure for all four

tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the

recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the Tire and Loading Informa-

tion label to turn the low tire pressure

warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,

replace it with a spare tire as soon as

possible. (For additional information,

refer to “Flat tire” in the “In case of

emergency” section for changing a flat

tire.)

●Since the spare tire is not equipped with

the TPMS, when a spare tire is mounted

or a wheel is replaced, tire pressure will

not be indicated, the TPMS will not

function and the low tire pressure warn-

ing light will flash for approximately

1 minute. The light will remain on after

1 minute. Have your tires replaced

and/or TPMS system reset as soon as

possible. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

●Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by NISSAN could affect the

proper operation of the TPMS.

●Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol

tire sealant into the tires, as this may

cause a malfunction of the tire pressure

sensors.

CAUTION

●The TPMS may not function properly

when the wheels are equipped with tire

chains or the wheels are buried in snow.

●Do not place metalized film or any

metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the win-

dows. This may cause poor reception of

the signals from the tire pressure sen-

sors, and the TPMS will not function

properly.

Some devices and transmitters may temporarily

interfere with the operation of the TPMS and

cause the low tire pressure warning light to illu-

minate.

Some examples are:

– Facilities or electric devices using similar radio

frequencies are near the vehicle.

– If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is

being used in or near the vehicle.

– If a computer (or similar equipment) or a

DC/AC converter is being used in or near the

vehicle.

Low tire pressure warning light may illuminate in

the following cases.

●If the vehicle equipped with a wheel and tire

without TPMS.

●If the TPMS has been replaced and the ID

has not been registered.

●If the wheel is not originally specified by

NISSAN.

Starting and driving 5-7

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device may

not cause harmful interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference re-

ceived, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modification not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to op-

erate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada

license-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-

tion is subject to the following two condi-

tions: (1) this device may not cause inter-

ference, and (2) this device must accept any

interference, including interference that

may cause undesired operation of the de-

vice.

TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert

When adding air to an under-inflated tire, the

TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert provides visual and

audible signals outside the vehicle to help you

inflate the tires to the recommended COLD tire

pressure.

Vehicle set-up

1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place.

2. Apply the parking brake and place the shift

lever to the P (Park) position.

3. Place the ignition switch to the ON position.

Do not start the engine.

Operation

1. Add air to the tire.

2. After a few seconds, the hazard indicators

will start flashing.

3. When the designated pressure is reached,

the horn beeps once and the hazard indica-

tors stop flashing.

4. Perform the above steps for each tire.

●If the tire is over-inflated more than ap-

proximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the horn

beeps and the hazard indicators flash

three times. To correct the pressure, push

the core of the valve stem on the tire

briefly to release pressure. When the

pressure reaches the designated pres-

sure, the horn beeps once.

●If the hazard indicator does not flash

within approximately 15 seconds after

starting to inflate the tire, it indicates that

the Easy Fill Tire Alert is not operating.

●The TPMS will not activate the Easy Fill

Tire Alert under the following conditions:

– If there is interference from an external

device or transmitter.

– The air pressure from the inflation device

is not sufficient to inflate the tire.

– There is a malfunction in the TPMS sys-

tem.

– There is a malfunction in the horn or haz-

ard indicators.

– The identification code of the tires pres-

sure sensor is not registered to the sys-

tem.

– The battery of the tire pressure sensor is

low.

●If the Easy Fill Tire Alert does not operate

due to TPMS interference, move the ve-

hicle about 3 ft (1 m) backward or forward

and try again.

If the Easy Fill Tire Alert is not working, use a tire

pressure gauge.

5-8 Starting and driving

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD

DRIVING PRECAUTIONS

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher

rollover rate than other types of vehicles.

They have higher ground clearance than passen-

ger cars to make them capable of performing in a

variety of on-pavement and off-road applications.

This gives them a higher center of gravity than

ordinary vehicles. An advantage of higher ground

clearance is a better view of the road, allowing

you to anticipate problems. However, they are not

designed for cornering at the same speeds as

conventional 2-wheel drive vehicles any more

than low-slung sports cars are designed to per-

form satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If at

all possible, avoid sharp turns at high speeds. As

with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate

this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control

or vehicle rollover. In a rollover crash, an unbelted

person is significantly more likely to die than a

person wearing a seat belt.

For additional information, refer to “Driving safety

precautions” in this section.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND

ROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe

and prudent manner may result in loss of

control or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey

all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,

high speed cornering, or sudden steering ma-

neuvers, because these driving practices could

cause you to lose control of your vehicle.

As with any vehicle, loss of control could

result in a collision with other vehicles or

objects or cause the vehicle to roll over,

particularly if the loss of control causes the

vehicle to slide sideways.

Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving when

tired. Never drive when under the influence of

alcohol or drugs (including prescription or over-

the-counter drugs which may cause drowsi-

ness). Always wear your seat belt as outlined in

the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemental

restraint system” section of this manual, and also

instruct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in colli-

sions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an

unbelted or improperly belted person is

significantly more likely to be injured or

killed than a person properly wearing a

seat belt.

OFF-ROAD RECOVERY

While driving, the right side or left side wheels

may unintentionally leave the road surface. If this

occurs, maintain control of the vehicle by follow-

ing the procedure below. Please note that this

procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle

must be driven as appropriate based on the con-

ditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Do not apply the brakes.

3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel

with both hands and try to hold a straight

course.

4. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-

erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the ve-

hicle to follow the road while vehicle speed

is reduced. Do not attempt to drive the ve-

hicle back onto the road surface until vehicle

speed is reduced.

6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the

steering wheel until both tires return to the

Starting and driving 5-9

road surface. When all tires are on the road

surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the ap-

propriate driving lane.

●If you decide that it is not safe to return the

vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle,

road or traffic conditions, gradually slow the

vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road.

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS

Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can occur

if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to

hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure loss

can also be caused by driving on under-inflated

tires.

Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling

and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway

speeds.

Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintain-

ing the correct air pressure and visually inspect

the tires for wear and damage. For additional

information, refer to “Wheels and tires” in the

“Do-it-yourself” section of this manual. If a tire

rapidly loses air pressure or “blows-out” while

driving, maintain control of the vehicle by follow-

ing the procedure below. Please note that this

procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle

must be driven as appropriate based on the con-

ditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.

WARNING

The following actions can increase the

chance of losing control of the vehicle if

there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure.

Losing control of the vehicle may cause a

collision and result in personal injury.

●The vehicle generally moves or pulls in

the direction of the flat tire.

●Do not rapidly apply the brakes.

●Do not rapidly release the accelerator

pedal.

●Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel

with both hands and try to hold a straight

course.

3. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-

erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location

off the road and away from traffic if possible.

5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually

stop the vehicle.

6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and

contact a roadside emergency service to

change the tire. For additional information,

refer to “Changing a flat tire” in the “In case

of emergency” section of this manual.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND

DRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alcohol

or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re-

duces coordination, delays reaction time

and impairs judgement. Driving after

drinking alcohol increases the likelihood

of being involved in an accident injuring

yourself and others. Additionally, if you

are injured in an accident, alcohol can

increase the severity of the injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,

you must choose not to drive under the influence

of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are

injured or killed in alcohol-related collisions. Al-

though the local laws vary on what is considered

to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol

affects all people differently and most people

underestimate the effects of alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! That is

true for drugs (over-the-counter, prescription)

and illegal drugs, too. Don’t drive if your ability to

operate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol,

drugs, or some other physical condition.

5-10 Starting and driving

DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Your NISSAN is designed for both normal and

off-road use. However, avoid driving in deep wa-

ter or mud as your NISSAN is mainly designed for

leisure use, unlike a conventional off-road ve-

hicle.

Remember that 2-wheel drive models are less

capable than all-wheel drive models for rough

road driving and extrication when stuck in deep

snow or mud, or the like.

Please observe the following precautions:

WARNING

●Spinning the front wheels on slippery

surface may cause the AWD warning

message to display and the AWD sys-

tem to automatically switch from the

AWD to the 2WD mode. This could re-

duce the traction. Be especially careful

when towing a trailer. (AWD models)

●Drive carefully when off the road and

avoid dangerous areas. Every person

who drives or rides in this vehicle

should be seated with their seat belt

fastened. This will keep you and your

passengers in position when driving

over rough terrain.

●Do not drive across steep slopes. In-

stead drive either straight up or straight

down the slopes. Off-road vehicles can

tip over sideways much more easily

than they can forward or backward.

●Many hills are too steep for any vehicle.

If you drive up them, you may stall. If

you drive down them, you may not be

able to control your speed. If you drive

across them, you may roll over.

●Do not shift gears while driving on

downhill grades as this could cause

loss of control of the vehicle.

●Stay alert when driving to the top of a

hill. At the top there could be a drop-off

or other hazard that could cause an

accident.

●If your engine stalls or you cannot make

it to the top of a steep hill, never at-

tempt to turn around. Your vehicle could

tip or roll over. Always back straight

down in R (Reverse) gear and apply

brakes to control your speed.

●Heavy braking going down a hill could

cause your brakes to overheat and fade,

resulting in loss of control and an acci-

dent. Apply brakes lightly and use a low

gear to control your speed.

●Unsecured cargo can be thrown around

when driving over rough terrain. Prop-

erly secure all cargo so it will not be

thrown forward and cause injury to you

or your passengers.

●To avoid raising the center of gravity

excessively, do not exceed the rated

capacity of the roof rack (if so equipped)

and evenly distribute the load.

●Secure heavy loads in the cargo area as

far forward and as low as possible. Do

not equip the vehicle with tires larger

than specified in this manual. This could

cause your vehicle to roll over.

●Do not grip the inside or spokes of the

steering wheel when driving off-road.

The steering wheel could move sud-

denly and injure your hands. Instead

drive with your fingers and thumbs on

the outside of the rim.

●Before operating the vehicle, ensure

that the driver and all passengers have

their seat belts fastened.

●Always drive with the floor mats in place

as the floor may become hot.

Starting and driving 5-11

●Lower your speed when encountering

strong crosswinds. With a higher center

of gravity, your NISSAN is more affected

by strong side winds. Slower speeds

ensure better vehicle control.

●Do not drive beyond the performance

capability of the tires, even with AWD

engaged.

●For AWD equipped vehicles, do not at-

tempt to raise two wheels off the

ground and shift the transmission to

any drive or reverse position with the

engine running. Doing so may result in

drivetrain damage or unexpected ve-

hicle movement which could result in

serious vehicle damage or personal

injury.

●Do not attempt to test an AWD

equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dyna-

mometer (such as the dynamometers

used by some states for emissions test-

ing), or similar equipment even if the

other two wheels are raised off the

ground. Make sure you inform test facil-

ity personnel that your vehicle is

equipped with AWD before it is placed

on a dynamometer. Using the wrong

test equipment may result in drivetrain

damage or unexpected vehicle move-

ment which could result in serious ve-

hicle damage or personal injury.

●When a wheel is off the ground due to

an unlevel surface, do not spin the

wheel excessively.

●Accelerating quickly, sharp steering

maneuvers or sudden braking may

cause loss of control.

●If at all possible, avoid sharp turning

maneuvers, particularly at high speeds.

Your NISSAN vehicle has a higher cen-

ter of gravity than a passenger car. The

vehicle is not designed for cornering at

the same speeds as passenger cars.

●Failure to operate this vehicle correctly

could result in loss of control and/or a

rollover accident.

●Always use tires of the same type, size,

brand, construction (bias, bias-belted,

or radial), and tread pattern on all four

wheels. Install tire chains on the front

wheels when driving on slippery roads

and drive carefully.

●Be sure to check the brakes immedi-

ately after driving in mud or water. For

additional information, refer to “Brake

system” in this section for “Wet

brakes”.

●Avoid parking your vehicle on steep

hills. If you get out of the vehicle and it

rolls forward, backward or sideways,

you could be injured.

●Whenever you drive off-road through

sand, mud or water as deep as the

wheel hub, more frequent maintenance

may be required. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Maintenance under se-

vere operating conditions” in the “Main-

tenance and schedules” section of this

manual.

5-12 Starting and driving

WARNING

Never remove or turn the key to the LOCK

position while driving. The steering wheel

will lock (for models with a steering lock

mechanism). This may cause the driver to

lose control of the vehicle and could result

in serious vehicle damage or personal

injury.

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE

TRANSMISSION (CVT)

The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition

switch cannot be turned to the LOCK position

until the shift lever is moved to the P (Park)

position.

●When moving the ignition switch to the

LOCK position, make sure the shift lever is in

the P (Park) position.

●When removing the key from the ignition

switch, make sure the shift lever is in the P

(Park) position.

When the ignition switch cannot be turned to the

LOCK position:

1. Shift the shift lever to the P (Park) position.

2. Turn the ignition switch slightly in the ON

direction.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-

tion.

4. Remove the key if it is inserted in the ignition

switch.

If the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK posi-

tion, the shift lever cannot be moved from the P

(Park) position.

The shift lever can be moved if the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position and the

foot brake pedal is depressed.

KEY POSITIONS

LOCK: Normal parking position (0)

OFF: (Not used) (1)

This position activates electrical accessories

such as the radio when the engine is not running.

ON: Normal operating position (2)

This position turns on the ignition system and the

electrical accessories.

LIC2717

IGNITION SWITCH (if so equipped)

Starting and driving 5-13

START: (3)

This position starts the engine. As soon as the

engine has started, release the key. It automati-

cally returns to the ON position.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not

allow the engine to start without the use of the

registered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered key

(for example, when interference is caused by

another registered key, an automated toll road

device or automatic payment device on the key

ring), restart the engine using the following pro-

cedure:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position

for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or

LOCK position, and wait approximately

10 seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device

(which may have caused the interference)

separate from the registered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-

ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-

rate key ring to avoid interference from other

devices.

WARNING

Do not operate the push-button ignition

switch while driving the vehicle except in

an emergency. (The engine will stop when

the ignition switch is pushed 3 consecu-

tive times in quick succession or the igni-

tion switch is pushed and held for more

than 2 seconds.) If the engine stops while

the vehicle is being driven, this could lead

to a crash and serious injury.

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH (if

so equipped)

5-14 Starting and driving

When the ignition switch is pushed without de-

pressing the brake pedal, the ignition switch will

illuminate.

Push the ignition switch center:

●Once to change to ON.

●Two times to change to OFF.

The ignition switch will automatically return to the

LOCK position when any door is either opened or

closed with the switch in the OFF position.

The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition

switch position cannot be switched to OFF until

the shift lever is moved to the P (Park) position.

When the ignition switch cannot be pushed to-

ward the OFF position, proceed as follows:

1. Move the shift lever into the P (Park) posi-

tion.

2. Push the ignition switch. The ignition switch

position will change to the ON position.

3. Push the ignition switch again to the OFF

position.

The shift lever can be moved from the P

(Park) position if the ignition switch is in

the ON position and the brake pedal is

depressed.

If the battery of the vehicle is discharged,

the push-button ignition switch cannot be

moved from the LOCK position.

Some indicators and warnings for operation are

displayed on the vehicle information display. For

additional information, refer to “Vehicle informa-

tion display” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

OPERATING RANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can only be used

when the Intelligent Key is within the specified

operating range.

When the Intelligent Key battery is almost dis-

charged or strong radio waves are present near

the operating location, the Intelligent Key sys-

tem’s operating range becomes narrower and

may not function properly.

If the Intelligent Key is within the operating range,

it is possible for anyone, even someone who does

not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the ignition

switch to start the engine.

LSD2184 LSD2020

Starting and driving 5-15

The operating range of the engine start function

is inside of the vehicle 䊊

●The luggage area is not included in the op-

erating range, but the Intelligent Key may

function.

●If the Intelligent Key is placed on the instru-

ment panel, inside the glove box, storage bin

or door pocket, the Intelligent Key may not

function.

●If the Intelligent Key is placed near the door

or window outside the vehicle, the Intelligent

Key may function.

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

POSITIONS

LOCK (Normal parking position):

The ignition switch can only be locked in this

position.

The ignition switch will lock when any door is

opened or closed with the ignition switched off.

ON (Normal operating position):

This position turns on the ignition system and

electrical accessories.

ON has a battery saver feature that will turn the

ignition switch to the OFF position, if the vehicle

is not running, after some time under the follow-

ing conditions:

●All doors are closed.

●Shift lever is in P (Park).

The battery saver feature will be cancelled if any

of the following occur:

●Any door is opened.

●Shift lever is moved out of the P (Park)

position.

●Ignition switch changes position.

CAUTION

Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition

switch in the ON position when the engine

is not running for an extended period. This

can discharge the battery.

OFF:

The ignition switch is in the OFF position when

the engine is turned off using the ignition switch.

No lights will illuminate on the ignition switch.

AUTO ACC:

With the vehicle in the P (Park) position, the

Intelligent key with you and the ignition placed

from ON to OFF, the radio can still be used for a

period of time, or until the driver’s door is opened.

After a period of time, functions such as radio,

navigation, and Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System may be restarted by pressing the

“POWER button/ VOLUME control knob”. For

additional information, refer to “Monitor, climate,

audio, phone and voice recognition systems” in

this manual or the key fob unlock button up to a

total of 30 minutes.

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF

To shut off the engine in an emergency situation

while driving, perform the following procedure:

●Rapidly push the push-button ignition

switch three consecutive times in less than

1.5 seconds, or

●Push and hold the push-button ignition

switch for more than 2 seconds.

5-16 Starting and driving

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

BATTERY DISCHARGE (if so

equipped)

If the battery of the NISSAN Intelligent Key® is

discharged, or environmental conditions interfere

with the Intelligent Key operation, start the engine

according to the following procedure:

1. Place the shift lever in the P (Park) position.

2. Firmly apply the foot brake.

3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent

Key as illustrated. (A chime will sound.)

After step 3 is performed, when the ignition

switch is pushed without depressing the

brake pedal, the ignition switch position will

change to ON.

4. Push the ignition switch while depressing

the brake pedal within ten seconds after the

chime sounds. The engine will start.

NOTE:

●When the ignition switch is pushed to the

ON position or the engine is started by the

above procedure, the Intelligent Key battery

discharge indicator appears in the vehicle

information display even when the Intelligent

Key is inside the vehicle. This is not a mal-

function. To turn off the Intelligent Key bat-

tery discharge indicator, touch the ignition

switch with the Intelligent Key again.

●If the Intelligent Key battery discharge indi-

cator appears, replace the battery as soon

as possible. For additional information, refer

to “Battery replacement” in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not

allow the engine to start without the use of the

registered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered key

(for example, when interference is caused by

another registered key, an automated toll road

device or automatic payment device on the key

ring), restart the engine using the following pro-

cedure:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position

for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or

LOCK position, and wait approximately

10 seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device

(which may have caused the interference)

separate from the registered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-

ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-

rate key ring to avoid interference from other

devices.

SSD0860

Starting and driving 5-17

●Make sure the area around the vehicle is

clear.

●Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-

ant, brake fluid, and windshield-washer fluid

as frequently as possible, or at least when-

ever you refuel.

●Check that all windows and lights are clean.

●Visually inspect tires for their appearance

and condition. Also check tires for proper

inflation.

●Check that all doors are closed.

●Position seat and adjust head

restraints/headrests.

●Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

●Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to

do likewise.

●Check the operation of warning lights when

the ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-

tion. For additional information, refer to

“Warning lights, indicator lights and audible

reminders” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neu-

tral). P (Park) is recommended.

The shift lever cannot be moved out of

P (Park) and into any of the other gear

positions if the ignition key is turned to

the OFF position or if the key is re-

moved from the ignition switch.

The starter is designed not to operate if

the shift lever is in any of the driving

positions.

3. Crank the engine with your foot off the

accelerator pedal by turning the ignition

key to START. Release the key when the

engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to

run, repeat the above procedure.

●If the engine is very hard to start in ex-

tremely cold weather or when restarting,

depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap-

proximately 1/3 to the floor) and hold it

and then crank the engine. Release the

key and the accelerator pedal when the

engine starts.

●If the engine is very hard to start because

it is flooded, depress the accelerator

pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.

Crank the engine for five to six seconds.

After cranking the engine, release the ac-

celerator pedal. Crank the engine with

your foot off the accelerator pedal by

turning the ignition key to START. Release

the key when the engine starts. If the

engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the

above procedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more than

15 seconds at a time. If the engine does

not start, turn the key off and wait ten

seconds before cranking again, otherwise

the starter could be damaged.

4. Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec-

onds after starting. Do not race the engine

while warming it up. Drive at moderate

speed for a short distance first, especially in

cold weather.

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE (models

without NISSAN Intelligent Key®

system)

5-18 Starting and driving

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery discharge

and potential no-start conditions such as:

1. Installation or extended use of electronic

accessories that consume battery power

when the engine is not running (Phone char-

gers, GPS, DVD players, etc.)

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only

driven short distances. In these cases, the

battery may need to be charged to maintain

battery health.

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neu-

tral). P (Park) is recommended.

The starter is designed not to operate if

the shift lever is in any of the driving

positions.

3. Push the ignition switch to the ON position.

Depress the brake pedal and push the igni-

tion switch to start the engine.

To start the engine immediately, push and

release the ignition switch while depressing

the brake pedal with the ignition switch in

any position.

●If the engine is very hard to start in ex-

tremely cold weather or when restarting,

depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap-

proximately 1/3 to the floor) and while

holding, crank the engine. Release the

accelerator pedal when the engine starts.

●If the engine is very hard to start because

it is flooded, depress the accelerator

pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.

Push the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion to start cranking the engine. After five

or six seconds, stop cranking by pushing

the ignition switch to LOCK. After crank-

ing the engine, release the accelerator

pedal. Crank the engine with your foot off

the accelerator pedal by depressing the

brake pedal and pushing the push-button

ignition switch to start the engine. If the

engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the

above procedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more than

15 seconds at a time. If the engine does

not start, push the ignition switch to the

OFF position and wait 10 seconds before

cranking again, otherwise the starter

could be damaged.

4. Warm-up

Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec-

onds after starting. Do not race the engine

while warming it up. Drive at moderate

speed for a short distance first, especially in

cold weather. In cold weather, keep the en-

gine running for a minimum of two to three

minutes before shutting it off. Starting and

stopping the engine over a short period of

time may make the vehicle more difficult to

start.

5. To stop the engine, shift the shift lever into

the P (Park) position and push the ignition

switch to the OFF position.

STARTING THE ENGINE (models with

NISSAN Intelligent Key® system)

Starting and driving 5-19

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery discharge

and potential no-start conditions such as:

1. Installation or extended use of electronic

accessories that consume battery power

when the engine is not running (Phone char-

gers, GPS, DVD players, etc.)

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only

driven short distances. In these cases, the

battery may need to be charged to maintain

battery health.

REMOTE START (if so equipped)

Vehicles started with the remote start require the

ignition switch to be placed in the ON position

before the shift lever can be moved from the P

(Park) position. To place the ignition switch to the

ON position, follow these steps:

1. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is on you.

2. Apply the brake.

3. Push the ignition switch once to the ON

position.

For additional information, refer to “NISSAN In-

telligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks and

adjustments” section of this manual.

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE

TRANSMISSION (CVT)

WARNING

●Do not depress the accelerator pedal

while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-

tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), or (M)

Manual shift mode. Always depress the

brake pedal until shifting is completed.

Failure to do so could cause you to lose

control and have an accident.

●Cold engine idle speed is high, so use

caution when shifting into a forward or

reverse gear before the engine has

warmed up.

●Do not downshift abruptly on slippery

roads. this may cause a loss of control.

●Never shift to either the P (Park) or R

(Reverse) position while the vehicle is

moving forward and P (Park) or D

(Drive) position while the vehicle is re-

versing. This could cause an accident or

damage the transmission.

CAUTION

●To avoid possible damage to your ve-

hicle; when stopping the vehicle on an

uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by

depressing the accelerator pedal. The

foot brake should be used for this

purpose.

●Except in an emergency, do not shift to

the N (Neutral) position while driving.

Coasting with the transmission in the N

(Neutral) position may cause serious

damage to the transmission.

The CVT in your vehicle is electronically con-

trolled to produce maximum power and smooth

operation.

The recommended operating procedures for this

transmission are shown on the following pages.

Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle

performance and driving enjoyment.

Engine power may be automatically re-

duced to protect the CVT if the engine

speed increases quickly when driving on

slippery roads or while being tested on

some dynamometers.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE

5-20 Starting and driving

Starting the vehicle

1. After starting the engine, fully depress the

foot brake pedal before moving the shift

lever out of the P (Park) position.

This CVT is designed so that the foot

brake pedal must be depressed before

shifting from P (Park) to any driving

position while the ignition switch is in

the ON position.

The shift lever cannot be moved out of

the P (Park) position and into any of

the other positions if the ignition

switch is placed in the LOCK or OFF

position.

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and

move the shift lever to a driving position.

3. Release the parking brake and foot brake

pedal, and then gradually start the vehicle in

motion.

WARNING

●Do not depress the accelerator pedal

while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-

tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or L (Low)

position. Always depress the brake

pedal until shifting is completed. Fail-

ure to do so could cause you to lose

control and have an accident.

●Cold engine idle speed is high, so use

caution when shifting into a forward or

reverse gear before the engine has

warmed up.

●Do not downshift abruptly on slippery

roads. This may cause a loss of control.

●Never shift to either the P (Park) or R

(Reverse) position while vehicle is mov-

ing forward and P (Park) or D (Drive)

position while the vehicle is reversing.

This could cause an accident or damage

the transmission.

CAUTION

●To avoid possible damage to your ve-

hicle, when stopping the vehicle on an

uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by

depressing the accelerator pedal. The

foot brake should be used for this

purpose.

●Except in an emergency, do not shift to

the N (Neutral) position while driving.

Coasting with the transmission in the N

(Neutral) position may cause serious

damage to the transmission.

Shifting

After starting the engine, fully depress the brake

pedal, push and press the shift lever button and

move the shift lever from the P (Park) position to

any of the desired shift positions.

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the shift lever is

in any position while the engine is not

running. Failure to do so could cause the

vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away

and result in serious personal injury or

property damage.

LSD2691

Starting and driving 5-21

CAUTION

Use the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position

only when the vehicle is completely

stopped.

P (Park)

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use the

P (Park) position only when the vehicle is

completely stopped

Use the P (Park) shift lever position when the

vehicle is parked or when starting the engine.

Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped.

The brake pedal must be depressed and

the shift lever button pushed in to move the

shift lever from N (Neutral) or any drive

position to P (Park). Apply the parking brake.

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake

first, then move the shift lever into the P (Park)

position.

R (Reverse)

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use the

R (Reverse) position only when the vehicle

is completely stopped.

Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Make

sure the vehicle is completely stopped before

selecting the R (Reverse) position. The brake

pedal must be depressed and the shift lever

button pushed in to move the shift lever

from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any drive po-

sition to R (Reverse).

N (Neutral)

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The

engine can be started in this position. You may

shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine

while the vehicle is moving.

D (Drive)

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

Manual shift mode

When the shift lever is in the manual shift gate,

the transmission is ready for the manual shift

mode. Shift ranges can be selected manually by

moving the shift lever up or down. To cancel

manual shift mode, return the shift lever to the D

(Drive) position. The transmission returns to au-

tomatic driving mode.

When the shift lever is shifted from D (Drive) to

the manual shift gate with the vehicle stopped or

while driving, the transmission enters the manual

shift mode. Shift ranges can be selected manu-

ally. In the manual shift mode, the shift range is

displayed on the position indicator in the meter.

When shifting the shift lever to the manual shift

gate, the position indicator displays 1 (1st) up to

7 (7th) depending on vehicle speed.

Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:

1⇔2⇔3⇔4⇔5⇔6⇔7

7 (7th)

Use this position for all normal forward driving at

highway speeds.

6 (6th) and 5 (5th)

Use this position when driving up long slopes, or

for engine braking when driving down long

slopes.

4 (4th), 3 (3rd) and 2 (2nd)

Use these positions for hill climbing or engine

braking on downhill grades.

1 (1st)

Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly

or when driving slowly, or for maximum engine

braking on steep downhill grades.

●Remember not to drive at high speeds for

extended periods of time in lower than 7th

gear. This reduces fuel economy.

5-22 Starting and driving

When shifting up

Move the shift lever to the + (up) side. (Shifts to

higher range.)

When shifting down

Move the shift lever to the ⫺(down) side. (Shifts

to lower range.)

●The transmission will automatically down-

shift the gears. (For example, if you select the

3rd range, the transmission will shift down

between the 3rd and 1st gears.)

●Moving the shift lever rapidly to the same

side twice will shift the ranges in succession.

When canceling the manual shift mode

Return the shift lever to the D (Drive) position to

return the transmission to the normal driving

mode.

●In the manual shift mode, the transmis-

sion may not shift to the selected gear.

This helps maintain driving perfor-

mance and reduces the chance of ve-

hicle damage or loss of control.

●When this situation occurs, the CVT

position indicator light will blink and

the chime will sound.

●In the manual shift mode, the transmis-

sion may shift up automatically to a

higher range than selected if the en-

gine speed is too high. When the ve-

hicle speed decreases, the transmis-

sion automatically shifts down and

shifts to 1st gear before the vehicle

comes to a stop.

●CVT operation is limited to automatic drive

mode when CVT fluid temperature is ex-

tremely low even if manual shift mode is

selected. This is not a malfunction. When

CVT fluid warms up, manual mode can be

selected.

●When the CVT fluid temperature is high, the

shift range may upshift in lower rpm than

usual. This is not a malfunction.

Shift lock release

If the battery charge is low or discharged, the

shift lever may not be moved from the P (Park)

position even with the brake pedal depressed

and the shift lever button pushed. To move the

shift lever, perform the following procedure:

1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or

LOCK position.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Remove the shift lock release cover using a

suitable tool.

4. Push down the shift lock release using a

suitable tool.

LSD2179

Starting and driving 5-23

5. Press the shift lever button and move the

shift lever to the N (Neutral) position while

holding down the shift lock release. The

vehicle may be moved to the desired loca-

tion. Replace the removed shift lock release

cover after the operation. If the shift lever

cannot be moved out of the P (Park) posi-

tion, have the CVT system checked as soon

as possible. It is recommended that you visit

a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING

If the shift lever cannot be moved from the

P (Park) position while the engine is run-

ning and the brake pedal is depressed, the

stop lights may not work. Malfunctioning

stop lights could cause an accident injur-

ing yourself and others.

Accelerator downshift

— in D (Drive) position —

For passing or hill climbing, depress the accel-

erator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmis-

sion down into a lower gear, depending on the

vehicle speed.

High fluid temperature protection

mode

This transmission has a high fluid temperature

protection mode. If the fluid temperature be-

comes too high (for example, when climbing

steep grades in high temperatures with heavy

loads, such as when towing a trailer), engine

power and, under some conditions, vehicle

speed will be decreased automatically to reduce

the chance of transmission damage. Vehicle

speed can be controlled with the accelerator

pedal, but the engine and vehicle speed may be

limited.

Fail-safe

When the fail-safe operation occurs, the CVT will

not be shifted into the selected driving position.

If the vehicle is driven under extreme con-

ditions, such as excessive wheel spinning

and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe

system may be activated. The Malfunction

Indicator Light (MIL) may come on to indi-

cate the fail-safe mode is activated. For

additional information, refer to “Malfunc-

tion Indicator Light (MIL)” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section of this manual.

This will occur even if all electrical circuits

are functioning properly. In this case, place

the ignition switch in the OFF position and

wait for 10 seconds. Then place the ignition

switch back in the ON position. The vehicle

should return to its normal operating con-

dition. If it does not return to its normal

operating condition, have the transmission

checked and repaired, if necessary. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

WARNING

When the high fluid temperature protec-

tion mode or fail-safe operation occurs,

vehicle speed may be gradually reduced.

The reduced speed may be lower than

other traffic, which could increase the

chance of a collision. Be especially careful

when driving. If necessary, pull to the side

of the road at a safe place and allow the

transmission to return to normal opera-

tion, or have it repaired if necessary.

5-24 Starting and driving

WARNING

●Be sure the parking brake is fully re-

leased before driving. Failure to do so

can cause brake failure and lead to an

accident.

●Do not release the parking brake from

outside the vehicle.

●Do not use the shift lever in place of the

parking brake. When parking, be sure

the parking brake is fully engaged.

●To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and /or its systems, do not leave

children, people who require the assis-

tance of others or pets unattended in

your vehicle. Additionally, the tempera-

ture inside a closed vehicle on a warm

day can quickly become high enough to

cause a significant risk of injury or

death to people and pets.

To engage: Firmly depress the parking brake.

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.

3. Firmly depress the parking brake pedal and it

will release.

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning

light goes out.

The SPORT mode switch adjusts the engine and

transmission points to enhance performance.

Push the SPORT mode switch on the instrument

panel to activate. The SPORT mode indicator

light appears in the meter.

NOTE:

In the SPORT mode, fuel economy may be

reduced.

LSD0158 LIC2417

PARKING BRAKE SPORT MODE SWITCH

Starting and driving 5-25

The ECO mode helps to enhance the fuel

economy by controlling the throttle sensitivity and

transmission points.

To turn on the ECO mode, push the ECO mode

switch. The ECO mode indicator light (on the

meter) will remain lit while the mode is active.

To turn off the ECO mode, push the ECO mode

switch again. The ECO mode indicator light (on

the meter) will turn off.

The ECO mode cannot be turned off while the

accelerator pedal is depressed, even if the ECO

mode switch is pushed to OFF. Release the

accelerator pedal to turn off the ECO mode.

The ECO mode will turn off automatically if a

malfunction occurs in the system.

Turn off the ECO mode or depress the accelera-

tor pedal fully when:

●driving with a heavy load of passengers or

cargo in the vehicle

●driving on a steep uphill slope

●ECO mode may affect air conditioner perfor-

mance

NOTE:

Selecting this drive mode will not necessar-

ily improve fuel economy as many driving

factors influence its effectiveness.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-

tions for proper use of the BSW system

could result in serious injury or death.

●The BSW system is not a replacement

for proper driving procedures and is not

designed to prevent contact with ve-

hicles or objects. When changing lanes,

always use the side and rear mirrors

and turn and look in the direction your

vehicle will move to ensure it is safe to

change lanes. Never rely solely on the

BSW system.

The BSW system helps alert the driver of other

vehicles in adjacent lanes when changing lanes.

LIC2416

ECO MODE SWITCH BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW) (if so

equipped)

5-26 Starting and driving

The BSW system uses radar sensors 䊊

1in-

stalled near the rear bumper to detect other ve-

hicles in an adjacent lane.

The radar sensors can detect vehicles on either

side of your vehicle within the detection zone

shown as illustrated. This detection zone starts

from the outside mirror of your vehicle and ex-

tends approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) behind the rear

bumper, and approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) side-

ways.

LSD2439

Detection zone

SSD1030

Starting and driving 5-27

1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light

BSW SYSTEM OPERATION

The BSW system operates above approximately

20 mph (32 km/h).

If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the detec-

tion zone, the side BSW/RCTA indicator light (1)

illuminates. If the turn signal is then activated, the

system chimes (twice), the side BSW/RCTA in-

dicator light flashes, and the BSW/RCTA indica-

tor illuminates (yellow) in the vehicle information

display. The side BSW/RCTA indicator light con-

tinues to flash until the detected vehicle leaves

the detection zone.

The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illuminates

for a few seconds when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position.

The brightness of the side BSW/RCTA indicator

light is adjusted automatically depending on the

brightness of the ambient light.

If a vehicle comes into the detection zone after

the driver activates the turn signal, then only the

side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes and no

chime sounds. For additional information, refer to

“BSW driving situations” in this section.

The BSW system automatically turns on every

time the engine is started, as long as it is acti-

vated using the settings menu on the vehicle

information display.

LSD2734

5-28 Starting and driving

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE

BSW SYSTEM

Perform the following steps to enable or disable

the BSW system.

1. Press the button until “Settings” dis-

plays in the vehicle information display and

then press OK. Use the button to

select “Driver Assistance.” Then press the

OK button.

Use the button to select “Driving Aids,” then

press the OK button.

2. Select “Blind Spot” and press the OK but-

ton.

– To turn on the warning system, use the

OK button to check the box for “Warn-

ing.”

LSD2678

Starting and driving 5-29

NOTE:

When enabling/disabling the system, the

system will retain current settings even if

the engine is restarted.

BSW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for

the BSW system. Failure to operate the

vehicle in accordance with these system

limitations could result in serious injury or

death.

●The BSW system cannot detect all ve-

hicles under all conditions.

●The radar sensors may not be able to

detect and activate BSW when certain

objects are present such as:

– Pedestrian, bicycles, animals.

– Vehicles such as motorcycles, low

height vehicles, or high ground clear-

ance vehicles.

– Oncoming vehicles.

– Vehicles remaining in the detection

zone when you accelerate from a

stop.

– A vehicle merging into an adjacent

lane at a speed approximately the

same as your vehicle.

– A vehicle approaching rapidly from

behind.

– A vehicle which your vehicle over-

takes rapidly.

– A vehicle that passes through the de-

tection zone quickly.

– When overtaking several vehicles in

a row, the vehicles after the first ve-

hicle may not be detected if they are

traveling close together.

●The radar sensors’ detection zone is

designed based on a standard lane

width. When driving in a wider lane, the

radar sensors may not detect vehicles in

an adjacent lane. When driving in a nar-

row lane, the radar sensors may detect

vehicles driving two lanes away.

●The radar sensors are designed to ig-

nore most stationary objects, however

objects such as guardrails, walls, foli-

age and parked vehicles may occasion-

ally be detected. This is a normal opera-

tion condition.

●The following conditions may reduce

the ability of the radar to detect other

vehicles:

– Severe weather

– Road spray

– Ice/frost/snow build-up on the

vehicle

– Dirt build-up on the vehicle

●Do not attach stickers (including trans-

parent material), install accessories or

apply additional paint near the radar

sensors. These conditions may reduce

the ability of the radar to detect other

vehicles.

●Excessive noise (for example, audio

system volume, open vehicle window)

will interfere with the chime sound, and

it may not be heard.

5-30 Starting and driving

BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS

Indicator

off

Indicator

flashing

Another vehicle approaching from

behind

Illustration 1: The side indicator light illumi-

nates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from

behind in an adjacent lane.

Illustration 2: If the driver activates the turn

signal when another vehicle is in the detection

zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the

side indicator light flashes.

NOTE:

●The radar sensors may not detect vehicles

which are approaching rapidly from behind.

●If the driver activates the turn signal before a

vehicle enters the detection zone, the side

indicator light will flash but no chime will

sound when the other vehicle is detected.

Illustration 1 – Approaching from behind

LSD2299

Illustration 2 – Approaching from behind

LSD2300

Starting and driving 5-31

Overtaking another vehicle

Illustration 3: The side indicator light illumi-

nates if you overtake a vehicle and that vehicle

stays in the detection zone for approximately

2 seconds.

Illustration 4: If the driver activates the turn

signal while another vehicle is in the detection

zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the

side indicator light flashes.

NOTE:

●When overtaking several vehicles in a row,

the vehicles after the first vehicle may not be

detected if they are traveling close together.

●The radar sensors may not detect slower

moving vehicles if they are passed quickly.

●If the driver activates the turn signal before a

vehicle enters the detection zone, the side

indicator light will flash but no chime will

sound when the other vehicle is detected. .

Illustration 3 – Overtaking another vehicle

LSD2302

Illustration 4 – Overtaking another vehicle

LSD2303

5-32 Starting and driving

Entering from the side

Illustration 5:The side indicator light illuminates

if a vehicle enters the detection zone from either

side.

Illustration 6:If the driver activates the turn sig-

nal while another vehicle is in the detection zone,

then the system chimes (twice) and the side

indicator light flashes.

NOTE:

●If the driver activates the turn signal before a

vehicle enters the detection zone, the side

indicator light will flash but no chime will

sound when the other vehicle is detected.

●The radar sensors may not detect a vehicle

which is traveling at about the same speed

as your vehicle when it enters the detection

zone.

Illustration 5 – Entering from the side

LSD2305

Illustration 6 – Entering from the side

LSD2308

Starting and driving 5-33

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY

UNAVAILABLE

When radar blockage is detected, the system will

be deactivated automatically. The “Side Radar

Obstruction” warning message will appear in the

vehicle information display.

The system is not available until the conditions no

longer exist.

The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary

ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist

or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused

by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing

the radar sensors.

NOTE:

If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA

system (if so equipped) will also stop work-

ing.

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer exist, the

system will resume automatically.

Malfunction

If the BSW system malfunctions, it will turn off

automatically. The system malfunction warning

message will appear in the vehicle information

display.

LSD2735

5-34 Starting and driving

NOTE:

If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA

system (if so equipped) will also stop work-

ing.

Action to take:

Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the

vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the engine off

and restart the engine. If the message continues

to appear, have the system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The two radar sensors 䊊

1for the BSW and

RCTA systems is located near the rear bumper.

Always keep the area near the radar sensors

clean.

The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary

ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist

or fog.

The blocked condition may also be caused by

objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the

radar sensors.

Check for and remove objects obstructing the

area around the radar sensors.

Do not attach stickers (including transparent ma-

terial), install accessories or apply additional

paint near the radar sensors.

Do not strike or damage the area around the

radar sensors. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer if the area around the radar sen-

sors is damaged due to a collision.

Radio frequency statement

For USA

FCC : OAYSRR3B

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful inter-

ference, and (2) this device must accept any

interference received, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to op-

erate the equipment

LSD2439

Starting and driving 5-35

For Canada

Applicable law: Canada 310

This device complies with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-

tion is subject to the following two condi-

tions: (1) this device may not cause inter-

ference, and (2) this device must accept any

interference, including interference that

may cause undesired operation of the de-

vice.

Frequency bands: 24.05 – 24.25GHz

Output power: less than 20 milliwatts

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-

tions for proper use of the RCTA system

could result in serious injury or death.

●The RCTA system is not a replacement

for proper driving procedures and is not

designed to prevent contact with ve-

hicles or objects. When backing out of a

parking space, always use the side and

rear mirrors and turn and look in the

direction your vehicle will move. Never

rely solely on the RCTA system.

The RCTA system will assist you when backing

out from a parking space. When the vehicle is in

reverse, the system is designed to detect other

vehicles approaching from the right or left of the

vehicle. If the system detects cross traffic, it will

alert you.

REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (RCTA)

(if so equipped)

5-36 Starting and driving

1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light

RCTA SYSTEM OPERATION

The RCTA system can help alert the driver of an

approaching vehicle when the driver is backing

out of a parking space.

When the shift position is in R (Reverse) and the

vehicle speed is less than approximately 5 mph

(8 km/h), the RCTA system is operational.

If the radar detects an approaching vehicle from

either side, the system chimes (once) and the

side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes on the

side the vehicle is approaching from.

LSD2734

Starting and driving 5-37

The RCTA system uses radar sensors 䊊

1in-

stalled on both sides near the rear bumper to

detect an approaching vehicle.

The radar sensors 䊊

1can detect an approaching

vehicle from up to approximately 66 ft (20 m)

away.

LSD2216 LSD2439

5-38 Starting and driving

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE

RCTA SYSTEM

Perform the following steps to enable or disable

the RCTA system.

1. Press the button until “Settings” dis-

plays in the vehicle information display and

then press OK. Use the button to

select “Driver Assistance.” Then press the

OK button.

2. Select “Parking Aids” and press the OK

button.

3. Select “Cross Traffic” and press the OK

button.

4. Use the OK button to enable or disable the

system.

NOTE:

When enabling/disabling the system, the

system setting will be retained even if the

engine is restarted.

LSD2678

Starting and driving 5-39

RCTA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for

the RCTA system. Failure to operate the

vehicle in accordance with these system

limitations could result in serious injury or

death.

●Always check surroundings and turn to

check what is behind you before back-

ing up. The radar sensors detect ap-

proaching (moving) vehicles. The radar

sensors cannot detect every object such

as:

– Pedestrians, bicycles, motorcycles,

animals or child-operated toy

vehicles

– A vehicle that is passing at speeds

greater than approximately 19 mph

(30 km/h)

– A vehicle that is passing at speeds

lower than approximately 5 mph

(8 km/h)

●The radar sensors may not detect ap-

proaching vehicles in certain situations:

– Illustration a: When a vehicle parked

next to you obstructs the beam of the

radar sensor.

LSD2173

5-40 Starting and driving

– Illustration b: When the vehicle is

parked in an angled parking space.

– Illustration c: When the vehicle is

parked on inclined ground.

– Illustration d: When an approaching

vehicle turns into your vehicle’s park-

ing lot aisle.

– Illustration e: When the angle formed

by your vehicle and approaching ve-

hicle is small

●The following conditions may reduce

the ability of the radar to detect other

vehicles:

– Severe weather

– Road spray

– Ice/frost/snow build-up on the

vehicle

– Dirt build- up on the vehicle

●Do not attach stickers (including trans-

parent material), install accessories or

apply additional paint near the radar

sensors. These conditions may reduce

the ability of the radar to detect other

vehicles

●Excessive noise (e.g. audio system vol-

ume, open vehicle window) will inter-

fere with the chime sound, and it may

not be heard.

NOTE:

In the case of several vehicles approaching

in a row (Illustration 1) or in the opposite

direction (Illustration 2), a chime may not

be sounded by the RCTA system after the

first vehicle passes the sensors.

Illustration 1

LSD2043

Starting and driving 5-41

Illustration 2

LSD2044

LSD2735

5-42 Starting and driving

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY

UNAVAILABLE

When radar blockage is detected, the system will

be deactivated automatically. The “Side Radar

Obstruction” warning message will appear in the

vehicle information display.

The systems are not available until the conditions

no longer exist.

The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary

ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist

or fog.

The blocked condition may also be caused by

objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the

radar sensors.

NOTE:

If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA

system will also stop working.

Action to take

When the above conditions no longer exist, the

system will resume automatically.

Malfunction

When the RCTA system malfunctions, it will turn

off automatically. The system malfunction warn-

ing message will appear in the vehicle information

display.

NOTE:

If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA

system (if so equipped) will also stop work-

ing.

Action to take

Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the

vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the engine off

and restart the engine. If the message continues

to appear, have the system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The two radar sensors 䊊

1for the BSW and

RCTA systems are located near the rear bumper.

Always keep the area near the radar sensors

clean.

The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary

ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist

or fog.

The blocked condition may also be caused by

objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the

radar sensors.

Check for and remove objects obstructing the

area around the radar sensors.

LSD2439

Starting and driving 5-43

Do not attach stickers (including transparent ma-

terial), install accessories or apply additional

paint near the radar sensors.

Do not strike or damage the area around the

radar sensors. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer if the area around the radar sen-

sors is damaged due to a collision.

Radio frequency statement

For USA

FCC : OAYSRR3B

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful inter-

ference, and (2) this device must accept any

interference received, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to op-

erate the equipment

For Canada

Applicable law: Canada 310

This device complies with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-

tion is subject to the following two condi-

tions: (1) this device may not cause inter-

ference, and (2) this device must accept any

interference, including interference that

may cause undesired operation of the de-

vice.

Frequency bands: 24.05 – 24.25GHz

Output power: less than 20 milliwatts

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE

CONTROL

1. CANCEL switch

2. RES/+ switch

3. SET/- switch

4. CRUISE ON/OFF switch

●If the cruise control system malfunctions, it

cancels automatically. The CRUISE indica-

tor light in the vehicle information display

then blinks to warn the driver.

LSD2722

CRUISE CONTROL

5-44 Starting and driving

●If the CRUISE indicator light blinks, turn the

cruise control switch off and have the sys-

tem checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

●The CRUISE indicator light may blink when

the cruise control switch is turned ON while

pushing the RES/+, SET/-, or CANCEL

switch. To properly set the cruise control

system, use the following procedures.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when driving

under the following conditions:

●When it is not possible to keep the

vehicle at a set speed.

●In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in

speed.

●On winding or hilly roads.

●On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).

●In very windy areas.

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle

control and result in an accident.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at a speed be-

tween 25 - 89 mph (40 - 144 km/h) without

keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push the

CRUISE ON/OFF switch ON. The CRUISE indi-

cator light in the vehicle information display will

illuminate.

To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to

the desired speed, push the SET/- switch and

release it. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

Your vehicle maintains the set speed.

●To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-

celerator pedal. When you release the

pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously

set speed.

●The vehicle may not maintain the set speed

when going up or down steep hills. If this

happens, drive without the cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of the

following three methods.

●Push the CANCEL switch.

●Tap the brake pedal.

●Push the CRUISE ON/OFF switch off. The

CRUISE indicator light in the vehicle infor-

mation display goes out.

The cruise control is automatically canceled if:

●You depress the brake pedal while pushing

the RES/+ or SET/- switch. The preset

speed is deleted from memory.

●The vehicle slows down more than 8 mph

(13 km/h) below the set speed.

●You move the shift lever to N (Neutral).

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of

the following three methods.

●Depress the accelerator pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push and

release the SET/- switch.

●Push and hold the RES/+ switch. When the

vehicle attains the speed you desire, release

the switch.

●Push and release the RES/+ switch. Each

time you do this, the set speed increases by

about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one

of the following three methods.

●Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-

hicle attains the desired speed, push the

SET/- switch and release it.

●Push and hold the SET/- switch. Release the

switch when the vehicle slows to the desired

speed.

Starting and driving 5-45

●Push and release the SET/- switch. Each

time you do this, the set speed decreases by

about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and re-

lease the RES/+ switch. The vehicle returns to

the last set cruising speed when the vehicle

speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).

To turn off the cruise control, use one of the

following three methods.

●Push the CANCEL switch.

●Tap the brake pedal.

●Push the CRUISE ON/OFF switch off. The

CRUISE indicator light in the vehicle infor-

mation display goes out.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-

tions for proper use of the ICC system

could result in serious injury or death.

●ICC is not a collision avoidance or warn-

ing device. It is for highway use only and

it is not intended for congested areas or

city driving. Failure to apply the brakes

could result in an accident.

●The ICC system is only an aid to assist

the driver and is not a collision warning

or avoidance device. It is the driver’s

responsibility to stay alert, drive safely,

and be in control of the vehicle at all

times.

●Always observe posted speed limits

and do not set the speed over them.

●Always drive carefully and attentively

when using the ICC system. Read and

understand the Owner’s Manual thor-

oughly before using the ICC system. To

avoid serious injury or death, do not rely

on the system to prevent accidents or to

control the vehicle’s speed in emer-

gency situations. Do not use the ICC

system except in appropriate road and

traffic conditions.

●In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control mode, a warning chime will not

sound to warn you if you are too close

to the vehicle ahead. Pay special atten-

tion to the distance between your ve-

hicle and the vehicle ahead of you or a

collision could occur.

The ICC system maintains a selected distance

from the vehicle in front of you within the speed

range of 0 to 90 mph (0 to 144 km/h) up to the

set speed. The set speed can be selected by the

driver between 20 to 90 mph (32 to 144 km/h).

The vehicle travels at a set speed when the road

ahead is clear.

The ICC system can be set to one of two cruise

control modes:

●Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode: For maintaining a selected distance

between your vehicle and the vehicle in front

of you up to the preset speed

●Conventional (fixed speed) cruise con-

trol mode: For cruising at a preset speed

INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (ICC)

(if so equipped)

5-46 Starting and driving

Push the MAIN switch 䊊

Ato choose the cruise

control mode between the vehicle-to-vehicle dis-

tance control mode and the conventional (fixed

speed) cruise control mode.

Once a control mode is activated, it cannot be

changed to the other cruise control mode. To

change the mode, push the MAIN switch 䊊

once to turn the system off. Then push the MAIN

switch 䊊

Aagain to turn the system back on and

select the desired cruise control mode.

Always confirm the setting in the ICC system

display.

For the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode,

refer to “Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode” in this section.

For the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control

mode, refer to “Conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control mode” in this section.

䊊

AMAIN (ON/OFF) switch

LSD2728

Starting and driving 5-47

HOW TO SELECT THE CRUISE

CONTROL MODE

Selecting the vehicle-to-vehicle distance

control mode: To choose the vehicle-to-vehicle

distance control mode 䊊

1, quickly push and re-

lease the MAIN switch 䊊

Selecting the conventional (fixed speed)

cruise control mode: To choose the conven-

tional (fixed speed) cruise control mode 䊊

2, push

and hold the MAIN switch 䊊

Afor longer than

approximately 1.5 seconds. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Conventional (fixed speed)

cruise control mode” in this section.

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE

CONTROL MODE

In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode,

the ICC system automatically maintains a se-

lected distance from the vehicle traveling in front

of you according to that vehicle’s speed (up to

the set speed), or at the set speed when the road

ahead is clear.

The ICC system is intended to enhance the op-

eration of the vehicle when following a vehicle

traveling in the same lane and direction.

LSD2727 LSD2731

5-48 Starting and driving

If the radar sensor 䊊

Bdetects a slower moving

vehicle ahead, the system will reduce the vehicle

speed so that your vehicle follows the vehicle in

front at the selected distance.

The system automatically controls the throttle

and applies the brakes (up to approximately 40%

of vehicle braking power) if necessary.

The detection range of the sensor is approxi-

mately 650 ft (200 m) ahead.

LSD2679

Starting and driving 5-49

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE

CONTROL MODE OPERATION

The vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is

designed to maintain a selected distance from

the vehicle in front of you and can reduce the

speed to match a slower vehicle ahead. The

system will decelerate the vehicle as necessary

and if the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the

vehicle decelerates to a standstill. However, the

ICC system can only apply up to 40% of the

vehicle’s total braking power.

This system should only be used when traffic

conditions allow vehicle speeds to remain fairly

constant or when vehicle speeds change gradu-

ally. If a vehicle moves into the traveling lane

ahead or if a vehicle traveling ahead rapidly de-

celerates, the distance between vehicles may

become closer because the ICC system cannot

decelerate the vehicle quickly enough. If this oc-

curs, the ICC system will sound a warning chime

and blink the system display to notify the driver to

take necessary action.

The system will cancel and a warning chime will

sound if the speed is below approximately

15 mph (24 km/h) and a vehicle is not detected

ahead. The system will also disengage when the

vehicle goes above the maximum set speed.

For additional information, refer to “Approach

warning” in this section.

The following items are controlled in the Vehicle-

to-vehicle distance control mode:

●When there are no vehicles traveling ahead,

the Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode maintains the speed set by the driver.

The set speed range is between approxi-

mately 20 and 90 mph (32 and 144 km/h).

●When there is a vehicle traveling ahead, the

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

adjusts the speed to maintain the distance,

selected by the driver, from the vehicle

ahead. If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop,

the vehicle decelerates to a standstill within

the limitations of the system. The system will

cancel once it judges a standstill with a

warning chime.

●When the vehicle traveling ahead has moved

out from its lane of travel, the Vehicle-to-

vehicle distance control mode accelerates

and maintains vehicle speed up to the set

speed.

The ICC system does not control vehicle speed

or warn you when you approach stationary and

slow moving vehicles. You must pay attention to

vehicle operation to maintain proper distance

from vehicles ahead when approaching toll gates

or traffic congestion.

5-50 Starting and driving

When driving on the freeway at a set speed and

approaching a slower traveling vehicle ahead, the

ICC system will adjust the speed to maintain the

distance, selected by the driver, from the vehicle

ahead. If the vehicle ahead changes lanes or exits

the freeway, the ICC system will accelerate and

maintain the speed up to the set speed. Pay

attention to the driving operation to maintain con-

trol of the vehicle as it accelerates to the set

speed.

The vehicle may not maintain the set speed on

winding or hilly roads. If this occurs, you will have

to manually control the vehicle speed.

Normally when controlling the distance to a ve-

hicle ahead, this system automatically acceler-

ates or decelerates your vehicle according to the

speed of the vehicle ahead. Depress the accel-

erator to properly accelerate your vehicle when

acceleration is required for a lane change. De-

press the brake pedal when deceleration is re-

quired to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle

ahead due to its sudden braking or if a vehicle

cuts in. Always stay alert when using the ICC

system.

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE

CONTROL MODE SWITCHES

The system is operated by the CRUISE ON/OFF

switch and four control switches, all mounted on

the steering wheel.

1. CANCEL switch:

Deactivates the system without erasing the

set speed.

2. RES/+ switch:

Resumes set speed or increases speed in-

crementally.

SSD0254 LSD2680

Starting and driving 5-51

3. SET/- switch:

Sets desired cruise speed or reduces speed

incrementally.

4. DISTANCE switch:

Changes the vehicle’s following distance:

●Long

●Middle

●Short

5. CRUISE ON/OFF switch:

Master switch to activate the system.

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode display and indicator

The display is located between the speedometer

and tachometer.

1. This indicator indicates the ICC system sta-

tus depending on a color:

●ICC system ON indicator (gray): Indi-

cates that the CRUISE ON/OFF switch is

ON.

●ICC system SET indicator (green):

Indicates that the cruising speed is set.

●ICC system warning (yellow): Indi-

cates that if there is a malfunction in the

ICC system.

2. Set vehicle speed indicator:

Indicates the set vehicle speed.

For Canadian models, the speed is dis-

played in km/h.

3. Set distance indicator:

Displays the selected distance between ve-

hicles set with the distance switch.

4. Vehicle ahead detection indicator:

Indicates whether it detects a vehicle in front

of you.

LSD2718

5-52 Starting and driving

Operating vehicle-to-vehicle distance

control mode

To turn on the cruise control: quickly push

and release the CRUISE ON/OFF switch 䊊

A. The

ICC system ON indicator (gray), set distance

indicator and set vehicle speed indicator 䊊

come on in a standby state for setting.

To set cruising speed: accelerate your vehicle

to the desired speed, push the SET/– switch 䊊

and release it. The ICC system set indicator

(green), vehicle ahead detection indicator, set

distance indicator and set vehicle speed indica-

tor 䊊

Bwill come on. Take your foot off the accel-

erator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set

speed.

When the SET/– switch is pushed under the

following conditions, the system cannot be set

and the ICC indicators will blink for approximately

2 seconds:

●When traveling below 20 mph (32 km/h)

and a vehicle ahead is not detected

●When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) or

Manual mode

●When the parking brake is applied

●When the brakes are operated by the driver

When the SET/– switch is pushed under the

following conditions, the system cannot be set.

A warning chime will sound and a message will

pop up:

●When the VDC system is off (To use the ICC

system, turn on the VDC system. Push the

CRUISE ON/OFF switch to turn off the ICC

system and reset the ICC switch by pushing

the CRUISE ON/OFF switch again.)

For additional information about the VDC

sytem, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) system” in this section.

●When ABS or VDC is operating

●When a wheel is slipping (To use the ICC

system, make sure the wheels are no longer

slipping.

LSD2681 LSD2682

Starting and driving 5-53

䊊

1System set display with vehicle ahead

䊊

2System set display without vehicle ahead

The driver sets the desired vehicle speed based

on the road conditions. The ICC system main-

tains the set vehicle speed, similar to standard

cruise control, as long as no vehicle is detected in

the lane ahead. The ICC system displays the set

speed.

Vehicle detected ahead

When a vehicle is detected in the lane ahead, the

ICC system decelerates the vehicle by control-

ling the throttle and applying the brakes to match

the speed of a slower vehicle ahead. The system

then controls the vehicle speed based on the

speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain the driver

selected distance.

NOTE:

●The stoplights of the vehicle come on

when braking is performed by the ICC

system.

●When the brake operates, a noise may

be heard. This is not a malfunction.

When a vehicle ahead is detected, the vehicle

ahead detection indicator comes on. The ICC

system will also display the set speed and se-

lected distance.

Vehicle ahead not detected

When a vehicle is no longer detected ahead, the

ICC system gradually accelerates your vehicle to

resume the previously set vehicle speed. The ICC

system then maintains the set speed.

When a vehicle is no longer detected, the vehicle

ahead detection indicator turns off.

If a vehicle ahead appears during acceleration to

the set vehicle speed or any time the ICC system

is in operation, the system controls the distance

to that vehicle.

When a vehicle is no longer detected under

approximately 15 mph (24 km/h), the system will

be canceled.

LSD2719

5-54 Starting and driving

When passing another vehicle, the set speed

indicator 䊊

Bwill flash when the vehicle speed

exceeds the set speed. The vehicle detect indi-

cator will turn off when the area ahead of the

vehicle is open. When the pedal is released, the

vehicle will return to the previously set speed.

Even though your vehicle speed is set in the ICC

system, you can depress the accelerator pedal

when it is necessary to accelerate your vehicle

rapidly.

How to change the set vehicle speed

To cancel the preset speed: use one of the

following methods:

●Push the CANCEL switch. The set vehicle

speed indicator will go out.

●Tap the brake pedal. The set vehicle speed

indicator will go out.

●Turn the CRUISE ON/OFF switch off. The

ICC indicators will go out.

To reset at a faster cruising speed: use one

of the following methods:

●Depress the accelerator pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push and

release the SET/– switch.

●Push and hold the RES/+ switch. The set

vehicle speed will increase by approximately

5 mph (5 km/h).

●Push, then quickly release the RES/+

switch. Each time you do this, the set speed

will increase by approximately 1 mph

(1 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed: use one

of the following methods:

●Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-

hicle attains the desired speed, push the

SET/– switch and release it.

●Push and hold the SET/– switch. The set

vehicle speed will decrease by approxi-

mately 5 mph (5 km/h).

●Push, then quickly release the SET/– switch.

Each time you do this, the set speed will

decrease by approximately 1 mph (1 km/h).

To resume the preset speed: push and re-

lease the RES/+ switch. The vehicle will resume

the last set cruising speed when the vehicle

speed is over 20 mph (32 km/h).

LSD2720

Starting and driving 5-55

How to change the set distance to the

vehicle ahead

The distance to the vehicle ahead can be se-

lected at any time depending on the traffic con-

ditions.

Each time the distance switch 䊊

Ais

pushed, the set distance will change to long,

middle, short and back to long again, in that

sequence.

Distance Approximate distance at

60 mph (100 km/h) [ft (m)]

1. Long 200 (60)

2. Middle 150 (45)

3. Short 100 (30)

●The distance to the vehicle ahead will

change according to the vehicle speed. The

higher the vehicle speed, the longer the dis-

tance.

●If the engine is stopped, the set distance

becomes “long”. (Each time the engine is

started, the initial setting becomes “long”.)

Approach warning

If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle ahead

due to rapid deceleration of that vehicle or if

another vehicle cuts in, the system warns the

driver with the chime and ICC system display.

Decelerate by depressing the brake pedal to

maintain a safe vehicle distance if:

●The chime sounds.

●The vehicle ahead detection indicator blinks.

The warning chime may not sound in some cases

when there is a short distance between vehicles.

Some examples are:

●When the vehicles are traveling at the same

speed and the distance between vehicles is

not changing.

●When the vehicle ahead is traveling faster

and the distance between vehicles is in-

creasing.

●When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle.

The warning chime will not sound when:

●The vehicle approaches other vehicles that

are parked or moving slowly.

●The accelerator pedal is depressed, overrid-

ing the system.

LSD2683 LSD2429

5-56 Starting and driving

NOTE:

The approach warning chime may sound

and the system display may blink when the

ICC sensor detects objects on the side of

the vehicle or on the side of the road. This

may cause the ICC system to decelerate or

accelerate the vehicle. The ICC sensor may

detect these objects when the vehicle is

driven on winding roads, narrow roads, hilly

roads, or when entering or exiting a curve.

In these cases you will have to manually

control the proper distance ahead of your

vehicle.

Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected by

vehicle operation (steering maneuver or driving

position in the lane) or traffic or vehicle condition

(for example, if a vehicle is being driven with some

damage).

Automatic cancellation

A chime sounds under the following conditions

and the control is automatically canceled:

●When the vehicle ahead is not detected and

your vehicle is traveling below the speed of

15 mph (24 km/h)

●When the system judges the vehicle is at a

standstill

●When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive)

position or Manual mode

●When the parking brake system is applied

●When the VDC system is turned off

●When ABS or VDC operates

●When distance measurement becomes im-

paired due to adhesion of dirt or obstruction

to the sensor

●When a wheel slips

●When the radar signal is temporarily inter-

rupted

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE

CONTROL MODE LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for

the ICC system. Failure to operate the

vehicle in accordance with these system

limitations could result in serious injury or

death.

●The ICC system is primarily intended for

use on straight, dry, open roads with

light traffic. It is not advisable to use the

ICC system in city traffic or congested

areas.

●The ICC system will not adapt automati-

cally to road conditions. This system

should be used in evenly flowing traffic.

Do not use the system on roads with

sharp curves, or on icy roads, in heavy

rain or in fog.

●As there is a performance limit to the

distance control function, never rely

solely on the ICC system. This system

does not correct careless, inattentive or

absentminded driving, or overcome

poor visibility in rain, fog, or other bad

weather. Decelerate the vehicle speed

by depressing the brake pedal, depend-

ing on the distance to the vehicle ahead

and the surrounding circumstances in

order to maintain a safe distance be-

tween vehicles.

●If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the

vehicle decelerates to a standstill

within the limitations of the system. The

system will cancel once it judges that

the vehicle has come to a standstill and

sound a warning chime. To prevent the

vehicle from moving, the driver must

depress the brake pedal.

Starting and driving 5-57

●Always pay attention to the operation of

the vehicle and be ready to manually

control the proper following distance.

The ICC system may not be able to

maintain the selected distance between

vehicles (following distance) or se-

lected vehicle speed under some

circumstances.

●The system may not detect the vehicle

in front of you in certain road or weather

conditions. To avoid accidents, never

use the ICC system under the following

conditions:

– On roads where the traffic is heavy or

there are sharp curves

– On slippery road surfaces such as on

ice or snow, etc.

– During bad weather (rain, fog, snow,

etc.)

– When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the

bumper around the distance sensor

– On steep downhill roads (the vehicle

may go beyond the set vehicle speed

and frequent braking may result in

overheating the brakes)

– On repeated uphill and downhill

roads

– When traffic conditions make it diffi-

cult to keep a proper distance be-

tween vehicles because of frequent

acceleration or deceleration

– Interference by other radar sources.

●Do not use the ICC system if you are

towing a trailer. The system may not

detect a vehicle ahead.

●In some road or traffic conditions, a

vehicle or object can unexpectedly

come into the sensor detection zone

and cause automatic braking. Always

stay alert and avoid using the ICC sys-

tem where not recommended in this

warning section.

The radar sensor will not detect the following

objects:

●Stationary and slow moving vehicles

●Pedestrians or objects in the roadway

●Oncoming vehicles in the same lane

●Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel lane

The sensor generally detects the signals returned

from the vehicle ahead. Therefore, if the sensor

cannot detect the reflection from the vehicle

ahead, the ICC system may not maintain the

selected distance.

The following are some conditions in which the

sensor cannot properly detect a vehicle ahead

and the system may not operate properly:

●When snow or road spray from traveling

vehicles reduces the sensor’s detection.

●When your vehicle is towing a trailer, etc.

●When excessively heavy baggage is loaded

in the rear seat or cargo area of your vehicle.

The ICC system is designed to automatically

check the sensor’s operation within the limita-

tions of the system.

When the sensor is covered with dirt or is ob-

structed, the system will automatically be can-

celed. If the sensor is covered with ice, a trans-

parent or translucent vinyl bag, etc., the ICC

system may not detect them. In these instances,

the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode may

not cancel and may not be able to maintain the

selected following distance from the vehicle

ahead. Be sure to check and clean the sensor

regularly.

The detection zone of the radar sensor is limited.

A vehicle ahead must be in the detection zone for

the vehicle-to-vehicle distance detection mode

to maintain the selected distance from the vehicle

ahead.

5-58 Starting and driving

A vehicle ahead may move outside of the detec-

tion zone due to its position within the same lane

of travel. Motorcycles may not be detected in the

same lane ahead if they are traveling offset from

the centerline of the lane. A vehicle that is enter-

ing the lane ahead may not be detected until the

vehicle has completely moved into the lane.

If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you

by blinking the system indicator and

sounding the chime. The driver may have to

manually control the proper distance away

from vehicle traveling ahead.

SSD0252

Starting and driving 5-59

When driving on some roads, such as winding,

hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads which are

under construction, the radar sensor may detect

vehicles in a different lane, or may temporarily not

detect a vehicle traveling ahead. This may cause

the radar system to decelerate or accelerate the

vehicle.

The detection of vehicles may also be affected by

vehicle operation (steering maneuver or traveling

position in the lane, etc.) or vehicle condition.

If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you

by blinking the system indicator and

sounding the chime unexpectedly. You will

have to manually control the proper dis-

tance away from the vehicle traveling

ahead.

SSD0253

5-60 Starting and driving

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY

UNAVAILABLE

The following are conditions in which the ICC

system may be temporarily unavailable. In these

instances, the ICC system may not cancel and

may not be able to maintain the selected follow-

ing distance from the vehicle ahead.

Condition A

Under the following conditions, the ICC system is

automatically canceled. A chime will sound and

the system will not be able to be set:

●When the VDC system is turned off

●When the VDC or ABS operates

●When a vehicle ahead is not detected and

your vehicle is traveling below the speed of

15 mph (24 km/h)

●When the system judges the vehicle is at a

standstill

●When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) or

Manual mode

●When the parking brake is applied

●When a wheel slips

●When the radar signal is temporarily inter-

rupted

LSD2684

Starting and driving 5-61

Action to take

When the conditions listed above are no longer

present, turn the system off using the ICC

CRUISE ON/OFF switch. Turn the ICC system

back on to use the system.

Condition B

When the radar sensor area of the front bumper

is covered with dirt or is obstructed, the ICC

system will automatically be canceled.

The chime will sound and the “Unavailable: Front

Radar Obstruction” warning message will appear

in the vehicle information display.

Action to take

If the warning message appears, stop the vehicle

in a safe place, place the shift lever in the P (Park)

position, and turn the engine off. When the radar

signal is temporarily interrupted, clean the sensor

area of the front bumper and restart the engine. If

the “Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction” warn-

ing message continues to be displayed, it is

recommended that you have the ICC system

checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Condition C

When the ICC system is not operating properly, a

chime sounds and the ICC system warning light

(orange) will come on.

Action to take

If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle in a

safe place. Turn the engine off, restart the engine,

resume driving and set the ICC system again.

If it is not possible to set the system or the

indicator stays on, it may indicate that the

system is malfunctioning. Although the ve-

hicle is still drivable under normal condi-

tions, have the vehicle checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

LSD2685 LSD2721

5-62 Starting and driving

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The sensor for the ICC system 䊊

Ais located on

the front of the vehicle.

To keep the ICC system operating properly, be

sure to observe the following:

●Always keep the sensor area clean.

●Do not strike or damage the areas around

the sensor.

●Do not attach a sticker (including transpar-

ent material) or install an accessory near the

sensor. This could cause failure or malfunc-

tion.

●Do not attach metallic objects near the sen-

sor area (brush guard, etc.) This could cause

failure or malfunction.

●Do not alter, remove, or paint the front bum-

per. Before customizing or restoring the

front bumper, it is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer.

Radio frequency statement

For USA

FCC ID OAYARS4B

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rules. Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and

2. This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compliance

could void the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

For Canada

Model: ARS4–B

IC: 4135A-ARS4B

FCC ID: OAYARS4B

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rules and with Industry Canada licence-exempt

RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and

2. This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR

d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils ra-

dio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autori-

sée aux deux conditions suivantes:

1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,

2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout

brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le

brouillage est susceptible d’en comprom-

ettre le fonctionnement.

LSD2690

Starting and driving 5-63

Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure Informa-

tion:

This equipment complies with FCC radiation ex-

posure limits set forth for an uncontrolled envi-

ronment.

This equipment should be installed and operated

with minimum distance of 30 cm between the

radiator and your body.

The transmitter must not be co-located or oper-

ating in conjunction with any other antenna or

transmitter.

Cet équipement est conforme aux limites

d’exposition aux rayonnements IC établies pour

un environnement non contrôlé. Cet équipement

doit être installé et utilisé avec un minimum de

30 cm de distance entre la source de rayonne-

ment et votre corps.

FCC Notice

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compliance

could void the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

CONVENTIONAL (fixed speed)

CRUISE CONTROL MODE

This mode allows driving at a speed between 25

to 90 mph (40 to 144 km/h) without keeping your

foot on the accelerator pedal.

WARNING

●In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control mode, a warning chime does not

sound to warn you if you are too close

to the vehicle ahead, as neither the

presence of the vehicle ahead nor the

vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected.

●Pay special attention to the distance

between your vehicle and the vehicle

ahead of you or a collision could occur.

●Always confirm the setting in the ICC

system display.

●Do not use the conventional (fixed

speed) cruise control mode when driv-

ing under the following conditions:

– When it is not possible to keep the

vehicle at a set speed

– In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies

in speed

– On winding or hilly roads

– On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice,

etc.)

– In very windy areas

●Doing so could cause a lose of vehicle

control and result in an accident.

5-64 Starting and driving

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control switches

1. CANCEL switch:

Deactivates the system without erasing the

set speed

2. RES/+ switch:

Resumes set speed or increases speed in-

crementally

3. SET/- switch:

Sets desired cruise speed or reduces speed

incrementally

4. CRUISE ON/OFF switch:

Master switch to activate the system

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control mode display and indicators

The display is located in the vehicle information

display.

1. Cruise indicator:

This indicator indicates the condition of the

ICC system depending on a color.

●Cruise control ON indicator (gray): Indi-

cates that the CRUISE ON/OFF switch is

●Cruise control SET indicator (green): In-

dicates that the cruising speed is set

●Cruise control warning (yellow): Indicates

that there is a malfunction in the ICC

system

2. Set vehicle speed indicator:

This indicator indicates the set vehicle

speed. For Canadian models, the speed is

displayed in km/h.

LSD2723 LSD2724

Starting and driving 5-65

Operating conventional (fixed speed)

cruise control mode

To turn on the conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control mode, push and hold the CRUISE

ON/OFF switch 䊊

Afor longer than about

1.5 seconds.

When pushing CRUISE ON/OFF switch on, the

conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode

display and indicators 䊊

Bare displayed in the

vehicle information display. After you hold the

CRUISE ON/OFF switch on for longer than

about 1.5 seconds, the ICC system display turns

off. The cruise indicator appears. You can now

set your desired cruising speed. Pushing the

CRUISE ON/OFF switch again will turn the sys-

tem completely off. When the ignition switch is

placed in the OFF position, the system is also

automatically turned off.

To use the ICC system again, quickly push and

release the CRUISE ON/OFF switch (vehicle-to

vehicle distance control mode) or push and hold

it (conventional cruise control mode) again to turn

it on.

CAUTION

To avoid accidentally engaging cruise con-

trol, make sure to turn the CRUISE

ON/OFF switch off when not using the ICC

system. To set cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle to

the desired speed, push the SET/- 䊊

Cswitch and

release it. (The color of the cruise indicator

changes to green and set vehicle speed indicator

comes on.) Take your foot off the accelerator

pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set speed.

●To pass another vehicle, depress the accel-

erator pedal. When you release the pedal,

the vehicle will return to the previously set

speed.

●The vehicle may not maintain the set speed

when going up or down steep hills. If this

happens, manually maintain vehicle speed.

LSD2725 LSD2726

5-66 Starting and driving

To cancel the preset speed, use any of the fol-

lowing methods:

1. Push the CANCEL switch. The vehicle

speed indicator will turn off.

2. Tap the brake pedal. The vehicle speed indi-

cator will turn off.

3. Turn the CRUISE ON/OFF off. Both the

cruise indicator and vehicle speed indicator

will turn off.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the

following three methods:

1. Depress the accelerator pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push and

release the SET/- switch.

2. Push and hold the SET/+ switch. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, release

the switch.

3. Push, then quickly release the SET/+

switch. Each time you do this, the set speed

will increase by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of

the following three methods:

1. Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-

hicle attains the desired speed, push the

SET/- switch and release it.

2. Push and hold the SET/- switch. Release the

switch when the vehicle slows down to the

desired speed.

3. Push, then quickly release the SET/- switch.

Each time you do this, the set speed will

decrease by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and release

the SET/+ switch. The vehicle will resume the

last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is

over 25 mph (40 km/h).

Starting and driving 5-67

System temporarily unavailable

A chime sounds under the following conditions

and the control is automatically canceled:

●When the vehicle slows down more than

8 mph (13 km/h) below the set speed

●When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) or

manual shift mode

●When the parking brake is applied

●When the VDC operates (including the trac-

tion control system)

●When a wheel slips

When the system is not operating properly, the

chime sounds and the color of the cruise indica-

tor will change to orange.

Action to take

If the color of the cruise indicator changes to

orange, stop the vehicle in a safe place and place

the shift lever in the P (Park) position. Turn the

engine off, restart the engine, resume driving, and

then perform the setting again.

If it is not possible to set or the indicator

stays on, it may indicate that the system is

malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is still

driveable under normal conditions, have the

vehicle checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LSD2684

5-68 Starting and driving

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-

tions for proper use of the FEB system

could result in serious injury or death.

●The FEB system is a supplemental aid

to the driver. It is not a replacement for

the driver’s attention to traffic condi-

tions or responsibility to drive safely. It

cannot prevent accidents due to care-

lessness or dangerous driving

techniques.

●The FEB system does not function in all

driving, traffic, weather and road

conditions.

The FEB system can assist the driver when there

is a risk of a forward collision with the vehicle

ahead in the traveling lane.

The FEB system uses a radar sensor 䊊

Alocated

behind the front bumper to measure the distance

to the vehicle ahead in the same lane.

LSD2690

FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING

(FEB) (if so equipped)

Starting and driving 5-69

1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator

2. FEB emergency warning indicator

3. FEB warning light

FEB SYSTEM OPERATION

The FEB system will function when your vehicle is

driven at speeds above approximately 3 mph

(5 km/h).

If a risk of a forward collision is detected, the FEB

system will provide an initial warning to the driver

by both a visual and audible alert.

If the driver applies the brakes quickly and force-

fully after the warning, and the FEB system de-

tects that there is still the possibility of a forward

collision, the system will automatically increase

the braking force. If the driver does not take

action, the FEB system issues the second visual

warning (red) and audible warning and also ap-

plies partial braking.

If the risk of a collision becomes imminent, the

FEB system applies harder braking automatically.

LSD2687

5-70 Starting and driving

NOTE:

The vehicle’s brake lights come on when

braking is performed by the forward emer-

gency braking system.

Depending on vehicle speed and distance to the

vehicle ahead, as well as driving and roadway

conditions, the system may help the driver avoid a

forward collision or may help mitigate the conse-

quences of a collision, should one be unavoid-

able. If the driver is handling the steering wheel,

accelerating or braking, the FEB system will func-

tion later or will not function.

The automatic braking will cease under the fol-

lowing conditions:

●When the steering wheel is turned as far as

necessary to avoid a collision.

●When the accelerator pedal is depressed.

●When there is no longer a vehicle detected

ahead.

If the FEB system has stopped the vehicle, the

vehicle will remain at a standstill for approximately

2 seconds before the brakes are released.

LSD2716

Starting and driving 5-71

TURNING THE FEB SYSTEM

ON/OFF

Perform the following steps to turn the FEB sys-

tems ON or OFF.

1. Press the button until “Settings” dis-

plays in the vehicle information display and

then press OK button. Use the button

to select “Driver Assistance”. Then press the

OK button.

2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the OK but-

ton.

3. Select “Emergency Brake” and press the

OK button.

When the FEB system is turned off, the FEB

system warning light illuminates.

NOTE:

●The FEB system will be automatically turned

on when the engine is restarted.

FEB SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for

the FEB system. Failure to operate the

vehicle in accordance with these system

limitations could result in serious injury or

death.

●The FEB system cannot detect all ve-

hicles under all conditions.

●The radar sensor does not detect the

following objects:

– Pedestrians, animals or obstacles in

the roadway.

– Oncoming vehicles.

– Crossing vehicles.

●The radar sensor has some perfor-

mance limitations. If a stationary ve-

hicle is in the vehicles’s path, the FEB

system will not function when the ve-

hicle is driven at speeds over approxi-

mately 50 mph (80 km/h).

●The radar sensor may not detect a ve-

hicle ahead in the following conditions:

– Dirt, ice, snow or other material cov-

ering the radar sensor.

– Interference by other radar sources.

– Snow or road spray from traveling

vehicles.

– If the vehicle ahead is narrow (e.g.

motorcycle).

– When driving on a steep downhill

slope or roads with sharp curves.

●In some road or traffic conditions, the

FEB system may unexpectedly apply

partial braking. When acceleration is

necessary, continue to depress the ac-

celerator pedal to override the system.

●Braking distances increase on slippery

surfaces.

5-72 Starting and driving

●The system is designed to automatically

check the sensor’s functionality, within

certain limitations. The system may not

detect some forms of obstructions of

the sensor area such as ice, snow, stick-

ers, etc. In these cases, the system may

not be able to worn the driver properly.

Be sure that you check, clean and clear

the sensor area regularly.

●Excessive noise will interfere with the

warning chime sound, and the chime

may not be heard.

LSD2717

Starting and driving 5-73

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY

UNAVAILABLE

Condition A

When the radar sensor picks up interference

from another radar source, making it impossible

to detect a vehicle ahead, the FEB system is

automatically turned off.

The FEB system warning light (orange) will illu-

minate.

Action to take

When the above conditions no longer exist, the

FEB system will resume automatically.

Condition B

When the sensor area of the front bumper is

covered with dirt or is obstructed, making it im-

possible to detect a vehicle ahead, the FEB sys-

tem is automatically turned off.

The FEB system warning light (orange) will illu-

minate and the “Unavailable: Front Radar Ob-

struction” warning message will appear in the

vehicle information display.

When driving on roads with limited road struc-

tures or buildings (for example, long bridges,

deserts, snow fields, driving next to long walls),

the system may illuminate the system warning

light (orange) and display the “Unavailable: Front

Radar Obstruction” message.

Action to take

If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the

vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever in the

P (Park) position and turn the engine off. Clean

the radar cover on the lower grille with a soft

cloth, and restart the engine. If the warning light

continues to illuminate, have the FEB system

checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

If the FEB system malfunctions, it will be turned

off automatically, a chime will sound, the FEB

warning light (orange) will illuminate and the

warning message [Malfunction] will appear in the

vehicle information display.

Action to take

If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the

vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off and

restart the engine. If the warning light continues

to illuminate, have the FEB system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The sensor 䊊

Ais located behind the front bum-

per.

To keep the system operating properly, be sure to

observe the following:

●Always keep the sensor area of the front

bumper clean.

●Do not strike or damage the areas around

the sensor.

●Do not cover or attach stickers or similar

objects on the front bumper near the sensor

area. This could cause failure or malfunction.

LSD2690

5-74 Starting and driving

●Do not attach metallic objects near the sen-

sor area (brush guard, etc.). This could

cause failure or malfunction.

●Do not alter, remove or paint the front bum-

per. Before customizing or restoring the

front bumper, it is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer.

Radio frequency statement

For USA

FCC ID OAYARS4B

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful in-

terference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to op-

erate the equipment.

For Canada

Model: ARS4–B

IC: 4135A-ARS4B

FCC ID: OAYARS4B

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-

tion is subject to the following two condi-

tions:

1. This device may not cause interference,

and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation of

the device.

Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR

d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appar-

eils radio exempts de licence.

L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux con-

ditions suivantes:

1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de

brouillage, et

2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter

tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,

même si le brouillage est susceptible

d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.

Radio frequency radiation exposure infor-

mation:

This equipment complies with FCC and IC

radiation exposure limits set forth for an

uncontrolled environment.

This equipment should be installed and

operated with minimum distance of 30 cm

between the radiator and your body.

This transmitter must not be co-located or

operating in conjunction with any other an-

tenna or transmitter.

Cet équipement est conforme aux limites

d’exposition aux rayonnements IC établies

pour un environnement non contrôlé.

Cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé

avec un minimum de 30 cm de distance

entre la source de rayonnement et votre

corps.

FCC Notice

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to op-

erate the equipment.

Starting and driving 5-75

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-

tions for proper use of the FEB with pe-

destrian detection system could result in

serious injury or death.

●The FEB with pedestrian detection sys-

tem is a supplemental aid to the driver.

It is not a replacement for the driver’s

attention to traffic conditions or re-

sponsibility to drive safely. It cannot

prevent accidents due to carelessness

or dangerous driving techniques.

●The FEB with pedestrian detection sys-

tem does not function in all driving,

traffic, weather and road conditions.

The FEB with pedestrian detection system can

assist the driver when there is a risk of a forward

collision with the vehicle ahead in the traveling

lane or with a pedestrian.

The FEB with pedestrian detection system uses a

radar sensor located behind the lower grille of the

front bumper to measure the distance to the

vehicle ahead in the same lane. For pedestrians,

the FEB system uses a camera 䊊

Ainstalled be-

hind the windshield in addition to the radar sen-

sor.

LSD2711

FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING

(FEB) WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

5-76 Starting and driving

1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator

2. FEB with pedestrian detection emergency

warning indicator

3. FEB with pedestrian detection system warn-

ing light

FEB WITH PEDESTRIAN

DETECTION SYSTEM OPERATION

The FEB with pedestrian detection system oper-

ates at speeds above approximately 3 mph

(5 km/h). For the pedestrian detection function,

the FEB with pedestrian detection system oper-

ates at speeds between 6 – 37 mph (10 –

60 km/h).

If a risk of a forward collision with a vehicle is

detected, the FEB with pedestrian detection sys-

tem will first provide a warning to the driver by

flashing the vehicle ahead detection indicator

and providing an audible alert. In addition, the

FEB with pedestrian detection system applies

partial braking. If the driver applies the brakes

quickly and forcefully, but the FEB with pedes-

trian detection system detects that there is still

the possibility of a forward collision, the system

will automatically increase the braking force.

LSD2687

Starting and driving 5-77

If the risk of a collision becomes imminent and the

driver does not take action, the FEB with pedes-

trian detection system issues the second warning

to the driver by flashing the FEB with pedestrian

detection emergency warning indicator (red),

providing an audible warning, and then automati-

cally applies harder braking.

If a risk of a forward impact with a pedestrian is

detected, the FEB with pedestrian detection sys-

tem will provide a warning to the driver by flashing

the FEB with pedestrian detection emergency

warning indicator (red), provides an audible alert

and the system will apply partial baking. If the

driver applies the brakes quickly and forcefully

but the FEB with pedestrian detection system

detects that there is still the possibility of a for-

ward impact with a pedestrian, the system will

automatically increase the braking force. If the

risk of collision becomes imminent and the driver

does not take action, the FEB with pedestrian

detection system automatically applies harder

braking.

NOTE:

The vehicle’s brake lights come on when

any braking is performed by the FEB with

pedestrian detection system.

Depending on vehicle speed and distance to the

vehicle or pedestrian ahead, as well as driving

and roadway conditions, the system may help the

driver avoid a forward collision or may help miti-

gate the consequences if a collision should be

unavoidable. If the driver is handling the steering

wheel, accelerating or braking, the FEB with pe-

destrian detection system will function later or

will not function.

The automatic braking will cease under the fol-

lowing conditions:

●When the steering wheel is turned to avoid a

collision.

●When the accelerator pedal is depressed.

●When there is no longer a vehicle or a pe-

destrian detected ahead.

If the FEB with pedestrian detection system has

stopped the vehicle, the vehicle will remain at a

standstill for approximately 2 seconds before the

brakes are released.

5-78 Starting and driving

TURNING THE FEB WITH

PEDESTRIAN DETECTION SYSTEM

ON/OFF

Perform the following steps to enable or disable

the FEB with pedestrian detection system.

1. Press the button until “Settings” dis-

plays in the vehicle information display and

then press the OK button. Use the

button to select “Driver Assistance”. Then

press the OK button.

2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the OK but-

ton.

3. Select “Emergency Brake” and press the

OK button.

When the FEB with pedestrian detection system

is turned off, the FEB with pedestrian detection

system warning light illuminates.

NOTE:

●The FEB with pedestrian detection system

will be automatically turned on when the

engine is restarted.

LSD2716

Starting and driving 5-79

FEB WITH PEDESTRIAN

DETECTION SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for

the FEB with pedestrian detection system.

Failure to operate the vehicle in accor-

dance with these system limitations could

result in serious injury or death.

●The FEB with pedestrian detection sys-

tem cannot detect all vehicles or pedes-

trians under all conditions.

●The FEB with pedestrian detection sys-

tem does not detect the following

objects:

– Small pedestrians (including small

children), animals and cyclists.

– Pedestrians in wheelchairs or using

mobile transport such as scooters,

child-operated toys, or skateboards.

– Pedestrians who are seated or other-

wise not in a full upright standing or

walking position.

– Oncoming vehicles

– Crossing vehicles

– Obstacles on the roadside

●The FEB with pedestrian detection sys-

tem has some performance limitations.

– If a stationary vehicle is in the vehi-

cle’s path, the FEB with pedestrian

detection system will not function

when the vehicle is driven at speeds

over approximately 50 mph

(80 km/h).

– For pedestrian detection, the FEB

with pedestrian detection system will

not function when the vehicle is

driven at speeds over approximately

37 mph (60 km/h) or below approxi-

mately 6 mph (10km/h).

●The FEB with pedestrian detection sys-

tem will not function for pedestrians in

darkness or in tunnels, even if there is

street lighting in the area.

●For pedestrians, the FEB with pedes-

trian detection system will not issue the

first warning and will not push the ac-

celerator pedal up.

●The FEB with pedestrian detection sys-

tem may not function if the vehicle

ahead is narrow (for example a

motorcycle).

●The FEB with pedestrian detection sys-

tem may not function if speed differ-

ence between the two vehicles is too

small.

●The radar sensor FEB with pedestrian

detection system may not function

properly or detect a vehicle ahead in the

following conditions:

o Poor visibility (conditions such as

rain, snow, fog, dust storms, sand-

storms, and road spray from other

vehicles)

o Driving on a steep downhill slope or

roads with sharp curves.

o Driving on a bumpy road surface,

such as an uneven dirt road.

o If dirt, ice, snow or other material is

covering the radar sensor area.

o Interference by other radar sources.

o The camera area of windshield is

fogged up, or covered with dirt, water

drops, ice, snow, etc.

5-80 Starting and driving

o Strong light (for example, sunlight or

high beams from oncoming vehicles)

enters the front camera. Strong light

causes the area around the pedes-

trian to be cast in a shadow, making

it difficult to see.

o A sudden change in brightness oc-

curs. (For example, when the vehicle

enters or exits a tunnel or a shaded

area or lightning flashes.)

o The poor contrast of a person to the

background, such as having clothing

color or pattern which is similar to

the background.

o The pedestrian’s profile is partially

obscured or unidentifiable due to the

pedestrian transporting luggage,

wearing bulky or very loose-fitting

clothing or accessories.

●The system performance may degrade

in the following conditions:

o The vehicle is driven on a slippery

road.

o The vehicle is driven on a slope.

o Excessively heavy baggage is loaded

in the rear seat or the trunk room of

your vehicle.

●The system is designed to automatically

check the sensor (radar and camera)’s

functionality, within certain limitations.

The system may not detect blockage of

sensor areas covered by ice, snow or

stickers, for example. In these cases,

the system may not be able to warn the

driver properly. Be sure that you check,

clean and clear sensor areas regularly.

●In some road and traffic conditions, the

FEB with pedestrian detection system

may unexpectedly apply partial braking.

When acceleration is necessary, de-

press the accelerator pedal to override

the system.

●Excessive noise will interfere with the

warning chime sound, and the chime

may not be heard.

Starting and driving 5-81

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY

UNAVAILABLE

Condition A:

In the following conditions, the FEB with pedes-

trian detection system warning light blinks and

the system will be turned off automatically.

●The radar sensor picks up interference from

another radar source.

●The camera area of windshield is misted or

frozen.

●Strong light is shining from the front.

●The cabin temperature is over approximately

104°F [40°C] in direct sunlight.

●The camera area of windshield glass is con-

tinuously covered with dirt, etc.

Action to take

When the above conditions no longer exist, the

FEB with pedestrian detection system will re-

sume automatically.

LSD2717

5-82 Starting and driving

NOTE:

When the inside of the windshield on cam-

era area is misted or frozen, it will take a

period of time to remove it after the A/C

turns on. If dirt appears on this area, it is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer.

Condition B:

In the following conditions, the FEB system warn-

ing light will illuminate and the system will be

turned off automatically and the “Unavailable:

Front Radar Obstruction” warning message will

appear in the vehicle information display.

●The sensor area of the front bumper is cov-

ered with dirt or is obstructed.

Action to take

If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the

vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever in the

P (Park) position and turn the engine off. Clean

the radar sensor area of front bumper or the

camera area of windshield with a soft cloth, and

restart the engine. If the warning light continues

to illuminate, have the FEB system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

If the FEB with pedestrian detection system mal-

functions, it will be turned off automatically, a

chime will sound, the FEB system warning light

(orange) will illuminate and the warning message

[Malfunction] will appear in the vehicle informa-

tion display.

Action to take

If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the

vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off and

restart the engine. If the warning light continues

to illuminate, have the FEB with pedestrian de-

tection system checked. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The radar sensor is located behind the lower

grille of the front bumper. The camera 䊊

Ais

located on the upper side of the windshield.

To keep the FEB with pedestrian detection sys-

tem operating properly, be sure to observe the

following:

●Always keep sensor areas of the front bum-

per and windshield clean.

●Do not strike or damage the areas around

the sensors (ex. Bumper, windshield).

LSD2711

Starting and driving 5-83

●Do not cover or attach stickers, or install any

accessory near the sensors. This could

block sensor signals, and/or cause failure or

malfunction.

●Do not attach metallic objects near the radar

sensor (brush guard, etc.). This could cause

failure or malfunction.

●Do not place reflective materials, such as

white paper or a mirror, on the instrument

panel. The reflection of sunlight may ad-

versely affect the camera unit’s detection

capability.

●Do not alter, remove or paint the front bum-

per. Before customizing or restoring the

front bumper, it is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer.

Radio frequency statement

For USA

FCC ID OAYARS4B

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful in-

terference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to op-

erate the equipment.

For Canada

Model: ARS4–B

IC: 4135A-ARS4B

FCC ID: OAYARS4B

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-

tion is subject to the following two condi-

tions:

1. This device may not cause interference,

and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation of

the device.

Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR

d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appar-

eils radio exempts de licence.

L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux con-

ditions suivantes:

1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de

brouillage, et

2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter

tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,

même si le brouillage est susceptible

d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.

Radio frequency radiation exposure infor-

mation:

This equipment complies with FCC and IC

radiation exposure limits set forth for an

uncontrolled environment.

This equipment should be installed and

operated with minimum distance of 30 cm

between the radiator and your body.

This transmitter must not be co-located or

operating in conjunction with any other an-

tenna or transmitter.

Cet équipement est conforme aux limites

d’exposition aux rayonnements IC établies

pour un environnement non contrôlé.

5-84 Starting and driving

Cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé

avec un minimum de 30 cm de distance

entre la source de rayonnement et votre

corps.

FCC Notice

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to op-

erate the equipment.

CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),

follow these recommendations to obtain

maximum engine performance and ensure

the future reliability and economy of your

new vehicle. Failure to follow these rec-

ommendations may result in shortened

engine life and reduced engine

performance.

●Avoid driving for long periods at constant

speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the

engine over 4,000 RPM.

●Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.

●Avoid quick starts.

●Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

●Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 mi

(805 km). Your engine, axle or other parts

could be damaged.

Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient Driving

Tips to help you achieve the most fuel economy

from your vehicle.

1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake

Pedal Application

●Avoid rapid starts and stops.

●Use smooth, gentle accelerator and

brake application whenever possible.

●Maintain constant speed while commut-

ing and coast whenever possible.

2. Maintain Constant Speed

●Look ahead to try and anticipate and mini-

mize stops.

●Synchronizing your speed with traffic

lights allows you to reduce your number

of stops.

●Maintaining a steady speed can minimize

red light stops and improve fuel effi-

ciency.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS

Starting and driving 5-85

3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at Higher

Vehicle Speeds

●Below 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more effi-

cient to open windows to cool the vehicle

due to reduced engine load.

●Above 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more effi-

cient to use A/C to cool the vehicle due to

increased aerodynamic drag.

●Recirculating the cool air in the cabin

when the A/C is on reduces cooling load.

4. Drive at Economical Speeds and Dis-

tances

●Observing the speed limit and not ex-

ceeding 60 mph (97 km/h) (where legally

allowed) can improve fuel efficiency due

to reduced aerodynamic drag.

●Maintaining a safe following distance be-

hind other vehicles reduces unnecessary

braking.

●Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate

changes in speed permits reduced brak-

ing and smooth acceleration changes.

●Select a gear range suitable to road con-

ditions.

5. Use Cruise Control

●Using cruise control during highway driv-

ing helps maintain a steady speed.

●Cruise control is particularly effective in

providing fuel savings when driving on flat

terrains.

6. Plan for the Shortest Route

●Utilize a map or navigation system to de-

termine the best route to save time.

7. Avoid Idling

●Shutting off your engine when safe for

stops exceeding 30–60 seconds saves

fuel and reduces emissions.

8. Buy an Automated Pass for Toll Roads

●Automated passes permit drivers to use

special lanes to maintain cruising speed

through the toll and avoid stopping and

starting.

9. Winter Warm Up

●Limit idling time to minimize impact to fuel

economy.

●Vehicles typically need no more than

30 seconds of idling at start-up to effec-

tively circulate the engine oil before driv-

ing.

●Your vehicle will reach its ideal operating

temperature more quickly while driving

versus idling.

10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool

●Park your vehicle in a covered parking

area or in the shade whenever possible.

●When entering a hot vehicle, opening the

windows will help to reduce the inside

temperature faster, resulting in reduced

demand on your A/C system.

5-86 Starting and driving

●Keep your engine tuned up.

●Follow the recommended scheduled main-

tenance.

●Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-

sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear

and lowers fuel economy.

●Keep all the wheels in correct alignment.

Improper alignment increases tire wear and

lowers fuel economy.

●Use the recommended viscosity engine oil.

For additional information, refer to “Engine

oil and oil filter recommendations” in the

“Technical and consumer information” sec-

tion of this manual.

If any malfunction occurs in the AWD system

while the engine is running, the master warning

light will come on.

The master warning light may illuminate while

trying to free a stuck vehicle due to high pow-

ertrain oil temperature. The driving mode may

change to 2WD. AUTO mode may change to

LOCK mode before the warning light illuminates.

If the master warning light illuminates during op-

eration, stop the vehicle with the engine idling in a

safe place immediately.

Then if the light turns off after a while, you can

continue driving.

A large difference between the diameters of the

front and rear wheels will make the warning light

illuminate. Pull off the road in a safe area and idle

the engine. Check that all tire sizes are the same,

tire pressure is correct, and the tires are not worn.

CAUTION

●If the warning light remains on after the

above operation, have your vehicle

checked as soon as possible. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

●If the warning light comes on while driv-

ing, there may be a malfunction in the

AWD system.

Reduce the vehicle speed and have your

vehicle checked as soon as possible. It

is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

●The powertrain may be damaged if you

continue driving with the warning light

illuminated.

●Never drive on dry, hard surface roads in

the LOCK mode, as this will overload

the powertrain and may cause a serious

malfunction.

WARNING

●For AWD equipped vehicles, do not at-

tempt to raise two wheels off the

ground and shift the transmission to

any drive or reverse position with the

engine running. Doing so may result in

drivetrain damage or unexpected ve-

hicle movement which could result in

serious vehicle damage or personal

injury.

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) (if so

equipped)

Starting and driving 5-87

●Do not attempt to test an AWD

equipped vehicle on a 2–wheel dyna-

mometer (such as the dynamometers

used by some states for emissions test-

ing) or similar equipment even if the

other two wheels are raised off the

ground. Make sure that you inform the

test facility personnel that your vehicle

is equipped with AWD before it is

placed on a dynamometer. Using the

wrong test equipment may result in

drive train damage or unexpected ve-

hicle movement which could result in

serious vehicle damage or personal

injury.

AWD LOCK SWITCH OPERATIONS

The AWD LOCK switch is located on the lower

side of the instrument panel. This switch is used

to select the AUTO or LOCK mode depending on

the driving conditions.

LOCK mode:

The AWD LOCK indicator light will illuminate.

AUTO mode:

The AWD LOCK indicator light will turn off.

LIC2645

5-88 Starting and driving

AWD mode Wheels driven AWD LOCK indicator light Use conditions

AUTO

Distribution of torque to

the front and rear wheels

changes automatically,

depending on road condi-

tions encountered [100:0]

←→ [50:50]. This results

in improved driving

stability. *1

For driving on paved or

slippery roads.

LOCK All-Wheel Drive (AWD) *2,

*3 For driving on rough

roads.

*1 When the rotation difference between the front and rear wheels is large, the AWD mode may change

from AUTO to LOCK for a while, however, this is not a malfunction.

*2 The LOCK mode will change to AUTO mode automatically when the vehicle has been driven at a

high speed. The AWD LOCK indicator light turns off.

*3 LOCK mode will automatically be canceled when the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position.

●The AWD torque distribution between the

front and rear wheels can be displayed in the

video information display.

●If the AWD LOCK switch is operated while

accelerating or decelerating, or if the ignition

switch is turned off, you may feel a jolt. This

is normal.

●The oil temperature of the powertrain parts

will increase if the vehicle is continuously

operated under conditions where the differ-

ence in rotation between the front and rear

wheels is large (wheel slip), such as when

driving the vehicle on rough roads, through

sand or mud, or freeing a stuck vehicle. In

these cases, the master warning light illumi-

nates and the AWD mode changes to 2WD

to protect the powertrain parts. Stop driving

with the engine idling and wait until the

warning light turns off and the AWD returns

to the AUTO mode. If the warning light re-

mains on, have your vehicle checked as

soon as possible. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Starting and driving 5-89

WARNING

●When driving straight, shift the AWD

LOCK switch to AUTO. Do not operate

the AWD LOCK switch when making a

turn or backing up.

●Do not operate the AWD LOCK switch

with the front wheel spinning.

●Engine idling speed is high while warm-

ing up the engine. Be especially careful

when starting or driving on slippery

surfaces.

●When turning the vehicle in LOCK mode

on paved roads, you may feel a braking

effect. This is a normal condition of the

AWD model. WARNING

●Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry grass,

waste paper or rags. They may ignite

and cause a fire.

●Safe parking procedures require that

both the parking brake be set and the

transmission placed into P (Park). Fail-

ure to do so could cause the vehicle to

move unexpectedly or roll away and re-

sult in an accident. Make sure the shift

lever has been pushed as far forward as

it can go and cannot be moved without

depressing the foot brake pedal.

●Never leave the engine running while

the vehicle is unattended.

●To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave

children, people who require the assis-

tance of others or pets unattended in

your vehicle. Additionally, the tempera-

ture inside a closed vehicle on a warm

day can quickly become high enough to

cause a significant risk of injury or

death to people and pets.

WSD0050

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

5-90 Starting and driving

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into

traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good

practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.

●HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB 䊊

Turn the wheels into the curb and move the

vehicle forward until the curb side wheel

gently touches the curb.

●HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB 䊊

Turn the wheels away from the curb and

move the vehicle back until the curb side

wheel gently touches the curb.

●HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO

CURB 䊊

Turn the wheels toward the side of the road

so the vehicle will move away from the cen-

ter of the road if it moves.

4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-

tion.

WARNING

●If the engine is not running or is turned

off while driving, the power assist for

the steering will not work. Steering will

be harder to operate.

●When the power steering warning light

illuminates with the engine running,

there will be no power assist for the

steering. You will still have control of

the vehicle, but the steering will be

much harder to operate. Have the power

steering system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

The power steering system is designed to pro-

vide power assistance while driving to operate

the steering wheel with light force.

When the steering wheel is operated repeatedly

or continuously while parking or driving at a very

low speed, the power assist for the steering

wheel will be reduced. This is to prevent over-

heating of the power steering system and protect

it from getting damaged. While the power assist

is reduced, steering wheel operation will become

heavy. If the steering wheel operation is still per-

formed, the power steering may stop and the

power steering warning light will illuminate. In a

safe location, stop the engine and push the igni-

tion switch to the OFF position. The temperature

of the power steering system will go down after a

period of time and the power assist level will

return to normal after starting the engine. The

power steering warning light will go off. Avoid

repeating such steering wheel operations that

could cause the power steering system to over-

heat.

You may hear a noise from the front of the vehicle

when the steering wheel is operated. This is a

normal operational noise and is not a malfunction.

If the power steering warning light illuminates

while the engine is running, it may indicate the

power steering system is not functioning properly

and may need servicing. Have the power steering

system checked. It is recommended that you visit

a NISSAN dealer for this service.

When the power steering warning light illumi-

nates with the engine running, the power assist

for the steering will cease operation but you will

still have control of the vehicle. At this time,

greater steering efforts are required to operate

the steering wheel, especially in sharp turns and

at low speeds.

POWER STEERING

Starting and driving 5-91

The brake system has two separate hydraulic

circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still

have braking at two wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS

Vacuum assisted brakes

The brake booster aids braking by using engine

vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the

vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,

greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be

required to stop the vehicle and stopping dis-

tance will be longer.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while

driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the

brake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.

To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the

brakes from overheating, reduce speed and

downshift to a lower gear before going down a

slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may

reduce braking performance and could result in

loss of vehicle control.

WARNING

●While driving on a slippery surface, be

careful when braking, accelerating or

downshifting. Abrupt braking or accel-

erating could cause the wheels to skid

and result in an accident.

●If the engine is not running or is turned

off while driving, the power assist for

the brakes will not work. Braking will be

harder.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven through

water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your

braking distance will be longer and the vehicle

may pull to one side during braking.

To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe

speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to

heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return

to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high

speeds until the brakes function correctly.

Parking brake break-in

Break in the parking brake shoes whenever the

stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened

or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or

drums/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the

best braking performance.

This procedure is described in the vehicle service

manual. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM

(ABS)

WARNING

●The ABS is a sophisticated device, but it

cannot prevent accidents resulting from

careless or dangerous driving tech-

niques. It can help maintain vehicle con-

trol during braking on slippery surfaces.

Remember that stopping distances on

slippery surfaces will be longer than on

normal surfaces even with ABS. Stop-

ping distances may also be longer on

rough, gravel or snow covered roads, or

if you are using tire chains. Always

maintain a safe distance from the ve-

hicle in front of you. Ultimately, the

driver is responsible for safety.

●Tire type and condition may also affect

braking effectiveness.

– When replacing tires, install the

specified size of tires on all four

wheels.

BRAKE SYSTEM

5-92 Starting and driving

– When installing a spare tire, make

sure that it is the proper size and type

as specified on the Tire and Loading

Information label. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Tire and Loading

Information label” in the “Technical

and consumer information” section

of this manual.

– For additional information, refer to

“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

The ABS controls the brakes so the wheels do

not lock during hard braking or when braking on

slippery surfaces. The system detects the rota-

tion speed at each wheel and varies the brake

fluid pressure to prevent each wheel from locking

and sliding. By preventing each wheel from lock-

ing, the system helps the driver maintain steering

control and helps to minimize swerving and spin-

ning on slippery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. De-

press the brake pedal with firm steady pressure,

but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will oper-

ate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer

the vehicle to avoid obstacles.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so

may result in increased stopping

distances.

Self-test feature

The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric

pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The

computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that

tests the system each time you start the engine

and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or

reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear

a “clunk”noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake

pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a

malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunc-

tion, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the

ABS warning light on the instrument panel. The

brake system then operates normally but without

anti-lock assistance.

If the ABS warning light illuminates during the

self-test or while driving, have the vehicle

checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

Normal operation

The ABS operates at speeds above3-6mph(5

- 10 km/h). The speed varies according to road

conditions.

When the ABS senses that one or more wheels

are close to locking up, the actuator rapidly ap-

plies and releases hydraulic pressure. This action

is similar to pumping the brakes very quickly. You

may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a

noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from

the actuator when it is operating. This is normal

and indicates that the ABS is operating properly.

However, the pulsation may indicate that road

conditions are hazardous and extra care is re-

quired while driving.

BRAKE ASSIST

When the force applied to the brake pedal ex-

ceeds a certain level, the brake assist is activated

generating greater braking force than a conven-

tional brake booster even with light pedal force.

WARNING

The brake assist is only an aid to assist

braking operation and is not a collision

warning or avoidance device. It is the driv-

er’s responsibility to stay alert, drive

safely and be in control of the vehicle at all

times.

Starting and driving 5-93

The VDC system uses various sensors to monitor

driver inputs and vehicle motion. Under certain

driving conditions, the VDC system helps to per-

form the following functions:

●Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel

slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is

transferred to a non slipping drive wheel on

the same axle.

●Controls brake pressure and engine output

to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle

speed (traction control function).

●Controls brake pressure at individual wheels

and engine output to help the driver maintain

control of the vehicle in the following condi-

tions:

– understeer (vehicle tends to not follow

the steered path despite increased steer-

ing input)

– oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to

certain road or driving conditions)

The VDC system can help the driver to maintain

control of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss of

vehicle control in all driving situations.

When the VDC system operates, the indi-

cator in the instrument panel flashes so note the

following:

●The road may be slippery or the system may

determine some action is required to help

keep the vehicle on the steered path.

●You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal

and hear a noise or vibration from under the

hood. This is normal and indicates that the

VDC system is working properly.

●Adjust your speed and driving to the road

conditions.

For additional information, refer to “Slip indicator

light” and “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF

indicator light” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

If a malfunction occurs in the system, the

and indicator lights come on in the instru-

ment panel. The VDC system automatically turns

off when these indicator lights are on.

The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC

system. The indicator illuminates to indi-

cate the VDC system is off.

When the VDC switch is used to turn off the

system, the VDC system still operates to prevent

one drive wheel from slipping by transferring

power to a non slipping drive wheel. The

indicator flashes if this occurs. All other VDC

functions are off and the indicator will not

flash.

The VDC system is automatically reset to on

when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position then back to the ON position.

The computer has a built in diagnostic feature

that tests the system each time you start the

engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse

at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you

may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in

the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an

indication of a malfunction.

WARNING

●The VDC system is designed to help the

driver maintain stability but does not

prevent accidents due to abrupt steer-

ing operation at high speeds or by care-

less or dangerous driving techniques.

Reduce vehicle speed and be especially

careful when driving and cornering on

slippery surfaces and always drive

carefully.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

SYSTEM

5-94 Starting and driving

●Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.

If suspension parts such as shock ab-

sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars,

bushings and wheels are not NISSAN

recommended for your vehicle or are

extremely deteriorated, the VDC system

may not operate properly. This could

adversely affect vehicle handling per-

formance, and the indicator may

flash or both the and indica-

tor lights may illuminate.

●If brake related parts such as brake

pads, rotors and calipers are not

NISSAN recommended or are extremely

deteriorated, the VDC system may not

operate properly and both the

and the indicator lights may

illuminate.

●If engine control related parts are not

NISSAN recommended or are extremely

deteriorated, both the and

indicator lights may illuminate.

●When driving on extremely inclined sur-

faces such as higher banked corners,

the VDC system may not operate prop-

erly and the indicator may flash or

both the and indicator

lights may illuminate. Do not drive on

these types of roads.

●When driving on an unstable surface

such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or

ramp, the indicator may flash or

both the and indicator

lights may illuminate. This is not a mal-

function. Restart the engine after driv-

ing onto a stable surface.

●If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN

recommended ones are used, the VDC

system may not operate properly and

the indicator may flash or both

the and indicator lights may

illuminate.

●The VDC system is not a substitute for

winter tires or tire chains on a snow

covered road.

BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION

During braking while driving through turns, the

system optimizes the distribution of force to each

of the front and rear wheels depending on the

radius of the turn.

WARNING

●The VDC system is designed to help the

driver maintain stability but does not

prevent accidents due to abrupt steer-

ing operation at high speeds or by care-

less or dangerous driving techniques.

Reduce vehicle speed and be especially

careful when driving and cornering on

slippery surfaces and always drive

carefully.

●Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.

If suspension parts such as shock ab-

sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars,

bushings and wheels are not NISSAN

recommended for your vehicle or are

extremely deteriorated, the VDC system

may not operate properly. This could

adversely affect vehicle handling per-

formance, and the indicator may

flash or the indicator light may

illuminate.

Starting and driving 5-95

●If brake related parts such as brake

pads, rotors and calipers are not

NISSAN recommended or are extremely

deteriorated, the VDC system may not

operate properly and the indica-

tor light may illuminate.

●If engine control related parts are not

NISSAN recommended or are extremely

deteriorated, the indicator light

may illuminate.

●When driving on extremely inclined sur-

faces such as higher banked corners,

the VDC system may not operate prop-

erly and the indicator may flash or

the indicator light may illuminate.

Do not drive on these types of roads.

●When driving on an unstable surface

such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or

ramp, the indicator may flash or

the indicator light may illuminate.

This is not a malfunction. Restart the

engine after driving onto a stable

surface.

●If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN

recommended ones are used, the VDC

system may not operate properly and

the indicator may flash or

the indicator light may illuminate.

●The VDC system is not a substitute for

winter tires or tire chains on a snow

covered road.

The chassis control is an electric control module

that includes the following functions:

●Active Trace Control

●Active Engine Brake

●Active Ride Control

ACTIVE TRACE CONTROL

This system senses driving based on the driver’s

steering and acceleration/braking patterns, and

controls brake pressure at individual wheels to

aid tracing at corners and help smooth vehicle

response.

The Active Trace Control can be set to ON (en-

abled) or OFF (disabled) through the vehicle

information display “Settings” page. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Vehicle information

display” in the “Instruments and controls” section

of this manual.

When the VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the

VDC system, the Active Trace Control is also

turned off.

CHASSIS CONTROL

5-96 Starting and driving

When the Active Trace Control is operated and

the “Chassis Control” mode is selected in the

vehicle information display, the Active Trace Con-

trol graphics are shown in the vehicle information

display. For additional information, refer to “Ve-

hicle information display” in the “Instruments and

controls” section of this manual.

If the chassis control warning message appears

in the vehicle information display, it may indicate

that the Active Trace Control is not functioning

properly. Have the system checked as soon as

possible. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING

The active trace control may not be effec-

tive depending on the driving condition.

Always drive carefully and attentively.

When the Active Trace Control is operating, you

may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a

noise. This is normal and indicates that the active

trace control is operating properly.

Even if the Active Trace Control is set to OFF,

some functions will remain on to assist the driver

(for example: avoidance scenes).

ACTIVE ENGINE BRAKE

The Active Engine Brake function adds subtle

deceleration by controlling CVT gear ratio, de-

pending on the cornering condition calculated

from driver’s steering input and plural sensors.

This benefit is for easier traceability and less

workload of adjusting speed with braking at cor-

ners.

The Active Engine Brake also enhances braking

feel by adding subtle deceleration with CVT gear

ratio control according to driver’s brake pedal

operation

The Active Engine Brake can be set to ON (en-

abled) or OFF (disabled) through the vehicle

information display “Settings” page. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Vehicle information

display” in the “Instruments and controls” section

of this manual.

LSD2185

Starting and driving 5-97

When the Active Engine Brake is operated at

corners and the “Chassis Control” mode is se-

lected in the vehicle information display, the Ac-

tive Engine Brake graphics are shown in the

vehicle information display. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Vehicle information display” in

the “Instruments and controls” section of this

manual.

If the chassis control warning message appears

in the vehicle information display, it may indicate

that the Active Engine Brake is not functioning

properly. Have the system checked as soon as

possible. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING

The Active Engine Brake may not be effec-

tive depending on the driving condition.

Always drive carefully and attentively.

When the Active Engine Brake is operating, the

needle of the tachometer will rise up and you may

hear an engine noise. This is normal and indicates

that the active engine brake is operating properly.

ACTIVE RIDE CONTROL

This system senses upper body motion (based

on wheel speed information) and controls engine

torque and four wheel brake pressure. This will

enhance ride comfort in effort to restrain uncom-

fortable upper body movement when passing

over undulated road surfaces. This system

comes into effect above 25 mph (40 km/h).

When the VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the

VDC system, the Active Ride Control is also

turned off.

LSD2185

5-98 Starting and driving

When brake control of Active Ride Control is

operated and the “Chassis Control” mode is se-

lected in the vehicle information display, the Ac-

tive Ride Control graphics are shown in the ve-

hicle information display. For additional

information, refer to “Vehicle information display”

in the “Instruments and controls” section of this

manual.

If the chassis control warning message appears

in the vehicle information display, it may indicate

that the Active Ride Control is not functioning

properly. Have the system checked as soon as

possible. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

When the Active Ride Control is operating, you

may hear noise and sense slight deceleration.

This is normal and indicates that the Active Ride

Control is operating properly.

WARNING

●Never rely solely on the hill start assist

system to prevent the vehicle from mov-

ing backward on a hill. Always drive

carefully and attentively. Depress the

brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped

on a steep hill. Be especially careful

when stopped on a hill on frozen or

muddy roads. Failure to prevent the ve-

hicle from rolling backwards may result

in a loss of control of the vehicle and

possible serious injury or death.

LSD2186 LSD2441

HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM

Starting and driving 5-99

●The hill start assist system is not de-

signed to hold the vehicle at a standstill

on a hill. Depress the brake pedal when

the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill.

Failure to do so may cause the vehicle

to roll backwards and may result in a

collision or serious personal injury.

●The hill start assist may not prevent the

vehicle from rolling backwards on a hill

under all load or road conditions. Al-

ways be prepared to depress the brake

pedal to prevent the vehicle from rolling

backwards. Failure to do so may result

in a collision or serious personal injury.

When the vehicle is stopped on a hill, the hill start

assist system automatically keeps the brakes ap-

plied. This helps prevent the vehicle from rolling

backward in the time it takes the driver to release

the brake pedal and apply the accelerator.

Hill start assist will operate automatically under

the following conditions:

●The shift lever is shifted to a forward or

reverse gear.

●The vehicle is stopped completely on a hill

by applying the brake.

The maximum holding time is two seconds. After

two seconds the vehicle will begin to roll back

and hill start assist will stop operating completely.

Hill start assist will not operate when the shift

lever is shifted into N (Neutral) or P (Park) or on a

flat and level road.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-

icer through the key hole. If the lock becomes

frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key

hole, or use the NISSAN Intelligent Key®.

ANTIFREEZE

In the winter when it is anticipated that the tem-

perature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check the

antifreeze to assure proper winter protection. For

additional information, refer to “Engine cooling

system” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

BATTERY

If the battery is not fully charged during extremely

cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may

freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maxi-

mum efficiency, the battery should be checked

regularly. For additional information, refer to “Bat-

tery” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-

freeze, drain the cooling system, including the

engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.

For additional information, refer to “Changing

engine coolant” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of

this manual.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

5-100 Starting and driving

TIRE EQUIPMENT

1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to

provide superior performance on dry pave-

ment. However, the performance of these

tires will be substantially reduced in snowy

and icy conditions. If you operate your ve-

hicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recom-

mends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL

SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for the tire type, size, speed rating and

availability information.

2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded

tires may be used. However, some U.S.

states and Canadian provinces prohibit their

use. Check local, state and provincial laws

before installing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studded

snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be

poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

3. Tire chains may be used. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Tire chains” in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items be

carried in the vehicle during winter:

●A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove

ice and snow from the windows and wiper

blades.

●A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the

jack to give it firm support.

●A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.

●Extra washer fluid to refill the windshield-

washer fluid reservoir.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

●Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),

very cold snow or ice can be slick and

very hard to drive on. The vehicle will

have much less traction or “grip” under

these conditions. Try to avoid driving on

wet ice until the road is salted or

sanded.

●Whatever the condition, drive with cau-

tion. Accelerate and slow down with

care. If accelerating or downshifting too

fast, the drive wheels will lose even

more traction.

●Allow more stopping distance under

these conditions. Braking should be

started sooner than on dry pavement.

●Allow greater following distances on

slippery roads.

●Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).

These may appear on an otherwise

clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of

ice is seen ahead, brake before reach-

ing it. Try not to brake while on the ice,

and avoid any sudden steering

maneuvers.

●Do not use the cruise control on slip-

pery roads.

●Snow can trap dangerous exhaust

gases under your vehicle. Keep snow

clear of the exhaust pipe and from

around your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so

equipped)

Engine block heaters are used to assist with cold

temperature starting.

The engine block heater should be used when

the outside temperature is 20°F (-7°C) or lower.

Starting and driving 5-101

WARNING

●Do not use your engine block heater

with an ungrounded electrical system or

a 2-pronged adapter. You can be seri-

ously injured by an electrical shock if

you use an ungrounded connection.

●Disconnect and properly store the en-

gine block heater cord before starting

the engine. Damage to the cord could

result in an electrical shock and can

cause serious injury.

●Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged ex-

tension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plug

the extension cord into a Ground Fault

Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded

110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the

proper extension cord or a grounded

outlet can result in a fire or electrical

shock and cause serious personal

injury.

To use the engine block heater:

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine block

heater cord.

3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a

grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension

cord.

4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault

Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-

volt AC (VAC) outlet.

5. The engine block heater must be plugged in

for at least two to four hours, depending on

outside temperatures, to properly warm the

engine coolant. Use an appropriate timer to

turn the engine block heater on.

6. Before starting the engine, unplug and prop-

erly store the cord to keep it away from

moving parts.

5-102 Starting and driving

6 In case of emergency

Hazard warning flasher switch ......................6-2

Emergency engine shut off (Push-button ignition

models only) ......................................6-2

Flat tire ...........................................6-3

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)..........6-3

Run-flat tires (if so equipped) ....................6-3

Changing a flat tire .............................6-4

Jump starting ....................................6-10

Push starting.....................................6-12

If your vehicle overheats ...........................6-12

Towing your vehicle ...............................6-13

Towing recommended by NISSAN ..............6-14

Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) .........6-15

Push the switch on to warn other drivers when

you must stop or park under emergency condi-

tions. All turn signal lights flash.

WARNING

●If stopping for an emergency, be sure to

move the vehicle well off the road.

●Do not use the hazard warning flashers

while moving on the highway unless

unusual circumstances force you to

drive so slowly that your vehicle might

become a hazard to other traffic.

●Turn signals do not work when the haz-

ard warning flasher lights are on.

The flashers will operate with the ignition switch

placed in any position.

Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use of

the hazard warning flasher switch while

driving.

To shut off the engine in an emergency situation

while driving, perform the following procedure:

– Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch

three consecutive times in less than 1.5 sec-

onds, or

– Push and hold the push-button ignition switch

for more than 2 seconds.

LIC0394

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

SWITCH

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF

(Push-button ignition models only)

6-2 In case of emergency

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with TPMS. It monitors

tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When

the low tire pressure warning light is lit, and the

“Tire Pressure Low — Add Air” (“Tire Pressure

Low — Visit Dealer” for vehicles equipped with

run-flat tires) warning appears in the vehicle in-

formation display, one or more of your tires is

significantly under-inflated. If equipped, the sys-

tem also displays pressure of all tires (except the

spare tire) on the display screen by sending a

signal from a sensor that is installed in each

wheel. If the vehicle is being driven with low tire

pressure, the TPMS will activate and warn you of

it by the low tire pressure warning light. This

system will activate only when the vehicle is

driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). For

additional information, refer to “Warning lights,

indicator lights and audible reminders” in the

“Instruments and controls” section and “Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the

“Starting and driving” section of this manual.

WARNING

●

Radio waves could adversely affect elec-

tric medical equipment. Those who use a

pacemaker should contact the electric

medical equipment manufacturer for the

possible influences before use.

●

If the low tire pressure warning light illu-

minates while driving, avoid sudden

steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, re-

duce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a

safe location and stop the vehicle as soon

as possible. Driving with under-inflated

tires may permanently damage the tires

and increase the likelihood of tire failure.

Serious vehicle damage could occur and

may lead to an accident and could result

in serious personal injury. Check the tire

pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire

pressure to the recommended COLD tire

pressure shown on the Tire and Loading

Information label to turn the low tire pres-

sure warning light OFF. If the light still

illuminates while driving after adjusting

the tire pressure, a tire may be flat or the

TPMS may be malfunctioning. If you have

a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as

soon as possible. If no tire is flat and all

tires are properly inflated, have the ve-

hicle checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

●Since the spare tire is not equipped with

the TPMS, when mounted or a wheel is

replaced, tire pressure will not be indi-

cated, the TPMS will not function and

the low tire pressure warning light will

flash for approximately 1 minute. The

light will remain on after 1 minute. Have

your tires replaced and/or TPMS sys-

tem reset as soon as possible. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for these services.

●Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by NISSAN could affect the

proper operation of the TPMS.

●Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol

tire sealant into the tires, as this may

cause a malfunction of the tire pressure

sensors.

RUN-FLAT TIRES (if so equipped)

Run-flat tires are those tires that can be used

temporarily if they are punctured. For additional

information, refer to “Run-flat tires” in “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

For additional information, refer to the tire safety

information in the Warranty Information Booklet.

FLAT TIRE

In case of emergency 6-3

WARNING

●Although you can continue driving with

a punctured run-flat tire, remember that

vehicle handling stability is reduced,

which could lead to an accident and

personal injury. Also, driving a long dis-

tance at high speeds may damage the

tires.

●Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph

(80 km/h) and do not drive more than

approximately 93 miles (150 km) with a

punctured run-flat tire. The actual dis-

tance the vehicle can be driven on a flat

tire depends on outside temperature,

vehicle load, road conditions and other

factors.

●Drive safely at reduced speeds. Avoid

hard cornering or braking, which may

cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

●If you detect any unusual sounds or

vibrations while driving with a punc-

tured run-flat tire, pull off the road to a

safe location and stop the vehicle as

soon as possible. The tire may be seri-

ously damaged and need to be

replaced.

CAUTION

●Never install tire chains on a punctured

run-flat tire, as this could damage your

vehicle.

●Avoid diving over any projection or pot-

hole, as the clearance between the ve-

hicle and the ground is smaller than

normal.

●Do not enter an automated car wash

with a punctured run-flat tire.

●Have the punctured tire inspected by a

NISSAN dealer or other authorized re-

pair shop. Replace the tire as soon as

possible if the tire is seriously

damaged.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions be-

low:

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and

away from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking

brake. Move the shift lever to P (Park).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to

signal professional road assistance person-

nel that you need assistance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle

and stand in a safe place, away from traffic

and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING

●Make sure the parking brake is securely

applied and the shift lever is shifted into

P (Park).

●Never change tires when the vehicle is

on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is

hazardous.

●Never change tires if oncoming traffic is

close to your vehicle. Wait for profes-

sional road assistance.

6-4 In case of emergency

A. Blocks

B. Flat tire

Blocking wheels

Place suitable blocks at both the front and back

of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to

prevent the vehicle from moving when it is jacked

up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle

may move and result in personal injury.

Getting the spare tire and tools (if so

equipped)

Open the rear liftgate. Remove the Divide-n-

Hide® floor. For additional information, refer to

“Divide-n-Hide® adjustable floor” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section of this manual.

Lift the floorboard.

1. The jack and tool kit are located in the stor-

age compartment to the left.

2. Remove the storage door by pressing the

two release tabs 䊊

Asimultaneously.

LCE2142 LCE2111 LIC2640

In case of emergency 6-5

3. Unhook the clip 䊊

Brestraining the jack and

tool kit.

4. Remove the tool kit.

5. Remove the jack by turning the spindle 䊊

counterclockwise, relieving the pressure on

the jack.

6. To loosen the bolt, turn counterclockwise.

7. Once loosened, remove the bolt.

8. Remove the spare tire.

9. Once the flat tire is exchanged with the

spare tire, store the flat tire where the spare

tire was located.

10. Turn the bolt clockwise to tighten.

LCE2112 LCE2247 WCE0188

6-6 In case of emergency

Changing the spare tire with BOSE®

sub-woofer (if so equipped)

1. To loosen the bolt, turn counterclockwise.

2. Once loosened, remove the bolt.

3. Place the sub-woofer in the upper right cor-

ner of the cargo space, leaning against the

2nd row passenger side seat.

4. Remove the spare tire.

5. Once the flat tire is exchanged with the

spare tire, store the flat tire where the spare

was located.

6. Place the sub-woofer inside the flat tire.

7. Turn the bolt clockwise to tighten.

Removing wheel cover (if so

equipped)

CAUTION

Do not use your hands to pry off wheel

caps or wheel covers. Doing so could re-

sult in personal injury.

To remove the wheel cover, use the jack rod 䊊

as illustrated.

Apply cloth 䊊

2between the wheel and jack rod to

prevent damaging the wheel and wheel cover.

Use caution not to scratch the wheel cover or

wheel surface.

LCE2109 LCE2110 SCE0630

In case of emergency 6-7

Jacking up vehicle and removing the

damaged tire

WARNING

●Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by the jack. If it is nec-

essary to work under the vehicle, sup-

port it with safety stands.

●Use only the jack provided with your

vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the

jack provided with your vehicle on other

vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting

only your vehicle during a tire change.

●Use the correct jack-up points. Never

use any other part of the vehicle for jack

support.

●Never jack up the vehicle more than

necessary.

●Never use blocks on or under the jack.

●

Do not start or run the engine while ve-

hicle is on the jack. It may cause the

vehicle to move. This is especially true for

vehicles with limited slip differentials.

●Do not allow passengers to stay in the

vehicle while it is on the jack.

●Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off

the ground. It may cause the vehicle to

move.

LCE2106

6-8 In case of emergency

Always refer to the proper illustrations for the

correct placement and jack-up points for your

specific vehicle model and jack type.

Carefully read the caution label attached to

the jack body and the following instruc-

tions.

1. Loosen each wheel nut 1 or 2 turns by

turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut

wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts

until the tire is off the ground.

2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up

point as illustrated so the top of the jack

contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.

Align the jack head between the 2 notches in

the front or the rear as shown. Also fit the

groove of the jack head between the

notches as shown.

The jack should be used on firm and

level ground.

3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever

and rod with both hands. Carefully raise the

vehicle until the tire clears the ground. Re-

move the wheel nuts, and then remove the

tire.

Installing the spare tire (if so

equipped)

The spare tire is designed for emergency

use. For additional information, refer to

“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be-

tween the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten

the wheel nuts finger tight.

SCE0002 WCE0056

In case of emergency 6-9

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel

nuts alternately and evenly in the sequence

illustrated until they are tight (䊊

A,䊊

B,䊊

C,䊊

䊊

E).

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire

touches the ground. Then, with the wheel

nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely

in the sequence illustrated (䊊

A,䊊

B,䊊

C,䊊

䊊

E). Lower the vehicle completely.

5. Securely store the jacking equipment in the

vehicle. When storing the tool kit, it is re-

quested to tighten the bag securely with the

attached band to prevent movement of the

tools, otherwise noise may occur.

WARNING

●Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly

tightened wheel nuts can cause the

wheel to become loose or come off.

This could cause an accident.

●Do not use oil or grease on the wheel

studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts

to become loose.

●Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve-

hicle has been driven for 600 miles

(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,

etc.).

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts

to the specified torque with a torque

wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

83 ft-lb (113 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to

specification at all times. It is recom-

mended that wheel nuts be tightened to

specifications at each lubrication interval.

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.

COLD pressure: After vehicle has been

parked for 3 hours or more or driven less

than 1 mile (1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on the tire

and loading information label affixed to the

driver side center pillar.

To start your engine with a booster battery, the

instructions and precautions below must be fol-

lowed.

WARNING

●If done incorrectly, jump starting can

lead to a battery explosion, resulting in

severe injury or death. It could also

damage your vehicle.

●Explosive hydrogen gas is always pres-

ent in the vicinity of the battery. Keep all

sparks and flames away from the

battery.

●Do not allow battery fluid to come into

contact with eyes, skin, clothing or

painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor-

rosive sulfuric acid solution which can

cause severe burns. If the fluid should

come into contact with anything, imme-

diately flush the contacted area with

water.

●Keep battery out of the reach of

children.

●The booster battery must be rated at

12 volts. Use of an improperly rated

battery can damage your vehicle.

JUMP STARTING

6-10 In case of emergency

●Whenever working on or near a battery,

always wear suitable eye protectors (for

example, goggles or industrial safety

spectacles) and remove rings, metal

bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean

over the battery when jump starting.

●Do not attempt to jump start a frozen

battery. It could explode and cause se-

rious injury.

●Your vehicle has an automatic engine

cooling fan. It could come on at any

time. Keep hands and other objects

away from it.

WARNING

Always follow the instructions below. Fail-

ure to do so could result in damage to the

charging system and cause personal

injury.

1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle,

position the two vehicles to bring their bat-

teries near each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever

to P (Park). Switch off all unnecessary elec-

trical systems (lights, heater, air conditioner,

etc.).

3. Ensure the vent caps are level and tight.

4. Connect the jumper cables in the sequence

illustrated (䊊

A,䊊

B,䊊

C,䊊

D).

CAUTION

●Always connect positive (⫹) to positive

(⫹) and negative (⫺) to body ground (for

example, strut mounting bolt, engine

lift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.

●Make sure the jumper cables do not

touch moving parts in the engine com-

partment and that the cable clamps do

not contact any other metal.

LCE2223

In case of emergency 6-11

5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and

let it run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the booster ve-

hicle at about 2,000 rpm and start the en-

gine of the vehicle being jump started.

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged for

more than 10 seconds. If the engine does

not start right away, place the ignition

switch in the OFF position and wait 3 to

4 seconds before trying again.

7. After starting the engine, carefully discon-

nect the negative cable and then the positive

cable.

CAUTION

●CVT models cannot be push-started or

tow-started. Attempting to do so may

cause transmission damage.

●Do not push start this vehicle. The

three-way catalyst may be damaged.

WARNING

●Do not continue to drive if your vehicle

overheats. Doing so could cause engine

damage or a vehicle fire.

●To avoid the danger of being scalded,

never remove the radiator or coolant

reservoir cap while the engine is still

hot. When the radiator or coolant reser-

voir cap is removed, pressurized hot

water will spurt out, possibly causing

serious injury.

●Do not open the hood if steam is com-

ing out.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an

extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if

you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal

noise, etc. take the following steps:

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply

the parking brake and move the shift lever to

P (Park).

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the

windows, move the heater or air conditioner

temperature control to maximum hot and fan

control to high speed.

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

6-12 In case of emergency

3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for

steam or coolant escaping from the radiator

before opening the hood. If steam or coolant

is escaping, turn off the engine. Do not open

the hood further until no steam or coolant

can be seen.

4. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the en-

gine, stand clear to prevent getting

burned.

5. Visually check drive belts for damage or

looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is

running. The radiator hoses and radiator

should not leak water. If coolant is leaking,

the water pump belt is missing or loose, or

the cooling fan does not run, stop the en-

gine.

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,

jewelry or clothing to come into contact

with, or get caught in, engine belts or the

engine cooling fan. The engine cooling fan

can start at any time.

6. After the engine cools down, check the cool-

ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank

with the engine running. Add coolant to the

engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary.

Have your vehicle repaired. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

When towing your vehicle, all jurisdictional and

local regulations for towing must be followed.

Incorrect towing equipment could damage your

vehicle. Towing instructions are available from a

NISSAN dealer. Local service operators are gen-

erally familiar with the applicable laws and proce-

dures for towing. To assure proper towing and to

prevent accidental damage to your vehicle,

NISSAN recommends having a service operator

tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have the ser-

vice operator carefully read the following precau-

tions:

WARNING

●Never ride in a vehicle that is being

towed.

●Never get under your vehicle after it has

been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

●When towing, make sure that the trans-

mission, axles, steering system and

powertrain are in working condition. If

any of these conditions apply, dollies or

a flatbed tow truck must be used.

●Always attach safety chains before

towing.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

In case of emergency 6-13

For additional information about towing your ve-

hicle behind a Recreational Vehicle (RV), refer to

“Flat towing for All-Wheel drive vehicle” or “Flat

towing for front wheel drive vehicle” in the “Tech-

nical and consumer information” section of this

manual.

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY

NISSAN

NISSAN recommends towing your vehicle based

upon the type of drivetrain. Please refer to the

diagrams in this section to ensure that your ve-

hicle is properly towed.

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models

NISSAN recommends that towing dollies be

used when towing your vehicle or the vehicle be

placed on a flatbed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

DO NOT tow AWD models with any of the

wheels on the ground as this may cause

serious and expensive damage to the

powertrain.

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models

LCE2238

6-14 In case of emergency

Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) models

NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed

with the driving wheels (front) off the ground or

place the vehicle on a flatbed truck as illustrated.

WARNING

●Never tow your vehicle with the front

wheels on the ground or four wheels on

the ground (forward or backward), as

this may cause serious and expensive

damage to the transmission. If it is nec-

essary to tow the vehicle with the rear

wheels raised always use towing dollies

under the front wheels.

●When towing with the rear wheels on

the ground or on towing dollies, place

the ignition switch in the ON position,

and secure the steering wheel in the

straight-ahead position with a rope or

similar device.

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck

vehicle)

WARNING

To avoid vehicle damage, serious personal

injury or death when recovering a stuck

vehicle:

●Contact a professional towing service

to recover the vehicle if you have any

questions regarding the recovery

procedure.

●Tow chains or cables must be attached

only to main structural members of the

vehicle.

●Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to tow

or free a stuck vehicle.

●Only use devices specifically designed

for vehicle recovery and follow the

manufacturer’s instructions.

Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) models

LCE2239

In case of emergency 6-15

●Always pull the recovery device straight

out from the front of the vehicle. Never

pull at an angle.

●Route recovery devices so they do not

touch any part of the vehicle except the

attachment point.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,

use a tow strap or other device designed specifi-

cally for vehicle recovery. Always follow the

manufacturer’s instructions for the recovery de-

vice.

Rocking a stuck vehicle

WARNING

●Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

●Do not spin your tires at high speed.

This could cause them to explode and

result in serious injury. Parts of your

vehicle could also overheat and be

damaged.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,

use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

system.

2. Make sure the area in front and behind the

vehicle is clear of obstructions.

3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear

an area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-

ward.

●Shift back and forth between R (Reverse)

and D (Drive).

●Apply the accelerator as little as possible

to maintain the rocking motion.

●Release the accelerator pedal before

shifting between R (Reverse) and D

(Drive).

●Do not spin the tires above 35 mph

(55 km/h).

5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few

tries, contact a professional towing service

to remove the vehicle.

6-16 In case of emergency

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior ..................................7-2

Washing ......................................7-2

Waxing ........................................7-2

Removing spots ................................7-3

Underbody ....................................7-3

Glass .........................................7-3

Aluminum alloy wheels (if so equipped) ...........7-3

Chrome parts ..................................7-3

Tire dressings ..................................7-3

Cleaning interior...................................7-4

Air fresheners ..................................7-4

Floor mats . . ...................................7-5

Seat belts .....................................7-6

Cleaning the seat tracks.........................7-6

Corrosion protection ...............................7-7

Most common factors contributing to vehicle

corrosion ......................................7-7

Environmental factors influence the rate of

corrosion ......................................7-7

Protect your vehicle from corrosion...............7-7

In order to maintain the appearance of your ve-

hicle, it is important to take proper care of it.

To protect the paint surfaces, please wash your

vehicle as soon as you can:

●After a rainfall to prevent possible damage

from acid rain.

●After driving on coastal roads.

●When contaminants such as soot, bird drop-

pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get

on the paint surface.

●When dust or mud builds up on the surface.

Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle

inside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in a

shady area or protect the vehicle with a body

cover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint surface

when putting on or removing the body

cover.

WASHING

Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of

water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild

soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose

dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm

(never hot) water.

CAUTION

●Do not use car washes that use acid in

the detergent. Some car washes, espe-

cially brushless ones, use some acid for

cleaning. The acid may react with some

plastic vehicle components, causing

them to crack. This could affect their

appearance, and also could cause them

not to function properly. Always check

with your car wash to confirm that acid

is not used.

●Do not wash the vehicle with strong

household soap, strong chemical deter-

gents, gasoline or solvents.

●Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-

light or while the vehicle body is hot, as

the surface may become water-spotted.

●Avoid using tight-napped or rough

cloths, such as washing mitts. Care

must be taken when removing

caked-on dirt or other foreign sub-

stances so the paint surface is not

scratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean

water.

Inside edges, seams and folds on the doors,

hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to

the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas

must be cleaned regularly. Take care that the

drain holes in the lower edge of the door are

open. Spray water under the body and in the

wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away

road salt.

A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to

avoid water spots.

WAXING

Regular waxing protects the paint surface and

helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is

recommended to remove built-up wax residue

and to avoid a weathered appearance before

re-applying wax.

A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the

proper product.

●Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash-

ing. Follow the instructions supplied with the

wax.

●Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,

cutting compounds or cleaners that may

damage the vehicle finish.

Machine compounding or aggressive polishing

on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the

finish or leave swirl marks.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care

REMOVING SPOTS

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,

and tree sap as quickly as possible from the

surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or

staining. Special cleaning products are available

at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory

store. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for these products.

UNDERBODY

In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is

necessary to clean the underbody regularly in

order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and

causing the acceleration of corrosion on the un-

derbody and suspension. Before the winter pe-

riod and again in the spring, the underseal must

be checked and, if necessary, re-treated.

GLASS

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film

from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to

become coated with a film after the vehicle is

parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft

cloth will easily remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the windows,

do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive

cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant

cleaners. They could damage the electrical

conductors, radio antenna elements or

rear window defroster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS (if so

equipped)

Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge damp-

ened in a mild soap solution, especially during

winter months in areas where road salt is used. If

not removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoid

staining or discoloring the wheels:

●

Do not use a cleaner that uses strong acid

or alkali contents to clean the wheels.

●Do not apply wheel cleaners to the

wheels when they are hot. The wheel

temperature should be the same as am-

bient temperature.

●Rinse the wheel to completely remove

the cleaner within 15 minutes after the

cleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTS

Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non-

abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

TIRE DRESSINGS

NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire

dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to

the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub-

ber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may

react with the coating and form a compound. This

compound may come off the tire while driving and

stain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the

following precautions:

●Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat-

ing on the tire dissolves more easily than

with an oil-based tire dressing.

●Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help

prevent it from entering the tire

tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to

remove).

●Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry

towel. Make sure the tire dressing is com-

pletely removed from the tire tread/grooves.

●Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-

mended by the tire dressing manufacturer.

Appearance and care 7-3

Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior

trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum

cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and

leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth damp-

ened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a

dry, soft cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required in order to

maintain the appearance of the leather.

Before using any fabric protector, read the manu-

facturer’s recommendations. Some fabric pro-

tectors contain chemicals that may stain or

bleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean

the meter and gauge lens.

WARNING

Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot

steam cleaners) on the seat. This can dam-

age the seat or occupant classification

sensor. This can also affect the operation

of the air bag system and result in serious

personal injury.

CAUTION

●Never use benzine, thinner or any simi-

lar material.

●Small dirt particles can be abrasive and

damaging to leather surfaces and

should be removed promptly. Do not

use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes,

oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-

gents or ammonia-based cleaners as

they may damage the leather’s natural

finish.

●Never use fabric protectors unless rec-

ommended by the manufacturer.

●Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on

meter or gauge lens covers. It may dam-

age the lens cover.

AIR FRESHENERS

Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect

the vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener,

take the following precautions:

●Hanging-type air fresheners can cause per-

manent discoloration when they contact ve-

hicle interior surfaces. Place the air fresh-

ener in a location that allows it to hang free

and not contact an interior surface.

●Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on

the vents. These products can cause imme-

diate damage and discoloration when

spilled on interior surfaces.

Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s in-

structions before using the air fresheners.

CLEANING INTERIOR

7-4 Appearance and care

FLOOR MATS

WARNING

To avoid potential pedal interference that

may result in a collision, injury or death:

●NEVER place a floor mat on top of an-

other floor mat in the driver front posi-

tion or install them upside down or

backwards.

●Use only Genuine NISSAN floor mats, or

equivalent floor mats, that are specifi-

cally designed for use in your vehicle

model and model year.

●Properly position the mats in the floor-

well using the floor mat positioning

hook. For additional information, refer

to ⴖFloor mat installationⴖin this

section.

●Make sure the floor mat does not inter-

fere with pedal operation.

●Periodically check the floor mats to

make sure they are properly installed.

●After cleaning the vehicle interior,

check the floor mats to make sure they

are properly installed.

The use of Genuine NISSAN floor mats can

extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it

easier to clean the interior. Mats should be main-

tained with regular cleaning and replaced if they

become excessively worn.

Floor mat installation

Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat position-

ing hook(s). The number and shape of the floor

mat positioning hooks for each seating position

varies depending on the vehicle.

When installing Genuine NISSAN floor mats,

follow the installation instructions provided with

the mat and the following:

LAI2007

Appearance and care 7-5

1. Position the floor mat in the floorwell so that

the floor mat grommet holes are aligned with

the hook(s).

2. Secure the grommet holes into the hook(s)

and ensure that the floor mat is properly

positioned.

3. Make sure the floor mat does not interfere

with pedal operation. With the ignition in the

OFF position, the selector lever in the P

(Park) position (Automatic Transmission

models) or the shift lever in the N (Neutral)

position (Manual Transmission models) fully

apply and release all pedals. The floor mat

must not interfere with pedal operation or

prevent the pedal from returning to its nor-

mal position.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for details about installing the floor mats in your

vehicle.

The illustration shows the location of the floor mat

positioning hooks.

SEAT BELTS

The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them

with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.

Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade

before using them. For additional information,

refer to “Seat belt maintenance” in the “Safety-

–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint

system” section of this manual.

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the

retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or

chemical solvents to clean the seat belts,

since these materials may severely

weaken the seat belt webbing.

CLEANING THE SEAT TRACKS

CAUTION

Periodically clean the seat tracks to pre-

vent reduction of ability to move the seats.

Clean periodically with a high-powered vacuum

cleaner. Dirt and debris may reduce the ability to

adjust the seat. A wet cleansing agent may be

used if necessary.

Positioning hooks

LAI2046

7-6 Appearance and care

MOST COMMON FACTORS

CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE

CORROSION

Most vehicle corrosion is caused by:

●The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt

and debris in body panel sections, cavities,

and other areas.

●Damage to paint and other protective coat-

ings caused by gravel and stone chips or

minor traffic collisions.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS

INFLUENCE THE RATE OF

CORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the ve-

hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion.

Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside

the vehicle and should be removed for drying to

avoid floor panel corrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high

relative humidity, especially those areas where

the temperatures stay above freezing and where

atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is

used.

Temperature

High temperatures accelerate the rate of corro-

sion to those parts which are not well ventilated.

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air

in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use acceler-

ates the corrosion process. Road salt also accel-

erates the disintegration of paint surfaces.

PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM

CORROSION

●Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the

vehicle clean.

●Always check for minor damage to the paint

and repair it as soon as possible.

●Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors

open to avoid water accumulation.

●Check the underbody for accumulation of

sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water

as soon as possible.

CAUTION

●NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-

bris from the passenger compartment

by washing it out with a hose. Remove

dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.

●Never allow water or other liquids to

come in contact with electronic compo-

nents inside the vehicle as this may

damage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are

extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion

and deterioration of underbody components

such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,

brake cables, floor pan and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be cleaned

periodically.

For additional protection against rust and corro-

sion, which may be required in some areas, it is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

CORROSION PROTECTION

Appearance and care 7-7

MEMO

7-8 Appearance and care

8 Do-it-yourself

Maintenance precautions ...........................8-2

Engine compartment check locations ................8-3

Engine cooling system .............................8-4

Checking engine coolant level ...................8-5

Changing engine coolant ........................8-5

Engine oil.........................................8-6

Checking engine oil level ........................8-6

Changing engine oil ............................8-7

Changing engine oil filter ........................8-8

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid .......8-9

Brake fluid ........................................8-9

Windshield-washer fluid...........................8-10

Windshield-washer fluid reservoir ...............8-10

Battery ..........................................8-10

Jump starting .................................8-12

Variable voltage control system.....................8-13

Drive belt ........................................8-13

Spark plugs......................................8-14

Replacing spark plugs .........................8-14

Air cleaner .......................................8-15

In-cabin microfilter (if so equipped) ..............8-15

Windshield wiper blades ..........................8-16

Cleaning .....................................8-16

Replacing ....................................8-16

Brakes ..........................................8-18

Fuses ...........................................8-19

Engine compartment...........................8-19

Passenger compartment .......................8-20

Battery replacement ..............................8-21

Key fob (if so equipped) ........................8-21

NISSAN jackknife key (if so equipped) ...........8-23

NISSAN Intelligent Key® (if so equipped) ........8-24

Lights ...........................................8-26

Headlights....................................8-26

Fog lights (if so equipped) ......................8-26

Exterior and interior lights.......................8-27

Wheels and tires .................................8-29

Tire pressure..................................8-29

Tire labeling...................................8-33

Types of tires..................................8-35

Tire chains....................................8-37

Changing wheels and tires .....................8-38

When performing any inspection or maintenance

work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent

serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to

the vehicle. The following are general precau-

tions which should be closely observed.

WARNING

●Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-

ply the parking brake securely and

block the wheels to prevent the vehicle

from moving. Move the shift lever to P

(Park).

●Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF

or LOCK position when performing any

parts replacement or repairs.

●If you must work with the engine run-

ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair

and tools away from moving fans, belts

and any other moving parts.

●It is advisable to secure or remove any

loose clothing and remove any jewelry,

such as rings, watches, etc. before

working on your vehicle.

●Always wear eye protection whenever

you work on your vehicle.

●Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-

matic engine cooling fan. It may come

on at any time without warning, even if

the ignition switch is in the OFF posi-

tion and the engine is not running. To

avoid injury, always disconnect the

negative battery cable before working

near the fan.

●If you must run the engine in an en-

closed space such as a garage, be sure

there is proper ventilation for exhaust

gases to escape.

●Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by a jack. If it is neces-

sary to work under the vehicle, support

it with safety stands.

●Keep smoking materials, flame and

sparks away from the fuel tank and

battery.

●Because the fuel lines on gasoline en-

gine models are under high pressure

even when the engine is off, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for service of the fuel filter or fuel lines.

CAUTION

●Do not work under the hood while the

engine is hot. Turn the engine off and

wait until it cools down.

●Avoid contact with used engine oil and

coolant. Improperly disposed engine

oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle

fluids can damage the environment. Al-

ways conform to local regulations for

disposal of vehicle fluid.

●Never leave the engine or Continuously

Variable Transmission (CVT) related

component harnesses disconnected

while the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

●Never connect or disconnect the battery

or any transistorized component while

the ignition switch is in the ON position.

This “ Do-it-yourself” section gives instructions

regarding only those items which are relatively

easy for an owner to perform.

You should be aware that incomplete or improper

servicing may result in operating difficulties or

excessive emissions, and could affect warranty

coverage. If in doubt about any servicing, it

is recommended that you have it done by a

NISSAN dealer.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

8-2 Do-it-yourself

QR25DE engine

1. Engine coolant reservoir

2. Engine oil filler cap

3. Brake fluid reservoir

4. Battery

5. Air cleaner

6. Fuse/Fusible link box

7. Radiator cap

8. Engine oil dipstick

9. Drive belt location

10. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

* Engine cover removed for clarity.

LDI2809

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS

Do-it-yourself 8-3

The engine cooling system is filled at the factory

with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% Genuine

NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and

50% water to provide year-round antifreeze and

coolant protection. The antifreeze solution con-

tains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional en-

gine cooling system additives are not necessary.

WARNING

●Never remove the radiator or coolant

reservoir cap when the engine is hot.

Wait until the engine and radiator cool

down. Serious burns could be caused

by high pressure fluid escaping from

the radiator. For additional information

on precautions, refer to “If your vehicle

overheats” in the “In case of emer-

gency” section of this manual.

●The radiator is equipped with a pres-

sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-

gine damage, use only a Genuine

NISSAN radiator cap.

CAUTION

●Never use any cooling system additives

such as radiator sealer. Additives may

clog the cooling system and cause dam-

age to the engine, transmission and/or

cooling system.

●When adding or replacing coolant, be

sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long

Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or

equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-diluted

to provide antifreeze protection to -34°

F (-37° C). If additional freeze protection

is needed due to weather where you

operate your vehicle, add Genuine

NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant

(blue) concentrate following the direc-

tions on the container. If an equivalent

coolant other than Genuine NISSAN

Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is

used, follow the coolant manufacturer’s

instructions to maintain minimum anti-

freeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). The

use of other types of coolant solutions

other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent

may damage the engine cooling

system.

●The life expectancy of the factory-fill

coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or

7 years. Mixing any other type of cool-

ant other than Genuine NISSAN Long

Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue), includ-

ing Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use

of non-distilled water will reduce the

life expectancy of the factory-fill cool-

ant. For additional information, refer to

the ⴖMaintenance and schedulesⴖsec-

tion of this manual.

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

8-4 Do-it-yourself

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT

LEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoir when

the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below

the MIN level 䊊

B, add coolant to the MAX level

䊊

A. If the reservoir is empty, check the coolant

level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If

there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the

radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and

also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX level 䊊

This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life expectancy of

the factory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles

(168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of

coolant or the use of non-distilled water will re-

duce the life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant.

For additional information, refer to the ⬙Mainte-

nance and schedules⬙section of this manual.

If the cooling system frequently requires

coolant, have it checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

For additional information on the location of the

engine coolant reservoir, refer to “Engine com-

partment check locations” in this section.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant.

The service procedure can be found in the

NISSAN Service Manual.

Improper servicing can result in reduced

heater performance and engine overheat-

ing.

WARNING

●To avoid the danger of being scalded,

never change the coolant when the en-

gine is hot.

●Never remove the radiator or engine

coolant reservoir cap when the engine

is hot. Serious burns could be caused by

high pressure fluid escaping from the

radiator.

●Avoid direct skin contact with used

coolant. If skin contact is made, wash

thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as

soon as possible.

●Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-

dren and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.

Check your local regulations.

LDI2810

Do-it-yourself 8-5

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches

operating temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than

10 minutes for the oil to drain back into

the oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Re-

insert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil

level. It should be between the H (High) and

L (Low) marks 䊊

B. This is the normal oper-

ating oil level range. If the oil level is below

the L (Low) mark 䊊

A, remove the oil filler cap

and pour recommended oil through the

opening. Do not overfill 䊊

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oil

maintenance intervals or during the

break-in period, depending on the severity

of operating conditions.

CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly. Op-

erating the engine with an insufficient

amount of oil can damage the engine, and

such damage is not covered by warranty.

LDI2811 LDI2812

ENGINE OIL

8-6 Do-it-yourself

CHANGING ENGINE OIL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches

operating temperature, then turn it off.

3. Remove the oil filler cap 䊊

Aby turning it

counterclockwise.

4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug

䊊

5. Remove the drain plug 䊊

Bwith a wrench by

turning it counterclockwise and completely

drain the oil.

If the oil filter is to be changed, remove and

replace it at this time. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Changing engine oil filter” in

this section.

●Waste oil must be disposed of prop-

erly.

●Check your local regulations.

WARNING

●Prolonged and repeated contact with

used engine oil may cause skin cancer.

●Try to avoid direct skin contact with

used oil. If skin contact is made, wash

thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as

soon as possible.

●Keep used engine oil out of reach of

children.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine

oil may be hot.

6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new

washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with

a wrench. Do not use excessive force.

Drain plug tightening torque:

25 ft-lb (34 N·m)

7. Refill engine with recommended oil through

the oil filler opening, then install the oil filler

cap securely.

For additional information on drain and refill

capacity, refer to “Recommended

fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the

“Technical and consumer information” sec-

tion of this manual.

The drain and refill capacity depends on the

oil temperature and drain time. Use these

specifications for reference only. Always use

the dipstick to determine when the proper

amount of oil is in the engine.

8. Start the engine. Check for leakage around

the drain plug and oil filter. Correct as re-

quired.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than

10 minutes. Check the oil level with the

dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.

LDI2813

Do-it-yourself 8-7

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Turn the engine off.

3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter 䊊

4. Remove pins 䊊

Afrom the right engine pro-

tector located inside right wheel well, re-

move protector. Remove oil filter 䊊

Bwith an

oil filter wrench by turning it counterclock-

wise. Then remove the oil filter by turning it

by hand.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine

oil may be hot.

5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface with

a clean rag.

CAUTION

●Be sure to remove any old gasket

material remaining on the sealing

surface of the engine. Failure to do

so could lead to an oil leak and en-

gine damage.

●The dipstick must be inserted in

place to prevent oil spillage from the

dipstick hole when filling the engine

with oil.

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean

engine oil.

7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance

is felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.

8. Start the engine and check for leakage

around the oil filter. Correct as required.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than

10 minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine

oil if necessary.

LDI2814

8-8 Do-it-yourself

CAUTION

●NISSAN recommends using Genuine

NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or equivalent)

ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with

other fluids.

●Do not use Automatic Transmission

Fluid (ATF) or Manual transmission

fluid in a NISSAN CVT, as it may damage

the CVT. Damage caused by the use of

fluids other than as recommended is

not covered under NISSAN’s New Ve-

hicle Limited Warranty.

●Using fluids that are not equivalent to

Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 may

also damage the CVT. Damage caused

by the use of fluids other than as recom-

mended is not covered under NISSAN’s

New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

When checking or replacement of CVT fluid is

required, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING

●Use only new fluid from a sealed con-

tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated

fluid may damage the brake system.

The use of improper fluids can damage

the brake system and affect the vehi-

cle’s stopping ability.

●Clean the filler cap before removing.

●Brake fluid is poisonous and should be

stored carefully in marked containers

out of reach of children.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-

faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is

spilled, immediately wash the surface with

water.

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the brake

fluid is below the MIN line 䊊

B, the brake warning

light will illuminate. Add brake fluid up to the MAX

line 䊊

A. For additional information on brake fluid

type, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants

and capacities” in the “Technical and consumer

information” section of this manual.

If the brake fluid must be added frequently, the

brake system should be thoroughly checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

LDI2815

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE

TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID

BRAKE FLUID

Do-it-yourself 8-9

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

RESERVOIR

Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir periodi-

cally. Add windshield-washer fluid when the low

windshield-washer fluid warning light comes on.

To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir, lift

the cap off the reservoir and pour the windshield-

washer fluid into the reservoir opening.

Add a washer solvent to the washer for better

cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield-

washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s in-

structions for the mixture ratio.

Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving

conditions require an increased amount of

windshield-washer fluid.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind-

shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-

freeze or equivalent.

CAUTION

●Do not substitute engine antifreeze

coolant for windshield-washer fluid.

This may result in damage to the paint.

●Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid

reservoir with washer fluid concen-

trates at full strength. Some methyl al-

cohol based washer fluid concentrates

may permanently stain the grille if

spilled while filling the windshield-

washer reservoir.

●Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with

water to the manufacturer’s recom-

mended levels before pouring the fluid

into the windshield-washer fluid reser-

voir. Do not use the windshield-washer

fluid reservoir to mix the washer fluid

concentrate and water.

●Keep the battery surface clean and dry.

Clean the battery with a solution of baking

soda and water.

●Make certain the terminal connections are

clean and securely tightened.

●If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or

longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery

terminal cable to prevent discharge.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery discharge

and potential no-start conditions such as:

1. Installation or extended use of electronic

accessories that consume battery power

when the engine is not running (Phone char-

gers, GPS, DVD players, etc.)

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only

driven short distances. In these cases, the

battery may need to be charged to maintain

battery health.

LDI2816

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID BATTERY

8-10 Do-it-yourself

WARNING

●Do not expose the battery to flames, an

electrical spark or a cigarette. Hydrogen

gas generated by the battery is explo-

sive. Explosive gases can cause blind-

ness or injury. Do not allow battery fluid

to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics or

painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can

cause blindness or injury. After touch-

ing a battery or battery cap, do not

touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly

wash your hands. If the acid contacts

your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately

flush with water for at least 15 minutes

and seek medical attention.

●Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in

the battery is low. Low battery fluid can

cause a higher load on the battery

which can generate heat, reduce battery

life, and in some cases lead to an

explosion.

●When working on or near a battery, al-

ways wear suitable eye protection and

remove all jewelry.

●Battery posts, terminals and related ac-

cessories contain lead and lead com-

pounds. Wash hands after handling.

●Keep battery out of the reach of

children.

●Do not tip the battery. Keep the vent

caps tight and the battery level.

1. Remove the vent caps with a screwdriver as

shown. Use a cloth to protect the battery

case.

Battery (Type A) (if so equipped)

WDI0224

Do-it-yourself 8-11

2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is

necessary to add fluid, add only distilled

water to bring the level up to the bottom of

the filler opening. Do not overfill. Reinstall

the vent caps.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under

severe conditions require frequent checks of the

battery fluid level.

NOTE:

Do not try to open the top of the battery.

The Type B battery is not equipped with remov-

able vent caps.

JUMP STARTING

If jump starting is necessary, refer to “Jump start-

ing” in the “In case of emergency” section of this

manual. If the engine does not start by jump

starting, the battery may have to be replaced. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

LDI0302

Battery (Type B) (if so equipped)

LDI2817

8-12 Do-it-yourself

CAUTION

●Do not ground accessories directly to

the battery terminal. Doing so will by-

pass the variable voltage control sys-

tem and the vehicle battery may not

charge completely.

●Use electrical accessories with the en-

gine running to avoid discharging the

vehicle battery.

Your vehicle is equipped with a variable voltage

control system. This system measures the

amount of electrical discharge from the battery

and controls voltage generated by the generator.

The current sensor is located near the battery

along the negative battery cable. If you add elec-

trical accessories to your vehicle, be sure to

ground them to a suitable body ground such as

the frame or engine block area.

1. Crankshaft pulley

2. Drive belt automatic tensioner pulley

3. Water pump pulley

4. Generator pulley

5. Air conditioner compressor pulley

WARNING

Be sure the ignition switch is placed in the

OFF or LOCK position before servicing

drive belt. The engine could rotate

unexpectedly.

LDI2132

QR25DE engine

LDI2130

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL

SYSTEM

DRIVE BELT

Do-it-yourself 8-13

1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual

wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is

in poor condition or is loose, have it replaced

or adjusted. It is recommended that you visit

a NISSAN dealer for this service.

2. Have the belt checked regularly for condi-

tion and tension in accordance with the

maintenance schedule found in the ⬙Mainte-

nance and schedules⬙section of this

manual.

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

Iridium-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace iridium-tipped 䊊

spark plugs as frequently as conventional type

spark plugs because they last much longer. Fol-

low the maintenance log shown in the ⬙Mainte-

nance and schedules⬙section of this manual. Do

not service iridium-tipped spark plugs by clean-

ing or regapping.

●Always replace spark plugs with rec-

ommended or equivalent ones.

WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch are

off and that the parking brake is engaged

securely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to re-

move the spark plugs. An incorrect socket

can damage the spark plugs.

If replacement is required, it is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

SDI1895

SPARK PLUGS

8-14 Do-it-yourself

The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and

reused. Replace it according to the maintenance

log shown in the ⬙Maintenance and schedules⬙

section of this manual.

To remove the air cleaner filter:

1. Push the retaining clips 䊊

Aand pull air

cleaner duct 䊊

Bstraight up to remove.

2. Unlatch the retaining clips 䊊

Cand move air

cleaner cover 䊊

Dforward.

3. Remove air cleaner filter.

Follow the removal instruction in reverse order to

install air cleaner filter, air cleaner cover and air

cleaner duct.

NOTE:

After installing a new air cleaner, make

sure the air cleaner cover and air cleaner

duct are seated correctly and all the retain-

ing clips are latched.

WARNING

●Operating the engine with the air

cleaner removed can cause you or oth-

ers to be burned. The air cleaner not

only cleans the air, it stops the flame if

the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and

the engine backfires, you could be

burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner

removed, and be careful when working

on the engine with the air cleaner

removed.

●Never pour fuel into the throttle body or

attempt to start the engine with the air

cleaner removed. Doing so could result

in serious injury.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER (if so

equipped)

The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air-

borne dust and pollen particles and reduces

some objectionable outside odors. The filter is

located behind the glove box. For additional in-

LDI2818 LDI2819

AIR CLEANER

Do-it-yourself 8-15

formation, refer to the ⬙Maintenance and Sched-

ules⬙section of this manual for change intervals.

If replacement is required, it is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

CLEANING

If your windshield is not clear after using the

windshield-washer or if a wiper blade chatters

when running, wax or other material may be on

the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer

solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is

clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear

water.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked

in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then

rinse the blades with clear water. If your wind-

shield is still not clear after cleaning the blades

and using the wiper, replace the blades.

CAUTION

Worn windshield wiper blades can dam-

age the windshield and impair driver

vision.

REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

To replace the windshield wiper blades, follow

the procedure below:

1. When ignition switch is ON or within

60 seconds after placing the ignition switch

from the ON to OFF position, place the

windshield wiper and washer lever into the

OFF position.

2. Rapidly lift the windshield wiper and washer

lever 䊊

Aupwards twice within 0.5 seconds.

This action will cause the wipers to auto-

matically take the service position.

LDI2476

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

8-16 Do-it-yourself

3. Once the wipers are in the service position,

push the release tab 䊊

4. Move the wiper blade down 䊊

Band remove.

5. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper

arm until it clicks into place.

6. Rotate the wiper blade so the dimple is in the

groove.

7. Finally, lift the windshield wiper and washer

lever to the mist position 䊊

Donce and re-

lease. This action will cause the wipers to

resume the set position.

CAUTION

●After wiper blade replacement, return

the wiper arm to its original position;

otherwise it may be damaged when the

hood is opened.

●Make sure the wiper blades contact the

glass; otherwise the arms may be dam-

aged from wind pressure.

If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not

to let wax get into the washer nozzle 䊊

F. This may

cause clogging or improper windshield-washer

operation. If wax gets into the nozzle, remove it

with a needle or small pin 䊊

LDI2785 LDI2477

LDI2820

Do-it-yourself 8-17

Rear window wiper blade

If checking or replacement is required, it is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

If the brakes do not operate properly, have the

brakes checked. It is recommended that you visit

a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Self-adjusting brakes

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting

brakes.

The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjust

every time the brake pedal is applied.

WARNING

Have your brake system checked if the

brake pedal height does not return to nor-

mal. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

Brake pad wear indicators

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible

wear indicators. When a brake pad requires re-

placement, a high pitched scraping or screech-

ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is in

motion. The noise will be heard whether or not the

brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes

checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator

sound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions, occa-

sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may

be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to

moderate stops is normal and does not affect the

function or performance of the brake system.

Proper brake inspection intervals should

be followed. For additional information regard-

ing brake inspections, refer to the appropriate

maintenance schedule information in the ⬙Main-

tenance and Schedules⬙section of this manual.

BRAKES

8-18 Do-it-yourself

Two types of fuses are used. Type 䊊

Ais used in

the fuse boxes in the engine compartment. Type

䊊

Bis used in the passenger compartment fuse

box.

Type 䊊

Afuses are provided as spare fuses. They

are stored in the passenger compartment fuse

box.

Type 䊊

Afuses can be installed in the engine

compartment and passenger compartment fuse

boxes.

If a type 䊊

Afuse is used to replace a type 䊊

Bfuse,

the type 䊊

Afuse will not be level with the fuse

pocket as shown in the illustration. This will not

affect the performance of the fuse. Make sure the

fuse is installed in the fuse box securely.

Type 䊊

Bfuses cannot be installed in the under-

hood fuse boxes. Only use type 䊊

Afuses in the

underhood fuse boxes.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

WARNING

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower

amperage rating than specified on the

fuse box cover. This could damage the

electrical system or electronic control

units or cause a fire

If any electrical equipment does not come on,

check for an open fuse.

For checking and replacing fuses, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

LDI0455 LDI0457 LDI2840

FUSES

Do-it-yourself 8-19

Fusible links

If the electrical equipment does not operate and

fuses are in good condition, check the fusible

links. If any of these fusible links are melted,

replace with only Genuine NISSAN parts.

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

WARNING

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower

amperage rating than specified on the

fuse box cover. This could damage the

electrical system or electronic control

units or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate,

check for an open fuse.

NOTE:

The fuse box is located on the driver’s side

of the instrument panel.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight

switch are OFF.

2. Remove the fuse box cover with a suitable

tool. Use a cloth to avoid damaging the trim.

3. Locate the fuse that needs to be replaced.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller 䊊

LDI2821

8-20 Do-it-yourself

5. If the fuse is open 䊊

B, replace it with an

equivalent good fuse 䊊

6. Push the fuse box cover to install.

If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical

system checked and repaired, It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

CAUTION

Be careful not to allow children to swallow

the battery or removed parts.

KEY FOB (if so equipped)

Replace the battery in the key fob as follows:

1. Remove the screw 䊊

LDI2760

LDI2219

BATTERY REPLACEMENT

Do-it-yourself 8-21

2. Insert a small screwdriver into the slit of the

corner 䊊

Band twist it to separate the upper

part from the lower part. Use a cloth to

protect the casing.

3. Replace the battery with a new one.

●Do not touch the internal circuit and elec-

tric terminals as doing so could cause a

malfunction.

●Make sure that the + side faces the bot-

tom of the case 䊊

Recommended battery: CR1620 or equivalent.

4. Close the lid and install the screw securely.

5. Operate the buttons to check its operation.

If you need assistance with replacement, it is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

If the battery is removed for any reason

other than replacement, perform step 5.

●An improperly disposed battery can

hurt the environment. Always confirm

local regulations for battery disposal.

●The key fob is water-resistant; how-

ever, if it does get wet, immediately

wipe completely dry.

●The operational range of the key fob

extends to approximately 33 ft (10 m)

from the vehicle. This range may vary

with conditions.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) This device may not cause

harmful interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference received, in-

cluding interference that may cause unde-

sired operation of the device.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device may

not cause harmful interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference re-

ceived, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

Note:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to op-

erate the equipment.

For Canada:

This devise complies with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-

tion is subject to the following two condi-

tions: (1) this device may not cause inter-

ference, and (2) this device must accept any

interference, including interference that

may cause undesired operation of the de-

vice.

8-22 Do-it-yourself

NISSAN JACKKNIFE KEY (if so

equipped)

Replace the battery in the jackknife key as fol-

lows:

䊊

1Hold jackknife key button side up. Insert a

small screwdriver into the slit of the corner

and twist it to separate the upper part from

the lower part. Use a cloth to protect the

casing.

䊊

2Remove old battery.

䊊

3Replace the battery with a now one.

Recommended battery: CR2032 or equiva-

lent.

●Do not touch the internal circuit and elec-

tric terminals as doing so could cause a

malfunction.

●Hold the battery by the edges. Holding

the battery across the contact points will

seriously deplete the storage capacity.

䊊

4Close lid securely as illustrated.

Operate the buttons to check the operation.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

if you need assistance for replacement.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to op-

erate the equipment.

LDI2354

Do-it-yourself 8-23

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device may

not cause harmful interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference re-

ceived, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

Note: Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party responsible

for compliance could void the user’s au-

thority to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-

tion is subject to the following two condi-

tions: (1) this device may not cause inter-

ference, and (2) this device must accept any

interference, including interference that

may cause undesired operation of the de-

vice.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® (if so

equipped)

Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as fol-

lows:

1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli-

gent Key.

2. Insert a small flathead screwdriver 䊊

Ainto

the slit 䊊

Bof the corner and twist it to sepa-

rate the upper part from the lower part. Place

a cloth over the screwdriver to protect the

casing.

LDI2001

8-24 Do-it-yourself

3. Replace the battery with a new one.

Recommended battery: CR2032 or equiva-

lent.

●Do not touch the internal circuit and elec-

tric terminals as doing so could cause a

malfunction.

●Hold the battery by the edges. Holding

the battery across the contact points will

seriously deplete the storage capacity.

●Make sure that the + side faces the bot-

tom of the lower part.

4. Close the lid securely as illustrated with 䊊

and 䊊

5. Operate the buttons to check the operation.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

if you need assistance for replacement.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device may

not cause harmful interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference re-

ceived, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

Note:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to op-

erate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-

tion is subject to the following two condi-

tions: (1) this device may not cause inter-

ference, and (2) this device must accept any

interference, including interference that

may cause undesired operation of the de-

vice.

LDI2637

Do-it-yourself 8-25

HEADLIGHTS

For additional information on headlight bulb re-

placement, refer to the instructions outlined in

this section.

Replacing the halogen headlight bulb

(if so equipped)

The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which

uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb.

They can be replaced from inside the engine

compartment without removing the headlight as-

sembly.

If headlight bulb replacement is required, it is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

CAUTION

●Aiming is not necessary after replacing

the bulb. When aiming adjustment is

necessary, it is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

●Do not leave the headlight assembly

open without a bulb installed for a long

period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke,

etc. entering the headlight body may

affect bulb performance. Remove the

bulb from the headlight assembly just

before a replacement bulb is installed.

●Only touch the base when handling the

bulb. Never touch the glass envelope.

Touching the glass could significantly

affect bulb life and/or headlight

performance.

●High pressure halogen gas is sealed

inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may

break if the glass envelope is scratched

or the bulb is dropped.

●Use the same number and wattage as

shown in the chart.

Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the

exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A

temperature difference between the inside and

the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not

a malfunction. If large drops of water collect

inside the lens, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for servicing.

Replacing the LED headlight bulb (if

so equipped)

If LED headlight bulb replacement is required, it is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)

For additional information on fog light bulb re-

placement, refer to the instructions outlined in

this section.

Replacing the fog light bulb

If bulb replacement is required, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

CAUTION

●High pressure halogen gas is sealed

inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may

break if the glass envelope is scratched

or the bulb is dropped.

●When handling the bulb, do not touch

the glass envelope.

●Use the same number and wattage as

originally installed as shown in the

chart.

●Do not leave the bulb out of the fog light

for a long period of time as dust, mois-

ture and smoke may enter the fog light

body and affect the performance of the

fog light.

LIGHTS

8-26 Do-it-yourself

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.

Headlight assembly (Type A) (if so equipped)*

High 65 H9

Low 55 H11

Turn 28/8 7444NR

Side marker 5 W5W

Headlight assembly (Type B) (if so equipped)*

High — —

Low — —

Turn 28/8 7444NR

Side marker — —

Daytime running lights* — —

Front fog lights (if so equipped)* 35 H8

Door mirror turn signal light — —

Map light* — —

Vanity mirror light 1.8 —

Room light (if so equipped) 8 —

Personal lights (if so equipped) 8 —

Cargo light* 5 —

High-mounted stop light* — —

Rear combination light*

Stop 5/21 W21W

Turn 21 WY21W

Side marker 5 168

Backup (reversing) assembly*

Backup 16 921

Tail — —

License plate light* 5 W5W

* It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for replacement.

Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.

Do-it-yourself 8-27

1. Headlight assembly

2 Map light

3 Personal light (if so equipped)

4. Door mirror turn signal light

5. Fog light (if so equipped)

6. Daytime running light

7. Room light (if so equipped)

8. High mounted stoplight

9. License plate light

10. Backup (reversing) assembly

11. Rear combination light

Replacement procedures

All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When

replacing a bulb, first remove the lens, lamp

and/or cover.

Indicates bulb removal

Indicates bulb installation

LDI2822

WDI0263

8-28 Do-it-yourself

If you have a flat tire, refer to “Flat tire” in

the “In case of emergency” section of this

manual.

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)

WARNING

Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should con-

tact the electric medical equipment

manufacturer for the possible influ-

ences before use.

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It

monitors tire pressure of all tires except

the spare. When the low tire pressure

warning light is lit and the Tire Pressure

Low - Add Air warning appears in the

vehicle information display, one or more of

your tires is significantly under-inflated. If

equipped, the system also displays pres-

sure of all tires (except the spare tire) on

the display screen by sending a signal

from a sensor that is installed in each

wheel.

The TPMS will activate only when the

vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph

(25 km/h). Also, this system may not de-

tect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for

example a flat tire while driving).

For additional information, refer to “Low

tire pressure warning light” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section, “Tire Pres-

sure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the

“Starting and driving” section and “Flat

tire” in the “In case of emergency” section

of this manual.

Tire inflation pressure

Check the tire pressures (including the

spare) often and always prior to long dis-

tance trips. The recommended tire pres-

sure specifications are shown on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label

or the Tire and Loading Information label

under the “Cold Tire Pressure” heading.

The Tire and Loading Information label is

affixed to the driver side center pillar. Tire

pressures should be checked regularly

because:

●Most tires naturally lose air over time.

●Tires can lose air suddenly when

driven over potholes or other objects

or if the vehicle strikes a curb while

parking.

The tire pressures should be checked

when the tires are cold. The tires are

considered COLD after the vehicle has

been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven

less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate

speeds.

The TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert pro-

vides visual and audible signals outside

the vehicle for inflating the tires to the

recommended COLD tire pressure. For

additional information, refer to “TPMS

with Easy Fill Tire Alert” in the “Starting

and driving” section of this manual.

Incorrect tire pressure, including un-

der inflation, may adversely affect

tire life and vehicle handling.

WHEELS AND TIRES

Do-it-yourself 8-29

WARNING

●Improperly inflated tires can fail

suddenly and cause an accident.

●The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR) is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-

tion label. The vehicle weight ca-

pacity is indicated on the Tire and

Loading Information label. Do

not load your vehicle beyond this

capacity. Overloading your ve-

hicle may result in reduced tire

life, unsafe operating conditions

due to premature tire failure, or

unfavorable handling character-

istics and could also lead to a

serious accident. Loading beyond

the specified capacity may also

result in failure of other vehicle

components.

●Before taking a long trip, or

whenever you heavily load your

vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge

to ensure that the tire pressures

are at the specified level.

●For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Important

Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

8-30 Do-it-yourself

Tire and loading information label

䊊

1Seating capacity: The maximum num-

ber of occupants that can be seated

in the vehicle.

䊊

2Tire size - refer to “Tire labeling” in

this section.

䊊

3Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to

this pressure when the tires are cold.

Tires are considered COLD after the

vehicle has been parked for 3 or more

hours, or driven less than 1 mile

(1.6 km) at moderate speeds. The

recommended cold tire inflation is set

by the manufacturer to provide the

best balance of tire wear, vehicle

handling, drivability, tire noise, etc.,

up to the vehicle’s GVWR.

䊊

4Original tire size: The size of the tires

originally installed on the vehicle at

the factory.

䊊

5Spare tire size (if so equipped).

䊊

6Vehicle load limit: Refer to “Vehicle

loading information” in the “Technical

and consumer information” section of

this manual.

LDI2737

Do-it-yourself 8-31

Checking tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from the

tire.

2. Press the pressure gauge squarely

onto the valve stem. Do not press too

hard or force the valve stem side-

ways, or air will escape. If the hissing

sound of air escaping from the tire is

heard while checking the pressure,

reposition the gauge to eliminate this

leakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge

stem and compare to the specifica-

tion shown on the Tire and Loading

Information label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too

much air is added, press the core of

the valve stem briefly with the tip of

the gauge stem to release pressure.

Recheck the pressure and add or

release air as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other tires,

including the spare.

Size Cold Tire Inflation

Pressure

Front and Rear

Original Tire:

225/65R17 102H

33 psi, 230 kPa

Front and Rear

Original Tire:

225/65RF17

100H

33 psi, 230 kPa

Front and Rear

Original Tire:

225/60R18 100H

33 psi, 230 kPa

Spare Tire:

T155/90D17

101M

60 psi, 420 kPa

Spare Tire:

T145/90D16

106M

60 psi, 420 kPa

LDI0393

8-32 Do-it-yourself

TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufacturers to

place standardized information on the

sidewall of all tires. This information iden-

tifies and describes the fundamental

characteristics of the tire and also pro-

vides the tire identification number (TIN)

for safety standard certification. The TIN

can be used to identify the tire in case of a

recall.

䊊

1Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)

1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de-

signed for passenger vehicles (not all

tires have this information).

2. Three-digit number (215): This num-

ber gives the width in millimeters of

the tire from sidewall edge to side-

wall edge.

3. Two-digit number (65): This number,

known as the aspect ratio, gives the

tire’s ratio of height to width.

4. R: The “R” stands for radial.

5. Two-digit number (15): This number

is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.

6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This

number is the tire’s load index. It is a

measurement of how much weight

each tire can support. You may not

find this information on all tires be-

cause it is not required by law.

7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not

drive the vehicle faster than the tire

speed rating.

Example

WDI0394

Example

WDI0395

Do-it-yourself 8-33

䊊

2TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a

new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX

XXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Depart-

ment Of Transportation”. The symbol

can be placed above, below or to the

left or right of the Tire Identification

Number.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s

identification mark.

3. Two-digit code: Tire size.

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code

(Optional).

5. Four numbers represent the week

and year the tire was built. For ex-

ample, the numbers 3103 means the

31st week of 2003. If these numbers

are missing then look on the other

sidewall of the tire.

䊊

3Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rubber-

coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufactur-

ers also must indicate the materials in the

tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester

and others.

䊊

Maximum permissible inflation pressure

This number is the greatest amount of air

pressure that should be put in the tire. Do

not exceed the maximum permissible in-

flation pressure.

䊊

5Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum load

in kilograms and pounds that can be car-

ried by the tire. When replacing the tires

on the vehicle, always use a tire that has

the same load rating as the factory in-

stalled tire.

䊊

6Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”

Indicates whether the tire requires an in-

ner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).

䊊

7The word “radial”

The word “radial” is shown if the tire has

radial structure.

䊊

8Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is shown.

Example

LDI2786

8-34 Do-it-yourself

Other Tire-related Terminology

In addition to the many terms that are

defined throughout this section, Intended

Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that

contains a whitewall, bears white lettering

or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or

model name molding that is higher or

deeper than the same molding on the

other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the out-

ward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical

tire that has a particular side that must

always face outward when mounted on a

vehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

●When changing or replacing tires, be

sure all four tires are of the same type

(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and

construction. A NISSAN dealer may be

able to help you with information about

tire type, size, speed rating and

availability.

●Replacement tires may have a lower

speed rating than the factory equipped

tires, and may not match the potential

maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed

the maximum speed rating of the tire.

●Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by NISSAN could affect the

proper operation of the low tire pres-

sure warning system.

●For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-

formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-

tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-

tion Booklet.

●Always use tires of the same type, size,

brand, construction and tread pattern

on all four wheels. Failure to do so may

result in a circumference difference be-

tween tires on the front and rear axles

which can cause the Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) system to malfunction re-

sulting in personal injury or death, ex-

cessive tire wear and may damage the

transmission, transfer case and differ-

ential gears.

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models

CAUTION

●ONLY use spare tires specified for the

AWD model.

If excessive tire wear is found, it is recommended

that all four tires be replaced with tires of the

same size, brand, construction and tread pattern.

The tire pressure and wheel alignment should

also be checked and corrected as necessary. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

All season tires

NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some mod-

els to provide good performance all year, includ-

ing snowy and icy road conditions. All Season

tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S

on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow

traction than All Season tires and may be more

appropriate in some areas.

Summer tires

NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models

to provide superior performance on dry roads.

Summer tire performance is substantially re-

duced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have

the tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.

Do-it-yourself 8-35

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy

conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of

SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four

wheels.

Snow tires

If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select

tires equivalent in size and load rating to the

original equipment tires. If you do not, it can

adversely affect the safety and handling of your

vehicle.

Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings

than factory equipped tires and may not match

the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never ex-

ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.

If you install snow tires, they must be the same

size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all

four wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires

may be used. However, some U.S. states and

Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check

local, state and provincial laws before installing

studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of

studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be

poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

Run–Flat Tires (if so equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with run-flat tires and is

not equipped with a spare tire, or a jack and tool

kit. The jack and tool kit may be purchased at the

dealer. Please consult a NISSAN dealer for addi-

tional information. You can continue driving to a

safe location even if the run-flat tires are punc-

tured. Always use run-flat tires of the specified

size on all four wheels. Mixing tire sizes or con-

struction may reduce vehicle handling stability. If

necessary, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

Frequently check the tire pressure and adjust

pressure of each tire properly. The tire pressure

can be also checked in the vehicle information

display.

It can be difficult to tell if a run-flat tire is under-

inflated or flat. Check the tire pressures as de-

scribed in this section. If the tire becomes under-

inflated while driving, the low tire pressure

warning light will illuminate and the “Tire Pressure

Low- Add Air” warning appears in the vehicle

information display. If the tire becomes flat while

driving, the low tire pressure warning light and the

“Flat Tire- Visit Dealer⬙warning will appear.

Low tire pressure:

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pres-

sure, the low tire pressure warning light will illu-

minate and the Tire Pressure Low - Add Air

warning appears in the vehicle information dis-

play.

Flat tire:

If the vehicle is being driven with one or more flat

tires, the low tire pressure warning light will illu-

minate continuously and a chime will sound for

10 seconds. A “Flat-Tire- Visit Dealer⬙warning

also appears in the vehicle information display.

The chime will only sound at the first indication of

a flat tire and the warning light will illuminate

continuously. When the flat tire warning is acti-

vated, have the system reset and the tire checked

and replaced if necessary by a NISSAN dealer.

Even if the tire is inflated to the specified COLD

tire pressure, the warning light will continue to

illuminate until the system is reset by a NISSAN

dealer.

If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates

continuously and the “Flat Tire- Visit Dealer⬙

warning appears in the vehicle information dis-

play:

●Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

●Increase your following distance to allow for

increased stopping distances.

●Avoid sudden maneuvers, hard cornering

and hard braking.

8-36 Do-it-yourself

WARNING

●Although you can continue driving with

a punctured run-flat tire, remember that

vehicle handling stability is reduced,

which could lead to an accident and

personal injury. Also, driving a long dis-

tance at high speeds may damage the

tire.

●Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph

(80 km/h) and do not drive more than

approximately 93 miles (150 km) with a

punctured run-flat tire. The actual dis-

tance the vehicle can be driven on a flat

tire depends on outside temperature,

vehicle load, read conditions and other

factors.

●Drive safely at reduced speeds. Avoid

hard cornering or braking, which may

cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

●If you detect any unusual sounds or

vibrations while driving with a punc-

tured run-flat tire, pull off the road to a

safe location and stop the vehicle as

soon as possible. The tire may be seri-

ously damaged and need to be

replaced.

CAUTION

●Never install tire chains on a punctured

run-flat tire, as this could damage your

vehicle.

●Avoid driving over any projection or pot-

hole, as the clearance between the ve-

hicle and the ground is smaller than

normal.

●Do not enter an automated car wash

with a punctured run-flat tire.

●Have the punctured tire inspected by a

NISSAN dealer or other authorized re-

pair shop. Replace the tire as soon as

possible if the tire is seriously

damaged.

●Always use tires of the same type, size,

brand, construction (bias, bias-belted

or radial), and tread pattern on all four

wheels. Failure to do so may result in a

circumference difference between tires

on the front and rear axles which will

cause excessive tire wear and may dam-

age the transmission, transfer case and

differential gears (AWD models).

●ONLY use spare tires specified for the

AWD model.

●If excessive tire wear is found, it is rec-

ommended that all four tires be re-

placed with tires of the same size,

brand, construction and tread pattern.

The tire pressure and wheel alignment

should also be checked and corrected

as necessary. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

TIRE CHAINS

Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to

location. Check the local laws before installing

tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure

they are the proper size for the tires on your

vehicle and are installed according to the chain

manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE

class “S” chains. Class “S” chains are used on

vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.

Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are de-

signed to meet the minimum clearances between

the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or

body component required to accommodate the

use of a winter traction device (tire chains or

cables). The minimum clearances are determined

using the factory equipped tire size. Other types

may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners

when recommended by the tire chain manufac-

turer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the

tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent

Do-it-yourself 8-37

the possibility of whipping action damage to the

fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully load-

ing your vehicle when using tire chains. In addi-

tion, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your

vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling

and performance may be adversely affected.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with

chains in such conditions can cause damage to

the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to

some overstress.

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends rotating the tires

every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).

For additional information on tire replac-

ing procedures, refer to “Flat tire”in the “In

case of emergency” section in this

manual.

As soon as possible, tighten the

wheel nuts to the specified torque

with a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

83 ft-lb (113 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tight-

ened to specifications at all times. It

is recommended that wheel nuts be

tightened to specification at each

tire rotation interval.

WARNING

●After rotating the tires, check and

adjust the tire pressure.

●Retighten the wheel nuts when

the vehicle has been driven for

600 miles (1,000 km) (also in

cases of a flat tire, etc.).

●Do not include the spare tire in

the tire rotation.

●For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Important

Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

WDI0258

8-38 Do-it-yourself

Tire wear and damage

1. Wear indicator

2. Location mark

WARNING

●Tires should be periodically in-

spected for wear, cracking, bulg-

ing or objects caught in the tread.

If excessive wear, cracks, bulging

or deep cuts are found, the tire(s)

should be replaced.

●The original tires have built-in

tread wear indicators. When the

wear indicators are visible, the

tire(s) should be replaced.

●Tires degrade with age and use.

Have tires, including the spare,

over 6 years old checked by a

qualified technician because

some tire damage may not be ob-

vious. Replace the tires as neces-

sary to prevent tire failure and

possible personal injury.

●Improper service of the spare tire

may result in serious personal in-

jury. If it is necessary to repair the

spare tire, it is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

●For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Important

Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread

design, speed rating and load carrying capacity

as originally equipped. Recommended types and

sizes are shown in “Wheels and tires” in the

“Technical and consumer information” section of

this manual.

WARNING

●The use of tires other than those recom-

mended or the mixed use of tires of

different brands, construction (bias,

bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns

can adversely affect the ride, braking,

handling, VDC system, ground clear-

ance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain

clearance, speedometer calibration,

headlight aim and bumper height.

Some of these effects may lead to acci-

dents and could result in serious per-

sonal injury.

WDI0259

Do-it-yourself 8-39

●For 2WD models, if your vehicle was

originally equipped with four tires that

were the same size and you are only

replacing two of the four tires, install

the new tires on the rear axle. Placing

new tires on the front axle may cause

loss of vehicle control in some driving

conditions and cause an accident and

personal injury

●If the wheels are changed for any rea-

son, always replace with wheels which

have the same off-set dimension.

Wheels of a different off-set could

cause premature tire wear, degrade ve-

hicle handling characteristics, affect the

VDC system and/or interference with

the brake discs/drums. Such interfer-

ence can lead to decreased braking ef-

ficiency and/or early brake pad/shoe

wear. For additional information on

wheel off-set dimensions, refer to

“Wheels and tires” in the “Technical and

consumer information” section of this

manual.

●Since the spare tire is not equipped with

the TPMS, when a spare tire is mounted

or a wheel is replaced, tire pressure will

not be indicated, the TPMS will not

function and the low tire pressure warn-

ing light will flash for approximately

1 minute. The light will remain on after

1 minute. Have your tires replaced

and/or TPMS system reset as soon as

possible. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

●Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by NISSAN could affect the

proper operation of the TPMS.

●The TPMS sensor may be damaged if it

is not handled correctly. Be careful

when handling the TPMS sensor.

●When replacing the TPMS sensor, the

ID registration may be required. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for ID registration.

●Do not use a valve stem cap that is not

specified by NISSAN. The valve stem

cap may become stuck.

●Be sure that the valve stem caps are

correctly fitted. Otherwise the valve may

be clogged up with dirt and cause a

malfunction or loss of pressure.

●Do not install a damaged or deformed

wheel or tire even if it has been re-

paired. Such wheels or tires could have

structural damage and could fail with-

out warning.

●The use of retread tires is not

recommended.

●For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-

formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-

tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-

tion Booklet.

CAUTION

Always use tires of the same type, size,

brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or

radial), and tread pattern on all four

wheels. Failure to do so may result in a

circumference difference between tires on

the front and rear axles which will cause

excessive tire wear and may damage the

transmission, transfer case and differen-

tial gears (AWD models).

8-40 Do-it-yourself

If excessive tire wear is found, it is recommended

that all four tires be replaced with tires of the

same size, brand, construction and tread pattern.

The tire pressure and wheel alignment should

also be checked and corrected as necessary. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling

and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get

out of balance. Therefore, they should be bal-

anced as required.

Wheel balance service should be per-

formed with the wheels off the vehicle.

Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle

could lead to mechanical damage.

●For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-

mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-

formation Booklet.

Care of wheels

●Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle

to maintain their appearance.

●Clean the inner side of the wheels when the

wheel is changed or the underside of the

vehicle is washed.

●Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing

the wheels.

●Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or

corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of

pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

●NISSAN recommends waxing the road

wheels to protect against road salt in areas

where it is used during winter.

Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY

spare tire) (if so equipped)

Since the spare tire is not equipped with the

TPMS, when a spare tire is mounted (TEMPO-

RARY USE ONLY or conventional), the TPMS

will not function.

Observe the following precautions if the TEM-

PORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used.

Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged or

involved in an accident:

WARNING

●The spare tire should be used for emer-

gency use only. It should be replaced

with the standard tire at the first oppor-

tunity to avoid possible tire or differen-

tial damage.

●Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY

USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid

sharp turns and abrupt braking while

driving.

●Periodically check spare tire inflation

pressure. Always keep the pressure of

the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire

at 420 kPa, 4.2 bar (60 psi).

●With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare

tire installed do not drive the vehicle at

speeds faster than 80 km/h (50 mph).

●When driving on roads covered with

snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire should be used on the

rear wheels and the original tire used

on the front wheels (drive wheels).

●Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster rate

than the standard tire. Replace the

spare tire as soon as the tread wear

indicators appear.

●Do not use the spare tire on other

vehicles.

●Do not use more than one spare tire at

the same time.

●Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO-

RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.

Do-it-yourself 8-41

CAUTION

●Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-

RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains

will not fit properly and may cause dam-

age to the vehicle.

●Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY

spare tire is smaller than the original

tire, ground clearance is reduced. To

avoid damage to the vehicle, do not

drive over obstacles. Also, do not drive

the vehicle through an automatic car

wash since it may get caught.

8-42 Do-it-yourself

9 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance requirements..........................9-2

General maintenance ...........................9-2

Scheduled maintenance.........................9-2

Where to go for service .........................9-2

General maintenance ..............................9-2

Explanation of general maintenance items .........9-2

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items .........9-5

Emission Control System Maintenance: ...........9-5

Chassis and Body Maintenance: .................9-6

Maintenance schedules ............................9-7

Additional Maintenance Items for severe

operating conditions ............................9-7

Standard maintenance .............................9-8

Emission control system maintenance.............9-8

Chassis & body maintenance ...................9-10

Maintenance under severe operating conditions......9-12

Severe driving conditions.......................9-12

Maintenance log..................................9-13

Some day-to-day and regular maintenance is es-

sential to maintain your vehicle good mechanical

condition, as well as its emissions and engine

performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that

the scheduled maintenance, as well as general

maintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who

can ensure that your vehicle receives proper

maintenance. You are a vital link in the mainte-

nance chain.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

General maintenance includes those items which

should be checked during normal day-to-day op-

eration. They are essential for proper vehicle op-

eration. It is your responsibility to perform these

procedures regularly as prescribed.

Performing general maintenance checks requires

minimal mechanical skill and only a few general

automotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done by

yourself, a qualified technician or, if you prefer, a

NISSAN dealer.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

The maintenance items listed in this section are

required to be serviced at regular intervals. How-

ever under severe driving conditions, additional

or more frequent maintenance will be required.

WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE

If maintenance service is required or your vehicle

appears to malfunction, have the systems

checked and serviced. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists

and are kept up-to-date with the latest service

information through technical bulletins, service

tips and training programs. They are completely

qualified to work on NISSAN vehicles before

work begins.

You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s

service department can perform the service

needed to meet the maintenance requirements

on your vehicle.

During the normal day-to-day operation of the

vehicle, general maintenance should be per-

formed regularly as prescribed in this section. If

you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or

smells, be sure to check for the cause or have a

NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, it is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer if

you think that repairs are required.

When performing any checks or maintenance

work, closely observe the “Maintenance precau-

tions” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

EXPLANATION OF GENERAL

MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the following

items with“*”isfound in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

performed from time to time, unless otherwise

specified.

Doors and engine hood: Check that the doors

and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure

that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges,

latches, latch pins, rollers and links if necessary.

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

9-2 Maintenance and schedules

Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the

hood from opening when the primary latch is

released.

When driving in areas using road salt or other

corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.

Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular basis.

Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail

lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all

operating properly and installed securely. Also

check headlight aim.

Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When checking

the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing,

and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if

necessary.

Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated every

5,000 miles (8,000 km).

Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge often

and always prior to long distance trips. If neces-

sary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the

spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully

for damage, cuts or excessive wear.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

transmitter components: Replace the TPMS

transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap

when the tires are replaced due to wear or age.

Wheel alignment and balance: If the vehicle

should pull to either side while driving on a

straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or

abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel

alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at

normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be

needed.

For additional information regarding tires, refer to

“Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire

Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty In-

formation Booklet.

Windshield: Clean the windshield on a regular

basis. Check the windshield at least every six

months for cracks or other damage. Have a dam-

aged windshield repaired by a qualified repair

facility.

Windshield wiper blades*: Check for cracks

or wear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

checked on a regular basis, such as when per-

forming scheduled maintenance, cleaning the ve-

hicle, etc.

Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for smooth

operation and make sure the pedal does not

catch or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat

away from the pedal.

Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth op-

eration. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down

further than normal, the pedal feels spongy or the

vehicle seems to take longer to stop, have your

vehicle checked immediately. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Keep the floor mat away from the pedal.

Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull the

vehicle to one side when applied.

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

P (Park) position mechanism: On a fairly

steep hill check that the vehicle is held securely

with the shift lever in the P (Park) position without

applying any brakes.

Parking brake: Check the parking brake opera-

tion regularly. The vehicle should be securely held

on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake

applied. If the parking brake needs adjustment, it

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

Seats: Check seat position controls such as

seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to ensure

they operate smoothly and all latches lock se-

curely in every position. Check that the head

restraints/headrests move up and down

smoothly and the locks (if so equipped) hold

securely in all latched positions.

Maintenance and schedules 9-3

Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat belt

system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters

and retractors) operate properly and smoothly,

and are installed securely. Check the belt web-

bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.

Steering wheel: Check for changes in the

steering system, such as excessive free play,

hard steering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes: Make sure all

warning lights and chimes are operating properly.

Windshield defroster: Check that the air

comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in

sufficient quantity when operating the heater or

air conditioner.

Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that

the wipers and washer operate properly and that

the wipers do not streak.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

checked periodically (for example, each time you

check the engine oil or refuel).

Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell. The

fluid should be at the bottom of the filler opening.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under

severe conditions require frequent checks of the

battery fluid level.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery discharge

and potential no-start conditions such as:

1. Installation or extended use of elec-

tronic accessories that consume bat-

tery power when the engine is not run-

ning (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD

players, etc.).

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or

only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to be

charged to maintain battery health.

Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the brake

fluid level is between the MAX and MIN lines on

the reservoir.

Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant level

when the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts*: Make sure the drive belts

are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level*: Check the level after parking

the vehicle on a level spot and turning off the

engine. Wait more than 15 minutes for the oil to

drain back into the oil pan.

Exhaust system: Make sure there are no loose

supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the

exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of

exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust

system inspected. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Exhaust gas (carbon

monoxide)”in the “Starting and driving” section of

this manual.

Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil,

water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has

been parked for a while. Water dripping from the

air conditioner after use is normal. If you should

notice any leaks or if fuel fumes are evident,

check for the cause and have it corrected imme-

diately.

Power steering fluid level* and lines: Check

the level when the fluid is cold, with the engine

off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks,

cracks, etc.

Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the

radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,

etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the

hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose

connections.

9-4 Maintenance and schedules

Underbody: The underbody is frequently ex-

posed to corrosive substances such as those

used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very

important to remove these substances, other-

wise rust may form on the floor pan, frame, fuel

lines and around the exhaust system. At the end

of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly

flushed with plain water, being careful to clean

those areas where mud and dirt may accumulate.

For additional information, refer to the “Appear-

ance and care” section of this manual.

Windshield-washer fluid*: Check that there is

adequate fluid in the reservoir.

The following descriptions are provided to give

you a better understanding of the scheduled

maintenance items that should be regularly

checked or replaced. The maintenance schedule

indicates at which mileage/time intervals each

item requires service.

In addition to scheduled maintenance, your ve-

hicle requires that some items be checked during

normal day-to-day operation. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “General maintenance” in this

section.

Items marked with “*” are recommended by

NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. You are

not required to perform maintenance on these

items in order to maintain the warranties which

come with your NISSAN. Other maintenance

items and intervals are required.

When applicable, additional information can be

found in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

NOTE:

NISSAN does not advocate the use of non-

OEM approved aftermarket flushing sys-

tems and strongly advises against perform-

ing these services on a NISSAN product.

Many of the aftermarket flushing systems

use non-OEM approved chemicals or sol-

vents, the use of which has not been vali-

dated by NISSAN.

For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids,

grease, and refrigerant, refer to “Recom-

mended fluids/lubricants and capacities”

in the “Technical and consumer informa-

tion” section of this manual.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

MAINTENANCE:

Drive belts*:

Check engine drive belts for wear, fraying or

cracking and for proper tension. Replace any

damaged drive belts.

Engine air filter:

Replace at specified intervals. When driving for

prolonged periods in dusty conditions,

check/replace the filter more frequently.

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED

MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Maintenance and schedules 9-5

Engine coolant*:

Replace coolant at the specified interval. When

adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only

Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant

(blue) or equivalent with the proper mixture. (For

additional information on the proper mixture for

your area, refer to “Engine cooling system” in the

“Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.)

NOTE: Mixing any other type of coolant or

the use of non-distilled water may reduce

the recommended service interval of the

coolant.

Engine oil and oil filter:

Replace engine oil and oil filter at the specified

intervals. For recommended oil grade and viscos-

ity refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and

capacities” in the “Technical and consumer infor-

mation” section of this manual.

Engine valve clearance*:

Inspect only if valve noise increase. Adjust valve

clearance if necessary.

Evaporative emissions control vapor lines*:

Check vapor lines for leaks or looseness. Tighten

connections or replace parts as necessary.

Fuel filter*:

Periodic maintenance is not required. (in-tank

type filter)

Fuel lines*:

Check the fuel hoses, piping and connections for

leaks, looseness, or deterioration. Tighten con-

nections or replace parts as necessary.

Spark plugs:

Replace at specified intervals. Install new plugs

of the same type as originally equipped.

CHASSIS AND BODY

MAINTENANCE:

Brake lines and cables: Visually inspect for

proper installation. Check for chafing, cracks,

deterioration, and signs of leaking. Replace any

deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.

Brake pads and rotors: Check for wear, dete-

rioration and fluid leaks. Replace any deteriorated

or damaged parts immediately.

Exhaust system: Visually inspect the exhaust

pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks, cracks, de-

terioration, and damage. Tighten connections or

replace parts as necessary.

In-cabin microfilter: Replace at specified in-

tervals. When driving for prolonged periods in

dusty conditions, replace the filter more fre-

quently.

Propeller shaft(s): Check for damage, loose-

ness, and grease leakage. (AWD)

Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus-

pension parts, drive shaft boots: Check for

damage, looseness, and leakage of oil or grease.

Under severe driving conditions, inspect more

frequently.

Tire rotation: Tires should be rotated every

5,000 miles (8,000 km) according to the instruc-

tions under “Explanation of general maintenance

items” in this section. When rotating tires, check

for damage and uneven wear. Replace if neces-

sary.

Transmission fluid/oil, differential oil,

transfer case oil: Visually inspect for signs of

leakage at specified intervals.

If towing a trailer, using a camper or car-top

carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads:

●Replace the fluid/oil every 20,000 miles

(32,000 km) or 24 months.

9-6 Maintenance and schedules

●Replace the CVT fluid every 60,000 miles

(96,000 km) or request the dealer to inspect

the fluid deterioration data using a CON-

SULT. If the deterioration data is more than

210000, replace the CVT fluid.

Off-Road Maintenance Check the following

items frequently whenever you drive off-road

through deep sand, mud or water:

●Brake pads and rotors

●Brake linings and drums

●Differential, transmission and transfer case

oil

●Steering linkage

●Propeller shaft(s) and front drive shafts

●Engine air filter

To help ensure smooth, safe and economical

driving, NISSAN provides two maintenance

schedules that may be used, depending upon the

conditions in which you usually drive. These

schedules contain both distance and time inter-

vals, up to 120,000 miles

(192,000 km)/144 months. For most people, the

odometer reading will indicate when service is

needed. However, if you drive very little, your

vehicle should be serviced at the regular time

intervals shown in the schedule.

After 120,000 miles

(192,000 km)/144 months, continue main-

tenance at the same mileage/time inter-

vals.

ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS

FOR SEVERE OPERATING

CONDITIONS

Additional maintenance items for severe

operating conditions should be performed on

vehicles that are driven under especially de-

manding conditions. Additional maintenance

items should be performed if you primarily oper-

ate your vehicle under the following conditions:

●Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles

(8 km).

●Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles

(16 km) with outside temperatures remain-

ing below freezing.

●Operating in hot weather in stop-an-go

“rush hour” traffic.

●Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for

long distances, such as police, taxi or door-

to-door delivery use.

●Driving in dusty conditions.

●Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread

roads.

●Towing a trailer, using a camper or using a

car-top carrier.

NOTE:

For vehicles operated in Canada, both

standard and severe maintenance items

should be performed at every interval.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

Maintenance and schedules 9-7

The following tables show the standard mainte-

nance schedule. Depending upon weather and

atmospheric conditions, varying road surfaces,

individual driving habits and vehicle usage, addi-

tional or more frequent maintenance may be re-

quired. After 120,000 miles

(192,000 km)/144 months, continue main-

tenance at the same mileage/time interval.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months,

whichever comes first. miles x 1,000

(km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

(8)

(16)

(24)

(32)

(40)

(48)

(56)

(64)

(72)

(80)

(88)

(96)

Drive belts See NOTE (1) I* I* I*

Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R R

EVAP vapor lines I* I* I*

Fuel lines I* I* I*

Fuel filter See NOTE (3)

Engine coolant* See NOTE (4)(5)

Engine oil RRRRRRRRRRR R

Engine oil filter RRRRRRRRRRR R

Spark plugs See NOTE (6) Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)

Intake and exhaust valve clearances* See NOTE (7)

STANDARD MAINTENANCE

9-8 Maintenance and schedules

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months,

whichever comes first. miles x 1,000

(km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

(104)

(112)

(120)

(128)

(136)

102

(144)

108

(152)

114

100

(160)

120

105

(168)

126

110

(176)

132

115

(184)

138

120

(192)

144

Drive belts See NOTE (1) I* I* I* I* I* I*

Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R R

EVAP vapor lines I* I* I*

Fuel lines I* I* I*

Fuel filter See NOTE (3)

Engine coolant* See NOTE (4)(5)

Engine oil RRRRRRRRRRR R

Engine oil filter RRRRRRRRRRR R

Spark plugs See NOTE (6) Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)

Intake and exhaust valve clearances* See NOTE (7)

NOTE:

(1) After 40,000 miles (64,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if found

damaged.

(2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.

(3) Periodic maintenance is not required.

(4) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 75,000 miles (120,000 km)

or 60 months.

(5) Use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with proper mixture ration of 50% antifreeze and 50%

demineralized or distilled water. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the life expectancy of the

factory fill coolant.

(6) Replace spark plug when the plug gap exceeds 0.055 in (1.4 mm) even if within specified periodic replacement mileage.

(7) Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increased, inspect valve clearance.

* Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such

maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.

Maintenance and schedules 9-9

CHASSIS & BODY MAINTENANCE

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace,

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months,

whichever comes first. miles x 1,000

(km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

(8)

(16)

(24)

(32)

(40)

(48)

(56)

(64)

(72)

(80)

(88)

(96)

Brake lines and cables I I I I I I

Brake pads and rotors夝IIIIII

Brake fluid夝RRR

CVT fluid See NOTE (1) I I I I I I

Transfer fluid & differential gear oil See NOTE (2) I I I I I I

Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts夝III

Tire rotation See NOTE (3)

Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (AWD models)夝IIIIII

Exhaust system夝III

In-cabin microfilter RRRR

Intelligent key battery RRRR

9-10 Maintenance and schedules

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months,

whichever comes first. miles x 1,000

(km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

(104)

(112)

(120)

(128)

(136)

102

(144)

108

(152)

114

100

(160)

120

105

(168)

126

110

(176)

132

115

(184)

138

120

(192)

144

Brake lines and cables I I I I I I

Brake pads and rotors夝IIIIII

Brake fluid夝RRR

CVT fluid See NOTE (1) I I I I I I

Transfer fluid & differential gear oil See NOTE (2) I I I I I I

Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts夝III

Tire rotation See NOTE (3)

Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (AWD models)夝IIIIII

Exhaust system夝III

In-cabin microfilter RRRR

Intelligent key battery RRRR

NOTE:

Maintenance items with “夝” should be performed more frequently according to “Maintenance under severe driving conditions”.

(1) If towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier or driving on rough or muddy roads, inspect CVT fluid deterioration at NISSAN

dealers every 60,000 miles (96,000 km), then change CVT fluid if necessary. And if the inspection is not performed, change (not just inspect)

CVT fluid every 60,000 miles (96,000 km).

(2) If towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every 20,000 miles

(32,000 km) or 24 months.

(3) For additional information on tire rotation, refer to “General maintenance” in this section.

Maintenance and schedules 9-11

The maintenance intervals shown on the preced-

ing pages are for normal operating conditions. If

the vehicle is mainly operated under severe driv-

ing conditions as shown below, more frequent

maintenance must be performed on the following

items as shown in the table.

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS

●Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles

(8 km).

●Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles

(16 km) with outside temperatures remain-

ing below freezing.

●Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go

“rush hour” traffic.

●Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for

long distance, such as police, taxi or door-

to-door delivery use.

●Driving in dusty conditions.

●Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread

roads.

●Towing a trailer, using a camper or using a

car-top carrier.

Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary.

Maintenance item Maintenance operation Maintenance interval

Brake fluid Replace Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months

Brake pads & rotors Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (AWD models) Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Exhaust system Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE

OPERATING CONDITIONS

9-12 Maintenance and schedules

5,000 Miles (8,000 km) or 6 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

10,000 Miles (16,000 km) or

12 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

15,000 Miles (24,000 km) or

18 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

20,000 Miles (32,000 km) or

24 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

25,000 Miles (40,000 km) or

30 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

30,000 Miles (48,000 km) or

36 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

35,000 Miles (56,000 km) or

42 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

40,000 Miles (64,000 km) or

48 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

45,000 Miles (72,000 km) or

54 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

MAINTENANCE LOG

Maintenance and schedules 9-13

50,000 Miles (80,000 km) or

60 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

55,000 Miles (88,000 km) or

66 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

60,000 Miles (96,000 km) or

72 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

65,000 Miles (104,000 km) or

78 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

70,000 Miles (112,000 km) or

84 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

75,000 Miles (120,000 km) or

90 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

80,000 Miles (128,000 km) or

96 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

85,000 Miles (136,000 km) or

102 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

90,000 Miles (144,000 km) or

108 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

9-14 Maintenance and schedules

95,000 Miles (152,000 km) or

114 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

100,000 Miles (160,000 km) or

120 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

105,000 Miles (168,000 km) or

126 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

110,000 Miles (176,000 km) or

132 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

115,000 Miles (184,000 km) or

138 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

120,000 Miles (192,000 km) or

144 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Maintenance and schedules 9-15

MEMO

9-16 Maintenance and schedules

10 Technical and consumer information

Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities ......10-2

Fuel recommendation ..........................10-3

Engine oil and oil filter recommendations .........10-6

Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil

recommendations .............................10-7

Specifications....................................10-8

Engine .......................................10-8

Wheels and tires ..............................10-9

Dimensions and weights .......................10-9

When traveling or registering in another country.....10-10

Vehicle identification .............................10-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate ........10-10

Vehicle identification number

(chassis number) .............................10-10

Engine serial number..........................10-11

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label .........10-11

Emission control information label ..............10-11

Tire and Loading Information label ..............10-12

Air conditioner specification label...............10-12

Installing front license plate .......................10-12

Vehicle loading information .......................10-13

Terms .......................................10-13

Vehicle load capacity .........................10-14

Securing the load.............................10-15

Loading tips .................................10-16

Measurement of weights ......................10-16

Towing a trailer ..................................10-17

Maximum load limits ..........................10-17

Towing load/specification......................10-20

Towing safety ................................10-21

Flat towing for All–Wheel drive vehicle

(if so equipped) ..............................10-25

Flat towing for front wheel drive vehicle

(if so equipped) ..............................10-25

Uniform tire quality grading .......................10-26

Emission control system warranty .................10-27

Reporting safety defects .........................10-27

Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test ....10-28

Event Data Recorders (EDR)......................10-29

Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . .10-30

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure

described in the “Do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Fluid type Capacity (approximate) Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

Metric

Measure

Imperial

Measure

Fuel 55 L 14-1/2 gal 12-1/8 gal • For additional information, refer to “Fuel recommendation” in this

section.

Engine oil*1

Drain and refill

*1: For additional information,

refer to “Engine oil” in the “Do-

it-yourself” section of this

manual.

With oil filter change 4.6 L 4-7/8 qt 4 qt • Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20 SN” is recommended.

• If the above motor is not available, use an equivalent motor oil that

matches the above grade and viscosity. For additional information, refer

to “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations” in this section.

Without oil filter

change 4.3 L 4-1/2 qt 3-3/4 qt

Engine coolant

with reservoir 8.1 L 2-1/8 gal 1-3/4 gal • Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or

equivalent

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid — — —

• Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3

• NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or

equivalent) ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with other fluids. Using

fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN CVT NS-3 may dam-

age the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recom-

mended is not covered under NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Differential gear oil — — — • Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or

equivalent conventional (non-synthetic) oil

Transfer oil — — —

Brake fluid — — — • Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*2 or equivalent DOT 3

*2: Available in mainland USA through a NISSAN dealer.

Multi-purpose grease — — — • NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)

Air conditioning system refrigerant — — —

• HFC-134a (R-134a)

• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system refrigerant

and oil recommendations” in this section.

RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/

LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

10-2 Technical and consumer information

Fluid type Capacity (approximate) Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

Metric

Measure

Imperial

Measure

Air conditioning system oil — — —

• NISSAN A/C System Oil Type ND-OIL8 or exact equivalents

• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system refrigerant

and oil recommendations” in this section.

Windshield-washer fluid 5 L 1-3/8 gal 1-1/8 gal • Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-

freeze or equivalent

FUEL RECOMMENDATION

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane

rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-

ber (Research octane number 91).

CAUTION

●Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission

control system, and may also affect the

warranty coverage.

●Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because this

will damage the three-way catalyst.

●Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your

vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to

run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or

E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically

designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can ad-

versely affect the emission control de-

vices and systems of the vehicle. Dam-

age caused by such fuel is not covered

by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

●Do not use fuel that contains the octane

booster methylcyclopentadienyl man-

ganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using fuel

containing MMT may adversely affect

vehicle performance and vehicle emis-

sions. Not all fuel dispensers are la-

beled to indicate MMT content, so you

may have to consult your gasoline re-

tailer for more details. Note that Fed-

eral and California laws prohibit the use

of MMT in reformulated gasoline.

●U.S. government regulations require

ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi-

fied by a small, square, orange and

black label with the common abbrevia-

tion or the appropriate percentage for

that region.

Gasoline specifications

NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets

the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifi-

cations where it is available. Many of the automo-

bile manufacturers developed this specification

to improve emission control system and vehicle

performance. Ask your service station manager if

the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu-

lated gasolines. These gasolines are specially

designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN

Technical and consumer information 10-3

supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug-

gests that you use reformulated gasoline when

available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy-

genates such as ethanol, Methyl Tert-butyl Ether

(MTBE) and methanol with or without advertising

their presence. NISSAN does not recommend

the use of fuels of which the oxygenate content

and the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN can-

not be readily determined. If in doubt, ask your

service station manager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take

the following precautions as the usage of such

fuels may cause vehicle performance problems

and/or fuel system damage.

●The fuel should be unleaded and have

an octane rating no lower than that

recommended for unleaded gasoline.

●If an oxygenate-blend other than

methanol blend is used, it should con-

tain no more than 10% oxygenate.

(MTBE may, however, be added up to

15%.)

●E-15 fuel contains more than 10% oxy-

genate. E-15 fuel will adversely affect

the emission control devices and sys-

tems of the vehicle and should not be

used. Damage caused by such fuel is

not covered by the NISSAN New Ve-

hicle Limited Warranty.

●If a methanol blend is used, it should

contain no more than 5% methanol

(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It

should also contain a suitable amount

of appropriate cosolvents and corro-

sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-

lated with appropriate cosolvents and

corrosion inhibitors, such methanol

blends may cause fuel system damage

and/or vehicle performance problems.

At this time, sufficient data is not avail-

able to ensure that all methanol blends

are suitable for use in NISSAN ve-

hicles.

If any driveability problems such as engine stall-

ing and difficult hot-starting are experienced after

using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately

change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a

low blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during refu-

eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can

cause paint damage.

E–15 fuel

E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15% fuel

ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline. E-15 can

only be used in vehicles designed to run on E-15

fuel. Do not use E-15 in your vehicle. U.S. gov-

ernment regulations require fuel ethanol dispens-

ing pumps to be identified with small, square,

orange and black label with the common abbre-

viation or the appropriate percentage for that

region.

E–85 fuel

E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel

ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can

only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do

not use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. government

regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing

pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange

and black label with the common abbreviation or

the appropriate percentage for that region.

Fuel containing MMT

MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tri-

carbonyl, is an octane boosting additive. NISSAN

does not recommend the use of fuel containing

MMT. Such fuel may adversely affect vehicle per-

formance, including the emissions control sys-

tem. Note that while some fuel pumps label MMT

content, not all do, so you may have to consult

your gasoline retailer for more details.

10-4 Technical and consumer information

Aftermarket fuel additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of any

aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injec-

tor cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit

removers, etc.) which are sold commercially.

Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish

or deposit removal may contain active solvents or

similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel

system and engine.

Octane rating tips

Using unleaded gasoline with an octane

rating lower than recommended can cause

persistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Spark

knock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If se-

vere, this can lead to engine damage. If you

detect a persistent heavy spark knock even

when using gasoline of the stated octane

rating, or if you hear steady spark knock

while holding a steady speed on level

roads, it is recommended that you have a

NISSAN dealer correct the condition. Fail-

ure to correct the condition is misuse of the

vehicle, for which NISSAN is not respon-

sible.

Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark

knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may

cause excessive fuel consumption or engine

damage. If any of the above symptoms are en-

countered, have your vehicle checked. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

servicing.

However, now and then you may notice

light spark knock for a short time while

accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a

cause for concern, because you get the

greatest fuel benefit when there is light

spark knock for a short time under heavy

engine load.

Technical and consumer information 10-5

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER

RECOMMENDATIONS

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct grade, quality

and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory

engine life and performance. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants

and capacities” in this section. NISSAN recom-

mends the use of an energy conserving oil in

order to improve fuel economy.

Select only engine oils that meet the American

Petroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna-

tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval

Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis-

cosity standard. These oils have the API certifica-

tion mark on the front of the container. Oils which

do not have the specified quality label should not

be used as they could cause engine damage.

Oil additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil

additives. The use of an oil additive is not neces-

sary when the proper oil type is used and main-

tenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been

previously used should not be used.

Oil viscosity

The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes

with temperature. Because of this, it is important

to select the engine oil viscosity based on the

temperatures at which the vehicle will be oper-

ated before the next oil change. Choosing an oil

viscosity other than that recommended could

cause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a

high-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. When

replacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or its

equivalent for the reason described in “Change

intervals.”

Change intervals

The oil and oil filter change intervals for your

engine are based on the use of the specified

quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filters

that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding

recommended oil and filter change intervals

could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine

caused by improper maintenance or use of incor-

rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not

covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

LTI2051

10-6 Technical and consumer information

Your engine was filled with a high-quality engine

oil when it was built. You do not have to change

the oil before the first recommended change

interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend

upon how you use your vehicle.

Operation under the following conditions may

require more frequent oil and filter changes:

●repeated short distance driving at cold out-

side temperatures

●driving in dusty conditions

●extensive idling

●towing a trailer

●stop and go commuting

For additional information, refer to the “Mainte-

nance and schedules” section of this manual.

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM

REFRIGERANT AND OIL

RECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN

vehicle must be charged with the refriger-

ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and NISSAN A/C

system oil Type ND-OIL8 or the exact

equivalents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or oil will

cause severe damage to the air condition-

ing system and will require the replace-

ment of all air conditioner system

components.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your

NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozone

layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the

earth’s atmosphere, certain government regula-

tions require the recovery and recycling of any

refrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys-

tem service. A NISSAN dealer has the trained

technicians and equipment needed to recover

and recycle your air conditioner system refriger-

ant.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

when servicing your air conditioner system.

Technical and consumer information 10-7

ENGINE

Model QR25DE

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC

Cylinder arrangement 4-cylinder

Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.5 x 3.9 (89.0 x 100.0)

Displacement cu in (cm

) 151.82 (2,488)

Firing order 1-3-4-2

Idle speed

No adjustment is necessary.

CVT (in N position)

Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed)

CO%atidle

Spark plug FXE20HE-11C

Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation Timing chain

This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

SPECIFICATIONS

10-8 Technical and consumer information

WHEELS AND TIRES

Wheel type Size

Steel 17 x 7J

Aluminum 17 x 7J

18x7J

19x7J

Tires Size

Non Run Flat 225/65R17

225/60R18

225/55R19

Run Flat 225/65RF17

Spare tires Size

Spare Wheel - Steel T145/90D16

Spare Wheel - Steel T155/90D17

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Overall length in (mm) 184.5 (4,686)

Overall width in (mm) 72.4 (1,840)

Overall height

with All-wheel drive in (mm) 68.4 (1,738)

with front wheel drive in (mm) 68.1 (1,729)

Front and Rear Track in (mm) 62.8 (1,595)

Wheelbase in (mm) 106.5 (2,706)

Gross vehicle weight rating lb (kg) Refer to the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.

V.S.S. certification label” on

the center pillar between the

driver’s side front and rear

doors.

Gross axle weight rating

Front lb (kg)

Rear lb (kg)

Technical and consumer information 10-9

When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-

hicle in another country, you should first find

out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi-

cle’s engine.

Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low

may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles

must be operated with unleaded gasoline. There-

fore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where

appropriate fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of your

vehicle to another country, state, province

or district, it may be necessary to modify the

vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis-

sion control and safety standards vary according

to the country, state, province or district; there-

fore, vehicle specifications may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into an-

other country, state, province or district and

registered, its modifications, transporta-

tion and registration are the responsibility

of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for

any inconvenience that may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(VIN) PLATE

The vehicle identification number (VIN) plate is

located as shown. This number is the identifica-

tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle

registration.

The VIN number is also available through the

center display screen. For additional information,

refer to your “Navigation System Owner’s

Manual”.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(chassis number)

The vehicle identification number is located as

shown.

TI1050M LTI2270

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING

IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

10-10 Technical and consumer information

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The number is stamped on the engine as shown.

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

CERTIFICATION LABEL

The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification la-

bel is affixed as shown. This label contains valu-

able vehicle information, such as: (GVWR),

(GAWR), month and year of manufacture, (VIN),

etc. Review it carefully.

EMISSION CONTROL

INFORMATION LABEL

The emission control information label is at-

tached to the underside of the hood as shown.

WTI0096 WTI0099 LTI2072

Technical and consumer information 10-11

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION

LABEL

The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and

Loading Information label. The label is located as

shown.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION

LABEL

The air conditioner specification label is affixed to

the underside of the hood as shown.

To mount the front license plate, attach the li-

cense plate bracket to the bumper fascia at the

location marks (small dimples) using the two

provided screws 䊊

LTI2251 LTI2271 LTI2265

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

10-12 Technical and consumer information

WARNING

●It is extremely dangerous to ride

in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In

a collision, people riding in these

areas are more likely to be seri-

ously injured or killed.

●Do not allow people to ride in any

area of your vehicle that is not

equipped with seats and seat

belts.

●Be sure everyone in your vehicle

is in a seat and using a seat belt

properly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself with

the following terms before loading your

vehicle:

●Curb Weight (actual weight of your

vehicle) - vehicle weight including:

standard and optional equipment, flu-

ids, emergency tools, and spare tire

assembly. This weight does not in-

clude passengers and cargo.

●GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb

weight plus the combined weight of

passengers and cargo.

●GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-

ing) - maximum total combined

weight of the unloaded vehicle, pas-

sengers, luggage, hitch, trailer

tongue load and any other optional

equipment. This information is lo-

cated on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

certification label.

●GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -

maximum weight (load) limit specified

for the front or rear axle. This informa-

tion is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification

label.

●GCWR (Gross Combined Weight

rating) - The maximum total weight

rating of the vehicle, passengers,

cargo, and trailer.

●Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,

Total load capacity - maximum total

weight limit specified of the load

(passengers and cargo) for the ve-

hicle. This is the maximum combined

weight of occupants and cargo that

can be loaded into the vehicle. If the

vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the

trailer tongue weight must be in-

cluded as part of the cargo load. This

information is located on the Tire and

Loading Information label.

●Cargo capacity - permissible weight

of cargo, the subtracted weight of

occupants from the load limit.

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

Technical and consumer information 10-13

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm

that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.

Both the GVWR and GAWR are located

on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification

label. For additional information, refer to

“Measurement of weights” in this section.

Do not exceed the load limit of your ve-

hicle shown as “The combined weight of

occupants and cargo” on the Tire and

Loading Information label. Do not exceed

the number of occupants shown as

“Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Load-

ing Information label.

To get “the combined weight of occu-

pants and cargo”, add the weight of all

occupants, then add the total luggage

weight. Examples are shown in the follow-

ing illustration.

Example

LTI0152

10-14 Technical and consumer information

Steps for determining correct load

limit

1. Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo

should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX

kg” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of

the driver and passengers that will be

riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the

driver and passengers from XXX lbs

or XXX kg.

4. The resulting figure equals the avail-

able amount of cargo and luggage

load capacity. For example, if the

XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs. and

there will be five 150 lb. passengers

in your vehicle, the amount of avail-

able cargo and luggage load capac-

ity is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150)

= 650 lbs) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =

300 kg.)

5. Determine the combined weight of

luggage and cargo being loaded on

the vehicle. That weight may not

safely exceed the available cargo and

luggage load capacity calculated in

step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,

load from your trailer will be trans-

ferred to your vehicle. Consult this

manual to determine how this re-

duces the available cargo and lug-

gage load capacity of your vehicle.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm

that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.

For additional information, refer to “Mea-

surement of weights” in this section.

Also check tires for proper inflation pres-

sures. For additional information, refer to

the “Tire and loading information label” in

this section.

SECURING THE LOAD

There are luggage hooks located in the cargo

area as shown. The hooks can be used to secure

cargo with ropes or other types of straps.

Do not apply a total load of more than

6.5 lbs. (29 N) to a single metal floor hook

when securing cargo.

Cargo area luggage hooks

LIC2629

Technical and consumer information 10-15

WARNING

●Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or

shifting. Do not place cargo higher than

the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-

lision, unsecured cargo could cause

personal injury.

●The child restraint top tether strap may

be damaged by contact with items in

the cargo area. Secure any items in the

cargo area. Your child could be seri-

ously injured or killed in a collision if

the top tether strap is damaged.

●Do not load your vehicle any heavier

than the GVWR or the maximum front

and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of your

vehicle can break, tire damage could

occur, or it can change the way your

vehicle handles. This could result in loss

of control and cause personal injury.

LOADING TIPS

●The GVW must not exceed GVWR

or GAWR as specified on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification

label.

●Do not load the front and rear axle to

the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the

GVWR.

WARNING

●Properly secure all cargo with

ropes or straps to help prevent it

from sliding or shifting. Do not

place cargo higher than the seat-

backs. In a sudden stop or colli-

sion, unsecured cargo could

cause personal injury.

●Do not load your vehicle any

heavier than the GVWR or the

maximum front and rear GAWRs.

If you do, parts of your vehicle can

break, tire damage could occur,

or it can change the way your

vehicle handles. This could result

in loss of control and cause per-

sonal injury.

●Overloading not only can shorten

the life of your vehicle and the

tire, but can also cause unsafe

vehicle handling and longer brak-

ing distances. This may cause a

premature tire failure which

could result in a serious accident

and personal injury. Failures

caused by overloading are not

covered by the vehicle’s warranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent weight

shifts that could affect the balance of your

vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive

to a scale and weigh the front and the rear

wheels separately to determine axle

loads. Individual axle loads should not ex-

ceed either of the GAWR. The total of the

axle loads should not exceed the GVWR.

These ratings are given on the vehicle

certification label. If weight ratings are

exceeded, move or remove items to bring

all weights below the ratings.

10-16 Technical and consumer information

WARNING

Overloading or improper loading of a

trailer and its cargo can adversely affect

vehicle handling, braking and perfor-

mance and may lead to accidents.

CAUTION

●Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load

for the first 500 miles (805 km). Your

engine, axle or other parts could be

damaged.

●For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you

tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph

(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full

throttle. This helps the engine and other

parts of your vehicle wear in at the

heavier loads.

Your new vehicle was designed to be used pri-

marily to carry passengers and cargo. Remember

that towing a trailer places additional loads on

your vehicle’s engine, drive train, steering, brak-

ing and other systems.

A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is available

on the website at www.nissanusa.com. This

guide includes information on trailer towing ca-

pability and the special equipment required for

proper towing.

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS

Maximum trailer loads

Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the

value specified in the “Towing

Load/Specification” chart found in this section.

The total trailer load equals trailer weight plus its

cargo weight.

The maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating

(GCWR) should not exceed the value specified

in the following Towing Load/Specification Chart.

The Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)

equals the combined weight of the towing vehicle

(including passengers and cargo) plus the total

trailer load. Towing loads greater than these or

using improper towing equipment could ad-

versely affect vehicle handling, braking and per-

formance.

The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not

only related to the maximum trailer loads, but also

the places you plan to tow. Tow weights appro-

priate for level highway driving may have to be

reduced for low traction situations (for example,

on slippery boat ramps).

LTI2030

TOWING A TRAILER

Technical and consumer information 10-17

Temperature conditions can also affect towing.

For example, towing a heavy trailer in high outside

temperatures on graded roads can affect engine

performance and cause overheating. The engine

protection mode, which helps reduce the chance

of engine damage, could activate and automati-

cally decrease engine power. Vehicle speed may

decrease under high load. Plan your trip carefully

to account for trailer and vehicle load, weather

and road conditions.

WARNING

Overheating can result in reduced engine

power and vehicle speed. The reduced

speed may be lower than other traffic,

which could increase the chance of a col-

lision. Be especially careful when driving.

If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driv-

ing speed, pull to the side of the road in a

safe area. Allow the engine to cool and

return to normal operation. For additional

information, refer to “If your vehicle over-

heats” in the “In case of emergency” sec-

tion of this manual.

CAUTION

Vehicle damage resulting from improper

towing procedures is not covered by

NISSAN warranties.

Tongue load

When using a weight carrying or a weight distrib-

uting hitch, keep the tongue load between 10 -

15% of the total trailer load or use the trailer

tongue load specified by the trailer manufacturer.

The tongue load must be within the maximum

tongue load limits shown in the following “Towing

Load/Specification” chart. If the tongue load be-

comes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow for

proper tongue load.

Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight

(GVW)/maximum Gross Axle Weight

(GAW)

The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceed

the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification

label. The GVW equals the combined weight of

the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage,

hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional

equipment. In addition, front or rear GAW must

not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating

(GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

certification label.

WTI0160 LTI2031

10-18 Technical and consumer information

Towing capacities are calculated assuming a

base vehicle with driver and any options required

to achieve the rating. Additional passengers,

cargo and/or optional equipment, such as the

trailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle and

reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacity

and trailer tongue load.

The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed to

confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, Front

GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined Weight

Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.

All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured

using platform type scales commonly found at

truck stops, highway weigh stations, building

supply centers or salvage yards.

To determine the available payload capacity for

tongue/king pin load, use the following proce-

dure.

1. Locate the GVWR on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all of

the passengers and cargo that are normally

in the vehicle when towing a trailer.

3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the

GVWR. The remaining amount is the avail-

able maximum tongue/king pin load.

To determine the available towing capacity, use

the following procedure.

1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the

⬙Towing Load/Specification⬙chart found in

this section.

2. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the

GCWR. The remaining amount is the avail-

able maximum towing capacity.

To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weigh

your trailer on a scale with all equipment and

cargo, that are normally in the trailer when it is

towed. Make sure the Gross trailer weight is not

more than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown

on the trailer and is not more than the calculated

available maximum towing capacity.

Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale to

make sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear

Gross Axle Weight are not more than Front

Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight

on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to

be moved or removed to meet the specified rat-

ings.

Example:

●Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed

on a scale - including passengers, cargo and

hitch - 6,350 lb. (2,880 kg).

●Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) from

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label -

7,250 lb. (3,289 kg).

●Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)

from “Towing Load/Specification⬙chart -

15,100 lb. (6,849 kg).

●Maximum Trailer towing capacity from “Tow-

ing Load/Specification⬙chart - 9,100 lb.

(4,128 kg).

7,250 lb. (3,289 kg) GVWR

– 6,350 lb. (2,880 kg) GVW

= 900 lb. (409 kg) Available for tongue

weight

15,100 lb. (6,849 kg) GCWR

– 6,350 lb. (2,880 kg) GVW

= 9,123 lb. (4,138 kg) Capacity available for

towing

900 lb. (409 kg) Available tongue weight

/ 8,750 lb. (3,969 kg) Available capacity

= 10 % tongue weight

Technical and consumer information 10-19

The available towing capacity may be less than

the maximum towing capacity due to the passen-

ger and cargo load in the vehicle.

Remember to keep trailer tongue weight be-

tween 10 - 15% of the trailer weight or within the

trailer tongue load specification recommended

by the trailer manufacturer. If the tongue load

becomes excessive, rearrange the cargo to ob-

tain the proper tongue load. Do not exceed the

maximum tongue weight specification shown in

the “Towing load/specification” chart even if the

calculated available tongue weight is greater

than 15%. If the calculated tongue weight is less

than 10%, reduce the total trailer weight to match

the available tongue weight.

Always verify that available capacities are within

the required ratings.

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION CHART

U.S. and Canada

Maximum Towing Capacity*1 1,100 lb.

(500 kg)

Maximum Tongue Load 110 lb.

(50 kg)

Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating 5,291 lb.

(2,400 kg)

*1: The towing capacity values are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve

the rating. Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehi-

cle’s maximum towing capacity.

10-20 Technical and consumer information

TOWING SAFETY

Trailer hitch

Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional

trailer tow package. The trailer tow package in-

cludes a receiver-type frame mounted hitch. This

hitch is rated for the maximum towing capacity of

this vehicle when the proper towing equipment is

used. Choose a proper ball mount and hitch ball

that is rated for the trailer to be towed. Genuine

NISSAN ball mounts and hitch balls are available

from a NISSAN dealer.

If your vehicle is not equipped with the optional

trailer tow package, check the towing capacity of

your bumper hitch or receiver-type frame

mounted hitch. Choose a proper hitch for your

vehicle and trailer. A Genuine NISSAN trailer

hitch is available from a NISSAN dealer. Make

sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to the

vehicle to help avoid personal injury or property

damage due to sway caused by crosswinds,

rough road surfaces or passing trucks.

WARNING

Trailer hitch components have specific

weight ratings. Your vehicle may be ca-

pable of towing a trailer heavier than the

weight rating of the hitch components.

Never exceed the weight rating of the

hitch components. Doing so can cause

serious personal injury or property

damage.

Hitch ball

Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weight

rating for your trailer:

●The required hitch ball size is stamped on

most trailer couplers. Most hitch balls also

have the size printed on the top of the ball.

●Choose the proper class hitch ball based on

the trailer weight.

●The diameter of the threaded shank of the

hitch ball must be matched to the ball mount

hole diameter. The hitch ball shank should

be no more than 1/16” smaller than the hole

in the ball mount.

●The threaded shank of the hitch ball must be

long enough to be properly secured to the

ball mount. There should be at least 2

threads showing beyond the lock washer

and nut.

Ball mount

The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount and the

ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver.

Choose a proper class ball mount based on the

trailer weight. Additionally, the ball mount should be

chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with the

ground.

Weight carrying hitches

A weight carrying or “dead weight” ball mount is

one that is designed to carry the whole amount of

tongue weight and gross weight directly on the

ball mount and on the receiver.

Weight distribution hitch

This type of hitch is also called a “load-leveling” or

“equalizing” hitch. A set of bars attach to the ball

mount and to the trailer to distribute the tongue

weight (hitch weight) of your trailer. Many vehicles

can’t carry the full tongue weight of a given trailer,

and need some of the tongue weight transferred

through the frame and pushing down on the front

wheels. This gives stability to the tow vehicle.

A weight-distributing hitch system (Class IV) is

recommended if you plan to tow trailers with a

maximum weight over 5,000 lbs (2,268 kg).

Check with the trailer and towing equipment

manufacturers to determine if they recommend

the use of a weight-distributing hitch system.

Technical and consumer information 10-21

NOTE:

A weight-distributing hitch system may af-

fect the operation of trailer surge brakes. If

you are considering use of a weight-

distributing hitch system with a surge

brake-equipped trailer, check with the

surge brake, hitch or trailer manufacturer

to determine if and how this can be done.

Follow the instructions provided by the manufac-

turer for installing and using the weight-

distributing hitch system.

General set-up instructions are as follows:

1. Park unloaded vehicle on a level surface.

With the ignition on and the doors closed,

allow the vehicle to stand for several minutes

so that it can level.

2. Measure the height of a reference point on

the front and rear bumpers at the center of

the vehicle.

3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust

the hitch equalizers so that the front bumper

height is within0-.5inches (0 – 13 mm) of

the reference height measured in step 2. The

rear bumper should be no higher than the

reference height measured in step 2.

WARNING

Properly adjust the weight distributing

hitch so the rear of the bumper is no

higher than the measured reference

height when the trailer is attached. If the

rear bumper is higher than the measured

reference height when loaded, the vehicle

may handle unpredictably which could

cause a loss of vehicle control and cause

serious personal injury or property

damage.

Sway control device

Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buffeting

caused by other vehicles can affect trailer han-

dling. Sway control devices may be used to help

control these affects. If you choose to use one,

contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to make

sure the sway control device will work with the

vehicle, hitch, trailer and the trailer’s brake sys-

tem. Follow the instructions provided by the

manufacturer for installing and using the sway

control device.

Class I hitch

Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball

mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers

of a maximum weight of 2,000 lb (907 kg).

Tire pressures

●When towing a trailer, inflate the ve-

hicle tires to the recommended cold

tire pressure indicated on the Tire

and Loading Information label.

●Trailer tire condition, size, load rating

and proper inflation pressure should

be in accordance with the trailer and

tire manufacturer’s specifications.

Safety chains

Always use suitable safety chains between your

vehicle and the trailer. The safety chains should

be crossed and should be attached to the hitch,

not to the vehicle bumper or axle. The safety

chains can be attached to the bumper if the hitch

ball is mounted to the bumper. Be sure to leave

enough slack in the chains to permit turning

corners.

10-22 Technical and consumer information

Trailer lights

CAUTION

When splicing into the vehicle electrical

system, a commercially available power-

type module/converter must be used to

provide power for all trailer lighting. This

unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct

power source for all trailer lights while

using the vehicle tail light, stoplight and

turn signal circuits as a signal source. The

module/converter must draw no more that

15 milliamps from the stop and tail lamp

circuits. Using a module/converter that

exceeds these power requirements may

damage the vehicle’s electrical system.

See a reputable trailer retailer to obtain

the proper equipment and to have it

installed.

Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or

local regulations. For assistance in hooking up

trailer lights, contact a NISSAN dealer or repu-

table trailer retailer. Vehicles equipped with the

optional trailer tow package are equipped with a

7-pin trailer harness connector. If your trailer is

equipped with a flat 4-pin connector, an adapter

will be needed to connect the trailer lights to the

vehicle. Adapters are available at auto parts

stores and hitch retailers.

Pre-towing tips

●Be certain your vehicle maintains a level

position when a loaded and/or unloaded

trailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it

has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down

condition; check for improper tongue load,

overload, worn suspension or other possible

causes of either condition.

●Always secure items in the trailer to prevent

load shift while driving.

●Keep the cargo load as low as possible in

the trailer to keep the trailer center of gravity

low.

●Load the trailer so approximately 60% of the

trailer load is in the front half and 40% is in

the back half. Also make sure the load is

balanced side to side.

●Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, ve-

hicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, and

trailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach a

trailer to the vehicle.

●Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to

all federal, state or local regulations. If not,

install any mirrors required for towing before

driving the vehicle.

●Determine the overall height of the vehicle

and trailer so the required clearance is

known.

Trailer towing tips

In order to gain skill and an understanding of the

vehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning,

stopping and backing up in an area which is free

from traffic. Steering stability and braking perfor-

mance will be somewhat different than under

normal driving conditions.

●Always secure items in the trailer to prevent

load shift while driving.

●Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or

lock to prevent the coupler from inadver-

tently becoming unlatched.

●Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.

●Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.

●Always drive your vehicle at a moderate

speed.

●When backing up, hold the bottom of the

steering wheel with one hand. Move your

hand in the direction in which you want the

trailer to go. Make small corrections and

back up slowly. If possible, have someone

guide you when you are backing up.

Technical and consumer information 10-23

Always block the wheels on both vehicle and

trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not

recommended; however, if you must do so:

CAUTION

If you move the shift lever to the P (Park)

position before blocking the wheels and

applying the parking brake, transmission

damage could occur.

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

2. Have someone place blocks on the downhill

side of the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. After the wheel blocks are in place, slowly

release the brake pedal until the blocks ab-

sorb the vehicle load.

4. Apply the parking brake.

5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).

6. Turn off the engine.

To drive away:

1. Start the vehicle.

2. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

3. Shift the transmission into gear.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer are

clear from the blocks.

6. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

7. Have someone retrieve and store the blocks.

●While going downhill, the weight of the

trailer pushing on the tow vehicle may de-

crease overall stability. Therefore, to main-

tain adequate control, reduce your speed

and shift to a lower gear. Avoid long or

repeated use of the brakes when descend-

ing a hill, as this reduces their effectiveness

and could cause overheating. Shifting to a

lower gear instead provides “engine brak-

ing” and reduces the need to brake as fre-

quently.

●If the engine coolant temperature rises to a

high temperature, refer to “If your vehicle

overheats” in the “In case of emergency”

section of this owner’s manual.

●Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal

circumstances.

●Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s first

500 miles (805 km).

●For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you do

tow, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h).

●Have your vehicle serviced more often than

at intervals specified in the recommended

Maintenance Schedule in the “Maintenance

and schedules” section of this manual.

●When making a turn, your trailer wheels will

be closer to the inside of the turn than your

vehicle wheels. To compensate for this,

make a larger than normal turning radius

during the turn.

●Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely

affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly caus-

ing vehicle sway. When being passed by

larger vehicles, be prepared for possible

changes in crosswinds that could affect ve-

hicle handling.

Do the following if the trailer begins to sway:

1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal to

allow the vehicle to coast and steer as

straight ahead as the road conditions allow.

This combination will help stabilize the ve-

hicle

– Do not correct trailer sway by steering or

applying the brakes.

2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply the

brakes and pull to the side of the road in a

safe area.

10-24 Technical and consumer information

3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is bal-

anced as described in this section.

●Be careful when passing other vehicles.

Passing while towing a trailer requires con-

siderably more distance than normal pass-

ing. Remember, the length of the trailer must

also pass the other vehicle before you can

safely change lanes.

●Downshift the transmission to a lower gear

for engine braking when driving down steep

or long hills. This will help slow the vehicle

without applying the brakes.

●Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long

or too frequently. This could cause the

brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced

braking efficiency.

●Increase your following distance to allow for

greater stopping distances while towing a

trailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually.

●NISSAN recommends that the cruise con-

trol not be used while towing a trailer.

●Some states or provinces have specific

regulations and speed limits for vehicles that

are towing trailers. Obey the local speed

limits.

●Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness con-

nections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after

50 miles (80 km) of travel and at every break.

●When launching a boat, don’t allow the wa-

ter level to go over the exhaust tail pipe or

rear bumper.

●Make sure you disconnect the trailer lights

before backing the trailer into the water or

the trailer lights may burn out.

When towing a trailer, final drive gear oil

should be replaced and transmission

oil/fluid should be changed more fre-

quently. For additional information, refer to

the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

FLAT TOWING FOR ALL–WHEEL

DRIVE VEHICLE (if so equipped)

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the

ground is sometimes called flat towing. This

method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle

behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor

home.

CAUTION

●Failure to follow these guidelines can

result in severe transmission damage.

●Never flat tow your All-wheel drive

(AWD) vehicle.

●DO NOT tow your All-wheel drive (AWD)

vehicle with any wheels on the ground.

Doing so may cause serious and expen-

sive damage to the powertrain.

●For emergency towing procedures refer

to “Towing recommended by NISSAN”

in the “In case of emergency” section of

this manual.

FLAT TOWING FOR FRONT WHEEL

DRIVE VEHICLE (if so equipped)

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the

ground is sometimes called flat towing. This

method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle

behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor

home.

Technical and consumer information 10-25

CAUTION

●Failure to follow these guidelines can

result in severe transmission damage.

●Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-

ways tow forward, never backward.

●Never tow your front wheel drive vehicle

with the front tires on the ground. Doing

so may cause serious and expensive

damage to the powertrain.

●DO NOT tow your front wheel drive con-

tinuously variable transmission vehicle

with all four wheels on the ground (flat

towing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE inter-

nal transmission parts due to lack of

transmission lubrication.

●For emergency towing procedures refer

to “Towing recommended by NISSAN”

in the “In case of emergency” section of

this manual.

Continuously Variable Transmission

To tow a vehicle equipped with a continuously

variable transmission, an appropriate vehicle

dolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicle’s

drive wheels. Always follow the dolly manufac-

turer’s recommendations when using their prod-

uct.

DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality

Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to

federal safety requirements in addition to these

grades.

Quality grades can be found where applicable on

the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and

maximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating

based on the wear rate of the tire when tested

under controlled conditions on a specified gov-

ernment test course. For example, a tire graded

150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times

as well on the government course as a tire graded

100. The relative performance of tires depends

upon the actual conditions of their use, however,

and may depart significantly from the norm due to

variations in driving habits, service practices and

differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are

AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the

tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea-

sured under controlled conditions on specified

government test surfaces of asphalt and con-

crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction

performance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire is

based on straight-ahead braking traction

tests, and does not include acceleration,

cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction

characteristics.

Temperature A, B and C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,

and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the

generation of heat, and its ability to dissipate heat

when tested under controlled conditions on a

specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained

high temperature can cause the material of the

tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces-

sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.

The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-

mance which all passenger car tires must meet

under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No.

109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of

performance on the laboratory test wheel than

the minimum required by law.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

10-26 Technical and consumer information

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is es-

tablished for a tire that is properly inflated

and not overloaded. Excessive speed,

under-inflation, or excessive loading, ei-

ther separately or in combination, can

cause heat build-up and possible tire

failure.

Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following

emission warranties:

For USA

1. Emission Defects Warranty

2. Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found with other

vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information

Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.

If you did not receive a Warranty Information

Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace-

ment by writing to:

●Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canada

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found with other

vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information

Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.

If you did not receive a Warranty Information

Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace-

ment by writing to:

●Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

For USA

If you believe that your vehicle has a de-

fect which could cause a crash or could

cause injury or death, you should immedi-

ately inform the National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addi-

tion to notifying NISSAN.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it

may open an investigation, and if it finds

that a safety defect exists in a group of

vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy

campaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-

come involved in individual problems be-

tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Ve-

hicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-

327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go

to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh

Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590.

You can also obtain other information

about motor vehicle safety from

http://www.safercar.gov.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

WARRANTY

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

Technical and consumer information 10-27

You may notify NISSAN by contacting our

Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at

1-800-NISSAN-1.

For Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a de-

fect which could cause a crash or could

cause injury or death, you should immedi-

ately inform Transport Canada in addition

to notifying NISSAN.

If Transport Canada receives complaints,

it may open an investigation, and if it finds

that a safety defect exists in a group of

vehicles, it may request that NISSAN con-

duct a recall campaign. However, Trans-

port Canada cannot become involved in

individual problems between you, your

dealer, or NISSAN.

You may contact Transport Canada’s De-

fect Investigations and Recalls Division

toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You may

also report safety defects online at:

https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/

7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-cp.aspx?lang=eng

(English speakers) or

https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/

7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-cp.aspx?lang=fra

(French speakers)

Additional information concerning motor

vehicle safety may be obtained from Trans-

port Canada’s Road Safety Information

Centre at 1-800-333-0371 or online at

www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (English speak-

ers) or www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere

(French speakers).

To notify NISSAN of any safety concerns

please contact our Consumer Information

Centre toll free at 1-800-387-0122.

WARNING

A vehicle equipped with All -Wheel Drive

(AWD) should never be tested using a two

wheel dynamometer (such as the dyna-

mometers used by some states for emis-

sions testing), or similar equipment. Make

sure you inform the test facility personnel

that your vehicle is equipped with AWD

before it is placed on a dynamometer.

Using the wrong test equipment may re-

sult in drivetrain damage or unexpected

vehicle movement which could result in

serious vehicle damage or personal injury.

Due to legal requirements in some states and

Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be re-

quired to be in what is called the “ready condi-

tion” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of

the emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when it

is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually,

the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary

usage of the vehicle.

If a powertrain system component is repaired or

the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be

reset to a “not ready” condition. Before taking the

I/M test, check the vehicle’s

inspection/maintenance test readiness condi-

tion. Place the ignition switch in the ON position

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/

MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST

10-28 Technical and consumer information

without starting the engine. If the Malfunction

Indicator Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 sec-

onds and then blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test

condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not blink

after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is

“ready”. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer to set the “ready condition” or to

prepare the vehicle for testing.

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Re-

corder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to

record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa-

tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a

road obstacle, data that will assist in understand-

ing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR

is designed to record data related to vehicle

dynamics and safety systems for a short period of

time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this

vehicle is designed to record such data as:

●How various systems in your vehicle were

operating;

●Whether or not the driver and passenger

safety belts were buckled/fastened;

●How far (if at all) the driver was depressing

the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

●How fast the vehicle was traveling.

●Sounds are not recorded.

These data can help provide a better understand-

ing of the circumstances in which crashes and

injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by

your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation

occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under

normal driving conditions and no personal data

(e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) are

recorded. However, other parties, such as law

enforcement, could combine the EDR data with

the type of personally identifying data routinely

acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip-

ment is required and access to the vehicle or the

EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu-

facturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, such

as law enforcement, that have the special equip-

ment, can read the information if they have ac-

cess to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only

be accessed with the consent of the vehicle

owner or lessee or as otherwise required or per-

mitted by law.

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)

Technical and consumer information 10-29

Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this model

year and prior can be purchased. A Genuine

NISSAN Service Manual is the best source of

service and repair information for your vehicle.

This manual is the same one used by the factory-

trained technicians working at NISSAN dealer-

ships. Genuine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals can

also be purchased.

For USA

For current pricing and availability of Genuine

NISSAN Service Manuals, contact:

www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of Genuine

NISSAN Owner’s Manuals, contact:

1-800-247-5321

For Canada

To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSAN Ser-

vice Manual or Owner’s Manual, for this model

year and prior, please contact the nearest

NISSAN dealer. For the phone number and loca-

tion of a NISSAN dealer in your area, call the

NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-387-0122

and a bilingual NISSAN representative will assist

you.

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE

MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

10-30 Technical and consumer information

11 Index

2nd row bench seat adjustment.........1-6

Aiming control, headlights ...........2-41

Air bag (See supplemental restraint

system).....................1-47

Air bag system

Front (See supplemental front impact

air bag system) ...............1-54

Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-65

Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . .1-65, 2-15

Air bag warning light, supplemental . .1-65, 2-15

Air cleaner housing filter ............8-15

Air conditioner

Air conditioner operation ..........4-35

Air conditioner specification label . . . .10-12

Air conditioner system refrigerant and

oil recommendations ............10-7

Air conditioner system refrigerant

recommendations..............10-7

Heater and air conditioner

controls................4-33,4-41

Servicing air conditioner ..........4-43

Airflowcharts..................4-37

Alarm system

(See vehicle security system) .........2-33

All-Wheel Drive .................5-87

Anchor point locations .............1-30

Antenna .....................4-77

Antifreeze ...................5-100

Anti-lock brake warning light..........2-11

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)........5-92

Apps .......................4-77

Armrests .....................1-6

Around View® Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17

Audible reminders ...............2-18

Audio system ..................4-43

AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44

Bluetooth® audio . . . . . . . . . .4-73, 4-74

Bluetooth® streaming audio . . . .4-73, 4-74

Compact disc (CD) player . . . . .4-55, 4-62

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)

player.................4-52,4-56

FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44

iPod® Player .............4-68,4-70

iPod® player operation .......4-68,4-70

Radio ....................4-43

USB interface ............4-64,4-66

USB (Universal Serial Bus)

Connection Port ...........4-64,4-66

Autolight switch.................2-39

Automatic

Automatic drive positioner . . . . .3-41, 3-43

Automatic power window switch .....2-59

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror .......3-39

Automatic door locks ..............3-7

Automatic drive positioner .......3-41,3-43

AUXjack ....................4-64

AWD.......................5-87

Battery .................5-100, 8-10

Charge warning light ............2-12

Battery replacement ..............8-21

Keyfob ...................8-21

NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . .8-23, 8-24

Before starting the engine ...........5-18

Belt (See drive belt) ..............8-13

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) warning

system......................5-26

Block heater

Engine ...................5-101

Bluetooth® audio ............4-73,4-74

Bluetooth® hands-free phone

system..................4-82,4-95

Bluetooth® streaming audio with Navigation

System .....................4-74

Boosterseats..................1-44

Brake

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)......5-92

Brake fluid ..................8-9

Brake light (See stop light). . . . . . . . .8-27

Brake system ................5-92

Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11

Brake wear indicators . . . . . . . .2-18, 8-18

Parking brake operation ..........5-25

Self-adjusting brakes ............8-18

Brake assist ...................5-93

Brake fluid ....................8

-9

Brakes ......................8-18

Brake system ..................5-92

Break-inschedule ...............5-85

Brightness/contrast button...........4-10

Brightness control

Instrument panel ..............2-42

Bulb check/instrument panel ..........2-11

Bulb replacement ................8-27

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants ..................10-2

Cargo area storage bin . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53

Cargocover...................2-55

Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . .10-13

Car phone or CB radio .............4-82

CD care and cleaning ..............4-75

CD player (See audio system) . . . . . .4-55, 4-62

Checkingbulbs .................2-11

Check tire pressure ...............2-31

Child restraints . . . . . . .1-23, 1-24, 1-25, 1-27

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) System ..............1-27

Precautions on child

restraints. . . . . . . . .1-25, 1-32, 1-39, 1-44

Top tether strap anchor point locations . .1-30

Child restraint with top tether strap.......1-30

Child safety rear door lock ............3-7

Chimes, audible reminders ...........2-18

Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . . . .7-2, 7-4

Clock setting

(models with Navigation System) ........4-7

Clock setting

(models without Navigation System) ......4-53

C.M.V.S.S. certification label .........10-11

Cold weather driving ..............5-100

Compact disc (CD) player ........4-55,4-62

Connect phone .................4-77

Consolebox...................2-50

Consolelight...................2-62

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT). . .5-20

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

fluid.......................8-9

Driving with Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) .............5-20

Control panel buttons ...............4-4

Brightness/contrast button .........4-10

Enterbutton..................4-4

Setting button .................4-7

Controls

Heater and air conditioner

controls................4-33,4-41

Coolant

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants ................10-2

Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . .8-5

Checking engine coolant level ........8-5

Engine coolant temperature gauge .....2-6

Corrosion protection ...............7-7

Cruisecontrol..................5-44

Cupholders...................2-51

Daytime running light system (Canada only) . .2-41

Defroster switch

Rear window and outside mirror defroster

switch.....................2-38

Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9

Dimmer switch for instrument panel ......2-42

Display......................2-19

Display controls (see control panel buttons) . .4-4

Door locks .....................3-5

Doors........................3-5

Drive belt .....................8-13

Drive positioner, Automatic........3-41,3-43

Driving

Cold weather driving ............5-100

Driving with Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) .............5-20

Precautions when starting and

driving ..................5-4,5-11

Driving the vehicle ................5-20

ECO mode switch ................5-26

Economy-fuel..................5-87

Emergency engine shutoff............5-16

Emission control information label ......10-11

Emission control system warranty.......10-27

Engine

Before starting the engine..........5-18

Blockheater................5-101

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Changing engine coolant ...........8-5

Changingengineoil..............8-7

Changing engine oil filter ...........8-8

Checking engine coolant level ........8-5

Checking engine oil level ...........8-6

Engine compartment check locations ....8-3

Engine coolant temperature gauge .....2-6

Engine cooling system ............8-4

Engineoil ...................8-6

Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . .10-6

Engine oil viscosity..............10-6

Engine serial number............10-11

Engine specifications ............10-8

Starting the engine .............5-18

11-2

Engine coolant temperature gauge .......2-6

Enterbutton....................4-4

Event Data recorders .............10-29

Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) .........5-4

Explanation of maintenance items ........9-2

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . .9-5

Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48

Eyeglass case ..................2-50

Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch) . .6-2

Flat tire .......................6-3

Floor mat positioning aid .............7-5

Fluid

Brake fluid ...................8-9

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants ................10-2

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

fluid.......................8-9

Engine coolant.................8-4

Engine oil ...................8-6

Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . .8-10

F.M.V.S.S. certification label ..........10-11

Foglightswitch.................2-43

Forward Emergency Braking (FEB).......2-12

Front air bag system

(See supplemental restraint system) ......1-54

Front power seat adjustment ...........1-4

Frontseats.....................1-2

Fuel

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants ................10-2

Fuel economy ................5-87

Fuel-filler door and cap ...........3-35

Fuel gauge ...................2-6

Fuel octane rating ..............10-5

Fuel recommendation ............10-3

Loose fuel cap warning ...........2-31

Fuel efficient driving tips.............5-85

Fuel-filler door...............3-34,3-34

Fuelgauge.....................2-6

Fuses.......................8-19

Fusiblelinks ...................8-20

Gascap .....................3-35

Gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge .....2-6

Fuel gauge ...................2-6

Odometer ...................2-5

Speedometer .................2-4

Tachometer ..................2-5

Trip odometer .................2-5

General maintenance ...............9-2

Glovebox.....................2-50

Hands-free phone system,

Bluetooth®................4-82,4-95

Hazard warning flasher switch ..........6-2

Headlight aiming control ............2-41

Headlight and turn signal switch ........2-39

Headlight control switch ............2-39

Headlights ....................8-26

Headlights, aiming control............2-41

Head restraints..................1-10

Heated seats ...................2-44

Heated steering wheel switch .........2-45

Heater

Heater and air conditioner

controls ................4-33,4-41

Heater operation ...........4-34,4-42

Hill start assist system..............5-99

Hood.......................3-26

Hook

Luggage hook ................2-54

n .......................2-43

Ignition switch ..................5-13

Ignition Switch

Push-Button Ignition Switch ........5-14

Immobilizer system. . . . . . . . .2-34, 5-14, 5-17

Important vehicle information label ......10-11

In-cabin microfilter ................8-15

Increasing fuel economy.............5-87

Indicator lights and audible reminders

(See warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders).................2-11,2-16

Information display ................2-19

Inside automatic anti-glare mirror ........3-39

Instrument brightness control ..........2-42

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-6, 2-2

Instrument panel dimmer switch ........2-42

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC).........5-46

Intelligent Key system

Key operating range .............3-12

Key operation ................3-14

Mechanical key ................3-4

Remote keyless entry operation.......3-17

11-3

Troubleshooting guide............3-21

Warning signals ...............3-21

Interiorlight................2-62,2-63

iPod®Player...............4-68,4-70

ISOFIX child restraints .............1-27

Jump starting ...............6-10,8-12

Key.........................3-2

Key fob battery replacement ..........8-21

Keyless entry

With Intelligent Key system

(See Intelligent Key system).........3-17

Without Intelligent Key system

(See remote keyless entry

system)...............3-2,3-7,3-8

Keys

NISSAN Intelligent Key® .......3-3,3-11

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. .3-4

Label

Tire and Loading Information label . . . .10-12

Labels

Air conditioner specification label .....10-12

C.M.V.S.S. certification label .......10-11

Emission control information label . . . .10-11

Engine serial number............10-11

F.M.V.S.S. certification label ........10-11

Tire and Loading Information label . . . .10-12

Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . .10-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

plate.....................10-10

Warning labels (for SRS) ..........1-65

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)

System ......................1-27

License plate

Installing the license plate .........10-12

Liftgate ......................3-27

Liftgate release..................3-33

Light

Air bag warning light .........1-65,2-15

Brake light (See stop light) .........8-27

Bulb check/instrument panel ........2-11

Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27

Charge warning light ............2-12

Consolelight.................2-62

Exterior and Interior lights ..........8-27

Foglights...................8-26

Foglightswitch...............2-43

Headlight and turn signal switch ......2-39

Headlight control switch ..........2-39

Headlights..................8-26

Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-62, 2-63

Lightbulbs..................8-26

Low tire pressure warning light .......2-12

Low windshield-washer fluid warning

light ..................2-14,2-31

Passenger air bag and status light .....1-57

Personal lights ................2-63

Security indicator light............2-17

Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . . .2-63

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders ...............2-11,2-16

Lights.......................8-26

Maplights ..................2-63

Lock

Child safety rear door lock ..........3-7

Door locks ...................3-5

Liftgate release................3-33

Power door locks ...............3-6

Loose fuel cap warning..........2-31,3-36

Low fuel warning light ..........2-14,2-31

Low tire pressure warning light .........2-12

Low windshield-washer fluid warning

light ....................2-14,2-31

Luggage hook ..................2-54

Luggage rack (see roof rack) ..........2-56

Luggage (See vehicle loading information). .10-13

Luggage storage

(see vehicle loading information) ........2-53

Maintenance

General maintenance .............9

-2

Insidethevehicle...............9-3

Maintenance precautions ...........8-2

Outside the vehicle ..............9-2

Seat belt maintenance............1-23

Under the hood and vehicle .........9-4

Maintenancelog.................9-13

Maintenance requirements ............9-2

Maintenance schedules..............9-7

Maintenance under severe operation

conditions ....................9-12

Malfunction indicator light ............2-16

Manual front seat adjustment...........1-3

Maplights ....................2-63

11-4

Memory Seat ...............3-41,3-43

Meters and gauges ................2-4

Instrument brightness control ........2-42

Mirror

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror......3-39

Outside mirrors ...............3-40

Rearview ...................3-39

Vanity mirror .................3-38

Mirrors ......................3-39

Mobileapps...................4-77

Moonroof .................2-59,2-60

Moving Object Detection (MOD) ........4-28

NissanConnect

................4-77

NissanConnect

Services...........4-78

NISSAN Intelligent Key® .........3-3,3-11

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer

System ...............2-34,5-14,5-17

NISSAN voice recognition system ......4-104

Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) . . . . .10-5

Odometer .....................2-5

Oil

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants ................10-2

Changing engine oil ..............8-7

Changing engine oil filter ...........8-8

Checking engine oil level ...........8-6

Engine oil ...................8-6

Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . .10-6

Engine oil viscosity..............10-6

One shot call . . . . . . . . . . . .4-85, 4-85, 4-97

Outside mirrors .................3-40

Overheat

If your vehicle overheats...........6-12

Owner’s manual order form ..........10-30

Owner’s manual/service manual order

information ...................10-30

Parking

Parking brake operation ...........5-25

Parking/parking on hills ...........5-91

Parking brake...................5-25

Personallights..................2-63

Phone, Bluetooth® hands-free

system ...................4-82,4-95

Power

Front seat adjustment .............1-4

Power door locks ...............3-6

Power outlet .................2-46

Power rear windows .............2-58

Power steering system ...........5-91

Power windows ...............2-57

Rear power windows ............2-58

Power outlet ...................2-46

Power steering ..................5-91

Precautions

Maintenance precautions ...........8-2

On-pavement and off-road driving

precautions ..................5-9

Precautions on booster

seats . . . . . . . . . . .1-25, 1-32, 1-39, 1-44

Precautions on child

restraints. . . . . . . . .1-25, 1-32, 1-39, 1-44

Precautions on seat belt usage .......1-15

Precautions on supplemental restraint

system ....................1-47

Precautions when starting and

driving ..................5-4,5-11

Programmable features ..............4-7

Push starting ...................6-12

Radio

CarphoneorCBradio...........4-82

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)

player .................4-52,4-56

Readiness for inspection maintenance (I/M)

test .......................10-28

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) ........5-36

Rear power windows ..............2-58

Rearview mirror .................3-39

RearView Monitor ................4-11

Rear window and outside mirror defroster

switch.......................2-38

Rear window wiper and washer switches . . .2-37

Recommended Fluids ..............1

0-2

Recorders

EventData.................10-29

Refrigerant recommendation ..........10-7

Registering a vehicle in another country . . .10-10

Remote keyless entry system . . . . .3-2, 3-7, 3-8

Remote Start ...............3-23,5-20

Reporting safety defects (US only) ......10-27

Roof rack .....................2-56

11-5

Safety

Child safety rear door lock ..........3-7

Child seat belts . . . . .1-25, 1-32, 1-39, 1-44

Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .10-27

Seat adjustment

Front manual seat adjustment ........1-3

Front power seat adjustment .........1-4

Second row bench seats ...........1-6

Seatback pockets ................2-49

Seat belt

Childsafety..................1-23

Infants and small children . . . . . . . . . .1-24

Injured Person ................1-18

Largerchildren................1-24

Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . .1-15

Pregnant women...............1-18

Seat belt extenders .............1-22

Seat belt maintenance............1-23

Seat belts ................1-15,7-6

Shoulder belt height adjustment ......1-21

Three-point type with retractor .......1-18

Seat belt extenders ...............1-22

Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . .1-18, 2-15

Seats

2nd row bench seat adjustment .......1-6

Adjustment...................1-2

Armrests....................1-6

Automatic drive positioner . . . . . .3-41, 3-43

Frontseats...................1-2

Heatedseats.................2-44

Manual front seat adjustment.........1-3

Security indicator light..............2-17

Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer

System), engine start . . . . . . .2-34, 5-14, 5-17

Security systems

Vehicle security system ...........2-33

Self-adjusting brakes ..............8-18

Service manual order form...........10-30

Servicing air conditioner.............4-43

Setting button ...................4-7

Shoulder belt height adjustment ........1-21

Siri® Eyes-Free .................4-78

Smartphone connectivity ............4-77

Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14

Sparkplugs ...................8-14

Specifications ..................10-8

Speedometer ...................2-4

Speedometer and odometer ...........2-4

SPORT mode switch ..............5-25

Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . . . . .2-63

SRSwarninglabel................1-65

Standard maintenance ..............9-8

Starting

Before starting the engine..........5-18

Jump starting .............6-10,8-12

Precautions when starting and

driving ..................5-4,5-11

Push starting .................6-12

Starting the engine .............5-18

Starting the engine ...............5-18

Starting the engine (models with NISSAN

Intelligent Key® system).............5-19

Steering

Power steering system ...........5-91

Steeringwheel..................3-37

Stoplight.....................8-27

Storage......................2-49

Storagebin....................2-53

Sunglasses case.................2-50

Sunglasses holder ................2-50

Sunroof......................2-60

Sunroof (see Moonroof) . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59

Sun visors ....................3-37

Supplemental air bag warning labels ......1-

Supplemental air bag warning light . . .1-65, 2-15

Supplemental front impact air bag system . . .1-54

Supplemental restraint system

Information and warning labels .......1-65

Precautions on supplemental restraint

system ....................1-47

Supplemental restraint system

(Supplemental air bag system) .........1-47

Switch

Autolightswitch...............2-39

Automatic power window switch ......2-59

Fog light switch ...............2-43

Hazard warning flasher switch ........6-2

Headlight aiming control . . . . . . . . . .2-41

Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . .2-39

Headlight control switch ..........2-39

Ignition switch ................5-13

Instrument brightness control ........2-42

Power door lock switch ............3-6

Rear window and outside mirror defroster

switch.....................2-38

Rear window wiper and washer

switches ...................2-37

Turnsignalswitch..............2-42

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off

switch.....................2-45

11-6

Tachometer ....................2-5

Temperature gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge .....2-6

Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System),

engine start.............2-34,5-14,5-17

Three-way catalyst ................5-4

Tire

Flat tire .....................6-3

Spare tire ................6-5,8-41

Tire and Loading Information label . . . .10-12

Tire chains ..................8-37

Tirepressure.................8-29

Tire rotation..................8-38

Types of tires .................8-35

Uniform tire quality grading ........10-26

Wheels and tires...............8-29

Wheel/tire size ................10-9

Tire pressure

Low tire pressure warning light .......2-12

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ....5-5

Top tether strap child restraint .........1-30

Towing

Flattowing.................10-25

Towing load/specification .........10-20

Towtrucktowing...............6-13

Trailer towing ................10-17

Towing a trailer .................10-17

Transmission

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

fluid.......................8-9

Driving with Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) .............5-20

Travel (See registering a vehicle in another

country) .....................10-10

Trip odometer ...................2-5

Troubleshooting guide

(NISSAN voice recognition system) .....4-108

Turn signal switch ................2-42

Uniform tire quality grading ..........10-26

USB interface ...............4-64,4-66

Audio file operation ..........4-65,4-67

Vanity mirror ...................3-38

Variable voltage control system .........8-13

Vehicle dimensions and weights ........10-9

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch . . .2-45

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system ....5-94

Vehicle identification ..............10-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN) ......10-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

(Chassis number) ...............10-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . .10-10

Vehicle immobilizer system . . . .2-34, 5-14, 5-17

Vehicle Information Display ...........2-19

Vehicle loading information ..........10-13

Vehicle recovery..............6-15,6-16

Vehicle security system .............2-33

Vehicle security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobi-

lizer System), engine start. . . . .2-34, 5-14, 5-17

Ventilators ....................4-32

Visors.......................3-37

Voice Prompt Interrupt ..........4-85,4-97

Voice recognition system ...........4-104

Warning

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-65, 2-15

Anti-lock brake warning light ........2-11

Battery charge warning light ........2-12

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) warning

light......................5-26

Brake warning light .............

2-11

Hazard warning flasher switch ........6-2

Loose fuel cap warning........2-31,3-36

Low fuel warning light ........2-14,2-31

Low tire pressure warning light .......2-12

Low windshield-washer fluid warning

light ..................2-14,2-31

Passenger air bag and status light .....1-57

Seat belt warning light ........1-18,2-15

Supplemental air bag warning

light ..................1-65,2-15

TPMS......................2-4

Vehicle security system ...........2-33

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders ...............2-11,2-16

Warning labels (for SRS) ..........1-65

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders.................2-11,2-16

Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . .2-11, 2-16

Checkingbulbs ...............2-11

Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11, 2-16

Warning lights.............2-11,2-16

Warning lights...............2-11,2-16

11-7

Warning lights, indicator lights and audible

reminders.....................2-10

Washer switch

Rear window wiper and washer

switches ...................2-37

Weights (See dimensions and weights) . . . .10-9

Wheels and tires.................8-29

Wheel/tire size ..................10-9

When traveling or registering in another

country .....................10-10

Windows .....................2-57

Locking passengers’ windows .......2-58

Power rear windows .............2-58

Power windows ...............2-57

Rear power windows ............2-58

Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10

Windshield wiper blades ............8-16

Wiper

Rear window wiper and washer

switches ...................2-37

Wiperblades.................8-16

Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36

11-8

FUEL RECOMMENDATION:

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane

rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-

ber (Research octane number 91).

CAUTION

●Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission

control system, and may also affect the

warranty coverage.

●Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because this

will damage the three-way catalyst.

●Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your

vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to

run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or

E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically

designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can ad-

versely affect the emission control de-

vices and systems of the vehicle. Dam-

age caused by such fuel is not covered

by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

●Do not use fuel that contains the octane

booster methylcyclopentadienyl man-

ganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using fuel

containing MMT may adversely affect

vehicle performance and vehicle emis-

sions. Not all fuel dispensers are la-

beled to indicate MMT content, so you

may have to consult your gasoline re-

tailer for more details. Note that Fed-

eral and California laws prohibit the use

of MMT in reformulated gasoline.

●U.S. government regulations require

ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi-

fied by a small, square, orange and

black label with the common abbrevia-

tion or the appropriate percentage for

that region.

For additional information, refer to “Recom-

mended fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the

“Technical and consumer information” section of

this manual.

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:

• Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20 SN”

For additional information, refer to “Engine oil and

oil filter recommendations” in the “Technical and

consumer information” section of this manual.

COLD TIRE PRESSURE:

For additional information, refer to “Tire and

Loading Information label” in the “Technical and

consumer information” section of this manual.

The label is typically located on the driver side

center pillar or on the driver’s door. For additional

information, refer to “Wheels and tires” in the

“Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

2017 Nissan Rogue | Owner's Manual And Maintenance Information USA

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation